Primavera P6 Project Management Reference Manual PDF

Primavera P6
Project Management
Reference Manual
Version 6.2
Copyright 1999 - 2008 Primavera. All rights reserved.

The software described herein and this documentation is furnished under a Software License Agreement and may
be used only in accordance with the terms of the Agreement.
Except as provided in the applicable Software License Agreement, Primavera assumes no liability resulting from
any omission or inaccuracies in this document or from use of the information obtained herein. Except as
provided in the applicable Software License Agreement, Primavera does not assume any liability arising out of
the application or use of any product described herein. Primavera reserves the right to make changes to any
products described herein to improve reliability, function, or design, and reserves the right to revise this
document and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of
revisions or changes.
Please send your comments to:
Primavera Systems, Inc.
Three Bala Plaza West
Bala Cynwyd, PA 19004
Telephone: 1-610-667-8600
FAX: 1-610-667-7894
World Wide Web site: http://www.primavera.com
The software products described in this document may not be copied, reproduced, modified, or distributed,
except as indicated in the Software License Agreement. You may not reproduce the printed version of the User
Documentation or other printed materials accompanying the software, except as expressly permitted in the
Software License Agreement or in writing by Primavera. However, you are permitted to reproduce and distribute
as many copies of the electronic version of the User Documentation, in printed and electronic format, as you
reasonably require in support of your use of the software.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights: If the software is acquired for or on behalf of the United States of America,
its agencies and/or instrumentalities (U.S. Government), it is provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS, as set
forth in the Software License Agreement. Use, modification, reproduction, release, performance, display or
disclosure of the software and accompanying documentation by the U.S. Government are subject to the restrictions set forth in the Software License Agreement.
Trademarks: Primavera, the Primavera sundial, Authorized Representative, Solution Provider, Business
Solutions for a Project-Driven World logos, P6, P5, P3, Primavera Project Manager, Primavera ProSight,
Primavera Contract Manager, Pertmaster, Primavera Cost Manager, Evolve, Primavera Contractor, Primavera
Inspire, Claim Digger and SureTrak are either trademarks, services marks or registered trademarks of Primavera
in the United States and/or other countries. All other trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their
respective owners.
To view the P6 Commercial Notices and Disclosures for Documentation, go to the \Documentation\<language>\Notices and Disclosures folder located in the \Documentation\<language> folder of the P6
physical media or download.
iii
Table of Contents
Preface................................................................................................. xi
Primavera Products .............................................................................................xii
Using Documentation and Help.......................................................................... xv
Where to Get Support ......................................................................................xviii
Part 1: Overview and Configuration

Understanding Project Management ...............................................21
Why Use Project Portfolio Management? .......................................................... 22
Your Role in the Enterprise................................................................................. 23
Project Management Process Overview.............................................................. 26
Planning, Controlling, and Managing Projects ................................................... 28
Quick Tour..........................................................................................31
Getting Started .................................................................................................... 32
Selecting a Language .......................................................................................... 36
The Workspace.................................................................................................... 37
What Is a Layout? ............................................................................................... 40
Customizing Displays ......................................................................................... 42
Sample Layouts................................................................................................... 44
Using Wizards..................................................................................................... 46
Setting User Preferences....................................................................49

Formatting Time Units........................................................................................ 50
Formatting Dates................................................................................................. 52
Setting View Currency and Symbols .................................................................. 53
Setting Mail Preferences ..................................................................................... 54
Implementing Wizards ........................................................................................ 55
Creating a Log of Tasks and
Setting Startup, Group and Sort, and Column Options...................................... 56
Changing Your Password .................................................................................... 58
Setting Profile and Spreadsheet Data Options .................................................... 60
Setting Calculation Options for Resource and Role Assignments...................... 62
Selecting Startup Filters...................................................................................... 64
iv
Table of Contents
Part 2: Structuring Projects

Setting Up the Enterprise Project Structure ...................................67
Enterprise Project Structure Overview................................................................ 68
Setting Up the Enterprise Project Structure ........................................................ 75
Adding a New Project to the Enterprise Project Structure.................................. 77
Using Project Architect ....................................................................................... 79
Working with the Enterprise Project Structure ................................................... 87
Defining Enterprise Project Structure Details..................................................... 92
Setting Up the Organizational Breakdown Structure ..................103

The Enterprise OBS .......................................................................................... 104
Viewing an OBS................................................................................................ 107
Setting Up an OBS ............................................................................................ 109
Editing OBS Elements ...................................................................................... 112
Defining Resources and Roles.........................................................115

Resources Overview.......................................................................................... 116
Viewing and Adding Resources ........................................................................ 117
Defining Resource Shifts .................................................................................. 124
Defining and Assigning Resource Codes and Values ....................................... 125
Setting Up Roles ............................................................................................... 128
Assigning Roles to Resources........................................................................... 133
Defining Custom Resource Curves ................................................................... 135
Reviewing Work Breakdown Structures .......................................139

The Enterprise WBS ......................................................................................... 140
Viewing a WBS................................................................................................. 142
Grouping by WBS Path..................................................................................... 144
Adding WBS Elements and Assigning Properties ............................................ 145
Using WBS Milestones ..................................................................................... 149
Assigning WBS Category Values...................................................................... 151
Defining Earned Value Settings for Specific WBS Elements ........................... 152
Assigning Estimation Weights to WBS Elements ............................................ 155
Defining Budgets ..............................................................................159

Top-Down Budgeting........................................................................................ 160
Establishing Budgets......................................................................................... 163
Establishing a Monthly Spending Plan ............................................................. 165
Tracking Budget Changes ................................................................................. 167
Establishing Funding......................................................................................... 169
Tracking and Analyzing Budgets...................................................................... 172
Establishing Project Codes..............................................................173

Defining and Assigning Project Codes ............................................................. 174
Grouping, Summarizing, and Filtering by Codes ............................................. 179
Primavera - Project Management
Table of Contents
Working with User-Defined Fields .................................................183

Creating User-Defined Fields ........................................................................... 184
Working with User-Defined Fields ................................................................... 186
Working with Indicators.................................................................................... 188
Creating Calendars ..........................................................................191

Adding Calendars.............................................................................................. 192
Modifying Calendars ........................................................................................ 194
Part 3: Implementing the Schedule

Establishing Activity Codes ............................................................201
Creating Activity Codes and Values ................................................................. 202
Grouping and Summarizing by Codes.............................................................. 207
Working with Activities ...................................................................211

Activities Overview .......................................................................................... 212
Adding Activities .............................................................................................. 213
Defining General Activity Information............................................................. 215
Defining Schedule Information......................................................................... 219
Establishing Relationships ................................................................................ 223
Displaying Activity Details for Assignments ................................................... 229
Assigning Resources and Roles ........................................................................ 230
Assigning Resource Curves to Resource or Role Assignments........................ 234
Manually Planning Future Period Assignments ............................................... 235
Assigning Activity Codes and Adding Expenses ............................................. 241
Viewing Activity Feedback and Posting Resource Notes................................. 243
Assigning Work Products and Documents........................................................ 245
Adding Steps..................................................................................................... 246
Creating and Assigning Activity Step Templates ............................................. 248
Viewing Activity Summaries ............................................................................ 251
Viewing Contract Manager Documents ............................................................ 252
Using Global Change ........................................................................................ 253
Working with Cost Accounts and Project Expenses.....................257

Cost Account and Expense Overview............................................................... 258
Setting Up a Cost Account Structure ................................................................ 259
Adding Expenses and Entering Cost Information ............................................ 263
Defining Expense Details.................................................................................. 266
Analyzing Costs ................................................................................................ 268
Performing Top-Down Estimation .................................................271

Performing Top-down Estimation..................................................................... 272
Applying Saved Top-Down Estimates To a Project.......................................... 276
vi
Table of Contents
Part 4: Updating and Managing the Schedule

Managing Baselines .........................................................................281
Creating and Maintaining Baselines ................................................................. 282
Assigning Baselines to Projects ........................................................................ 286
Comparing Current and Baseline Schedules..................................................... 288
Updating Baselines ........................................................................................... 290
Updating, Scheduling, and Leveling...............................................295

The Update Process........................................................................................... 296
Choosing a Method of Updating ....................................................................... 298
Highlighting Activities for Updating ................................................................ 302
Updating Progress for Spotlighted Activities ................................................... 304
Estimating Progress Automatically................................................................... 306
Updating Using Timesheets .............................................................................. 309
Updating Activities Manually ........................................................................... 314
Interrupting Activity Progress........................................................................... 320
Applying Actuals .............................................................................................. 322
Storing Period Performance (Past Period Actuals) ........................................... 324
Scheduling Projects........................................................................................... 328
Leveling Resources ........................................................................................... 333
Recalculating Resource and Role Assignment Costs ....................................... 337
Managing Resource Assignments ..................................................................... 339
Summarizing Projects .....................................................................341

Setting Summarization Options ........................................................................ 342
Summarizing Project Data ................................................................................ 343
Project Issues and Thresholds ........................................................351

Adding Issues.................................................................................................... 352
Assigning Tracking Layouts to Issues .............................................................. 356
Using the Issue Navigator ................................................................................. 357
Adding Thresholds ............................................................................................ 358
Threshold Parameter Definitions ...................................................................... 361
Monitoring Thresholds...................................................................................... 365
Assigning Tracking Layouts to Thresholds ...................................................... 366
Managing Risks................................................................................367
Adding Risks..................................................................................................... 368
Calculating Exposure Values ............................................................................ 370
Calculating a Risks Impact .............................................................................. 371
Creating and Deleting Risk Types..................................................................... 372
Customizing Risk Layouts ................................................................................ 373
Table of Contents
vii
Maintaining a Projects Document Library ..................................375

Viewing a Document Library and
Adding/Deleting Work Products and Documents............................................ 376
Specifying Document Location References...................................................... 378
Assigning Work Products and Documents........................................................ 379
Tracking Projects .............................................................................381

Creating Tracking Layouts................................................................................ 382
Working with Tracking Layouts ....................................................................... 385
Customizing Tracking Layouts ......................................................................... 386
Grouping, Sorting, and Filtering Data in Tracking Layouts ............................. 388
Comparing Projects with Schedule Comparison ..........................391

Schedule Comparison Overview....................................................................... 392
Comparing Projects/Baselines .......................................................................... 393
Comparison Data .............................................................................................. 400
Creating and Using Reflections ......................................................407

Reflection Overview ......................................................................................... 408
Creating and Using Reflections ........................................................................ 409
Reflection Guidelines........................................................................................ 413
Checking Projects In and Out.........................................................415

Managing Remote Projects ............................................................................... 416
Checking Out Projects ...................................................................................... 417
Checking In Projects ......................................................................................... 419
Part 5: Customizing Projects

Working with Layouts .....................................................................425
Layout Types..................................................................................................... 426
Creating, Opening, and Saving Layouts ........................................................... 432
Exporting and Importing Layouts..................................................................... 433
Copying and Pasting Resource Spreadsheet Data to Microsoft Excel.............. 434
Grouping, Sorting, and Filtering Data...........................................435

Grouping Data................................................................................................... 436
Sorting Data ...................................................................................................... 440
Filtering Data .................................................................................................... 441
Customizing Layouts .......................................................................445

Modifying Columns .......................................................................................... 446
Adjusting the Timescale.................................................................................... 449
Formatting Gantt Charts.................................................................................... 452
Formatting Activity Network Layouts .............................................................. 460
Modifying Resource and Activity Usage Profile Settings ................................ 464
viii
Table of Contents
Customizing Reports .......................................................................473

Reports Overview.............................................................................................. 474
Opening Reports ............................................................................................... 475
Creating and Modifying Reports....................................................................... 476
Using the Report Editor .................................................................................... 479
Adding Data Sources and Rows to Reports ...................................................... 483
Adding Text Cells to Reports ............................................................................ 487
Sorting Report Data Sources............................................................................. 495
Customizing a Report with the Report Editor: an Example.............................. 496
Using Report Groups ........................................................................................ 506
Setting Up Batch Reports.................................................................................. 507
Printing Layouts and Reports.........................................................509

Defining Page Settings ...................................................................................... 510
Previewing Layouts and Reports....................................................................... 514
Printing Layouts and Reports............................................................................ 515
Publishing Layouts and Reports in HTML Format........................................... 517
Publishing a Project On the Web ...................................................519

Project Web Site Overview ............................................................................... 520
Publishing a Project Web Site ........................................................................... 522
Customizing the Appearance of a Project Web Site ......................................... 524
Publishing Activity and Tracking Layouts........................................................ 525
Part 6: Importing and Exporting Data

Linking the Project Management
and Contract Manager Modules ...................................................529
Linking the Project Management Module to Contract Manager ...................... 530
Linking a Project Management Project to a Contract Manager Project ........... 532
Importing Contract Manager Data to a Project Management Module Project . 534
Transferring Data to Other

Project Management Module Users ..............................................537
Exporting Projects............................................................................................. 538
Exporting Roles or Resources........................................................................... 545
Importing Projects............................................................................................. 547
Importing Roles or Resources........................................................................... 567
Transferring Methodology Data.....................................................573

Exporting Methodologies.................................................................................. 574
Exporting Roles or Resources........................................................................... 576
Importing Methodologies.................................................................................. 578
Importing Projects as Methodologies ............................................................... 583
Importing Roles or Resources........................................................................... 588
Table of Contents
ix
Transferring Data Using Microsoft Project Files..........................593

Exporting Resources ......................................................................................... 602
Importing Projects from Microsoft Project....................................................... 607
Importing Resources from Microsoft Project ................................................... 618
Transferring Data Using Microsoft Excel Files.............................627

Exporting Project Data to Microsoft Excel....................................................... 628
Updating Project Data in Microsoft Excel........................................................ 635
Importing Projects from Microsoft Excel ......................................................... 638
Transferring Data Between

P3 and the Project Management Module .....................................643
Exporting Projects to P3 3.x ............................................................................. 644
Importing P3 3.x Projects to the Project Management Module........................ 653
Transferring Data to Primavera Contractor Users ......................681

Exporting Resources ......................................................................................... 685
Index..................................................................................................687
xi
Preface
In this preface:
Primavera Products
Using Documentation and Help
Where to Get Support
Primaveras Project Management module is

comprehensive, multiproject planning and
control software, built on SQL, Oracle, and
SQL Server Express server databases for
enterprise-wide project management
scalability. The module can stand alone for
project and resource management, or it can
be used with companion Primavera products
to manage your project portfolios.
xii
Preface
Primavera Products
Primavera provides an integrated project portfolio management (PPM)
solution consisting of role-specific tools to satisfy each team members
needs, responsibilities, and skills. This solution uses standard Windows
interfaces, client/server architecture, Web-enabled technology, and
stand-alone (SQL Server Express) or network-based (Oracle and
Microsoft SQL Server) databases. Primavera offers the following
software components:
Project Management The Project Management module enables
users to track and analyze performance. It is a multiuser, multiproject
system with scheduling and resource control capabilities supporting
multi-tiered project hierarchies, resource scheduling with a focus on
roles and skills, recording of actual data, customizable views, and userdefinable data.
The module is ideal for organizations that need to simultaneously
manage multiple projects and support multiuser access across a
department or the entire enterprise. It supports an enterprise project
structure (EPS) with an unlimited number of projects, activities,
baselines, resources, work breakdown structures (WBS), organizational
breakdown structures (OBS), user-defined codes, and critical-pathmethod (CPM) scheduling and resource leveling. Large-scale
implementations for enterprise-wide project portfolio management use
it with Oracle or SQL Server as the project database. For smaller
implementations, you can use SQL Server Express.
The module also provides centralized resource management. This
includes resource timesheet approval and the ability to communicate
with project resources who use the Timesheets module. In addition, the
module provides integrated risk management, issue tracking, and
management by threshold. The tracking feature enables users to perform
dynamic cross-project rollups of cost, schedule, and earned value.
Project work products and documents can be assigned to activities and
managed centrally. The Report Wizard creates customized reports that
extract specific data from its database.
Preface
xiii
Methodology Management The Methodology Management

module is a system for authoring and storing methodologies, or project
plan templates, in a central location. Project managers can select,
combine, and tailor methodologies to create custom project plans. These
customized methodologies can be imported into the Project
Management module using the Project Architect wizard and used as
templates for new projects. In this way, your organization can
continually improve and refine methodology activities, estimates, and
other information with each new project.
Timesheets Primavera also provides a Web-based interproject
communication and timekeeping system. As a team-level tool for
project participants, Timesheets helps team members focus on the work
at hand with a simple cross-project to-do list of their upcoming
assignments. It also provides views of project changes and timecards for
manager approval. Because team members use this module to enter upto-the-minute information about their assignments and record time
against their workloads, project leaders can make crucial project
decisions with the confidence that they have the most current
information possible.
P6 Web Access P6 Web Access provides browser-based access to
project, portfolio, and resource data across the enterprise. Every web
user can create customized dashboards that provide an individualized
and focused view of the specific projects and categories of project data
that are most relevant to their role in managing project portfolios,
projects, and resources. Project Workspaces and Workgroups extend the
model of customizable, focused data views by enabling designated
project team members to create a uniform team view of data that relates
to one specific project or to a subset of activities within a project. P6
Web Access provides access to a wide range of data views and features
that enable Web users to manage their projects from initial concept
review and approval through to completion.
Primavera Web Services Primavera Web Services uses open
standards, including XML, SOAP, and WSDL, to seamlessly integrate
Primaveras project management functionality into other applications.
Using Primavera Web Services, organizations can share Primavera
project management data between applications independent of operating
system or programming language. For detailed information, see the
Primavera P6 Web Services Administrators Guide.
xiv
Preface
Primavera Integration API The Primavera Integration API

(Application Programming Interface) is a Java-based API and server
that enables developers to create client code that can directly and
seamlessly access Primaveras project management database. For
detailed information, see the Primavera P6 Integration API
Administrators Guide.
Software Development Kit The Primavera Software Development
Kit (SDK) enables users to integrate the data in the Project Management
module database with external databases and applications. It provides
access to the schema and to stored procedures that encapsulate business
logic. The SDK supports the Open Database Connectivity (ODBC)
standard and ODBC-compliant interfaces, such as OLE-DB and JDBC,
for connecting to the project management database. The SDK must be
installed on any computer that needs to integrate with the database. For
detailed information, see the Primavera SDK Help.
Schedule Comparison Schedule Comparison provides the
capability to compare two projects, or a project and an associated
baseline, to determine what data has been added, deleted, or modified
from the schedules. Based on the data fields you select for comparison,
this feature creates a project plan comparison report in one of three file
formats. Schedule Comparison is automatically installed with the
Project Management module. You can access it from the Tools menu.
ProjectLink ProjectLink is a plug-in that enables Microsoft Project
(MSP) users to work in the MSP environment while being connected to
Primavera's enterprise features. The functionality enables users of
MSP2002 and 2003 to open and save projects from or to the Project
Management module database from within the MSP application.
Moreover, MSP users have the ability to invoke Primavera's resource
management within the MSP environment. ProjectLink benefits
organizations that have a substantial amount of project data stored in
MSP but require some users to have the additional functionality and
optimized data organization available within Primavera applications.
Microsoft 2007 currently is not supported for use with Project
Link.
Preface
xv
Using Documentation and Help

For a list of new features
included in this version of
the module, refer to the
Whats New in Project
Management? topic of the
Help.
This book guides you through the process of planning and controlling
projects using the Project Management module. Read the first chapter to
become familiar with the process of PPM, then follow the steps in each
successive chapter to build projects and project components, set up
codes and documents, manage the resources required to complete the
project plan, update projects as work gets underway, and report results
throughout the project life cycle. This manual is organized as follows:
Part 1: Overview and Configuration Provides an overview of
project portfolio management, simple steps for getting started quickly,
and information about the standard layouts you can use to view project
data. This part also provides a quick tour, including instructions for
configuring user workstation preferences.
Part 2: Structuring Projects Includes the basics about the
enterprise project structure (EPS) and describes how to set up this
structure, add new projects to build the hierarchy, use and navigate the
EPS, open existing projects, and define project properties. In addition,
Part 2 describes how to
Use an organizational breakdown structure (OBS) in conjunction

with the EPS to ensure that each project is effectively managed and
that corresponding security measures are in place
Establish the personnel and equipment required to perform the

work, define unlimited hierarchical resource codes for grouping
and rollups, and create a standard set of roles based on skill
requirements that you can assign to resources in all projects
Establish and use a work breakdown structure (WBS) as the basis

for the budget and spending information, specifications, and
milestones within the EPS
Establish project budgets and the funding sources behind them,

monthly spending plans that show how budgets are distributed
throughout project life cycles, and layouts that track and analyze
variance as projects progress
Set up project codes to categorize projects for organizing, grouping,

selecting, and summarizing
Define custom fields that enable you to track and report project data
in fields customized for your business needs
Create calendars that define national and organizational holidays,

project-specific work/nonworkdays, and resource vacation days
xvi
Preface
Part 3: Implementing the Schedule Describes how to define a set

of codes you can use to categorize project activities for organizing,
grouping, selecting, and summarizing. Part 3 also explains how to
Establish the activities that compose projects and apply durations,

dates, resource information, activity types, activity relationships,
and other activity details
Set up the expenses, or nonresource costs, associated with a project,

and create global cost accounts to track activity costs and earned
value according to your organizations specific cost account codes
Assign estimation weights to WBS elements and activities to

perform top-down estimation
Part 4: Updating and Managing the Schedule Describes how to

establish baseline plans against which you can track project cost,
schedule, and performance data. Part 4 also explains how to
Create baselines to use for comparison, summarization, and earned

value reporting
Update projects by applying actual dates directly to activities or by

using timesheet data from the Timesheets module, and how to
schedule and level projects
Summarize and save project data on-the-fly or at a regularly

scheduled interval you specify
Establish issues, or known problems within a project plan, either

manually or by defining project thresholds, which monitor project
data according to measures you specify
Calculate the effect that a project riska concern or uncertainty

about a project or one of its componentswill have on a projects
schedule, costs, and durations
Catalog and track all project-related documents and deliverables,

and track the schedule by setting up additional layouts to monitor
project status
Compare projects and baselines to determine the project data that

has been updated
Check projects in and out of the module to maintain the most up-todate project data possible throughout the enterprise
Preface
xvii
Part 5: Customizing Projects Describes how to:
customize layouts for analysis and easier data entry
display specific information about project
produce reports that detail or summarize project information and

answer key questions that arise as the project progresses.
publish a project on the World Wide Web.
Part 6: Importing and Exporting Data Describes how to:
exchange project and methodology data with other Primavera

Project Management and Methodology Management users using
Primaveras propriety exchange format (XER).
exchange project data with other Primavera Project Management

users using Primavera XML files.
exchange project data with Microsoft Project or Microsoft Excel.
exchange project data between the Project Management module

and Primavera Project Planner (P3), Primavera Contractor, and
Primavera Contract Manager users.
Project Management Help Provides an extensive online help

system to supplement the documentation. Use Help to access general
information about program options, detailed descriptions of windows
and dialog boxes, and step-by-step instructions for specific project
tasks. Help also includes Hint Help for column values in various
windows. Access Hint Help by clicking the Display Options bar,
choosing Hint Help, and then clicking a value in a column.
xviii
Preface
Where to Get Support

If you have a question about using Primavera products that you or your
network administrator cannot resolve with information in the
documentation or Help, contact Primavera Customer Support at the
times and locations listed below.
Please provide your Primavera product serial number when contacting
Primavera. Each interaction is logged to help Primavera resolve your
questions quickly.
Office
Time Zone Hours
Telephone
FAX
E-mail Address*
Bala Cynwyd, ET
Pennsylvania,
USA
8:008:00
(MonFri)
9:002:00
(Sat)
+1-610-668-3030
+1-610-667-0652
[email protected]
London,
England, UK
GMT
8:306:30
(MonThur)
8:305:30
(Fri)
+44-20-8563-5555
+44-20-8563-5543
[email protected]
Hong Kong
GMT +8
8:005:00
(MonFri)
+852-2111-8299
+852-2111-9477
[email protected]
*Primavera's Web site at http://www.primavera.com/customer/index.asp provides support and product information,

such as knowledgebases, file downloads, user group and newsgroup information, and a product enhancement
request form.
In the United States, Primavera periodically and randomly

monitors technical support calls to ensure that you receive
the highest quality support.
All Primavera products are backed by comprehensive support and

training.
Part
Overview and Configuration

In this part:
Understanding Project Management

Quick Tour
Setting User Preferences
ead this part to learn more about project portfolio

management.
Understanding Project Management discusses Primaveras

enterprise approach to managing projects. It also defines the
various enterprise-wide project management roles, explains how
these roles can use other Primavera applications to achieve their
project goals, and provides an overview of the methods used to
successfully manage and control projects.
Quick Tour introduces key project portfolio management
concepts and explains how to perform basic tasks, such as
opening a new project and using wizards.
The Setting User Preferences chapter explains how to
customize the module to fit your special needs.
21

In this chapter:
Why Use Project Portfolio
Management?
Your Role in the Enterprise
Project Management Process
Overview
Planning, Controlling, and
Managing Projects
Primavera software products are designed to

support the project management needs of
organizations that manage large numbers of
projects at one time.
These integrated applications use project
portfolio management (PPM) to support the
management needs of project teams in
different locations and at varying levels of
the enterprise.
This chapter provides an overview of PPM,
the roles used in PPM, and the basic
concepts for planning, managing, and
controlling your projects.
22
Why Use Project Portfolio Management?

Large businesses typically have hundredseven thousandsof projects
underway at one time to create the new products and services that build
their future. These projects cross normal business hierarchies and chains
of command, making project portfolio management (PPM) an
enterprise-wide challenge. The pressure to complete projects on time
and within budget, and maintain a competitive edge, is driving
corporations to develop and implement PPM processes. They are
moving away from a traditional functional structure to a multipleproject organization that must achieve clear, but urgent goals, using
limited, shared resources, and they need the fastest business payback
from those projects to realize potential revenue and increase shareholder
equity.
PPM provides comprehensive information on all projects in an
organization, from executive-level summaries to detailed plans by
project. Individuals across all levels of the company can analyze, record,
and communicate reliable information and make timely, informed
decisions that support their corporate mission. By putting the right tool
in the right hands, PPM enables an organization to
Make strategic business decisions
Control the minute detail that is necessary to finish projects
Understand current resource demands, set priorities, and evaluate

long-term staffing requirements
Use skilled resources effectively and productively
Reorganize projects to fit shifting priorities without sacrificing

quality
23
Your Role in the Enterprise

By definition, PPM must meet the needs of several types of users. The
following section describes the enterprise roles as they typically apply
to the Primavera applications. Roles may vary or overlap depending on
the organization.
Network administrators Network administrators configure an
enterprises network environment (local- and wide-area networks) for
optimal performance with Primavera applications. They install and
maintain the server and client components of the applications. In
addition, they manage user access to enterprise data and develop and
maintain a comprehensive security policy to ensure that PPM data are
protected from unauthorized access, theft, or damage.
Network administrators ensure that the hardware and software
supporting Primavera applications function reliably by
Setting up and maintaining the network to ensure reliable

connections and the fastest possible data transfer
Creating and maintaining accurate lists of network resources and

users so that each has a unique network identity
Database administrators Database administrators (DBAs) are

responsible for setting up, managing, and assigning access rights for the
Primavera database. They set and oversee rules governing use of
corporate databases, maintain data integrity, and set interoperability
standards.
Database administrators ensure reliable access to the Primavera
database by
Installing, configuring, and upgrading database server software and

related products as required
Creating and implementing the database
Implementing and maintaining database security, including creating

and maintaining users, roles, and privileges for the database
Monitoring database performance and tuning as needed
Planning for growth and changes and establishing and maintaining

backup and recovery policies and procedures
24
Operations executives Operations executives are responsible for

strategic planning and ongoing performance analysis. They use the
Project Management module and the Portfolios section of P6 Web
Access to analyze schedule, resource, and cost data across projects.
Senior executives may be responsible for
Prioritizing projects
The profit/loss for a specific business entity
Funding and go/no-go decisions about projects
Strategic planning over the future of the business or division
Project controls coordinators Project controls coordinators are

responsible for ensuring that Primavera applications are implemented
properly and operate smoothly. They play a key role during
implementation by
Working with operations executives and program/project managers

to set up methodologies in the Methodology Management module
Working with operations executives and program/project managers

to structure project, organizational breakdown structure (OBS), and
resource hierarchies, set up basic calendars, and define enterprisewide custom fields and codes in the Project Management module
Working with the project administrator to create user accounts and

user groups for the Project Management module
Assigning security rights to users in the Project Management

module
Program managers Program managers oversee several high-level

project managers; they are responsible for multiple projects and use the
Project Management and Methodology Management modules, along
with P6 Web Access to:
Perform cross-project analysis
Manage projects to on-time and on-budget completion
Prioritize resources across projects
Plan projects before they are funded
25
Project managers Project managers manage multiple small,

repetitive projects or a single, complex project. They are responsible for
on-time/on-budget completion of the projects and use the Project
Management module and P6 Web Access to
Allocate specific named resources to a project in conjunction with

the functional manager of those resources
Communicate project information both up and down the chain of

command
Manage resources related to the project
Resource/cost managers Resource managers allocate resources

across projects and distribute their workloads. They are responsible for
resource planning, including recruiting, hiring, and training resources,
and they may be responsible for loading resource information in the
Project Management module, the Methodology Management module,
and the Resource section of P6 Web Access. Cost managers perform
detailed financial analysis of projects, handle project billing, and
integrate financial information within the company.
Team leaders Team leaders manage the work for a portion of a larger
project. They are managers who produce work and manage a team, and
they often use the Project Management and Timesheets modules, and P6
Web Access, to prioritize short-term tasks or objectives, typically when
the duration is less than the planning period of the project.
Team members Team members are trained in a specific skill
required on a project. They work with their manager to develop
activities and durations for incorporation into the schedule. Once
activities are added to the schedule, team members update them using
the Timesheets module to indicate the work they performed during
designated accounting periods. Team members may also use
personalized dashboards in P6 Web Access to quickly access their
projects, activities, documents, and more.
26
Project Management Process Overview

When contractors develop plans for a building, one of the first steps is
laying a foundation. This is also a true for building projects using the
Project Management module. The hierarchical structuring of data serves
as the foundation before the addition of actual project data. The
following is a suggested sequence for setting up these structures:
For information about

setting up security, see the
Set up the organizational breakdown structure (OBS), which is the

hierarchical arrangement of your companys management structure,
either as roles or individuals.
Set up the enterprise project structure (EPS), which is the

hierarchical structure that identifies the company-wide projects and
enables organization and management of those projects in your
organization.
Set up a resource hierarchy that reflects your organizations

resource structure and supports the assignment of resources to
activities.
For each project, set up the work breakdown structure (WBS),

which is a hierarchical arrangement of the products and services
produced during and by a project.
Project controls coordinators, working with operations executives and

program/project managers, structure the OBS and EPS hierarchies.
Setting up the OBS first enables association of the responsible managers
with their areas of the EPSeither nodes or projectswhen the EPS is
structured. User access and privileges to nodes and projects within the
EPS hierarchy are also implemented via a responsible OBS, so the
security profiles that monitor data access by project participants can be
established early on in the process.
Once the OBS is established, the EPS can be set up. An EPS can consist
of multiple root nodes, which enable particular types of projects to be
grouped together, such as project templates or high-risk projects. Within
each root node, you can further break down an EPS into multiple EPS
nodes, such as Capital Improvement projects and Manufacturing
projects, to categorize the types of templates projects.
27
The WBS acts as a continuation of the EPS for the individual projects in
the enterprise. A WBS provides organization and control of project and
activity information through a hierarchy of WBS elements. When you
create projects, the Project Management module automatically creates a
WBS element at the same hierarchy level and with the same name as the
project. You can set anticipated project dates, budgets, and spending
plans for a WBS at a high level to indicate when the work should occur
and how much its planned budget and monthly spending will be before
any projects are added to the EPS. In addition, you can use the preestablished budget amounts and funding information you set for WBS
elements for their project and activity counterparts.
For details on setting up
these structures, see the
applicable chapters in Part
2.
The following example represents how the OBS, EPS, and WBS
structures interrelate within one branch of the EPS.
The responsible manager

used for the root node in the
EPS branch is used as the
default for the EPS nodes
and projects for that branch;
you can change the
assignment(s).
The WBS extends beyond

the project levelall
activities in the project
have a WBS association.
28
Planning, Controlling, and Managing Projects

Before implementing Primavera to schedule projects, team members
and other project participants should understand the processes involved
in project management and the associated recommendations that help
smooth the Primavera implementation that supports your corporate
mission.
If you were driving to a place you had never seen, would you get in the
car without directions or a map? Probably not. More than likely youd
take the time to plan your trip, consider alternate routes, and estimate
your time of arrival. Planning the drive before you even left would help
your trip be more successful. And, along the way, should you encounter
road blocks or traffic delays, you would have already identified alternate
ways to reach your destination.
Project management follows the same methodology and purposeto
achieve each projects goals, you need to plan them in advance. Good
project management is no longer an option in todays corporate world. It
is a critical tool to help your company stay on target and accomplish its
goals.
Simply stated, project management is the process of achieving set goals
within the constraints of time, budget, and staffing restrictions. It allows
you to get the most out of your available resources. Resources include
People
Materials
Money
Equipment
Information
Facilities
Roles
Project portfolio management factors in all of these variables across

multiple projects, enabling project managers and company executives to
see an accurate picture of how each projects resource use affects other
projects.
29
The process of project management is guided by three key principles:
Planning
Controlling
Managing
Planning a project The first step in project management is to define

your project.
1 What is the scope of the work? What activities will make up the
project and what is their relationship to each other? Youll also want
to identify the major milestones that will help you monitor the
projects progress.
2 What is the project duration? What are the dates when the project
will begin and end?
3 What resources are available to the project? Beyond labor, think
about all the types of resources you will require.
4 Who will perform what tasks? Determining your labor resources
and their available workhours is a key part of building a successful
project. Youll need to plan for downtime and holidays and
determine the regular workweek for various staffing types.
5 How much will the project cost? What are the costs per resource?
Are there any hidden project costs?
6 What is the estimated budget? Establishing a project budget
estimate in advance helps you monitor possible cost overruns.
The answers to these questions form the framework of your project.
Controlling a project Once you have built your project and
estimated your budgeting needs, you save this original plan as a
baseline, or target schedule, to help you control the project. A baseline
provides a solid point of reference as your schedule changes over time.
It allows you to compare the original schedule to the current one and
identify significant changes and develop contingency plans.
You control a project to keep it heading in the right direction. Youll
want to track work progress and costs, compare them to your baseline,
and then recommend what actions should be taken.
30
Effective project control reaps many benefits. It allows you to keep a

close eye on possible problems before they become critical. It lets the
project team and senior management view cost and scheduling
timeframes based on the reality of the schedule.
Managing a project The process of guiding a project from start to
finish is the responsibility of a project manager. A good project manager
wears many hats, acting at various times as a motivator, communicator,
coordinator, and advisor. As you control the projects progress, it is your
job to keep your team aware of changes to the schedule and possible
consequences. In many ways, you are the projects ambassador,
ensuring that your project organization is carrying out its
responsibilities for the best possible outcome.
To be an effective project manager also requires consistency when you
update your projects. Select a day each week, or biweekly, when you
will regularly update projects. This regular update will include progress
on values such as
Dates on which activities started or finished
Dates when resources are consumed
Changes to resource rates
Determine a standard policy for the update and scheduling procedure,

and for reporting progress.
The Project Management module provides many tools to assist you in
reporting progress to both team members and senior management. Use
the Project Web Site option to create a central location where team
members can view project progress. Consider the many system reports
as a means for communicating change. In addition, senior management
can use the Portfolios section of P6 Web Access to summarize project
data and easily capture a snapshot of how a project or group of projects
is progressing.
31
Quick Tour
In this chapter:
Getting Started
Selecting a Language
The Workspace
What Is a Layout?
Customizing Displays
Sample Layouts
Using Wizards
This quick tour introduces you to the Project

Management module and its workspace. It
discusses the layout approach to viewing
data and includes samples to help you start
creating your own layouts. You will also
learn the basic steps for starting the module,
opening a project, and using wizards to
speed up your work.
32
Getting Started
The installation process guides you through setting up the module on
your computer. Refer to the Administrators Guide for detailed
instructions.
Start the Project Management module Click Start, then choose
Programs, Primavera, Project Management.
Log in Before using the module, you must enter a valid login name
and password. If you do not know your login name and password, see
your system administrator.
4 Click to open the
Welcome dialog box.
1 Type your login name.
2 Type your password.
3 Accept the database
shown, or select
another database.
Passwords are case-sensitive and depend on selections in

the Admin Preferences dialog box.
If the Enable Password Policy check box is marked in the
Admin Preferences dialog box, you are required to enter a
password with a minimum length of 8 characters, including
one alpha and one numeric character.
If the Enable Password Policy check box is cleared in the
Admin Preferences dialog box, you are required to enter a
password of up to 20 characters in length.
Your login name can be up to 20 characters in length.
Use the Welcome dialog box to create a new project, open an existing
project or the last open project, or open global data only.
Quick Tour
33
Click to select a different portfolio
Starts the Create a New Project

wizard for adding a new project
Displays the Open Project dialog
box for selecting an existing
project or EPS node to open
Opens the last project you used
Opens the module without

opening or creating a project.
Only global data and
administrative functions are
available.
Mark the Do Not Show This Window Again checkbox if you do not
want the Welcome dialog box to appear each time you open the module.
The last project used at startup automatically opens. To turn this option
back on, choose Edit, User Preferences, then click the Application tab
and mark the Show the Welcome Dialog at Startup checkbox.
Select a portfolio Select a project portfolio to view a group of
projects that have a common characteristic. A portfolio can contain any
number of projects. Choose File, Select Project Portfolio to select a
portfolio.
34
Click to change
your portfolio
display. You can
change the table
font, color, and
row height, or
expand/collapse
all bands.
Modify a portfolio Use the Project Portfolios dialog box to view and
change general information about the selected portfolio. You can also
add and delete portfolios. Choose Enterprise, Project Portfolios to set up
project portfolios.
The top portion of the Project Portfolios dialog box contains
information about all available portfolios, and the lower portion is
divided into two tabs that display specific information about a selected
portfolio.
Quick Tour
35
Select who can access the

selected portfolio. All Users
means the portfolio is
available to all users;
Current User means only
the current user can access
the portfolio; and Another
User means only the
specified user can access
the portfolio.
Click to add projects to the

selected portfolio.
Click to remove projects
from the selected portfolio.
36
Selecting a Language
Use the Set Language dialog box to select the language in which to
display the information in menus, dialog boxes, and messages.
This option does not affect the data you enter; this
information appears exactly as typed.
Select a language To display the Set Language dialog box, choose

Tools, Set Language.
Restart the Project Management module for the language change to

work properly.
Quick Tour
37
The Workspace
When you first open a project, the Home workspace displays the main
functions available in the module. For example, click Activities to focus
on activity data and customize layouts. The workspace for each main
window consists of a menu bar, navigation bar, directory bar, toolbar,
and command bar.
Use the toolbar to quickly access options that
pertain to the window displayed and to change
the look of your layout.
Use the navigation bar to move

between open windows, display and
hide the directory, and open Help
quickly for a specific window.
Choose a menu
to open a list
of commands.
Use the directory to

switch your focus.
Click the buttons in the Command

bar to perform various functions
specific to the open window.
38
Display the directory bar Use the directory to display windows

quickly. Choose View, Toolbars, Directory, to display or hide the
directory bar. To display or hide directory bar button text, choose View,
Toolbars, Directory Button Text.
Display data at the

enterprise level
Displays the Projects window. Use to globally review the global

enterprise project structure (EPS), and to work with individual
projects.
Displays the Resources window. Use to add or modify your
organization's resources.
Displays the Reports window. Use to produce reports for all
projects or the open project.
Displays the Tracking window. Use to display and create
tracking layouts for the open project.
Displays the Work Breakdown Structure window. Use to add or
modify the open project's work breakdown structure (WBS).
Displays the Activities window. Use to work with activities in the
open project.
Displays the Resource Assignments window. Use to view, add,
and delete resources assigned to activities.
Display data at the

project level
Displays the Work Products and Documents window. Use to

create and assign work products/documents for the open project.
Displays the Project Expenses window. Use to work with
expense items for the open project.
Displays the Project Thresholds window. Use to add or delete
thresholds for the open project.
Displays the Project Issues window. Use to add or delete issues
for the open project, review issue history, and notify other team
members of issues.
Displays the Project Risks window. Use to add, delete, or
calculate risks for the open project.
Quick Tour
39
Display the navigation bar Use the navigation bar to move

between open windows. You can also use the navigation bar to display
and hide the directory and open Help for the current window or dialog
box. The navigation bar is displayed or hidden when you choose View,
Toolbars, Navigation Bar. To display or hide navigation bar button text,
choose View, Toolbars, Navigation Bar Button Text.
Returns to the Home workspace
Displays the next window in a series of windows
you opened. The Forward button is available
only after you use the Back button to redisplay a
previous window.
Displays the last
window you opened
Displays or hides the directory
Opens Help
Use shortcut menus Instead of using standard menus and buttons,

you can also use the right mouse button to access frequently used
commands. To use shortcut menus, right-click an element or the white
space in any window, then choose the appropriate command.
Select multiple items To select a group of items that are next to
each other in the display, hold down the Shift key, click the first item in
the group, then click the last item in the group. To select multiple items
that are not next to each other in the display, hold down the Ctrl key,
then click each item you want to select.
40
What Is a Layout?
A layout is a customizable view of project information. To customize a
layout to meet specific needs, you can choose from a wide range of
project information, columns, colors, fonts, and activity groupings, and
you can display these data in the top and/or bottom layouts. For
example, show a Gantt Chart in the top layout and an Activity Table in
the bottom layout. Each time you change the way data are presented in
the top and bottom layouts, you create a unique layout. The module
automatically prompts you to save a layout when you close it, allowing
you to define a unique name for it so you can use the layout again with
the current project or a different project.
You can also customize the
Activity Table and Gantt
Chart in the Projects
window.
Activity Table displays activity information in spreadsheet format.

Use this type of layout to quickly update a project. Use the Fill Down
function to quickly copy and paste contents of rows in the Activity
Table. You can use filters and group data to see only those activities that
occur in your current status cycle. You can customize Activity Table
columns. You can also sort, filter, and group activities in the Activity
Table, as well as change the font of the activity information and the
color of the table background. The Activity Table is displayed in the top
and bottom layouts.
For more information on

using the Fill Down
function in the Activity
Table, see the Help.
Gantt Chart provides a graphical display of activity progress over the

course of the project. You can customize Gantt Chart bars, colors,
labels, and symbols. You can also sort, filter, and group activities in the
Gantt Chart. The Gantt Chart is displayed in the top and bottom layouts.
Activity Usage Spreadsheet displays units, costs, or earned value
data by activity over time. Use this type of layout to review per period
and rolled up activity resource/cost data. The Activity Usage
Spreadsheet is displayed in the top and bottom layouts.
Activity Network provides a graphical display of activities, including
logical relationships. You can specify which information you want to
display, and you can change the Activity Network colors and fonts. You
can also group and filter activities in the Activity Network. The Activity
Network is displayed in the top layout only.
Activity Details display detailed information for an activity you
select in either the Activity Table or Activity Network. You can also use
Activity Details to enter and edit an activitys information, such as dates,
resource assignments, and predecessor and successor relationships.
Activity Details is displayed in the bottom layout only.
Quick Tour
41
Resource Usage Spreadsheet displays resource data in

spreadsheet format. This approach is helpful when you are updating and
maintaining both your organization's resource hierarchy and individual
resource information. This spreadsheet is displayed in the bottom layout
only.
Activity Usage Profile displays a time distribution of activity units
and costs in a Bar Chart format. You can customize all aspects of the
Activity Usage Profile display. You can also filter activity information in
the Activity Usage Profile. This profile is displayed in the bottom layout
only.
Resource Usage Profile displays a time distribution of resource
units and costs in relation to activities in a Bar Chart format. You can
customize all aspects of the Resource Usage Profile display. You can
also filter activity and resource information. This profile is displayed in
the bottom layout only. You can also display a stacked histogram for the
profile in the Activity window, and in the Resource Analysis type layout
in the Tracking window.
Trace Logic provides a graphical display of dependency relationships
for an activity you select in either the Activity Table or Activity
Network. Trace Logic is displayed in the bottom layout only.
Use toolbar buttons to
customize the layout.
To completely close the
lower layout and view
only the data in the top
layout, click the Show/
Hide Bottom Layout
button.
To hide or show more of
the information in each
pane, drag the horizontal
split bar between the two
layouts.
In the sample layout above, the top part of the window shows activity
data in a Gantt Chart, while the lower part displays the Activity Details.
42
Customizing Displays
Most windows and dialog boxes include a Display or Layout Options
bar at the top of the screen that contains commands that enable you to
customize the current display. Click this bar to display a menu of the
commands available for that window or dialog box. You can also access
many of these commands from the View menu.
Click the Layout

Options bar to display a
menu of the options
available for the
Activities window.
For details about

customizing layouts, see
Customizing Layouts on
page 445.
You can switch your display from a hierarchical view to a list view when
displaying information, such as resources and the work breakdown
structure, that is displayed in different levels. To switch a display from
hierarchy to list view, click the leftmost column label that appears in the
display.
Quick Tour
An outline symbol ( )in the leftmost

column label indicates a hierarchy view.
43
A triangle symbol ( ) in the leftmost

column label indicates a list view.
After you change a display to list view, you can also sort the displayed
information by clicking any column label.
44
Sample Layouts
The sample database included with the module provides standard
layouts that you can use with your own projects.
To open a sample layout, first open one of the projects from the sample
database or your own database in the Activities window, then choose
View, Layout, Open.
In this sample layout,

you can view your
project data based on
the projects work
breakdown structure
(WBS).
Quick Tour
45
This layout enables you

to compare your current
dates to your baseline
dates.
This Activity Network

layout enables you to
view your project
graphically, by
predecessor and
successor relationships.
Click the Activity
Network boxes to move
along the critical path of
the project, or right-click
to make changes to the
data.
46
Using Wizards
Wizards are a great way to speed up your work. They quickly guide you
through repetitive steps, doing most of the work for you.
The module contains wizards for creating new projects, adding
activities, creating resources, and building reports.
If you prefer to work without

wizards, mark this checkbox
on the first dialog box of each
wizard or choose Edit, User
Preferences, Assistance, and
set your choices in the
Wizards section.
These navigation buttons step you

through the wizard. Click Prev to
change your previous entries and
Next to move forward.
You can specify whether you want wizards to help you add activities
and resources. Other wizards are also available to create new projects,
export and import project data, and define administrative preferences.
Wizards are discussed in more detail in the appropriate chapters of this
manual or in the Help.
Quick Tour
47
Set wizard options Choose Edit, User Preferences. Click the

Assistance tab.
Mark to use the New

Resource Wizard.
Mark to use the New

Activity Wizard.
Navigate wizards To move between different wizard windows, click

Prev or Next. To save your changes and close the wizard at any time,
click Finish. To close the wizard without saving your changes, click
Cancel.
49

In this chapter:
Formatting Time Units
Formatting Dates
Setting View Currency and
Symbols
Setting Mail Preferences
Implementing Wizards
Creating a Log of Tasks and
Setting Startup, Group and Sort,
and Column Options
Changing Your Password
Setting Profile and Spreadsheet
Data Options
Setting Calculation Options for
Resource and Role Assignments
Selecting Startup Filters
You can tailor certain options to fit your

specific needs. For example, indicate the
format for displaying time units and dates,
specify the currency to use for viewing costs,
and set startup display preferences. You can
also indicate how you want to transfer
information to and from e-mail installations
of the module, and specify whether you want
to use the latest calculated summarized data
or the most current data in Activity/Resource
Usage Spreadsheets and Profiles.
This chapter describes how to set these
options.
50
Formatting Time Units

Time unit settings affect how time unit values are displayed in tracking
layouts, activity durations, resource prices, availability, and work
efforts. Choose Edit, User Preferences, then click the Time Units tab.
This option is
disabled when Show
Unit label or Show
Duration label is not
marked.
Mark to display the time

unit abbreviation with the
time/duration value.
For each time period,

specify the number of hours
to use as a conversion
factor when you display time
unit fields in increments
other than hours. These
fields are disabled when the
Admin Preference 'Allow
users to specify the number
of work hours for each time
period' is not selected.
Set time unit options In the Units Format section, select the time
unit used to display work efforts, and resource/role prices and
availability. In the Durations Format section, select the time unit used to
display activity duration values.
Mark the Sub-Unit checkbox to include the next smallest time interval
for the Unit of Time selected; the field name changes accordingly. For
example, if you select Day in the Units field, the Sub-Units field
displays Hours. You can also select the number of decimal places you
want to include in time unit displays.
In the Units/Time Format section, choose to show resource units per
time as percentages or as units per duration. Your choice determines
how rates are displayed. For example, 4h/d is the same as 50 percent of
an eight-hour day.
51
Define the Hours per Time Period Primavera calculates and

stores time unit values in hourly increments. When you display or enter
data in time unit fields in increments other than hours, the Project
Management module converts the data based on the Hours per Time
Period settings (either Admin Preference or User Preference - see note
below). Conversely, if you enter time units in increments other than
hours, the Hours per Time Period settings (either Admin Preference or
User Preference - see note below) are used to convert these input values
to hours for database calculation and storage.
In order to display time unit data accurately, you should set the Hours
per Time Period values according to the activity calendar used by your
role in the organization. For example, if you are an engineer and
engineers use an 8-hour activity calendar, enter 8 as the Hours/Day
value. If you do not enter a value that corresponds to your role's activity
calendar, activity durations may be displayed incorrectly when you view
your activities in spreadsheets, reports, etc.
If the Admin Preference (Time Periods tab) option 'Allow
users to specify the number of work hours for each time
period' is not selected, these fields are not editable. When
the option is not selected, the Hours per Time Period settings
on the Time Periods tab of Admin Preferences are used to
calculate display values for time unit fields.
52
Formatting Dates
Choose Edit, User Preferences, then click the Dates tab to specify how
to display dates.
Choose to exclude the time

from date fields.
Displays an example of
your format preferences
Specify date format Choose the date format you want to use, then
choose how to display time values in date fields. Mark the applicable
checkboxes in the Options area to indicate how the selected date format
should appear. In the Separator field, select the character you want to
use to separate days, months, and years.
53
Setting View Currency and Symbols

Choose Edit, User Preferences, then click the Currency tab to specify
the currency used to view cost data, and whether to show or hide the
currency symbol and/or decimal values in cost values.
You must enter all cost data in the view currency selected in
User Preferences.
Click to select the

currency for viewing
costs; this may differ
from the base currency
used to store monetary
values.
Mark to include the symbol

used for the currency.
Mark to show
decimal values for
costs.
The currencies available for viewing monetary units are

defined by your administrator in the Currencies dialog box.
54
Setting Mail Preferences

Choose Edit, User Preferences, then click the E-Mail tab to configure
the module to transfer information to and from e-mail installations.
Not needed for

Internet mail
This is typically the

project administrators
address.
Configure mail settings The module supports both MAPI

(Messaging Application Interface) and SMTP (Internet) for sending
issues to users via e-mail. Select the applicable protocol for your mail
system in the E-Mail Protocol field. When using SMTP, select Internet.
If you are using MAPI as the protocol, type the profile name in the Mail
Login Name/Profile Name field. The profile name is set in Control
Panel in the Mail Settings dialog box (accessible from the Mail and Fax
icon) on the workstation running the module. Click Password to enter
the password to the MAPI profile.
In the Outgoing Mail Server (SMTP) field, type either the fully qualified
domain name of the Internet mail server or its IP address. In the User EMail Address field, type the Internet mail address for the user from
whom the mail will be sent. If you have a MAPI configuration, clear the
Outgoing Mail Server (SMTP) field, and type the Microsoft Exchange
e-mail address of the person sending the e-mail notification in the User
E-Mail Address field.
55
Implementing Wizards
Choose Edit, User Preferences, then click the Assistance tab to enable
the use of wizards when adding resources and activities.
To discontinue a wizards
use, you can either clear
the checkbox in this
dialog box or mark the Do
Not Show This Wizard
Again checkbox in the
wizard dialog box. To
enable a wizard for future
sessions, mark the
applicable checkbox
again in the Assistance
tab of the User
Preferences dialog box.
If you clear one or both

checkboxes and add a
new resource or activity,
you will need to use the
current layout to add the
information.
Set assistance options Wizards guide you through the steps

necessary to complete a function. Once you feel comfortable adding
resources and activities, you may not need to use them. Mark the
checkboxes in the Wizards section to automatically display the New
Resource Wizard when you add a new resource, and the New Activity
Wizard when you add a new activity.
56
Creating a Log of Tasks and Setting Startup, Group

and Sort, and Column Options
Choose Edit, User Preferences, then click the Application tab to
establish the default window and dialog box that displays when you start
the module, and to record the actions you perform to a log file. You can
also set options for grouping and sorting.
Make your selection

based on the area in
which you work most
often; you can change
this setting as your
requirements change.
Mark to automatically create

a log file called
ERRORS.LOG each time you
work in the Project
Select the range of

financial periods
available for display as
columns. If you do not
select a range, all
financial periods are
viewable as columns.
You must choose Show ID/

Code, Show Name/
Description, or both.
Set startup and log file options Select the window to display each
time you start the module. Select Home if your work varies each day;
the Home workspace enables you to select the applicable window or
layout for each session.
You can also indicate whether to display the Issue Navigator dialog box,
which contains outstanding issues that are generated based on your
preset thresholds, and the Welcome dialog box, which enables you to
choose to create a new project, open an existing project, open the last
project opened in your previous session, or display global/enterprise
data only.
Primavera recommends that you use the log file only with the
assistance of Primavera Customer Support staff.
57
Set grouping and sorting options You can show or hide the ID/
Code or Name/Description fields as labels in the group-by bands when
grouping by hierarchies that include both an ID/code and a name
description. This user preference setting affects windows/dialog boxes
where you cannot access a Group and Sort dialog box.
Mark the Reorganize Automatically checkbox to enable the Project
Management module to immediately re-sort any changes to activity data
in the current view to reflect the layouts grouping and sorting criteria.
If you do not want the module to automatically reorganize
data, you can choose Reorganize Now from the Tools menu
to apply the group and sort criteria to the updates in the
current view.
Set column options for financial periods You can make a range
of financial periods available as columns in the Activities and Resource
Assignments windows, as well as the Resources tab of Activity Details.
You must enter a range to make financial period columns available for
selection in the Columns dialog box. For example, if each financial
period in the Financial Period dictionary has a duration of one month,
you may only want to view the previous six financial periods (six
months). You can change the range of financial periods you want to
display at any time.
58
Changing Your Password

The Enable Password Policy check box of the Admin Preferences dialog
box controls the type of password to enter in the Change Password
dialog box:
If the Enable password policy setting is selected in the Password

Policy field of the Admin Preferences dialog box, enter a password
that is a minimum of 8 characters long, and that contains one alpha
and one numeric character. This requirement is also shown in the
Change Password dialog box.
If the Enable password policy setting is not selected, enter a

password up to 20 characters long.
Choose Edit, User Preferences, then click the Password tab to open the
Change Password dialog box, in which you can enter a new password.
1 Click to change your

password.
2 Enter a new password.

3 Enter the new password
again to confirm it.
These password specifications are required when the Enabled

Password Policy check box is marked in the Admin Preferences
dialog box.
59
This password specification is

required when the Enabled
Password Policy check box is
cleared in the Admin Preferences
dialog box.
Additional Considerations:
If the Project Management module is running in LDAP

authentication mode, password management is handled through the
directory server. You cannot change your password through the
module and the Password tab does not appear in the User
Preferences dialog box.
Passwords are case-sensitive.
Passwords that were set before the new password policy was
enabled are valid and usable.
The same login and password applies to Project Management, P6

Web Access, Timesheets, and ProjectLink. Changing the password
in one application propagates the change to all.
60
Setting Profile and Spreadsheet Data Options

Choose Edit, User Preferences, then click the Resource Analysis tab to
choose the project data to use when displaying and summarizing
remaining units and costs in Resource Usage Spreadsheets, Resource
Usage Profiles, and tracking layouts. You can also choose options for
displaying and calculating time-distributed data in Resource Usage
Spreadsheets, Resource Usage Profiles, and tracking layouts in the
Project Management module, as well as time-distributed charts in P6
Web Access.
If you manually plan

future period resource
allocation in the
Resource Usage
Spreadsheet, this
setting determines the
minimum timescale
interval in which you
can enter a value.
If you choose to calculate

the role limit based on
custom defined role limits
and no limit has been
defined for a role, the
module assumes the role
has a limit of zero
maximum units/time.
If you do not choose Show

All Projects, the module
displays profile/
spreadsheet and tracking
data from open projects
only, and the data are live
rather than summarized.
Choose the project data to display If you choose Show All

Projects from the Display Options bar in a Resource Usage Profile or
Resource Usage Spreadsheet, you can specify whether to include data
from open and closed projects, or only the projects currently open when
calculating remaining units and costs. (Closed projects are any projects
in the enterprise project structure (EPS) that are not currently open.)
To include live data from all open projects and stored summary data
from all closed projects (excluding those with a What-If status),
choose All Closed Projects (Except What-If Projects).
61
Summarized data is available only when projects have been

summarized. To summarize data, choose Tools, Summarize,
then select to summarize the open projects in the current
view, all projects in the EPS (includes both open and closed
projects but excludes summary only projects), or summary
only projects (those projects for which the Contains
Summarized Data Only checkbox is marked in the Project
Details Settings tab).
To include live data from all open projects and stored summary data
from all closed projects with a specific leveling priority, choose All
Closed Projects with Leveling Priority Equal/Higher Than, and
enter the leveling priority you want to use. (Specify the leveling
priority per project in the General tab of the Projects window.) The
module uses this value to consider applicable external projects
(those not included in the current layout) when deducting from
resource availability immediately during leveling.
To not include resource data from external (closed) projects in the

remaining units and cost values for Resource Usage Profiles,
Resource Usage Spreadsheets, and tracking layouts, choose Open
Projects Only.
Choose the time-distributed data to display In the TimeDistributed Data section of the Resource Analysis tab, choose a starting
point for calculating remaining units and costs for display in Resource
Usage Profiles, the Resource Usage Spreadsheet, tracking layouts, and
P6 Web Access charts. To focus on the current remaining estimate,
choose Remaining Early Dates. To focus on values calculated from a
forecast date, choose Forecast Dates.
Next, select the interval at which live resource and cost calculations are
performed for Resource Usage Profiles and Resource Usage
Spreadsheet displays and in tracking layouts. Profiles, spreadsheets, and
layouts are only affected if their timescale interval is set lower than the
interval set in the Interval for Time-Distributed Resource Calculations
field.
For P6 Web Access users,
you can choose how you
want to display role limits in
the Resource Staffing
section of Global
Preferences.
Finally, choose to display role limits based on custom role limits defined
in the Roles dictionary or on the calculated limit of each roles primary
resource. The Resource Usage Spreadsheet, Resource Usage Profile,
tracking layouts, and P6 Web Access charts display the role limit
according to the option you select.
62
Setting Calculation Options for Resource and Role

Assignments
Choose Edit, User Preferences, then click the Calculations tab to specify
how cost and units are allocated when you add or delete multiple
resource assignments. You can also choose the default behavior when
replacing a resource/role on an existing activity assignment with a
different resource/role.
Choose resource assignment defaults You can specify how to

calculate remaining values when new resource assignments are added to
or removed from activities. Remaining duration, remaining units, and
remaining units/time will not change for existing assignments,
regardless of the duration type.
When the first assignment is added, units/costs are calculated based on the activitys duration type.
63
Preserve the units, duration, and units/time for existing

assignments
When adding or removing multiple resource assignments on
activities, choose this option for units, durations, and units/time to
remain constant when additional resources are assigned to any
activity. Regardless of the duration type of an activity, this equation
is always true:
Remaining Units = Remaining Duration x Remaining Units/Time
Recalculate the units, duration, and units/time for existing

assignments based on the activity duration type
When adding or removing multiple resource assignments on
activities, choose this option to calculate a resource assignments
remaining values based on the activitys duration type, specified in
the Activity Details General tab.
Choose assignment staffing defaults In the Project

Management module, you can choose the modules default behavior
when you replace a resource on an existing activity assignment with a
different resource and when you assign a resource to an existing role
assignment.
When replacing a resource on an existing activity assignment, you can
choose to always use the units/time and overtime factor of the new
resource or of the current assignment (i.e., the resource you are
replacing); or, you can choose to be prompted to select which units/time
and overtime factor you want to use each time.
When assigning a resource to an existing role assignment, you can
choose to always use the price/unit of the resource or role; or, you can
choose to be prompted to select which price/unit you want to use each
time.
If you choose to always use the role's price/unit, in the
Activity Details, Resources tab, the Rate Source is set to
Role. If you choose to always use the resource's price/unit,
the Rate Source is set to Resource. The price/unit value
used to calculate costs for the assignment is determined by
the rate type you select in the Rate Type field (which are
resource- and role-specific).
64
Selecting Startup Filters

Choose Edit, User Preferences, then click the Startup Filters tab to
choose the data filters you want to run when starting the module. You
can choose to view data for your current projects only, or all data in the
database. These filters can reduce the time it takes for your projects to
open.
When you change an
option in the Startup
Filters tab, you must exit
and then restart the
module for the change to
take effect.
These filters can be

changed in the
individual views by
clicking the Display
Options bar and then
Filter By.
Your security privileges control which data are displayed

when you select View All Data (No Filter).
Part
Structuring Projects
In this part:
Setting Up the Enterprise Project

Structure
Setting Up the Organizational
Breakdown Structure
Defining Resources and Roles
Reviewing Work Breakdown Structures
Defining Budgets
Establishing Project Codes
Working with User-Defined Fields
Creating Calendars
his part describes how to start planning and creating projects.
The first four chapters explain how to structure and add projects
to the hierarchy; establish the managers directly responsible for
projects and the users associated with them throughout the
enterprise; set up project resources and roles; and use the work
breakdown structure (WBS) to plan and manage project
information.
Subsequent chapters explain how to set up project budgets,
funding sources, and spending plans; track and analyze variance
as projects progress; define project codes and assign values to
project information so you can organize it in different ways
across the enterprise; and define custom user fields. Once your
project structures are set up, you can define the calendars that
determine when work can and cannot occur.
67

Structure
In this chapter:
Enterprise Project Structure
Overview
Structure
Adding a New Project to the
Enterprise Project Structure
Using Project Architect
Working with the Enterprise
Project Structure
Defining Enterprise Project
Structure Details
This chapter describes how to define the

enterprise project structure (EPS) that will be
used to organize and manage the projects in
your organization. In addition, it explains
how to develop, create, and add projects to
the EPS, and define project attributes.
68
Enterprise Project Structure Overview

Typically, users in an enterprise will have access to a large database that
contains all the projects and related information for their company. The
information this database contains must be structured in a way that
allows individuals to access the project data they need, quickly and
accurately. In addition, users must be able to review project data at the
level appropriate for their role in the enterprise and the specific
questions they need to answer.
Your database of projects is arranged in a hierarchy called the enterprise
project structure (EPS). The EPS can be subdivided into as many levels
or nodes as needed to parallel work in the enterprise. Nodes at the
highest, or root, level might represent divisions within your company,
project phases, site locations, or other major groupings that meet the
needs of your organization, while projects always represent the lowest
level of the hierarchy. Every project in the enterprise must be included
in an EPS node.
Use the Admin
Preferences, Data Limits
tab to specify the
maximum number of EPS
levels you can define.
Specify up to 50 combined
EPS/WBS levels.
The number of EPS levels and their structure depend on the scope of
your projects and how you want to summarize data. For example, you
may want to define increasingly lower levels of EPS nodes, similar to an
outline, to represent broad areas of work that expand into more detailed
projects. In the following example, the Caprini Corporation EPS node
includes a lower-level node called Apex Project. The Apex Project node
is further divided into the Apex Construction node. This node contains
the projects that constitute their part of the Apex Project. For example,
the Apex Construction node contains the Automated System, Office
Building Addition, and Conveyor System projects. You can specify as
many projects as necessary to complete the required work and fulfill the
scope set forth by operations executives and program managers in your
organization.
This EPS shows the Caprini

Corporation node, which is
further divided into nodes
that contain projects
corresponding to the types of
projects within the enterprise.
A project is the
lowest level in the
EPS.
Setting Up the Enterprise Project Structure
69
Multiple levels enable you to manage projects separately while retaining

the ability to roll up and summarize data to higher levels. For example,
you can summarize information up to each node in the EPS. Conversely,
top-down budgeting can be performed from higher-level EPS nodes
down through their lower-level projects for cost control.
Ideally, one person or group controls the EPS across the enterprise. The
project controls coordinator creates the hierarchical structure that
identifies the company-wide projects. The coordinator works with the
project manager in each area of the enterprise to define basic project
information for each group and to develop standards before any projects
are added. The following diagram is a simplified representation of
responsibilities and projects within a hierarchy.
Review portfolio
performance in P6
Web Access
High-level
EPS node
Operations Executive
and Program Manager
Project Controls Coordinator
Lower-level
EPS node
Team Members
Timesheets
module
Project Manager and

Resource/Cost Manager
Project
Team Leader
Project
Team Leader
70
Move around in the EPS When you first start the module, click
Open Existing on the Welcome dialog box, or choose File, Open, from
within the module. EPS nodes that contain other nodes and projects are
identified by a pyramid symbol. A + symbol indicates that more nodes
or projects are rolled up beneath the selected node. Click + or doubleclick the node to display additional levels in the hierarchy.
Root level of the

enterprise project
structure
Indicates that this
level is expanded.
Click the + to expand
the item; click the - to
collapse it.
Indicates that this
node contains more
rolled up nodes or
projects
Identifies a project,
the lowest level of the
hierarchy
Select the EPS node or project you want to open, then click Open. To
view the EPS structure, click Projects from the Home workspace.
You can right-click in the Projects window and choose Open
Project to display the Open Project dialog box.
71
Click Projects to
display the
enterprise project
structure.
You can group and

sort by any defined
project code; click the
Display Options bar,
then choose Group
and Sort By to select
a code.
The Specifications project
was opened from the
Open Project dialog box;
this project is located
under the Manufacturing
to Specifications node in
the EPS.
If you converted projects from a version prior to 4.1 to

version 4.1 or later, the Project Management module
displays the project groups and member projects in the EPS
as a two-level hierarchy showing the project group as the
EPS node, and the member projects as projects of the
node.
Other project structures Other project data, such as the

organizational breakdown structure (OBS), the work breakdown
structure (WBS), resources, and project codes, use a similar structure.
These data correspond directly with the various levels of the EPS to
denote logical and meaningful divisions in the enterprise.
72
Work breakdown structure Each project has its own WBS, which
shows the hierarchy of products and services produced during and by a
project. The summary rollup of the highest WBS level is equal to that of
the project level in the EPS. This effectively extends the EPS hierarchy
down to the activity level in the EPS, as shown in the following
example.
Both EPS and WBS

nodes can be
assigned dates and
budgetsessential
elements for topdown planning.
For more information

about the OBS hierarchy,
see Setting Up the
Organizational Breakdown
Structure on page 103.
Organizational breakdown structure User access and privileges

to nodes within the EPS hierarchy are implemented through a global
OBS that represents the management responsible for the projects in the
EPS. Each manager in the OBS is associated with his or her area of the
EPS, either by node or by project, and the WBS of the particular level of
the hierarchy.
73
Each level of the OBS is

associated with a level of
the EPS hierarchy,
whether it be a node or a
project.
Resources Resources are the personnel and equipment that perform

the work across all projects. You can set up a resource hierarchy that
reflects your organizations resource structure and supports the
assignment of resources to activities.

about the resource
hierarchy, see Defining
Resources and Roles on
page 115.
74
Project codes Project codes are another way to group and sort
projects in the enterprise. When you have many projects in the
hierarchy, codes enable consolidation and/or filtering of potentially vast
amounts of information located in different areas of the enterprise.
When you open a high-level

EPS node, you can organize
the layout by project code to
quickly see only projects
assigned to that code.

about summarizing data,
see Summarizing
Projects on page 341.
Summarizing Projects
You can view summary data for all projects in the enterprise in the
Projects window of the Project Management module and in many P6
Web Access views. The Project Management module enables you to
summarize data at regularly scheduled intervals or on demand, using the
Tools, Summarize command. Summarize data to obtain a broad
overview of project information and to display project data more
quickly.
An administrative preference determines how resource and role
assignment data is summarized: by calendar intervals, by financial
period intervals, or both. Since P6 Web Access displays summary data
on many tabs and pages, project data must be appropriately summarized
to view it in P6 Web Access. For example, to view project data in
Financial Period timescale intervals in P6 Web Access, resource and
role assignment data must be summarized by financial period. For more
information on setting administrative options for summarization, refer
to the Primavera Administrators Guide.
75

To establish the EPS nodes that will contain your enterprise projects,
choose Enterprise, Enterprise Project Structure.
This dialog box presents a
high-level picture of your
EPS, enabling you to set up
appropriate divisions of
information in the
enterprise.
You must specify a

responsible manager for
each node in the EPS to
enable security rights and
privileges; the module uses
the OBS root as the default
for all nodes if you dont
provide one.
Click to move nodes up/down
or indent/outdent.
Add a node to the EPS Select the node under which you want to
add a node. The new node will be placed below the selected node in the
hierarchy. Click Add in the Enterprise Project Structure (EPS) dialog
box. Type a unique ID and name for the node directly in the column
cells, or in the EPS ID and EPS Name fields. Accept the responsible
manager shown, or click the Browse button in the field to select a
different OBS element for the node. Use the arrow keys to indent/
outdent a node to denote its placement in the EPS, and to move a node
up/down in the hierarchy.
Click Close.
76
Add multiple root nodes You can distinguish different branches of

the EPS hierarchy by including more than one root node. For example,
you might want to separate current projects from completed projects or
from template projects that you use as the basis for new projects. Add a
root EPS node the same way you add an EPS node, but outdent the root
to the left-most position in the hierarchy.
Add root nodes to separate

projects with an Inactive
status or to distinguish
projects used as templates.

about security profiles, see
the Administrators Guide.
Build the hierarchy After you set up an EPS, you can define
additional data about each EPS node, such as anticipated dates, budgets,
and spending plans. Use the Project Details to specify this information,
as described later in this chapter. Or, you can begin adding projects
under the applicable nodes in the structure if you have access rights to
these functions. Access rights are set by your network or database
administrator.
77
Adding a New Project to the Enterprise Project

Structure
A project is a set of activities and their associated information that
constitutes a plan for creating a product or service. A project has a start
and finish date, work breakdown structure (WBS), and any number of
activities, relationships, baselines, expenses, risks, issues, thresholds,
and work products/documents. A project may also have its own Web
site.
While resources typically work on several projects, each project has its
own resource assignments. Similarly, while calendars, reports, and
activity codes may span all projects, they may also be project specific.
Determine your requirements for adding a new project to the hierarchy.
As a project manager who manages one or more higher-level projects in
the enterprise, youll probably want to add an EPS node that
encompasses these projects. If you are a team leader, youll probably
want to add an individual project that incorporates the tasks your group
needs to perform to complete the higher-level EPS node. You will create
this individual project below one of the EPS nodes previously
established by your project manager.
You can also use the
Project Architect wizard to
create new projects. See
on page 79.
Use the Projects window to add a project to the EPS hierarchy. Define
general information such as the projects ID and name, planned start and
must finish by dates, and the responsible manager.
Add a project to the EPS Choose Enterprise, Projects, or click
Projects on the Home workspace to open the Projects window. Select
the EPS node to which you want to add a project. (If you have not yet
created any EPS nodes, select the root EPS node created for you when
you installed the module.)
Click Add. The Create a New Project Wizard guides you through the
steps required to add a project, including selecting the node in which to
place the project in the EPS, naming the project, and identifying the
responsible manager for the project.
You cannot add projects below existing projects.
78
The root node was

selected as the EPS
node in which to place
the new project.
Identify the new project

using the General tab in
Project Details.
Use the default information
provided, or change it to
accommodate the project
requirements.
To define additional project information, display Project Details at the

bottom of your layout (click the Display Options bar and choose Show
on Bottom, Project Details), then refer to the Defining Enterprise
Project Structure Details on page 92.
about importing and
converting projects, see
Import projects You may want to build your EPS using projects
previously created in an earlier version of the Project Management
module, Microsoft Project, or Primavera Project Planner 3.0 (P3). The
Import Wizard prompts you to specify the information to be imported
and where the project should be placed in the current EPS hierarchy.
79

The Project Architect wizard helps you select and import methodologies
as pre-built project plans from the Methodology Management module.
Use Project Architect to create a new project plan or to add activities
and associated information to an existing project. Because Project
Architect copies methodologies from the Methodology Management
module database, the information you change does not affect source
methodologies.
using methodologies, see
the Methodology
Management Reference
Manual.
In addition to providing access to methodologies, Project Architect also

contains a bottom-up estimation feature that allows you to estimate
resource units and costs for your methodology selections. Project
Architect bases this estimate on the project complexity value that you
specify during the architect process. This enables you to estimate work
effort and cost before adding a project.
You can also access the

Project Architect wizard
from the File menu. Use
this option to incorporate
methodologies into the
current project.
Start Project Architect Wizard Choose File, New to start the

Create a New Project wizard. Select the EPS level in which to place the
new project. Name the project and specify a start date.
Select a responsible manager. Depending on the choices you make when
you run the Project Architect, the OBS element you select here will
appear at the top of the new projects OBS.
Choose the default rate type. Then choose Yes and run the Project
Architect.
The options that you select

in Project Architect for the
Responsible Manager and
default rate may override
the selections you choose
in the New Project wizard.
Select methodologies and estimate project complexity Click

Select Base Methodology or Plug-in Methodology to select the
methodology you want to import. Click Next to select the Base or Plugin Methodology you want to import. Click Next and type a value for the
project complexity, or click the Size and Complexity Wizard button to
calculate a value for the project complexity. The module uses the project
complexity percentage to calculate a value between the low and high
estimated values defined for the labor and nonlabor units, material costs,
and expense costs defined for each activity in the project.
80
The project complexity value can be between 0 and 100 percent. If the
project complexity value equals 0, the module uses the low estimate for
each activity. If the project complexity value equals 100, the module
uses the high estimate for each activity. For project complexity values
between 0 and 100, the module calculates an intermediate value
between the low and high estimates for each activity. The value
calculated using the project complexity value is then copied into the
planned labor/nonlabor units, material costs, and expense costs for each
activity.
81
Click to select a methodology from

the list of base methodologies
stored in the Methodology
Management module.
Click to display information about this

Project Architect session. You can
enter additional information to explain
your choice of a base methodology.
The Rationale information is added as
a Notebook Topic at the project level.
82
Tailor the WBS elements You can modify the Work Breakdown
Structure (WBS) elements associated with the selected methodology.
Click Tailor to view the details and activities of each WBS element.
Organizations using Primavera ProjectLink cannot modify
Microsoft Project (MSP)-managed WBS elements in the
Project Management module. For more information on
ProjectLink, refer to the Primavera ProjectLink Help in
Microsoft Project (available only if ProjectLink is installed).
You can access the help by clicking the Help button on any
ProjectLink screen.
Click to include the selected

WBS element.
Click to view the details of the

selected WBS element.
Click to specify which of the
activities for the selected WBS
you want to include in your
project plan. Clear the
corresponding checkbox to
exclude the selected activity.
83
Determine whether to merge the methodology WBS into the

current projects WBS To replace the top level WBS node with the
WBS from the methodology, mark the Merge methodology WBS into
current project's WBS checkbox. To assign the current top level project
OBS node to the project, clear the checkbox.
Mark to replace the top level WBS

node with the WBS from the
methodology.
Clear to assign the current top
level project OBS node to the
project
Tailor the WPs and Docs You can view the work products and
documents associated with the selected methodology. Click Tailor to
view the details of each work product or document and to select which
documents to include in the project plan.
Review the tailored methodology Click Next to view the results
after tailoring the methodology. Click Overview to review the changes
made to the selected methodology.
84
Choose Assignment Rate Type You can use the rate type that has
been set for the project. Alternatively, you can copy the price/unit rate
type from the methodology.
Click to use the rate type that

has been set for the project.
Click to copy the price/unit rate
type from the methodology.
Choose the responsible manager to be used for the project

and WBS assignments You can use the responsible manager
assignments from the project or the methodology.
Click to assign a responsible

manager based on the WBS
assignments in Project
Click to use the responsible
manager assignments that are
made in the methodology.
If you elect to use the assignments from the methodology, the

top level WBS/project node assignment is determined by
whether you selected the Merge option in an earlier dialog.
85
Choose update project options Select a layout configuration to

use when bringing methodology data into the project. You can create
and save several different configurations; however, only one
configuration is used to import the file. Select Yes in the Use field next
to the configuration you want to use.
Click to customize the

layout configuration.
Click to create a new

Modify a layout configuration To modify the options specified in a

layout configuration, select the layout in the Update Project Options
dialog box, then click Modify. The Action specified in the layout
determines how to import data that match in the import file and in the
existing project database.
86
The Modify Import Configuration dialog box lists the data types for
which you can set options. Select one of the following in the Action
field to indicate how you want to update the data type:
Keep Existing Retains data in the existing database and does not
overwrite them with the updated methodology data; adds new data
if the record does not exist.
Update Existing Overwrites data in the existing database with the

updated methodology data; adds new data if the record does not
exist.
Insert New Retains data in the existing database and adds any new
data items. For example, if a new role was added in the
Methodology Management module, but you dont want to change
the existing roles, choose Insert New to add the new role to the
project management database.
Do Not Import Retains data in the existing database and does not
import the methodology data.
Click OK to save changes to the modified layout configuration. Click

Next to specify where you would like to place the Base or Plug-in
methodology, then click Finish to create the project.
87
Working with the Enterprise Project Structure

Open an EPS node to open all the projects that compose it, or open
projects individually. You can also select nonconsecutive projects to see
their combined status, resources, or costs. Choose File, Open, select the
nodes or projects you want to open, then click OK.
Click to view a list of users who currently
have the selected project open.
Depending on your security

profile or the way in which
other users have opened the
project, one or more of these
options may not be available.
Only one user at a time can have Exclusive access to a

project.
Use status for filtering projects in the EPS You can change an
open (Active) project to closed (Inactive) when the project is completed.
You can also assign a What-If status to a copied project that you want to
use for analysis. Project status can be used to organize and summarize
information, and to filter projects.
Choose File, Open. Select the EPS node or project whose status you
want to change and click Open. Then, click Projects in the Home
workspace.
88
In the General tab,

select the projects
status.
To view only those projects with a specific status, choose View, Filter
By, Status, then choose the status you want to use. You can also choose
View, Filter By, Customize. In the Filters dialog box, mark the
applicable Select checkboxes for the statuses of the projects you want to
see.
Status filters
89
Using Root Nodes to Denote Project Status

Another way to distinguish projects with statuses other than Active is to
place them under separate root nodes in the EPS. The projects remain
part of the hierarchy, but they are not considered when you budget,
schedule, and level your active projects. Choose Enterprise, Enterprise
Project Structure, to set up root nodes as placeholders within the EPS.
You can then drag and drop projects to these root nodes when status
changes.
You may want to place the

status root nodes at the
bottom of the EPS to keep
them separate from the rest
of the hierarchy.
Click to move a selected node to the

left-most position and designate it as a
root node.
Copy an EPS node or project You can copy an existing node or

project to use as a template for a new one. Rename the node or project
after you copy it, then make the necessary changes to it.
90
When you open the Projects window, include the node/project you want
to copy as well as the node to which you want to copy it. Select the
node/project you want to copy, then click Copy from the command bar.
Select the node to which you want to copy the node/project, then click
Paste in the command bar. When you copy a project to another location
in the EPS, you can also choose to copy the links to the WBS,
documents, OBS, and other related elements. Mark the applicable
checkboxes in the dialog boxes that are displayed when you click Paste.
Click OK in each dialog box to proceed with the copy.
Mark the
checkboxes for
the elements
you want to
copy.
You can only delete

projects that are opened in
Exclusive mode.
Delete an EPS node or project When you delete a node, all

projects in that branch of the hierarchy will also be removed. If you
dont want to delete these projects, you must copy and paste them to
another area of the hierarchy before you delete the higher-level EPS
node.
91
To delete an EPS node, choose Enterprise, Enterprise Project Structure.

Select the EPS node you want to delete, then click Delete. Confirm that
you want to delete the selected node by clicking Yes. To delete a project,
open the Projects or WBS window with that project included. Select the
project, then click Delete. Confirm that you want to delete the selected
project by clicking Yes.
Click to delete the selected project.
Click to delete the

selected node.
92
Defining Enterprise Project Structure Details

Define project details and defaults used throughout a project using the
Project Details tabs in the bottom portion of the Projects window. You
can also define information specific to the EPS nodes in your hierarchy.
To display Project Details, click the Display Options bar, then choose
Show on Bottom, Project Details (the box next to Project Details should
be marked).
Make sure Project Details

are displayed so you can
define properties.
To include/exclude tabs,
right-click in the Details
area, and choose
Customize Project Details.
Open each tab to view and edit that type of information for the selected
node or project.
For details about the Budget Log, Spending Plan, Budget
Summary, and Funding tabs, see Defining Budgets on
page 159.
93
General information The General tab enables you to view and edit
general information about the selected node or project. This information
includes the ID, name, responsible manager, leveling priority, and risk
level. You can also view or edit the projects Web site address, if
applicable.
Use status to identify active (Active) or closed
(Inactive) projects. You can also select What-If
status for analysis before establishing a more
permanent project schedule, or Planned status
for use during the project planning phase.
The name of the user and the

date and time the user checked
out the project. This field is blank
when the Check Out Status is
Checked In.
The nodes/projects assigned organizational

breakdown structure (OBS) element. The Responsible
Manager is a mandatory assignment for each level of
the EPS.
The overall risk in performing the node/

project. Use the risk level to organize,
filter, and report project information.
Use this value to

consider applicable
external projects
(those not included in
the current window)
when deducting from
resource availability
immediately during
leveling.
94
Leveling Priority
You can include assignments from closed projects during leveling. Mark
the Consider Assignments in Other Projects with Priority Equal/Higher
Than checkbox in the Level Resources dialog box and indicate a Project
Leveling Priority for those projects on the General tab in the Projects
window. You can enter a value from 1 to 100, with 1 being the highest
priority. To use the priority level as a tie breaker during leveling, include
Project Leveling Priority under Leveling Priorities in the Level
Resources dialog box.
95
Dates The Dates tab enables you to edit schedule information for the
selected project. This information includes the current data date,
planned start date, and the scheduled finish date. If you have an EPS
node selected, you can also enter the dates you anticipate the node will
start and finish.
The latest early finish date calculated
when the project was last scheduled
A date constraint
placed on the
project end date
The user-defined date

the project is expected
to start or finish
The start date of the

project
The date used as the
starting point to calculate
the schedule
The actual finish date of the project, if

the project has finishedall activities in
the project have actual finish dates.
Anticipated Dates
Anticipated start and finish dates are used during the project planning
stage, and can be set at the EPS, project, or WBS level. If the selected
project has no activities, or the activities have not started, the Start date
or Finish date (in columns) is set equal to the Anticipated Start or
Anticipated Finish. Click the Browse button to select a new date.
96
Notebook The Notebook tab enables you to assign notebook topics

and details to the selected node or project. These topics are defined in
the Notebook Topics tab of the Admin Categories dialog box.
Click to add a topic,

select a topic in the
Assign Notebook Topic
dialog box, then click
Assign.
Click in this area to type a

description of the selected topic.
For free-form, user-defined details, you can use HTML

editing features, which include formatting text, inserting
pictures, copying and pasting information from other
document files (while retaining formatting), and adding
hyperlinks.
Project codes The Codes tab enables you to assign project code
values to the selected project. You must first add project codes and
values (choose Enterprise, Project Codes).
To sort the display, click

the applicable column
label.
97
Default values The Defaults tab enables you to specify the default
settings for the selected project. This information includes the default
cost account for resource assignments to activities, the defaults for
automatic activity numbering, and the default activity calendar, duration
type, and percent complete type.
If you change the default calendar,
the module applies the default
calendar only to new activities.
The default duration,
percent complete, and
activity types for
activities in the project.
Changing these
settings does not affect
existing activities.
Mark to automatically
number new activities
one increment greater
than the selected
activity, when adding
manually.
The default cost account

for resource assignments
to activities and project
expenses in the project
New activity IDs are numbered

according to this increment.
Auto-Numbering Activity IDs

When a new activity is created, the activity ID is automatically
generated using auto-numbering. Activity ID auto-numbering
concatenates the prefix and the suffix, with the suffix incremented to
make the ID unique. For example, A (prefix), 1000 (suffix), 10
(increment) yields activity IDs of A1010, A1020, A1030, and so
on. If you change the activity ID prefix, suffix, or increment, the change
applies to new activities only.
Resources The Resources tab enables you to specify project level

resource permissions for the Timesheets application. Permissions
include allowing resources to assign themselves to activities and to
report their activities and assignments as completed. You can also
specify whether resources enter remaining units or activity completion
percentages for their assigned activities and whether to allow the dates
of new resource assignments to be independent of the activity or to
allow new assignments to force a recalculation of activity dates and
duration.
98
This setting is used to calculate the cost for activities that

have labor/nonlabor units with no assigned resources/
roles or resources/roles that do not have prices.
Mark to allow new resource/role assignments to

determine the dates and durations of the activity.
Marking the Drive Activity Dates by Default checkbox simply

flags the corresponding resource in the RBSif you
customize columns in the Resources window to include the
Drive Activity Dates editable column, a checkmark will
appear in that column for the corresponding resources.
Settings The Settings tab enables you to view and specify

summarization information and project-level settings for the selected
project.
Mark to maintain only

summarized data for
the project.
99
The month the projects

fiscal year begins. You can
select a new month.
Maximum WBS level the

project data can be stored
to in the database for
summarization. This
summarize level impacts
the data shown in P6
Web Access when
viewing summary, rather
than live, data.
Choose to identify all activities

that have an early finish equal
to the latest calculated early
finish for the project with driving
relationships traced to the
project start date.
The maximum float time for

activities in the project
before they are marked
critical. You can type a new
number and timeperiod.
Marking the Contains Summarized Data Only checkbox

enables an organization to maintain summary-level data for
projects managed externally from the Project Management
module.
Calculations The Calculations tab enables you to set activity and

resource/role assignment preferences for the selected project.
In the Resource Assignments area, for the setting When Updating
Actual Units or Cost, to calculate a new At Complete as the sum of the
actual and remaining units or costs (At Complete = Actual units/costs +
Remaining units/costs), choose Add Actual to Remaining. Actual units
and costs are normally calculated using this option. To calculate the
remaining units or costs as the difference between the At Complete and
actual units or costs (Remaining units/costs = At Complete units/costs
Actual units/costs), choose Subtract Actual from At Completion.
100
This setting is used to calculate the cost for

activities that have labor/nonlabor/material
units with no assigned resources/roles or
resources/roles that do not have prices.
Mark to base percent
complete on activity steps
when using the physical
percent complete type.
Mark to update the

Planned unit/cost values,
and finish dates, when the
Remaining or At
Completion values are
changed on activities that
have not started. Then,
choose how to calculate
the duration and units
when progress is removed
from an activity.
Refer to the Help for further

information about the
calculation settings.
Choose to determine the true At

Complete units/costs.
Choose to track the amount
remaining before you exceed the
budget.
Mark to recalculate actual or actual

this period units and costs when one
of these values is updated. This
option must be selected to store
period performance.
Mark the Recalculate Actual Units and Cost when Duration% Complete
Changes checkbox to automatically update the actual units and costs
when the Duration% complete is updated. If this checkbox is cleared,
the module does not estimate actuals, and the actual fields remain blank
unless you specify values.
If you use timesheets or Apply Actuals to update or apply
actuals, you can still select the Recalculate Actual Units and
Cost when Duration % Complete Changes option; however,
when you apply actuals, the module overwrites existing
actuals values that were recalculated based on this setting.
You must have the project privilege Edit Project Details

except Financials to edit this setting. You can check the
project privileges in Admin, Security Profiles.
To recalculate units when costs are updated for resource assignments,

mark the Update Units when Costs Change on Resource Assignments
checkbox.
101
Mark the Link Actual and Actual This Period Units and Cost checkbox
if you intend to store past period actuals using the Store Period
Performance feature. If this option is not selected, you cannot store
period performance or edit past period actuals.
103
Setting Up the Organizational

Breakdown Structure
In this chapter:
The Enterprise OBS
Viewing an OBS
Setting Up an OBS
Editing OBS Elements
An organizational breakdown structure

(OBS) is a hierarchical arrangement of a
projects management structure. User access
and privileges to nodes and projects within
the enterprise project structure (EPS) are
implemented via responsible managers,
defined in an enterprise-wide OBS hierarchy.
An OBS is not the same as a resource pool.
While resources are assigned to activities,
OBS elements are associated with EPS
nodes and projects. The OBS element
corresponding to an EPS node is the project
manager responsible for all work included in
that branch of the hierarchy. In this way, an
OBS supports larger projects that involve
several project managers with different areas
of responsibility.
Read this chapter to learn how to set up an
OBS and associate its elements with the
EPS.
104
The Enterprise OBS

The organizational breakdown structure (OBS) is a global hierarchy that
represents the managers responsible for the projects in your enterprise.
The OBS usually reflects the management structure of your
organization, from top-level personnel down through the various levels
constituting your business. You can associate the responsible managers
with their areas of the EPS either nodes or individual projects. When
you associate a responsible manager with an EPS node, any projects you
add to that branch of the EPS are assigned that manager element by
default. The OBS hierarchy is also used to grant users specific access
privileges to projects and the WBS levels within projects.
Click the Display Options bar,

then Filter By, Current EPS/
Projects to view only the OBS
elements assigned to the
open projects.
You may want to create your OBS to match each EPS node and project
set up in the EPS. You can initially match OBS names to the EPS node
and project names. For example, for the Corporate (Corporate IT) node,
name the OBS element, Corporate IT Manager.
about setting up security,
see the Administrators
Guide.
Assign users, by their login names, to the OBS elements to grant access
to the corresponding EPS nodes or projects. The type of access granted
to a user is determined by the project security profile assigned to the
user. Security profiles are set up on the Security Profiles dialog box
(choose Admin, Security Profiles) and then assigned to users on the
Users dialog box (choose Admin, Users).
Setting Up the Organizational Breakdown Structure
105
This user will have project

manager rights for the OBS
element to which he or she
is assigned.
Enterprise OBS nodes Creating an EPS node or a project in the

Projects window automatically creates and associates an OBS node as
the responsible manager.
106
The module automatically

associates the OBS assigned
to the EPS node in which the
new project is added.
The OBS can mirror the EPS at the node and project level, or include
additional OBS levels to accommodate your management organization.
For example, you may want to specify team leaders as the responsible
managers for the WBS levels of a project, and the project manager
above the team leaders in the OBS as the responsible manager of the
project. In this way, you can delineate appropriate access and security
measures at various levels of the EPS while maintaining an OBS that
accurately reflects your organization chart.
An OBS can have only one root element.

about producing OBS and
other standard reports, see
Customizing Reports on
page 473.
You can also produce reports based on your OBS; several standard OBS
reports are included with the sample projects.
107
Viewing an OBS
You can view an OBS in two ways: as a chart or a table. Choose
Enterprise, OBS, to open the Organizational Breakdown Structure
dialog box.
View the OBS chart Click the Display Options bar, then choose
Chart View. To change the information included in the chart and the way
it is displayed, click the Display Options bar and choose Chart Box
Template, Customize.
108
This chart shows the OBS

name and associated users
for each OBS element;
choose Chart Box Template,
Customize to edit the
information shown in the
boxes and the box height and
width.
OBS Details are hidden so

that more of the chart is
visible.
View the OBS table Click the Display Options bar, then choose
Table View.
Click the OBS Name

column once to view the
OBS hierarchy; click it
again to list and sort OBS
elements.
109
Setting Up an OBS
Use the Organizational Breakdown Structure dialog box to create, view,
and edit the global OBS. You can also use this dialog box to view a list
of users who can access an OBS elements global and project
information, and to see how people are assigned across the enterprise of
projects.
about establishing EPS
nodes, see Setting Up the
Enterprise Project
Structure on page 67.
Create an OBS A root OBS node is automatically assigned to the

root EPS node so that a default OBS element can be assigned to each
project you add to the EPS root. When you use the Enterprise Project
Structure dialog box to set up the EPS nodes that make up the
foundation of the EPS, you can use the existing root EPS as the default
for each node, or you can set up the OBS before you build the EPS. You
can then assign actual responsible managers when you create EPS
nodes. Once your basic OBS is in place, you can include additional OBS
elements to provide access to specific EPS nodes, projects, and WBS
elements, to users not included with the original enterprise OBS node.
Choose Enterprise, OBS. Select the OBS element immediately above
and of the same hierarchy level as the element you want to add, then
click Add.
Click the OBS Name

column to display the OBS
hierarchy, as indicated by
this symbol.
The module inserts the new
OBS element at the same
level as the selected
element.
Type a meaningful name for

the new OBS.
110
Click in the OBS Description area on the General tab to type a

description of the OBS element. You can use HTML editing features,
which include formatting text, inserting pictures, copying and pasting
information from other document files (while retaining formatting), and
adding hyperlinks.
For details on establishing
users and profiles, see the
View users associated with OBS elements Click the Users tab
in the Organizational Breakdown Structure dialog box to view the users
and corresponding security profiles associated with an OBS element.
You can also assign users from this tab, if you have appropriate access
rights.
The user associated with the selected OBS at

that particular level of the hierarchy.
111
View a responsibility list Click the Responsibility tab to quickly

see where responsible managers (OBS elements) are assigned across the
enterprise. Select the OBS name for whom you want to see assignments.
Assignments for the

selected manager are
shown by WBS level
across the EPS.
112
Editing OBS Elements

You can edit an OBS in several ways. You can change an existing OBS
elements position and information, you can add an OBS element
(described earlier), and you can delete an OBS element.
Edit an OBS element Choose Enterprise, OBS. Click the OBS
Name column label to display the OBS hierarchy. An outline symbol
( ) in the OBS Name column label indicates a hierarchy display. Select
the OBS element you want to edit. To change the elements information,
click the General tab and enter new information. To change the
elements position in the OBS, click the appropriate arrow buttons.
The Scheduling Manager

OBS element is moved to the
right using the right-arrow
button, to make it an element
of the Project Coordinator
OBS.
113
Delete an OBS element Choose Enterprise, OBS. Click the OBS

Name column label to display the OBS hierarchy. Select the OBS
element you want to delete, then click Del/Merge. If the OBS element
you want to delete has WBS, issue, threshold, risk, or any other data
item assignments, you are prompted to merge the element with its
higher-level OBS element. Click Yes, then click Yes again.
If you delete a higher-level OBS element, the module deletes
all of the elements contained in that element.
115

In this chapter:
Resources Overview
Viewing and Adding Resources
Defining Resource Shifts
Defining and Assigning Resource
Codes and Values
Setting Up Roles
Assigning Roles to Resources
Defining Custom Resource
Curves
Resources include the personnel and equipment

that perform work on activities across all
projects. Labor and nonlabor resources, such as
engineers and equipment, are always time-based
and are usually assigned to other activities and/or
projects; material resources, such as supplies and
other consumable items, are recorded in terms of
cost per unit, rather than hours.
You can create a resource hierarchy that reflects
your organizations resource structure and
supports the assignment of resources to
activities. You can establish unlimited
hierarchical resource codes for grouping and
rollups.
In addition, you can set up roles with specific
skill sets and use them as resource assignments
until specific resources can be assigned. This
enables you to schedule and plan costs by role at
the project planning stage. You can also assign
resource calendars and define contact
information, and define the price over time for
resources and roles. This chapter describes
resources, roles, and resource codes.
116
Resources Overview
You can develop a resource plan that integrates resources, costs, and the
schedule so you can effectively control your projects. Begin by defining
a list of all the resources necessary to complete the projects included in
your enterprise project structure (EPS). For each resource, set
availability limits, unit prices, and a calendar to define its standard
worktime and nonworktime. Define shifts and apply one or more of the
shifts to the resources to whom they apply. Group the resources by
broad categories so you can easily find a specific resource when
assigning resources to a project.
To enable grouping and rollups of your resources across the enterprise,
set up resource codes and assign code values. Use this information to
produce resource reports and profiles. Analyze the resource allocation,
and adjust your project plan to avoid overallocation and peaks and
valleys of resource use.
Resources are different than expenses. While some resources are timebased and generally extend across multiple activities and projects,
expenses are one-time expenditures for nonreusable items required by
activities.
Roles If you are in the planning stage of your project or want to see
how certain resource assignments will affect the schedule, you can
assign roles as temporary placeholders for resource assignments. Roles
are project personnel job titles or skills. They represent a type of
resource with a certain level of proficiencyrather than a specific
individual. Roles can also be assigned to specific resources to further
identify that resources skills.
assigning resources to
activities, see Working
with Activities on
page 211.
Primary resources An activitys primary resource is typically the

resource who is responsible for coordinating an activitys work. The
primary resource updates the activitys start date, finish date, and
expected end date. In addition, if an activity has any material resources,
the primary resource may be responsible for reporting the material
resources hours/units.
Primary resources are also responsible for editing the physical percent
complete when weighted steps are linked to activity percent complete
for the corresponding activities in a selected project.
117
Viewing and Adding Resources

Use the Resources window to view and add the resources required to
complete all projects across the enterprise. Structure the hierarchy of
resources according to the work performed. For example, you may have
various teams comprised of individuals in several resource groups in the
enterprise. You can set up the hierarchy so that the people managing
these groups are at a higher level than the resources in the groups.
You can set up multiple root, or top-level, elements in a resource
breakdown structure (RBS). A root RBS element serves as the lead
person (such as a manager), instead of a division or a department. For
this reason, you cannot roll up lower-level resources to the root
resource.
You can also open the
Resources window at the
global levelwithout any
projects open.
Team leaders, project managers, and resource managers in charge of

teams or groups in the enterprise should jointly establish the resource
hierarchy. The program manager and/or project controls coordinator
may need to participate in this process to make sure resources are
distributed consistently based on availability.
118
View resources Choose Enterprise, Resources, or click Resources on

the Home workspace. Click the Display Options bar, then choose one of
the following:
To change the resource
display from hierarchy to
list view, click the Resource
ID column label. A triangle
symbol in this column label
indicates a list display. You
can sort resource
information in a list display
by clicking a column label.
To view detailed information about a specific resource, choose

Details, then select the resource whose information you want to
view.
To view resources as a chart, choose Chart View.
To select the columns to include in the display, choose Columns,

Customize, or one of the predefined column displays.
To select the resources to display, choose Filter By, then choose All
Active Resources, All Resources, or Current Projects Resources.
To organize the resource hierarchy, choose Group and Sort By, and
choose one of the predefined groupings or customize your own.
If resource security is enabled, the module only displays the
resources you have access rights to view. Refer to the
Primavera Administrators Guide for more information.
Add a resource Choose Enterprise, Resources. Click the Display

Options bar, then choose Group and Sort By, Default, to display the
resource hierarchy. Select the resource immediately above and at the
same level as the resource you want to add, then click Add. Depending
on your user preferences, the New Resource wizard may be started. The
wizard prompts you to add the information included on each tab in
Resource Details. If you do not use the wizard, this information can also
be entered directly on each tab. To display Resource Details, click the
Display Options bar, then choose Details.
Refer to this section to establish basic resource information. To specify
additional information, refer to the following sections later in this
chapter:
Codes Defining and Assigning Resource Codes and Values on

page 125
Roles Setting Up Roles on page 128 and Assigning Roles to

Resources on page 133
119
Use Resource Details to

add, view, and edit detailed
information about a new or
selected resource.
Click the left/right arrows to indent or

outdent a selected resource to denote its position in
the hierarchy; click the up/down arrows to move a
selected resource up or down in the hierarchy.
General information Use the General tab to enter general

information about the selected resource, including the resources ID,
name, title, employee ID, e-mail address, office phone numbers, and
status.
The employee identifier

corresponding to the
resource, such as social
security number, used
for the employee in your
company
If the resource is associated with a user in
the Timesheets module, this field will
correspond to the E-Mail Address on the
Contact tab of the Users dialog box.
If this checkbox is marked, the

resource is available for assignment;
if cleared, it indicates an inactive
status or unavailability.
120
Details Use the Details tab to specify a resources labor

classificationlabor (personnel), nonlabor (equipment), or material
(supplies), indicate whether a resource can log overtime hours, assign a
calendar to the selected resource, specify the resources default units/
time, specify how actual and remaining units are applied for a resources
assignments, and indicate that any assignments for a resource will have
its quantities recalculated whenever any cost changes occur.
The module uses your calendar assignments for activity scheduling,
tracking, and resource leveling; you can select a global calendar or a
resource calendar for the resource.
The minimum amount of

time a resource is available
to work on an activity
You can select a unit of

measure name and
abbreviation for the
material resource.
By default, displays the
view currency selected in
User Preferences when
the resource was added;
you can select a different
currency to associate with
the resource.
Mark to enable the labor
or nonlabor resource to
record overtime hours for
activities in the
Timesheets module.
Type the number by which the resources
standard price should be multiplied to
determine the resources overtime price
(standard price * overtime factor =
overtime price).
Mark to automatically calculate the

selected resources actual quantity of
work according to project plan rather
than reported hours in the
Timesheets module; clear if you are
using the Timesheets module to
update actuals.
Mark to indicate that any new
assignments for this resource will
have its costs recalculated
whenever any quantity changes
occur, such as changing the
estimate to complete for an activity.
121
Default Units/Time
You can enter the default units/time value as a numeric value followed
by a forward slash (/) and the appropriate time duration, depending on
your user preference setting for time units, or as a percentage for labor
and nonlabor resources. For example, if the selected resource is one
person, a reasonable value may be eight hours (units) per day (duration).
In this case, the Default Units/Time would be 8.00h/d, or eight hours of
work per day. If you are entering a percentage, you would enter 100%
indicating that the resource is available to work full-time. Similarly, if
the selected resource is a department with five people, the Max Units/
Time may be 40.00h/d, or 500%. This means that five people can
perform 40 hours of work per day, rather than one person performing 8
hours of work per day. The module uses this value in conjunction with
the calendar assignment to calculate resource allocation/distribution
during scheduling and leveling.
Marking the Calculate Costs From Units checkbox simply

flags the corresponding resource in the RBSif you
customize columns in the Resources window to include the
Calculate Costs From Units column, a checkmark will
appear in that column for the corresponding resources. The
actual setting to perform a recalculation of resource
quantities is on the Calculations tab of Project Details.
Units and prices Use the Units & Prices tab to specify available
quantities (limits) for the resource. Setting limits helps you quickly
identify areas of resource overload in Resource Usage Profiles using
different colors to represent limits and overallocated units in histograms.
The module automatically adjusts the resources costs for its assigned
activities to reflect price changes for different timeperiods.
122
Select the resources shift calendar and type the applicable

shift number for which you are setting limits, if the shift
calendar has more than one shift. See the Defining Resource
Shifts section for information about defining shifts.
You can set varying limits

and prices over time by
specifying the effective start
date for each change.
Double-click the cell, then type

the resources price followed by
a forward slash (/) and the unit
associated with the price.
The number of units available during each workperiod

(hour, day, week, or month) of the specified timeframe;
you can enter a percentage, or a numeric value followed
by a forward slash (/) and the appropriate time duration,
depending on your user preference setting for time units.
To level resources, you must set availability limits (Max Units/

Time).
You can rename the five available Price/Unit fields in Admin

Preferences, Rate Types tab.
Using Limits for Delayed Resource Start

Use limits to delay the start of a resource in the project schedule until
the resource is available. For example, suppose you hire a new engineer,
Joe, but he does not start for another month. You can add Joes activities
and assignments to the project and then set the resource limits as
follows:
Effective Date
Max Units/Time
10AUG01
0h/h
10SEP01
1h/h
123
Notes Use the Notes tab to enter comments about the resource. You
can use HTML editing features, which include formatting text, inserting
pictures, copying and pasting information from other document files
(while retaining formatting), and adding hyperlinks.

about configuring
resources for use with the
Timesheets module, see
Timesheets Use the Timesheets tab to specify the selected resources

timesheet login name and whether the resource uses timesheets to
record hours for assigned activities. You must first set up login names in
the Users dialog box. Choose Admin, Users, then click the General tab.
Click the Browse button to select

a login name for Timesheets.
Click to access the Users dialog

box, where you can specify a
different login name and password.
Mark if the resource uses

timesheets to record time
spent on his or her activities.
Click the Browse button to select

the resources timesheet
approval manager.
124
Defining Resource Shifts

You can globally define shifts that span specific work hours over a
certain period of time and apply one or more shifts directly to the
resources to whom they apply. The module considers the shift hours
when calculating units and prices during leveling. The resource calendar
is used to determine when the resource can work, and the limits for that
period are determined from the shift definition on that resource.
Define resource shifts Choose Enterprise, Resource Shifts. Click
Add, then type the new shifts name. To edit the new shift, click Modify.
The total shift hours must add

up to 24 hours, and each shift
must have a duration of at least
one hour.
The start hour must begin and

end on the hour, for example,
8:00 rather than 8:30.
Choose Enterprise, Resources to assign the resource shifts to resources

in the Resources Window, Units & Prices tab.
125
Defining and Assigning Resource Codes and Values

Resource codes provide another way to categorize project resources. For
example, establish a code called Classification, and create values for it,
for example, Management and Engineering. Assign these values to the
appropriate resources so you can quickly group, filter, or sort by all
managers or all resources on the engineering team.
Set up resource codes Choose Enterprise, Resource Codes. Click
Modify to add resource code definitionsbroad categories for which
you will be adding values. Type the resource code name and enter the
maximum number of characters for each value you will be assigning to
the code. Click Close when you are finished adding codes and value
lengths.
Add resource code values In the Resource Codes dialog box,

select the code for which you want to establish values, then click Add.
Type the resource code value name; the maximum number of characters
is preset at the resource code level. Type a description for the value. To
create a hierarchy of code values, click the right arrow key to indent the
selected value one level.
126
You can further categorize

code values by arranging
them in a hierarchy.
Assign resource code values You can assign code values to

resources using the Codes tab in Resource Details or by creating
resource code columns in the Resources window and then assigning
values in the columns. To use the Codes tab, click the Display Options
bar and choose Details (the box next to the Details command should be
marked). Click the Codes tab, then click Assign. To use columns, click
the Display Options bar, then choose Columns, Customize, and add one
or more resource code columns. Refer to the following example:
Customize columns to
include the resource
codes for which you want
to assign values; click in
the column cell for each
resource to select the
resource code value
assignment...
or
click Assign to select the
resource code value for
the selected resource
127
Group and summarize using resource codes One way to use

resource codes is for grouping and sorting in Resource Usage
Spreadsheets. Right-click in a Resource Usage Spreadsheet layout and
choose Group and Sort By, Customize. Grouping by resource codes
enables you to quickly see the activities that are assigned to a particular
area of responsibility or are being performed by a specific group
throughout your enterprise. Click a group band to see a summary or
rollup of a particular group.
This section lists the activity assignments
for selected resources or roles.
This section is grouped

by resource code.
128
Setting Up Roles
Roles are project personnel job titles or skills, for example, project
planner, quality assurance tester, and engineer. You can create a standard
set of roles that you can assign to labor and nonlabor resources and
activities in all projects in the enterprise. You can establish an unlimited
number of roles and organize them in a hierarchy for easier management
and assignment. The set of roles you assign to an activity defines the
activitys skill requirements. You can also define multiple price per unit
rates and unit/time limits for each role to accurately plan future costs
and allocation.
Assign roles to activities as you would resources during project
schedule and cost planning. When your plans are finalized, you can
replace roles with resources, based on each activitys role and skill
requirements.
View roles Choose Enterprise, Roles, then click the Display Options
bar.
To view only those roles that have assignments in the open project,
choose Filter By, Current Projects Roles.
To view all roles, choose Filter By, All Roles.
129
View roles for a specific resource Choose Enterprise, Resources.

Select the resource whose roles you want to view. Display Resource
Details by clicking the Display Options bar and choosing Details. Click
the Roles tab.
Add a role Choose Enterprise, Roles. Select the role immediately

above and at the same level as the role you want to add, then click Add.
Type the roles ID and name. To create a hierarchy of roles, click the
right arrow key to indent the selected role one level. For example, you
may want to list specific roles included under Project Manager, such as
Design Manager.
Type a description of the roles responsibilities. You can use HTML
editing features, which include formatting text, inserting pictures,
copying and pasting information from other documents (while retaining
formatting), and adding hyperlinks.
130
Replace the highlighted

text with the ID and name
of the new role.
Click the up/down arrows to move a role up or down in the list;

click the left/right arrows to change a roles hierarchy level.

assigning roles to
activities, refer to
Assigning Resources and
Roles on page 230.
Add rates to a role You can add up to five price per unit rates for
each role in the roles dictionary. When you assign a role to an activity
during project planning, you can choose which rate you want to use to
calculate cost. Defining rates for specific roles yields more accurate
project cost planning results.
To add rates to a role choose Enterprise, Roles. If tabs are not displayed
in the Roles dialog box, click the Display Options bar and choose Roles
Details. Select the role you want to assign rates to, then click the Prices
tab. Enter up to five Price/Unit rates for the selected role.
For example, if the price per unit is $25/hour, enter 25h; if the price per
unit is $50000/year, enter 50000y. You can only enter unit values in
minutes, hours, days, weeks, months, and years. Your system
administrator defines the abbreviations for these units in the Admin
Preferences, Time Periods tab.
131
Mark to indicate that any

new assignments for this
role will have its costs
recalculated whenever any
quantity changes occur,
such as changing the
estimate to complete for an
activity.
Enter the price and unit for the selected role. The
unit must be the same for each rate defined for a
specific role (e.g., you cannot mix hourly and weekly
time units for the same role). If multiple rates are
defined for a role and you change the unit for one
rate, the module changes the unit for all other
defined rates. If you enter a price but not a unit, the
default unit is hours.
Define role limits Use the Limits tab to specify available quantities
(limits) for a role. Setting limits helps you quickly identify areas of role
overload in Resource/Role Usage Profiles, using different colors to
represent limits and overallocated units in charts and histograms.
In P6 Web Access, you
can view role limits in all
charts and histograms that
display role data, such as
the Capacity Planning
chart (Portfolios section),
Role Usage histogram
(Resources section), and
Team Usage histogram
(Projects section).
By default, role limits are calculated based on the limit

defined for each roles primary resource, which may not
accurately reflect a roles planned allocation. In the Project
Management module, on the User Preferences, Resource
Analysis tab, you can choose to display role limits based on
the custom role limits you define in the Roles dictionary. In
P6 Web Access, you can set this same option in the Global
Preferences, Resource Staffing section.
132
To define role limits, choose Enterprise, Roles. If tabs are not displayed
in the Roles dialog box, click the Display Options bar and choose Roles
Details. Select the role you want to define limits for, then click the
Limits tab. Click Add at the bottom of the Roles dialog box. Doubleclick in the Effective Date column, then click the Browse button to
select the date the limit takes effect. In the Max Units/Time column,
enter the allocation limit for the role as a unit value or as a percentage,
depending on your user preference settings for resource units/time (User
Preferences, Time Units tab).
You can set

varying limits
over time by
specifying the
effective start
date for each
change. Each
effective date
must be
unique.
The number of
units available
during each
workperiod (hour,
day, week, or
month); you can
enter a
percentage, or a
numeric value
followed by a
forward slash (/)
and the
appropriate time
duration,
depending on
your user
preference setting
for time units.
133
Assigning Roles to Resources

The set of roles you assign to a resource describes the resources skill
capabilities. These role assignments make it easy to assign resources to
activities according to role. You can also assign roles to activities
directly when you are unsure of the actual resources available to work
on those activities. You can later replace the roles with the applicable
resources.
For information on
assigning resources to
activities by role, see
Working with Activities
on page 211.
You can assign roles to resources in two ways: from the Resource
Details window or from the Roles dialog box.
Assign roles to resources from the Resource Details
window Choose Enterprise, Resources, select the resource to which
you want to assign a role, click the Display Options bar, then choose
Details. Click the Roles tab, then click Assign.
Mark the checkbox for the role you want to use as the default
role, if there are more than one listed for the resource.
Displays resource roles

for the selected resource;
click the Role ID column
label to sort the display.
You can modify role names in

the Roles dialog box (choose
Enterprise, Roles).
You can analyze resource and skill

supply and demand using role and
proficiency usage profiles.
Assign roles to resources from the Roles dialog box Choose

Enterprise, Roles. Click the Display Options bar, then choose Roles
Details. Select the role you want to assign. Click the Resources tab, then
click Assign.
134
Select the resource to which

you want to assign the
selected role; click the
Assign button, then click the
Close button.
Double-click the displayed proficiency level, then select the appropriate

proficiency level.
135
Defining Custom Resource Curves

Resource/cost distribution curves enable you to specify how you want
resource units or costs spread over the duration of an activity. Resource
units and costs are distributed evenly during an activity unless you
specify nonlinear distribution using curves. The Resource Usage Profile
and Resource Usage Spreadsheet reflect resource curves. Resource
curves are not used when leveling.
If some of your activities
require unique future
period allocations because
planned work cannot be
accurately distributed
using custom resource
curves, you can manually
enter future period planned
and remaining units values
for assignments in the
Resource Usage
Spreadsheet (Resource
Assignments and Activities
windows). Refer to
Manually Planning Future
Period Assignments on
page 235 for more
information.
The module contains a set of pre-defined resource curves you can assign
to resource/role assignments. When the pre-defined resources curves do
not accurately capture how units should be spread for some of your
projects activities, you can create global custom resource curves. If
many activities require resource/role units to be spread using the same
distribution curve, you can define the custom curve and assign it to the
necessary resource/role assignments.
For instructions on
assigning resource curves
to resource and role
assignments, see
Assigning Resource
Curves to Resource or Role
Assignments on page 234.
Add a custom resource curve Choose Enterprise, Resource

Curves. Click Add. Select an existing curve from which to copy the
curve value percentages, then click Select. Type a name for the new
resource curve.
If timesheet data exists for the actuals, curves are ignored for the actuals
and are spread using the timesheet data. Activities with timesheet data
continue to spread the remaining units using the curve. To use curves to
calculate the Actual Units/Cost and EV Units/Costs, mark the
Recalculate Actual Units and Costs when duration % complete changes
checkbox in the Calculations tab in Project Details.
Resource curves do not support expenses. The Accrual
Type field will continue to spread the expenses.
136
You can type

up to 60
alphanumeric
characters for
the new
resource curve
name.
Click Modify to define the curves distribution. Edit the curve value
percentages to create a curve that indicates how your costs/units should
distribute over time. Curves are defined by 21 points (at 5% intervals
from 0 to 100). Click Prorate to make the total of the distribution values
equal to 100% while maintaining the shape you specified. Click OK,
then Close.
137
Resource lag is taken into consideration. The curve should

begin on the lagged start date.
Delete a custom resource curve Choose Enterprise, Resource

Curves. Select the global curve you want to delete. Click Delete, then
click Yes.
You cannot delete the default curves. If you delete a
resource curve assigned to a resource or role assignment,
the curve is removed from the assignment, and earned
value for those assignments is recalculated.
139
Reviewing Work Breakdown

Structures
In this chapter:
The Enterprise WBS
Viewing a WBS
Grouping by WBS Path
Adding WBS Elements and
Assigning Properties
Using WBS Milestones
Assigning WBS Category Values
Defining Earned Value Settings
for Specific WBS Elements
Assigning Estimation Weights to
WBS Elements
A work breakdown structure (WBS) is a

hierarchical arrangement of the products and
services produced during and by a project.
The project is the highest level of the WBS
while an individual activity required to
create a product or service is the lowest level.
Each project in the enterprise project
structure (EPS) has its own WBS.
When creating a project, the project manager
typically develops the WBS first, assigns
work products and documents to each WBS
element, and then defines activities for
performing the elements work. Specific
earned value calculations can be specified
for each WBS element, along with an
organizational breakdown structure (OBS)
element responsible for all work included in
the WBS element.
Read this chapter to learn how to set up and
implement a WBS.
140
The Enterprise WBS

The enterprise work breakdown structure (WBS) consists of the WBS
for each project included in the enterprise project structure (EPS), in
effect, extending the EPS beyond the project level. You can view the
entire WBS at once, or you can display only the work breakdown
structures for a specific node or project. Open the EPS element whose
WBS you want to view, then choose Project, WBS.
When you create a project,

the module automatically
creates a WBS element at the
same hierarchy level and with
the same name as the
project; you can differentiate
the WBS level from that of the
project by adding numbers or
letters such as Bldg.1,
Bldg.D&E.
You can break down the work
further, essentially extending
the EPS to another level.
Planning and budgeting You can set anticipated dates, budgets,

and spending plans at a high level in a WBS to indicate when the work
should occur and how much its planned budget and monthly spending
will cost. Because financial information is shared between projects and
their WBS elements, you can use the pre-established budget amounts
and funding information you set for WBS elements immediately for
their project and activity counterparts.
141
The budget
and spending
plan can stand
alone to
represent
financial data
for the WBS
level.
You can also summarize project data to a specific WBS level when
calculating and maintaining summary data.
Project Details
The WBS levels to which you

want to summarize data for
viewing in P6 Web Access.
You can also use the WBS at the planning stage of a project for topdown estimations and summary rollups of data not yet associated with
projects. For example, you can create a WBS for a higher-level node of
the EPS and include summary data, planned budgets, and dates,
independent of any project.
142
Viewing a WBS
You can view a WBS as a chart or a table. Open the Work Breakdown
Structure window by choosing Project, WBS; you can also click WBS
from the Directory bar or from the Home workspace.
View the Work Breakdown Structure chart Click the Display
Options bar, then choose Show on Top, Chart View. To change the
displayed information, click the Display Options bar and choose Chart
Box Template, then an information type.
To change the displays

content and appearance,
click the Display Options bar,
then choose Chart Box
Template and/or Chart Font
and Colors.
View the Work Breakdown Structure table Click the Display

Options bar, then choose Show on Top, WBS Table. To list and sort
WBS elements, click the WBS Code column label. To change the
information the table displays, click the Display Options bar, then
choose any of the following:
To view detailed information about a specific WBS element, choose

Show on Bottom, WBS Details, then select the WBS element
whose information you want to view. To hide WBS Details, choose
Show on Bottom, No Bottom Layout.
To change the columns in the WBS display, choose Columns, then

one of the predefined displays, or customize the columns.
143
You can also choose to display a Gantt Chart to the right of the WBS
table. Click the Display Options bar, then choose Show on Top, Gantt
Chart.
Click the Display Options bar,
then choose Columns,
Customize, to select only the
columns you want to display.
This display is grouped

according to OBS
assignment.
144
Grouping by WBS Path

You can organize multiple projects that use the same work breakdown
structure (WBS) by grouping their identical WBS levels. The WBS path
lists activities grouped by WBS levels, without displaying the project
level node. Group by WBS path in the Activities and WBS windows.
You can also filter or display the WBS path as a column in projects and
reports. Further organize a layout by sorting to arrange the order of
activities. If you use both grouping and sorting to organize a layout, the
items are grouped first, then sorted.
Organize multiple projects

that follow the same work
breakdown structure path.
Group activities by WBS path Choose Project, Activities, then

choose View, Group and Sort. In the Group By section, click the cell,
then select WBS Path. Click Sort, then select a sort order for the WBS
path. Click OK. Click Sort, then select a sort order for the WBS path.
Click OK.
To view the WBS path in the WBS window, choose Project,
WBS, then View, Group and Sort by, WBS Path.
145
Adding WBS Elements and Assigning Properties

When you create projects, the module automatically creates a WBS toplevel element with the same name and EPS and project IDs as the
project. Use the Work Breakdown Structure window to view and edit the
open projects WBS.
Add a WBS element Choose Project, WBS. Select the WBS
element immediately above and under which you want to add the new
element, then click Add. The new WBS element is indented one level
under the selected WBS element.
Display Work Breakdown Structure Details by clicking the Display
Options bar and choosing Show on Bottom, WBS Details. Refer to the
following sections to establish basic WBS properties. To specify
additional information, refer to the following chapters:
To include/exclude tabs,
right-click in the Details
area, and choose
Customize WBS Details.
Notebook tab Setting Up the Enterprise Project Structure on

page 67
Budget Log, Spending Plan, and Budget Summary tabs Defining

Budgets on page 159
WBS Milestones Using WBS Milestones on page 149
WPs & Docs tab Maintaining a Projects Document Library on

page 375
Earned Value tab Defining Earned Value Settings for Specific

WBS Elements on page 152
146
Display Work Breakdown

Structure Details so you
can add and assign
information for each WBS
element you create.
General information Use the General tab to view and edit the
selected WBS elements general information. This includes the code,
name, status, and responsible manager.
The user-defined dates the project/activities associated with the
WBS element are expected to start and finish; used during the
project planning stage, and set at the WBS, EPS, or project level
Determines whether
Timesheets users have
access to activities within the
WBS. In general, only Active
status enables access.
However, a project level
option can be set to enable
read-only access when the
WBS status is Inactive.
You can also directly edit

some WBS information in
the Work Breakdown
Structure table. Doubleclick the information you
want to change, then type
or select the new value.
The name of the selected WBS

elements root OBS element
Edit a WBS element Select the WBS element you want to edit. To
change the elements position in the WBS, click the appropriate arrow
buttons at the bottom of the command bar on the right side of the Work
Breakdown Structure window. Display Work Breakdown Structure
Details by clicking the Display Options bar and choosing Show on
Bottom, WBS Details, then enter new information in the tabs.
147
Delete a WBS element Choose Project, WBS. Select the WBS

element you want to delete, then click Delete. If the WBS elements you
want to delete have activity assignments, you are prompted to delete the
WBS element and all of its activity assignments, or delete the WBS
element and reassign, or merge, all of its activity assignments to the
elements higher-level WBS element. Click OK, then click Yes.
If you delete a higher-level WBS element, the module also
deletes all elements contained in that element.
How a WBS Elements Status Affects

Timesheets Users
There are four status types for WBS elements: Planned, Active, Inactive,
and What-If.
Planned WBS elements If a WBS elements status is Planned,
Timesheets users cannot view any activities included in the WBS
element. This prevents Timesheets users from assigning themselves to
and performing work on activities assigned to a WBS element that is not
authorized for actual use.
Active WBS elements If a WBS elements status is Active,
Timesheets users can view all activities included in the WBS element.
Depending on their timesheet privileges, users may also be able to
assign themselves to and perform work on activities that are included in
an Active WBS element.
If a WBS element belongs to a higher-level WBS element, the element
has the same status as that element.
Inactive WBS elements If a WBS elements status is Inactive, a
project level setting on the Project Details Resources tab determines
whether Timesheets users can view activities that belong to the WBS.
When this option is turned on, Timesheets users can view, but can not
edit activities that are included in the Inactive WBS element.
148
What-If WBS elements If a WBS elements status is What-If,

Timesheets users cannot view any activities included in the WBS
element. This prevents Timesheets users from assigning themselves to
and performing work on activities assigned to a WBS element that is not
authorized for actual use.
If a WBS element belongs to a higher-level WBS element, both
elements have the same status.
149
Using WBS Milestones

In the initial stages of project planning, the project manager, and other
individuals responsible for establishing project processes, need to
decide how the module will calculate earned value, percent complete,
resource use, and financial data.
You can add an unlimited number of WBS milestones, which can also
be used to calculate earned value. Milestones are assigned at the WBS
level, and each milestone is given a weight that indicates its importance
to the project schedule. When you mark a WBS milestone as complete,
the module uses its weight to calculate the performance percent
complete of all activities included in the WBS level. That is, the
performance percent complete is applied to all activities under that
WBS level and then rolled back up to the WBS.
For example, suppose a particular level of the WBS includes ten
activities, and actual finish dates have been entered for five of these
activities. The same WBS level is also assigned four WBS milestones
having equal weights, but only one of these milestones is marked as
complete. The module uses the completed WBS milestone to calculate
the WBS levels performance percent complete as 25, even though half
the activities included in the WBS level are finished.
You may want to use WBS milestones when higher-level task
increments comprise a body of activities and you want to control the
activities at the WBS level. For example, to control the design of a new
product, you might assign WBS milestones to the major steps required
to complete the designsuch as drafting the requirements, writing the
design specifications, and so on. Each of these milestones would contain
the detailed activities required to complete it.
The first milestone is
complete, and the
corresponding
performance percent
complete, relative to the
other WBS milestones, is
shown.
150
If a WBS element has no activities beneath it, and you mark

milestones as complete, the performance percent complete
will remain zero. To calculate performance percent complete,
add a dummy activity to the WBS element.
Add WBS milestones Use the WBS Milestones tab to add an

unlimited number of WBS milestones to a WBS element. Click Add,
then type a name for the milestone and assign a weight for calculating
performance percent complete for all activities in the WBS element.
The module calculates this performance percent
complete, or earned value, based on the weighted
milestones you mark as Completed on this tab,
independent of the child activities corresponding to the
Type a number indicating the significance

of this milestone relative to the others
listed, and to calculate a corresponding
percent complete value when the
milestone is marked Completed.
When you mark the checkbox for a milestone, the module

calculates the performance percent complete for the WBS
element based on the milestones weight value in combination
with the other milestones listed.
How Weights Affect Percent Complete

If all weighted milestones for a WBS element have a value of 1.0 and
you have a total of four milestones, marking one as Completed would
indicate that the WBS element is twenty-five percent complete. If this
same milestone had a weight of 9.0, and the other three had 1.0 weights,
marking it Completed would indicate that the WBS element is seventyfive percent complete. The module uses the following formula to
calculate percent complete from weighted milestones:
Actual Weight of Completed Milestones / Total Possible Weight of All
Milestones
Applying this formula to the previous example, the completed milestone

has a weight of 9.0, and is divided by the total weight of all milestones
(12.0), to equal seventy-five percent complete.
151
Assigning WBS Category Values

Depending on your security profile, you can define a custom category
and category values for WBS elements. This category and its values are
not project-specific; you can assign category values to all WBS
elements in the EPS, which allows you to customize the module to
reflect your organizations terminology and unique requirements. This
category and its values also enables you to group, sort, and filter WBS
elements.
about defining a WBS
category and values, refer
to the Primavera
Establish a custom category and its values using the Admin Categories
dialog box. The Admin Categories dialog box appears when you choose
Admin, Admin Categories.
Assign a WBS category value Choose Project, WBS. Add the
WBS category as a column by clicking the Display Options bar and
choosing Columns, Customize. Select the WBS category name under
General in the Available Options area, then click the right arrow button
to move it to the Selected Options column; click OK. Select the WBS
element to which you want to assign a category value, then click the
Browse button in the WBS category column.
Select the value to

assign to the WBS
element, click the
Select button, then click
the Close button.
152
Defining Earned Value Settings for Specific WBS

Elements
Earned value is a technique for measuring project performance
according to both project costs and the schedule. This technique
compares the budgeted cost of the work to the actual cost. While earned
value analyses are typically performed for WBS elements, you can also
perform an earned value analysis for activities and groups of activities.
Use the Earned Value tab in Work Breakdown Structure Details to
specify settings for calculating the selected WBS elements earned
value. Earned Value cost is the portion of the budgeted total cost of the
activity that is actually completed as of the project data date; it is
calculated as
Earned Value = Budget At Completion (BAC) x Performance % Complete
The method for calculating the performance percent complete depends

on the earned-value technique selected for the activitys WBS.
To define default earned
value settings for all WBS
elements, choose Admin,
Admin Preferences, then
click the Earned Value tab.
Define earned value settings for a specific WBS element

Display Work Breakdown Structure Details by clicking the Display
Options bar and choosing Show on Bottom, WBS Details. Select the
WBS element whose earned value settings you want to define, then
click the Earned Value tab.
153
In the Technique for Computing Performance Percent Complete area,

choose the completion percentage method you want to use when
calculating an activitys earned value:

Future Period Bucket
planning, see Manually
Planning Future Period
Activity Percent Complete: Calculates earned value according to

current activity completion percentages and the percent complete
type selected on the General tab of Activity Details.
Use Resource Curves / Future Period Buckets: If you want to

override the Activity Percent Complete type for activities that have
a resource curve assigned to at least one of the resource
assignments, or for activities that have assignments with manuallydefined future period bucket values. If a curve is assigned, Units
Percent Complete is always multiplied by the Budget at Completion
to calculate Earned Value.
WBS Milestones Percent Complete: Calculates earned value

according to completion of the WBS elements weighted
milestones, rather than the completion percentages of the elements
activities.
0/100 Percent Complete: Calculates earned value as 100 percent

only after the activity ends. Until the activity is complete, the
activitys earned value is zero percent.
50/50 Percent Complete: Calculates earned value as 50 percent

after the activity starts and until the activity ends. After the activity
ends, the activitys earned value is 100 percent.
Custom Percent Complete: Calculates earned value as a

percentage you specify. This percentage applies after the activity
starts and until the activity ends. After the activity ends, the
activitys earned value is 100 percent.
In the Technique for Computing ETC area, choose the method you want
to use when calculating an activitys estimate to complete (ETC) value:
ETC = Remaining Cost for Activity: Calculates ETC values as

the remaining cost to complete an activity (ETC = remaining
duration of activity * applicable resource rates).
PF = 1: Calculates ETC values as Budget At Completion (BAC)

less Earned Value Cost. This method yields an optimistic result.
PF = 1/CPI: Calculates ETC values according to a Performance

Factor (PF) of 1 divided by the Cost Performance Index (CPI).This
method yields the most likely result.
154
PF = 1/(CPI*SPI): Calculates ETC values according to a PF of 1

divided by the product of the CPI and Schedule Performance Index
(SPI). This method yields a pessimistic result.
PF =: Calculates ETC values according to a PF you specify.
155
Assigning Estimation Weights to WBS Elements

You can assign estimation weights to work breakdown structure (WBS)
elements and activities to perform Top-down estimation. You can assign
estimation weights directly in the Project Management module or
import them from the Methodology Management module using Project
Architect.
using Top-down
Estimation, see
Performing Top-Down
Estimation on page 271.
The Project Management module uses the estimation weights to

calculate the number of units that each WBS element receives in
relation to its lower-level elements in the WBS hierarchy. For example,
if 1,000 days of labor are applied top down to three WBS elements with
estimation weights of 30, 30, and 40, then each WBS element receives
300 days, 300 days, and 400 days, respectively. Top-down estimation
weights are relative values between elements in the WBS hierarchy; the
absolute values of the estimation weights have no meaning.
Top-down estimation uses the WBS Estimated Weight field to
determine how to push down the units within each branch of the
WBS. The algorithm is:
WBS 1.1 Weight
WBS 1.1 Units = Sum of All WBS Weights at WBS Level x Est Units
where:
WBS 1.1 Weight = Weight of WBS 1.1
WBS 1.1 Units = Number of Units Allocated to WBS Element 1.1
Sum of All WBS Weights at WBS Level = Sum of Weight of All WBSs
at Same Level of Hierarchy as WBS 1.1
Est Units = Number of Estimated Units Distributed Among All WBSs at
WBS Level 1.N
For example, if you select a WBS with three, level-one WBS elements
beneath it, and each of those elements has a weight of 1 with an estimate
of 100 days, the module calculates each WBS as having 33.3 days, as
follows:
1
Units = 1 + 1 + 1 x 100d = 33.3d
Alternatively, if the weights for each WBS element vary, such as 6 for
one element and 2 each for the other two elements, the result is 60 days
for the first element, and 20 days each for the other two elements:
6
Units = 6 + 2 + 2 x 100d=60d
156
The algorithm continues to calculate any lower-level WBS elements in

the WBS branch to distribute the units accordingly. This process
continues until all WBS levels in the branch have been considered; it
then continues with the next branch in the hierarchy. The module
ignores any WBS element that does not have activity assignments when
distributing units within a branch of the WBS.
If an activity has multiple resources assigned, each resource will be
allocated remaining units in proportion to how many remaining units
each resource previously was assigned for that activity. For example, if
Resource 1 previously had six hours of remaining units on an activity
with remaining units of five days, and Resource 2 previously had four
hours of remaining units, Resource 1 will now have remaining units of
three days (24 hours) and Resource 2 will have remaining units of two
days (16 hours).
If an activity is completed, that activity is allocated zero
remaining units. If all activities under a WBS are completed,
zero units are distributed to that WBS.
Assign estimation weights to WBS elements Choose Project,

WBS. Click the Display Options bar, then choose Columns, Customize.
In the Est Weight column, enter the applicable weights for each element
listed.
157
You can also right-click to

select the columns to
display for entering data.
Type directly in the column

field for the WBS element to
enter its estimated weight.
Assign estimation weights to activities Choose Project,

Activities. Click the Display Options bar, then choose Columns. Add
the Est Weight column by selecting it in the Available Columns list and
clicking the right arrow. Click OK. Enter the applicable weights in the
Est Weight column for each activity listed.
Est Weight is located under

the General listing.
159
Defining Budgets
In this chapter:
Top-Down Budgeting
Establishing Budgets
Establishing a Monthly Spending
Plan
Tracking Budget Changes
Establishing Funding
Tracking and Analyzing Budgets
Budgets consist of the total estimated effort (or

quantities) necessary, and the cash flow required,
to complete a project. Before a project starts, the
resource/cost manager, along with the operations
executive, program manager, and project
manager, determine scope and budget
requirements, and set these estimates. As
requirements change, resource and financial
support are adjusted to compensate for those
changes. The individuals involved in project
funding and financial support can perform topdown estimating and log changes to the budget in
the project planning stage, or after the project is
underway. The module tracks these changes,
while retaining the original amounts.
Read this chapter to learn how to establish a
budget, note and implement changes to it, and
track monthly spending and variance at various
levels in your enterpriseenterprise project
structure (EPS) node, project, and work
breakdown structure (WBS).
160
Top-Down Budgeting
The ability to perform top-down planning is key to enterprise-wide
planning and control. If an organizations projects have a budget of $5
billion over the next two years, the details probably will not be worked
out until some period after the first project commences. The structure
used by a company to organize its projects must be flexible enough to
allow each project and group of projects to maintain its WBS and to
draw only against the resources normally allotted to it.
The module facilitates a top-down budgeting approach to cost
management. The resource/cost manager or other person responsible for
making decisions about project launches generally establishes highlevel budget estimates. These estimates are set at each EPS node. Project
managers distribute the budgets to the projects for which they are
responsible in each node, as shown in the following example.
Set original budget estimate at EPS node.
Assembly
Distribute original budget at the project level. Values

do not roll up, and distributed values do not have to
equal the budget of the higher-level EPS node.
$6,000,000
Auto
$4,000,000
Conv
$2,000,000
Corporate
FS-upg
Facilities
$1,500,000
$1,500,000
$3,000,000
Bldg
$2,500,000
Hydra-DE
$500,000
Once budget estimates are set at the EPS level, you can establish a
monthly spending plan to keep track of cash flow for each node and
project.
Defining Budgets
Assembly
161
$6,000,000
MAY03
$180,000
JUN03
$360,000
JUL03
$710,000
AUG03
$2,000,000
Spending plan at EPS node
AUTO
$4,000,000
$2,000,000
CONV
MAY03
$100,000
MAY03
$100,000
JUN03
$200,000
JUN03
$170,000
JUL03
$300,000
JUL03
$450,000
AUG03
$850,000
AUG03
$850,000
Spending plan at project level
With spending plans in place, you can compare the monthly totals for
the EPS node with those of all projects in the node, to ensure monthly
spending does not exceed your original budget estimates.
Spending Plan Spending Plan Tally
Variance
(Assembly) (AUTO+CONV)
MAY03
$180,000
$200,000
$20,000
JUN03
$360,000
$370,000
$10,000
JUL03
$710,000
$750,000
$40,000
AUG03
$2,000,000
$1,700,000
$300,000
Negative variance indicates

a need to reevaluate
planned spending during
these months.
If your projects use funding to support budgets, you can also set up a
Funding Source dictionary, which you can then use to quickly assign
specific funding sources to budget items as you develop projects.
When estimates are firmly established, resource/cost managers and team
leaders can set budget amounts and spending plans at the WBS levels
for which theyre responsible. Resources and budgets can then be
allocated at the activity level.
162
Once projects are underway, you can monitor budget changes using
change logs, and continue to track monthly spending as actual costs are
applied.
When your projects are complete, you can record and maintain the
benefit, or return on investment (ROI), of performing each project. This
value assists the operations executive in the strategic planning process
when undertaking future projects.
The remainder of this chapter discusses how to establish budgets,
spending plans, and funding, as well as how to track changes.
Defining Budgets
163
Establishing Budgets
You can establish budget estimates at the planning stage, then refine
them as projects progress. Document budget changes as they occur, and
then use these changes to calculate the latest budgeted amounts for the
project. You can also record monthly spending of budgeted funds, track
the current and undistributed variance amounts, and roll up the monthly
spending plan of each project in a branch to its higher EPS nodes.
Set up the total budget for each EPS node in the hierarchy first, then
enter the applicable portion of the total budgeted amount to each project
in the nodes branch. Once these initial total amounts are entered, you
can start apportioning anticipated monthly spending amounts per
project. The module then tallies the amounts for the projects so you can
keep track of the total spending plan and assess the variance between
this total and the current budget. This process is ongoing through the
project life cycle. Close to the completion of the project, you can better
determine profitability and enter the ROI. This amount can be used as a
gauge when determining whether a project of this type should be
undertaken in the future.
Display Project Details by
clicking the Display
Options bar and choosing
Show on Bottom, Project
Details.
Establish budgets Choose Enterprise, Projects, to open the Projects

window. (If you already set budget estimates for nodes and projects,
open the WBS window to enter budgets for the WBS levels in your
projects.) Click the Budget Log tab for the selected node/project (or
WBS element). Enter the total budgeted amount you anticipate for this
project in the Original Budget field.
164
Enter the total estimated

budget amount for the
selected EPS node or project.
After you have entered budgeted totals for a node and its projects, you
can start apportioning anticipated monthly spending amounts for each of
the projects in the branch. Read the next section for more information.
Defining Budgets
165
Establishing a Monthly Spending Plan

You can distribute the budget monthly for each EPS node and project to
create a spending plan. The Spending Plan tab also totals the spending
plans of lower levels of the EPS on a monthly basis so you can compare
how much you distributed at a high level to how much was actually
distributed at lower levels. In the following example, at the EPS node
level Assembly, the spending plan for 01MAY is $150,000. The
combined spending plans of Assemblys projects (AUTO and CONV) is
$160,000. Because this amount is $10,000 more than was planned, it
appears in red ($10,000) in the Undistributed Current Variance column.
Monthly spending plan of levels

beneath the EPS node selected
The difference between the EPS

nodes monthly spending and that
of its projects tallies.
Enter monthly spending amounts at the EPS level Click the

Spending Plan tab in the Projects window for a selected EPS node or
project. Enter total expenditures for each month in the Spending Plan
column. The Spending Plan Tally column shows any amounts
previously recorded for project spending plans.
166
You can also use the Spending Plan tab to establish a monthly benefit
plan. This plan helps you track the financial benefit of performing the
projects on a monthly basis. Enter the benefit amount, or profit return on
your monthly spending, in the Benefit Plan column. The module also
tallies the benefit plans for the combined project amounts in a selected
EPS node branch.
Defining Budgets
167
Tracking Budget Changes

As projects progress, changes in scope, resource reallocation, funding
additions/withdrawals, or other factors that affect original budgeted
amounts, often occur. The Budget Change Log enables you to track
modifications that affect the budget; this log also provides a clear
indication of the who, what, when, where, and how behind the change.
Change amounts are not incorporated in the current budget until these
amounts have an Approved status. Only authorized project participants
may issue budget changes and mark them as approved. You may post a
change amount as Pending; the program manager of the affected EPS
node, or the project manager of the affected project, must then mark the
amount as Approved or Not Approved. The module recalculates the new
budgeted amount and adjusts the current budget based on approved
changes to the log:
Proposed Budget = Original Budget + Approved Budget Changes + Pending
Budget Changes
Current Budget = Original Budget + Approved Budget Changes
168
Enter the budget. As the

project progresses, record
any changes.
The module calculates these fields based on the

original budget and approved and pending
budget changes.
Click the Budget Summary tab to track budget and spending totals as
projects progress and changes occur. The Budget Summary tab enables
you to see the current budget, distributed current budget, and benefit
plan totals for an overall picture of how your projects are doing
financially.
Current Budget Total Spending Plan
Total Spending Plan Total Spending Plan Tally
Defining Budgets
169
Establishing Funding
If you are working on government, capital, or other projects that are
traditionally funded by sources outside or within your organization, you
can set up a Funding Source dictionary, which you can then use to
quickly assign specific funding sources to budget items as you develop
projects.
You can apply unlimited
funding assignments to
each EPS and project
level.
Define funding sources Choose Enterprise, Funding Sources.

Select the funding source immediately above and at the same level as
the fund you want to add, then click Add. You can set up the Funding
Source dictionary as a hierarchy to categorize and group similar funds,
such as those affiliated with a particular agency.
Type any additional information about the fund in the Description area
using HTML editing features, which include formatting text, inserting
(while retaining formatting), and adding hyperlinks, then click Close.
To display your funding hierarchy as a chart, click the Display
Options bar and choose Chart View.
170
The funds you establish

are global, or available to
any EPS node or project in
your EPS hierarchy.
Use the arrows to change

the placement of a selected
fund in the hierarchy.
Specify your
funding source,
amount, and fund
share percentage at
the EPS or project
level.
The fund share value is the portion of the total funded amount
contributed by the funding source for the assignment. You can assign
the same funding source multiple times with varying monetary amounts
and share contributions for different levels of the EPS. You define both
the amount and share values for the fund. Funds do not roll up; you edit
them for each EPS level to allow for top-down planning. You can add a
Total Funding column in the Projects window to display the sum of the
funding for each project and EPS node.
Defining Budgets
171
The totals shown represent

the total funding amount for
a particular EPS node or
project; you can assign one
or more funds to each node
or project.
Set up fund contributions

individually to the applicable
EPS nodes and projects.
172
Tracking and Analyzing Budgets

The resource and cost spreadsheets provide an overall picture of unit
and cost budget distributions, along with the variance amounts resulting
from current use versus original estimates at the activity level. At the
EPS level, you can customize columns and produce reports to display
original budget amounts per project, along with the current variance
amounts. This is beneficial in the early stages of your projects when you
may not have all resources and estimates in place to cover the scope and
goals set forth by upper management.
Create a layout for budget and variance comparison Open the
Projects window, then click the Display Options bar and choose
Columns, Customize. You can select any budget-related columns from
the list of choices. The following example compares the original budget
amounts assigned to the projects and the current variance resulting from
budget spending on those projects to date.

assigning and analyzing
budgets at the WBS,
activity, and cost
account levels, see
Reviewing Work
Breakdown Structures
on page 139, Working
with Activities on
page 211, and Working
with Cost Accounts and
Project Expenses on
page 257, respectively.
When current spending differs from original

budget estimates, a variance results. A variance
amount shown in parentheses indicates a
negative variance amount for the project.

running reports, see
Printing Layouts and
Reports on page 509.
173

In this chapter:
Defining and Assigning Project
Codes
Grouping, Summarizing, and
Filtering by Codes
You can organize the projects in the

enterprise project structure (EPS) in groups
according to specific categories, such as
location and division, using project codes.
The module supports an unlimited number of
hierarchical project codes; you can establish
as many as you need to meet the filtering,
sorting, and reporting requirements for your
projects. For example, use project codes to
arrange projects hierarchically when your
EPS contains many projects within many
levels.
Read this chapter to learn how to set up
project codes, assign code values to projects,
and use project codes to organize your
enterprise layouts.
174
Defining and Assigning Project Codes

You can use project codes to group projects and consolidate large
amounts of information, and to generally distinguish one project from
another. You can group by project code in the Open Project dialog box
and in the Projects window, by right-clicking anywhere in the dialog
box or window, choosing Group and Sort By, then selecting the project
code name. All projects assigned a value for that code display in the
Open Project dialog box or the Projects window, grouped by their
corresponding value. Any project not assigned a value for the project
code is placed at the bottom of the window under a No Code group
band.
Choose to group the

selected projects by project
code; all predefined project
codes are available in the
Group and Sort By menu.
Project codes are set up in the Project Codes dictionary, which is

available to the entire enterprise. You can create values for the
predefined codes, or you can create new project codes and values for use
with your projects. Assign code values to projects using the Codes tab in
Project Details.
175
Define project codes and values Choose Enterprise, Project

Codes. Click Modify in the Project Codes dialog box, then define as
many project code definitions as you need.
Click Modify, then supply a project code
name, along with the number of
characters that will be available for each
code value.
To add values to a project code, click Close in the Project Code

Definitions dialog box. In the Project Codes dialog box, select the
project code for which you want to establish values, then click Add and
type the values and descriptions. To change a code values position in
the project codes hierarchy, select the code, then click the appropriate
arrow button.
For example, if you create a code called Location, you may then want to
specify code values for the different cities in which your company has
offices, such as Philadelphia, Chicago, and San Francisco. Within these
office locations, you can create values for the specific departments
located in that city. To indent a department beneath a city location, first
select the department, then click the up or down arrow buttons until it is
directly below the city location. Click the right arrow button to indent
the department.
176
Click the
arrows to
move values
up or down in
the list, or to
change a
selected
values
position in the
hierarchy.
To see a graphical display of your project codes hierarchy, click the

Display Options bar and choose Chart View. You can also modify the
appearance of the table or chart using the other menu commands
available from the Display Options bar.
Defining weighted project codes Weighted project codes enable
you to rank or prioritize projects using a weight value and then view
projects by score. The Project Management module works with the
project codes and scoring feature of P6 Web Access to determine the
score of each project code. For example, assume you rank projects in
terms of risk. Project codes with the highest score have the most risk;
those with the lowest score have the least risk.
To add weight to a project code, in Project Codes, enter a value in the
Weight column. To display the Weight column, click the Display
Options bar, select Columns, then choose Weight.
In P6 Web Access, you can display the Project Score field in the Project
Statistics portlet and scorecard portfolio views to view the score of each
weighted project code you create.
177
In Project Code Definitions, you can display the Weight

column along with the Weight Percent and Max Code Value
Weight columns. To display these columns, click the Display
Options bar, select Columns, then choose Weight. The
Weight Percent column displays the project code weight
divided by the total of all project code weights. The Max Code
Value Weight column enables you to enter the maximum
allowed weight value for a specific project code type.
If the Codes tab is not shown in Project Details, right-click in

the Details area of the Projects window and choose
Customize Project Details; select Codes from the list of
available tabs, click the right-arrow button to move it to the
Display Tabs column, then click OK.
Assign project code values In the Projects window, select the

project for which you want to assign project code values. Display
Project Details by clicking the Display Options bar and choosing Details
(the box next to the command should be marked). Click the Codes tab,
then click Assign. In the Assign Project Codes dialog box, click the
value for the applicable code, then click the Assign button.
Close
button
Assign
button
178
Click the Close button in the Assign Project Codes dialog box when you
are finished assigning project code values to the project.
You can also assign several values at once. Press and hold
the Ctrl key, then select each value you want to assign. Click
the Assign button.
179
Grouping, Summarizing, and Filtering by Codes

Use project codes to group projects in Activity Table and Gantt Chart
layouts within the Projects window. Grouping enables you to focus on a
particular aspect of projects, such as product line or location. In the
following example, projects assigned the same division values are
grouped together and identified by description bands. Current bars,
which represent the early or actual start and finish dates for each project,
and summary bars, which represent all projects within each group band,
are included in the layout. The summary bar begins at the earliest start
date of all projects that are assigned the code value and extends to the
latest early finish date of all projects that are assigned the code value.
Group by project codes so

the layout is easy to read.
To select the bars

included in the Gantt
Chart, click the Display
Options bar, then choose
Bars.
Summary bar
Current bar
Group by project code Click the Display Options bar, then choose
Group and Sort By. Choose a specific project code or choose Customize
to include additional codes or other project elements in your layout. The
module creates a group band for each Group By parameter you select in
the Group and Sort dialog box.
180
You can customize the

appearance of each group
band, choose whether to
show summary data,
indent the group band,
specify the lowest level
you want to include for the
Group By element, and
enter the time interval by
which to group daterelated elements.
Mark to hide group title

bands that do not contain
activities within the group.
Click in the first row of the Group By column, then select the project
code or other parameter by which you want to group. You can group by
more than one item by adding additional rows. Mark the Indent
checkbox for hierarchical items to show all levels or only levels up to
the number indicated in the To Level cell. You can indent only one level
per group. If you select a date Group By item, you can select the time
interval in the Group Interval cell. To change the font and background
color of the group bands, double-click the Font & Color cell for each
item.
see Summarizing
Summarize project code groups By default, the module

summarizes the data included under each group band at the group band
level in the layout and shows summary bars in the Gantt Chart. If the
Gantt Chart is not displayed, click the Display Options bar, then choose
Show on Top, Gantt Chart. The summary data are current up to the date
when data were last summarized.
181
Mark to display a summary

bar for each group band in
the layout. If your layout is
grouped by EPS also, mark
the Display checkbox for the
EPS Summary bar.
To exclude the project details and show only a summarized band,

double-click the band. A plus sign (+) displays before the group band
name when a group is summarized. To summarize all groups in the
layout, click the Layout Options bar and choose Collapse All.
Filter by project code You can create custom filters that use project
codes to limit the projects that are included in the Projects window. For
example, to review only the projects within a specific division, select the
Division project code. Click the Display Options bar, then choose Filter
By, Customize. Click New in the Filters dialog box to add a filter.
Identify the filter with a

meaningful name.
Select the filter
parameter. In this case,
all projects with the
project code value of
Accounting for the
Division project code will
be selected.
182
Click OK to return to the Filters dialog box. The new filter is listed
under User Defined filters, and the corresponding select checkbox is
marked, indicating it is active. Click Apply to see the projects selected
by the filter, or click OK to apply the filter to the layout and close the
dialog box.
This layout contains the

projects selected by the
filter. You can also display
specific information for
these projects by modifying
column dataclick the
Display Options bar, then
choose Columns,
Customize.
183

In this chapter:
Creating User-Defined Fields
Working with Indicators
User-defined fields enable you to customize

fields and values and add them to the project
database. For example, you can use them to
track additional activity data such as delivery
dates and purchase order numbers. You
could also track resource- and cost-related
data such as profit, variances, and revised
budgets.
This chapter describes how to configure
user-defined fields to meet your projects
needs.
184
Creating User-Defined Fields

User-defined fields (UDFs) enable you to add an unlimited number of
custom fields and values to the project database. Examples of UDFs
include purchase order numbers, delivery dates, drawing numbers,
profit, variances, and revised budgets.
Subject areas You may customize an unlimited number of UDFs in
any of the following subject areas: Activities, Activity Steps, Activity
Resource Assignments, Projects, Resources, WBS, Expenses, Issues,
Risks, and Work Products & Documents. In each of these subject areas,
you can add columns and group, sort, and filter data based on the UDFs
applicable to the subject area.
Data types For each custom field you create, you can specify any of
the following data types for that field: Cost, Integer, Number, Text, Start
Date, Finish Date, and Indicator. The data type you select determines
the type of data you can specify in a field. For example, if you select
Start Date, when you create a column for the Start Date you can only
enter dates in the Start Date column.
Indicator-type UDFs, refer
to Working with
Indicators on page 188.
The Indicator UDF is a special type of field that enables you

to enter color-coded values and display them in columns and
reports.
The following table summarizes the data types available and their uses
in user-defined fields:
Data Type Use For
Text
Text or combinations of text and numbers
Start Date
Start date
Finish Date Finish Date

Number
Numeric value with two decimal places
Cost
Currency value
Indicator
An indicator field that you can use to

enter color-coded icon values in columns
and display color-coded text in reports
Integer
Numeric data except money
185
Defining user-defined fields Choose Enterprise, User Defined

Fields. Select the subject area to which you want to add a new field, then
click Add.
Double-click in the Title column and type a name for the UDF. Doubleclick in the Data Type column and select the appropriate data type, then
click Close.
Organizations using Primavera ProjectLink cannot define or
assign values to UDFs for Microsoft Project (MSP)-managed
projects in the Project Management module. For more
information on ProjectLink, click the Help button on any
ProjectLink screen to access the Primavera ProjectLink Help
in Microsoft Project (available only if ProjectLink is installed).
You must select a subject

area before entering a Title
or Data Type.
Enter a Title and Data

Type for the user-defined
field. For example, in the
Project Expenses subject
area, you could enter
Change Order # as the
title and select Cost as
the data type.
The Add and Delete buttons are disabled if you do not

have edit privileges for user-defined fields.
Only users with security privileges to edit UDFs can add,

modify, or delete UDFs in the User Defined Fields dialog.
Users that do not have access rights to edit UDFs can still
view them in the User Defined Fields dialog. Any user can
assign values to existing UDFs in columns. Also, only users
with project security privileges to view project cost data can
view UDF values with a Data Type of Cost.
186

Like other data fields, you can create columns for UDFs, group, sort,
and filter based on UDF data, and view UDF data in reports. Read the
following sections to learn more about utilizing these capabilities.
Creating UDF columns You can display UDFs in the columns of
the Activity Table, Activity Steps, Activity Resource Assignments,
Projects, Resources, WBS, Project Expenses, Issues, Risks, and Work
Products and Documents.
For detailed information on
adding columns, refer to
page 445.
You can only create columns for a UDF in the layout of the
subject area in which you created the UDF. For example, if
you create a UDF called Purchase Order Number in the
Project Expenses subject area, the Purchase Order Number
UDF can only be viewed in the Expenses layout.

grouping, sorting, and
filtering data, refer to
Grouping, Sorting, and
Filtering Data on
page 435.
Group, Sort, and Filter UDFs When a layout is grouped by user

field, you can group, sort, filter, and view summaries. To group and sort
based on UDFs, click View, Group and Sort. To filter data based on a
UDF, select View, Filters.

Global Change, refer to
Using Global Change on
page 253.
Global change using UDFs You can use Global Change to assign
values to Activity, Activity Resource Assignments, and Expenses user
fields. To assign a global change click Tools, Global Change.
You must create UDFs in the User Defined Fields dialog
before you can assign and populate UDFs using Global
Change. There are no pre-existing UDFs available in the
database.

reports, refer to
Customizing Reports on
page 473.
Viewing UDFs in reports You can view UDFs in reports and

display them in columns. In the Report Wizard, you can select any UDF
to be included in the report. You can also group, sort, and filter data
based on a UDF. After you run the report, any UDFs you selected will
appear in columns.

formatting bars, refer to
Formatting Gantt Charts
on page 452.
Formatting UDF date bars You can create bars for user-defined
date fields and view them in the Gantt chart. Click View, Bars. In the
Bars dialog, click Add. Enter a name in the Name field. In the Timescale
field, select User Dates (the User Start Date and User Finish Date fields
will become enabled). Select the user-defined start and finish date
values in the User Start Date and User Finish Date fields.
187
You must create user-defined start date and finish date fields
in the User Defined Fields dialog before you can create bars
for these fields in the Gantt chart. Also, the User Finish Date
and User Start Date columns are only editable when you
select User Dates in the Timescale column.
Click in the Filter column to open the Filters dialog. Select a filter and
click Apply, OK. If desired, click on the Bar Style tab to change the
bars appearance. Click Apply, OK.
If you select a User Finish Date that is earlier than the User
Start Date, or if there is no value associated with those fields,
the bar will not be displayed.
Select User Dates in the

Timescale column.
The User Finish Date and User Start Date

fields are automatically enabled when you
select User Dates in the Timescale column.
If desired, click the Bar Labels tab

and enter information to display
UDFs as a label on any bar.
188
Working with Indicators

Indicators are a special type of user-defined field (UDF) that enable you
to select color-coded icons as values for display in columns, group and
sort, filters, and reports. Indicator UDFs can be used to highlight
Activities, Activity Steps, Activity Resource Assignments, Projects,
Resources, WBS, Expenses, Issues, Risks, and Work Products &
Documents. For example, you could group activities based on priority or
status using Indicator UDFs.
Like all other UDFs, you can perform the following functions using
Indicator UDFs:

defining UDFs, refer to
Working with UserDefined Fields on
page 186.
display in columns
group and sort data based on indicators
filter data based on indicators
perform global changes
display as labels on timescale bars
view indicator data in reports using columns, group and sort,

and filters
Defining Indicator UDFs From the Enterprise menu, click User

Defined Fields. Click Add, then select the Subject Area to which you
want to add the indicator UDF. In the Data Type field, select Indicator.
Enter a name (e.g., High Priority) in the Title field and click Close.
Selecting Indicator UDF values Once you create an indicator
UDF, you can assign indicator values. You must create columns for
indicator UDFs in order to assign values to a particular activity,
resource, project, etc.
An indicator UDF can have one of four values: red, yellow, green, or
blue. These values, shown in the next figure, are selectable icons in a
drop-down list when you click on a UDF field. You must select one of
these values whenever you enter a value for an Indicator UDF, whether
in columns, group and sort, filters, reports, global change or bars.
189
Indicator UDF example As an example, assume you want to create

an Indicator UDF that signifies status and priority of activities based on
the following parameters:
Red - high priority activities that have not started
Yellow - high priority activities that have started
Green - completed activities
Blue - low priority activities that have started
First, you could create an Indicator UDF in the User Defined Fields
dialog called Priority Indicator. Then, in Activities, you would create a
column for the Priority Indicator UDF. In the Priority Indicator column,
you would identify the activities you want to add an indicator value to,
click in the Priority Indicator field, and select the appropriate value. You
could then group, sort, and filter data based on the Priority Indicator
value. The Activity Table would look similar to the following figure,
with Indicators grouped by type.
190
Indicator UDFs in columns, group and sort, filters, bars,

global change, and reports Modifying columns, group and sort,
filters, bars, global change, and reports to include Indicator UDF data is
functionally the same as other types of UDFs.
The values will display as icons in each of these cases, except reports. In
reports, Indicator UDF columns show the text value of the icon (i.e.,
rather than displaying the icon, the value is red, yellow, green, or blue),
as shown in the next figure.
Indicator UDF icon values
display as text in reports.
191
Creating Calendars
In this chapter:
Adding Calendars
Modifying Calendars
You can create and assign calendars to each

resource and each activity. These calendars
define the number of available workhours in
each calendar day. You can also specify
national holidays, your organizations
holidays, project-specific work/
nonworkdays, and resource vacation days.
The module uses your calendar assignments
for scheduling and tracking activities, and
leveling resources. An activitys type
determines whether the activity uses the
calendar of an assigned resource or its
activity calendar.
You can link resource and project calendars
to global calendars. Changes to a global
calendar apply to all resource and project
calendars linked to the global calendar.
Read this chapter to learn how to add and
modify calendars.
192
Adding Calendars
You can establish an unlimited number of calendars to accommodate
different work patterns. For example, if some activities require a fiveday workweek, while others are performed part-time (such as Monday,
Wednesday, and Friday), you can create different calendars and assign
the activities and resources in your projects to them.
assigning global or project
calendars to activities, see
on page 211.
There are three calendar pools: global, resource, and project. The global
calendar pool contains calendars that apply to all projects in the
database. The project calendar pool is a separate pool of calendars for
each project in the enterprise. The resource calendar pool is a separate
pool of calendars for each resource. You can assign resource or global
calendars to resources, and global or project calendars to activities.

modifying calendars, see
Modifying Calendars on
page 194.
Create a global calendar Choose Enterprise, Calendars. Choose

Global, then click Add. Select the calendar you want to copy for the new
global calendar, then click the Select button. Type the new calendars
name. To make the new calendar the default global calendar for
activities and resources, mark the Default checkbox. To edit the new
calendar, click Modify. To view the calendars assignments before
changing it, click Used By.

assigning resource
calendars to resources, see
Defining Resources and
Roles on page 115.
Create a resource or project calendar Choose Enterprise,

Calendars. If you are creating a project calendar, you must first open a
project. Choose Resource or Project, then click Add. Select the calendar
you want to copy for the new resource or project calendar, then click the
Select button. Type the new calendars name. To edit the new calendar,
click Modify. To view the calendars assignments before changing it,
click Used By.
Creating Calendars
193
Organizations using Primavera ProjectLink cannot create or

edit project-specific calendars for Microsoft Project (MSP)managed projects in the Project Management module. For
more information on ProjectLink, click the Help button on any
ProjectLink screen to access the help in Microsoft Project
(available only if Primavera ProjectLink is installed).
Click to
convert a
resource
or project
calendar
to a global
calendar.
194
Modifying Calendars
For additional information
about modifying calendars,
refer to the Help.
Use more than one calendar when your projects contain activities that
can occur on different schedules. For example, you can create one
calendar that specifies a normal Monday-through-Friday workweek and
another calendar that specifies continuous worktime (24 hours/day). If
you define multiple project calendars, you must assign each activity to
the specific calendar that indicates the worktime available for
performing that activity. The module schedules each activity only
during the worktimes of the calendar to which it is assigned.
A calendar consists of a
standard workweek and a
list of exceptions.
You can also create multiple calendars to control the times when work is
performed by resources throughout your organization. You can then
associate different holidays/exceptions from the global calendar for each
work cycle to indicate individual resource availability.
Define the workhours for each day in the regular workweek. Use the
Calendar dialog box to view and edit a global, project, or resource
calendar.
Modify calendars Choose Enterprise, Calendars; choose the
calendar type (Global, Resource, or Project), select the calendar you
want to modify, then click Modify.
To base a resource or project calendar on another calendar,
select a new global calendar in the Inherit Holidays and
Exceptions from Global Calendar field.
Choose the month you want to modify by clicking the appropriate arrow
button next to the month-year title. Modify the year by clicking the
month/year title, and clicking the appropriate arrow button. To change
the number of hours in a specific workday, click the date you want to
change.
Work hours defined with decimal values other than .0 or .5
will round up or down to .0 or .5.
Creating Calendars
195
Displays a yearly calendar so you can

select a specific month to view
Choose to define the total

work hours in each day.
Set the number of hours

available to work for a
specific day.
Click to make the selected

day a nonwork day.
To apply the same change to all instances of a specific

weekday in the displayed month, click the weekdays
column label.
196
Choose to define which hours

of the day are work or nonwork
hours.
Select the hours you want

to change and click either
Work or Nonwork.
To make an exception into a

workday and apply the default
number of work hours to that
day, click the exception you want
to change, then click Standard.
Click to specify the number of default work hours

for the selected day in the open calendar.
If the dates display color changes to white, the number of

hours you entered does not equal the default number of
work hours for that weekday.
Each calendars work/nonworktime is based on its regular workweek.

The changes you make to the regular workweek are reflected in the
global, resource, or project calendar dialog box. The calendar dialog
box shows normal/standard, nonworktime, and exceptions in the colors
indicated in the legend.
Apply exceptions directly in the calendar dialog box. To apply the same
change to all instances of a specific weekday in the displayed month,
click the weekday's column label.
Specify default work hours Use the Calendar Weekly Hours dialog
box to specify the number of default work hours for each week day in
the open calendar.
Creating Calendars
197
Select a day of the week to

set its default number of work
hours.
hour a work hour.
Check this display for the

default number of work hours
for the selected day in the
open calendar.

hour a nonwork hour.
Delete a calendar Choose Enterprise, Calendars. Choose Global,

Resource, or Project, depending on the type of calendar you want to
delete. Select the calendar you want to delete, then click Delete. If
activities or resources are assigned to the calendar, the Calendars in Use
dialog box is displayed.
To delete the calendar and link its assignments to a different calendar,

choose Select Replacement Calendar, click OK, then select a
replacement calendar when prompted. To delete the calendar and link its
assignments to the default global calendar, choose Link to Default
Global Calendar, then click OK.
Part
Implementing the Schedule

In this part:
Establishing Activity Codes

Working with Cost Accounts and Project
Expenses
Performing Top-Down Estimation
ead this part to learn how to define and use activity codes to
organize and filter project activities, add activities and
relationships to projects, and monitor project expenses using cost
accounts.
Establishing Activity Codes describes how to structure project
data using activity codes so you can organize the information in
different ways.
Working with Activities describes how to create a schedule
consisting of activities and resource assignments.
Working with Cost Accounts and Project Expenses discusses
tracking activity costs and earned value throughout the project
life cycle.
Performing Top-Down Estimation shows you how to perform
and apply top-down estimation to WBS elements and activities.
201

In this chapter:
Creating Activity Codes and
Values
Grouping and Summarizing by
Codes
You can define a set of codes to categorize

the activities in your projects. You can then
sort, filter, and group activities according to
the activity codes and values you assign.
This chapter describes how to use global
codes to organize project activities across an
enterprise project structure (EPS) according
to specific categories, such as product and
division. You will learn how to use EPS-level
activity codes to organize project activities.
You will also learn how to establish project
activity codes to filter and organize activities
based on unique, project-specific features or
requirements.
202
Part 3: Implenting the Schedule
Creating Activity Codes and Values

You can also create activity
codes and values in P6
Web Access. For
information on creating
activity codes and values
in P6 Web Access, refer to
the P6 Web Access Help.
Activity codes represent broad categories of information, such as

design, quality control, or location. For each code, you can define
specific values that further describe that category. For example, if your
organization has more than one location, you can create a Location code
with values such as New York, San Francisco, and Chicago. You can
then associate activities with a specific location, such as New York, and
define an unlimited number of values for each code.
Create global activity codes Choose Enterprise, Activity Codes.
Choose Global, then click Modify. Click Add, then type the name of the
global activity code. Specify the maximum number of characters for the
activity codes values.
Click the Display Options

bar, then Filter By,
Current Projects Values
to view only the values
assigned to the open
projects.
Activity code values
Activity codes
Create global activity code values Choose Enterprise, Activity

Codes. Choose Global. Select the activity code for which you want to
create a value, then click Add. Type the values name and description.
The value cannot exceed the maximum character length specified for the
activity code.
203
Create EPS-level activity codes Choose EPS, then click Modify.

Click Add to select the EPS to which you want to apply the activity
code. Next, type the name of the EPS activity code. Specify the
maximum number of characters for the activity codes values.
Click to select an
EPS level to which
you want to add an
activity code.
Displays the EPS levels that

have assigned activity codes,
and which you have security
access to, based on the user
security profiles.
The Project Management module lists EPS-level activity

codes that you do not have access rights to, under the No
EPS ID level. More information about EPS-level activity code
security is available in the Project Management Help.
204
Create EPS-level activity code values Choose Enterprise,

Activity Codes. Choose EPS. Select the activity code for which you
want to create a value, then click Add. Type the values name and
description. The value cannot exceed the maximum character length
specified for the activity code.
Click to remove
the activity code
value and its
assignments.
205
Create project-level activity codes Open the project for which

you want to create activity codes, then choose Enterprise, Activity
Codes. Choose Project, then click Modify. Click Add, then type the
name of the project activity code. Specify the maximum number of
characters for the activity codes values.
Project activity codes are

listed beneath the name of
the open project.
Create project-level activity code values Choose Enterprise,

Activity Codes. Choose Project. Select the activity code for which you
want to create a value, then click Add. Type the values name and
description. The value cannot exceed the maximum character length
specified for the activity code.
Type the new value name

and description directly in
these cells; the names
length cannot exceed the
length specified in the Max
Length field for the code.
Use these arrows to

indent/outdent a
value in the activity
code hierarchy, and
to move a selected
value up or down in
the list.
206
Convert EPS-level activity codes and values You can convert

an EPS-level activity code and its values to a global activity code with
global values. Choose Enterprise, Activity Codes. Choose EPS, then
click Modify. Select the code you want to convert, then click Make
Global. Click Yes to convert the code and its values.
For instructions on
assigning activity codes
and values to activities,
see Working with
Activities on page 211.
Convert project-level activity codes and values You can

convert a project activity code and its values to a global activity code
with global values. Choose Enterprise, Activity Codes. Choose Project,
then click Modify. Select the code you want to convert, then click Make
Global. Click Yes to convert the code and its values.
If you change activity codes or values, the module applies
your changes to all activity assignments. In addition, if you
convert project activity codes to global activity codes, the
module applies these changes to all activity assignments.
207
Grouping and Summarizing by Codes

Use global, EPS, and project activity codes to group activities and
projects in Activity Table, Gantt Chart, and Activity Network layouts.
Grouping enables you to focus on specific activities, such as those
within a particular phase or department. The following example shows
activities grouped by the global activity codes Location and Project
Manager.
Group by location and

project manager so the
layout is easy to read.
When you summarize an

activity group, the early
date bar begins at the
earliest start date of all
activities in the code value
and extends to the latest
early finish date of all
activities in the code value.
Summary bar
208

about grouping and
sorting, see Grouping,
Sorting, and Filtering Data
on page 435.
Group by activity code In the Activities window, click the Layout

Options bar, then choose Group and Sort. Under Group By, click the
first available line, then select the project, EPS, or global activity code
by which you want to group.
If you are grouping by a hierarchical element,
you can select the lowest level you want to
include in the layout.
Group by as many
fields as necessary
for your layout.
209

see Summarizing
Summarize groups By default, the module summarizes the data

included under each group band at the group band level in the layout
and shows summary bars in the Gantt Chart. If the Gantt Chart is not
displayed, click the Layout Options bar, and choose Show on Top, Gantt
Chart. The summary data are current up to the date when data were last
summarized.

about bars, see Formatting
Gantt Charts.
To display summary bars in the Gantt Chart, click the Layout Options
bar, then choose Bars to display the Bars dialog box.
Mark to display a summary

bar for each group band in
the layout.
To exclude the project details and show only a summarized band,

double-click the band. A plus sign (+) displays before the group band
name when a group is summarized. To summarize all groups in the
layout, click the Layout Options bar and choose Collapse All.
211

In this chapter:
Activities Overview
Adding Activities
Defining General Activity
Information
Defining Schedule Information
Establishing Relationships
Displaying Activity Details for
Assignments
Assigning Resources and Roles
Assigning Resource Curves to
Resource or Role Assignments
Manually Planning Future Period
Assignments
Assigning Activity Codes and
Adding Expenses
Viewing Activity Feedback and
Posting Resource Notes
Assigning Work Products and
Documents
Adding Steps
Creating and Assigning Activity
Step Templates
Viewing Activity Summaries
Viewing Contract Manager
Documents
Using Global Change
Activities are the fundamental work

elements of a project. They are the lowest
level of a work breakdown structure (WBS)
and, as such, are the smallest subdivision of a
project that directly concerns the module. If
you divide activities into steps, an activitys
primary resource is typically responsible for
managing and tracking the progress of the
steps, while the project manager is typically
responsible for managing and tracking the
progress of the overall activity.
This chapter describes how to add activities
and their properties.
212
Activities Overview
Activities represent work that must take place in a determined amount of
time. Use the Activity Table or Activity Network layouts to add
activities and build your projects. Within these layouts, you can define
the following activity information:
Activity ID and name to uniquely identify and describe the

activity
Predecessor and successor relationships to define relationships

with other activities in the same project or in different projects in
the enterprise project structure (EPS)
Activity start and finish dates
Activity calendar
Activity type, duration type, and percent complete type; whether an

activity is a start or finish milestone; how to keep an activitys unit
values, duration values, and resource units/time values
synchronized; and how to calculate an activitys percent complete
WBS element
Activity codes and values to categorize activities
Constraints on the activitys scheduled start and finish dates
Expenses
Work products and documents, standards, and deliverables
Resources
Roles to identify skill requirements for staffing the activity
Notes and feedback to communicate with the resource working on

an activity
Notes about performing the activity
Steps to divide the activity into smaller units
Activity Step Templates to define sets of reusable steps common

to many activities in a project or across projects
213
Adding Activities
layouts, refer to Working
with Layouts on page 425
and Customizing Layouts
on page 445.
Use the Activities window to create, view, and modify activities for the
open project. The Activities window can be divided into upper and
lower layouts. For example, show an Activity Table, Gantt Chart,
Activity Usage Spreadsheet, or Activity Network in the top layout, and/
or show Activity Details, an Activity Table, Gantt Chart, Activity or
Resource Usage Spreadsheet or Profile, or Trace Logic in the bottom
layout. Customize the layouts to suit your requirements.
Choose Project, Activities, to display the Activities window.
To open a layout, click the

Layout Options bar and
choose Show on Top/
Show on Bottom, then
select the layout type.
To add an activity to a project, use the Activity Table and Gantt Chart, or
Activity Network. Depending on your user preferences, the New
Activity wizard may start to help you add an activity.
Add activities in the Activity Table Select an activity within the
group to which you want to add a new activity, then click Add. The new
activity is placed according to the sorting options selected for the layout.
214
Include the Gantt Chart to

see a timescaled version of
your schedule as you add
activities.
Type information directly

in the column cells for
the new activity...
...or use Activity Details to

complete activity
information.
Add activities in Activity Network In Activity Network, select the

group band or an activity box within the group band into which you
want to add the new activity, then click Add.
The new activity was added

to this second-level WBS
group band.
If no groups have been set up in Activity Network, the activity

will be added to the bottom of the layout.
215
Defining General Activity Information

Use the General tab to define general information for the selected
activity, including duration type, WBS assignment, primary resource,
activity type, and activity calendar.
In the Activities window, select the activity whose general information
you want to define. Click the Layout Options bar, then choose Show on
Bottom, Activity Details; click the General tab.
Layout Options bar
To specify which Activity

Details tabs you want to
display and their order,
click the Layout Options
bar, then choose Bottom
Layout Options.
216
Activity type Select the activity type according to the activitys

function in the project and the calendar that should be used for the
activity during scheduling.
To indicate that the activitys resources are scheduled according to

the activity calendar, select Task Dependent.
To indicate that each of the activitys resources are scheduled

according to the resources own calendar, select Resource
Dependent.
To indicate that the activitys duration is dependent on its

predecessor and/or successor activities, select Level of Effort
(LOE). LOE activities do not have constraints and are considered to
be ongoing; examples include project management tasks, reviews,
and meetings. The module does not include Level of Effort
activities when leveling resources.
All finish to start and start to start predecessors and start to
finish and start to start successors drive the start date of the
LOE activity; all finish to finish and start to finish
predecessors and finish to start and finish to finish
successors drive the finish date of the LOE activity.
To indicate that the activity marks the beginning of a major stage in

the project, select Start Milestone. Milestones do not have timebased costs or resource assignments. However, a primary resource
can be specified. Start milestone activities have a zero duration.
To indicate that the activity marks the end of a major stage in the
project, select Finish Milestone. Milestones do not have time-based
costs or resource assignments. However, a primary resource can be
specified. Finish milestone activities have a zero duration.
To indicate that the activitys duration is dependent on the earliest

start date and latest finish date of the activities that share a common
WBS level, select WBS Summary.
Driving resources can not be assigned to WBS Summary
activities.
Duration type Select the duration type based on whether resources,

the schedule, or costs will be most important when activities are updated
in a project. The duration type applies only when resources are assigned
to the activity. The following equation must hold true regardless of
which data are updated:
217
Remaining Units (resource) = Units/Time x Remaining Duration (activity)
For example, if a resource is assigned to an activity for 8 hours/day for 5

days, the remaining units or work effort is calculated as 40 hours. The
duration type enables you to control which variables of this equation are
calculated when you change a value.
Select Fixed Duration & Units/Time or Fixed Duration & Units to

indicate that the schedule is a limiting factor in your project. The
activity's duration does not change regardless of the number of
resources assigned when you modify or update activities. You
usually choose these duration types when you are using task
dependent activities.
When you update the remaining duration for the activity, you can
choose to calculate either the remaining units or the units per
timeperiod. If you want to recalculate the remaining units and keep
the units/time for the resource constant, choose Fixed Duration &
Units/Time. The module uses the equation:
Remaining Units = Units/Time x Remaining Duration
If you want to keep the remaining units constant instead and

recalculate the units/time, choose Fixed Duration & Units. The
module uses the equation:
Units/Time = Remaining Units/Remaining Duration

the percent complete type,
see Part 4, Updating and
Managing the Schedule on
page 279.
Select Fixed Units/Time to indicate that resource availability is the

most critical aspect of your project. In this case, the units/time or
rate of the resource remains constant, even if the activity's duration
or work effort changes. You most often use this duration type when
you are planning resource dependent activities.
Select Fixed Units to indicate that the budget (units or cost) is a

limiting factor; that is, the total amount of work is fixed. When you
update activities, the work effort required to complete the activity
does not change, even if the activity's duration or the resource rate
changes. Typically, you would use this type in conjunction with
resource dependent activities. Increasing resources can decrease the
activity duration.
Percent complete type You can choose to calculate an activitys

percent complete according to activity duration, activity units, or a
physical percent complete that you enter for each activity. You must
define a percent complete type for each activity.
To indicate that the activitys percent complete will be entered by

the user for this activity, select Physical.
218
To specify that the activitys percent complete be calculated from

the planned and remaining duration, select Duration.
To specify that the activitys percent complete be calculated from

the actual and remaining units, select Units.
Activity calendar This field displays the selected activitys calendar.

Click the Browse button to select a new calendar.
WBS Click the Browse button to assign a new WBS element to the
selected activity.
Responsible manager This field displays the name of the
responsible manager (in the OBS) assigned to the selected activitys
WBS element.
Primary resource This field displays the name of the selected
activitys primary resource. The primary resource is the person
responsible for the overall work on the activity and for updating activity
status. Click the Browse button to select a new primary resource.
219
Defining Schedule Information

Use the Activity Details Status tab to view and edit detailed schedule
information for the selected activity, including actual start and finish
dates, free float, total float, constraints, and duration. You can also view
and edit the activitys labor and nonlabor unit/cost values and material
cost values.
The module automatically recalculates the time value and period you
enter according to the project's calendar and the standard timeperiod
defined by your network/database administrator. To view the available
timeperiod abbreviations, choose Admin, Admin Preferences, then click
the Time Periods tab. You must have appropriate access rights to edit
Admin Preferences.
In the Activities window, select the activity whose schedule information
you want to define. Click the Layout Options bar, then choose Show on
Bottom, Activity Details; click the Status tab.
Duration Update the Duration fields when you are setting the duration
or updating the activity as a whole. (Most likely, the activity type will be
Task Dependent.)
updating the schedule, see
Part 4, Updating and
Managing the Schedule on
page 279.
To enter the planned duration for the activity, in the Planned field
enter the expected number of workperiods required to complete the
selected activity.
To enter the remaining duration for the activity, in the Remaining

field enter the remaining number of workperiods needed to
complete the selected activity. If the selected activity is in progress,
type a new number immediately followed by the timeperiod
abbreviation.
220
Use the General tab of the Admin Preferences dialog box to

specify the default duration for activities in all projects.
Choose Admin, Admin Preferences, then click the General
tab.
To enter a new at completion estimate, in the At Complete field

enter an estimate of the duration at completion time for the selected
activity. If the selected activity is in progress, type a new at
completion estimate (At Complete Duration = Actual Duration +
Remaining Duration).
If the Link Planned and At Completion for not started
activities checkbox is cleared in the Projects Details,
Calculations tab in the Project Window, the original planned /
remaining units and costs, and the durations, will remain
constant when you update the At Complete value for
activities that have not started.
Status Once an activity is underway, update its start and finish dates
and other status information.
To enter the activitys planned start date, click the Browse button in
the Started field, then select a date. If the activity has actually
started, mark the Started checkbox, then specify the actual start date
in the Started field.
To enter the activitys planned finish date, click the Browse button
in the Finished field, then select a date. If the activity is complete,
mark the Finished checkbox, then specify the actual finish date in
the Finished field.
If the planned date you enter differs from its scheduled date,
you are prompted to apply a constraint to hold the activity in
place. If you do not constrain the activity, your dates are
overwritten when the schedule is calculated.
If the selected activity has started, the Exp Finish field displays the
date the activity is expected to end. (Only the primary resource can
edit this date in the Timesheets module.) Anyone who has access to
the project can edit this date.
The % field name changes

depending on the percent
complete type set on the
Activity Details General
tab.
221
If the selected activitys percent complete type is set to Duration,

the Duration % is calculated from the planned and remaining
durations. If the selected activitys percent complete type is set to
Units, the Units % is calculated from the actual and remaining
units. If the selected activitys percent complete type is set to
Physical, you can enter its physical percent complete in the
Physical % field.
To edit the Physical % field, the activity must have started.
Total float is the amount of time the selected activity can be

delayed, without delaying the projects finish date.
Free float is the amount of time the selected activity can be delayed,
without delaying the immediate successor activities.
Constraints Use constraints when activities must start or finish on a

specific date. Network logic alone cannot reflect all project situations.
Sometimes activity must be accomplished according to specific dates
rather than on dates determined by other activities in the project. To
model dependence on specific dates, assign primary and secondary
constraints to activities.
The module uses the date constraints only when they create a tighter
schedule. For example, an imposed Start On date of December 1 will
not affect a schedule-determined early start date of December 15.
Conversely, if an imposed Start On or After date is set to December 30,
the module schedules an activity whose early start is December 15 to the
imposed start date.
Choose the primary constraint for the activity, then click the
Browse button in the Date field to select the date to which the
primary constraint applies.
Choose a secondary constraint if necessary. This list is filtered

based on the value you select in the Primary field. Click the Browse
button in the Date field to select the date to which the secondary
constraint applies.
You can enter a constraint date only after you select a
constraint type.
222
Labor/Nonlabor Units/Cost or Material Cost Click the Options

bar and select Labor or Nonlabor units or cost, or Material cost. The
amounts in the Status tab total the amounts for all resources assigned in
the Resources tab.
The planned amount is the expected number of labor/nonlabor units

or cost, or material cost the selected activitys resources will use.
The actual amount is the actual number of labor/nonlabor units or

cost, or material cost the selected activitys resources have used. If
the selected activity has started, type a new actual value.
The remaining amount is the remaining number of labor/nonlabor

units or cost, or material cost the selected activitys resources will
use. If the selected activity is in progress, type a new remaining
value.
The at complete amount is an estimate of the labor/ nonlabor units

or cost, or material cost at completion time for the selected
activitys resources, (At Complete Units/Cost = Actual Units/Cost
+ Remaining Units/Cost). If the selected activity is in progress, type
a new at complete estimate.
If the Link Planned and At Completion for Not Started
Activities checkbox is cleared in the Projects Details,
Calculations tab on the Project Window, the original planned /
remaining units and costs and the durations will remain
constant when you update the At Complete value for
activities that have not started.
223
Establishing Relationships
Create relationships between activities to indicate whether an activity
can begin only after other activities start or finish. Once you assign
relationships, schedule the project to calculate early and late dates for
each activity.
Establish relationships between activities in the same project, or link
projects by creating relationships between activities in different projects
within the EPS. You can define relationships to activities in any other
project (not including what-if/inactive projects), even if the project is
not opened in the current display.
There are several methods for assigning relationships. Use the Activity
Network to visualize the flow of logic as you link activities, or use the
Gantt Chart to view relationships according to time. You can also use
the Relationships tab in Activity Details to assign relationships to
activities in the same project or in other projects in the EPS.
Relationship types and lag You can define the following four
types of relationships. Typically, you define relationships from the
predecessor to the successor activity.
Finish to start. The successor activity can begin only
when the predecessor activity completes.
Finish to finish. The finish of the successor activity
depends on the finish of the predecessor activity.
Start to start. The start of the successor activity depends
on the start of the predecessor activity.
Start to finish. The successor activity cannot finish until
the predecessor activity starts.
When a successor activity cannot start or finish as soon as its

predecessor starts or finishes, you can define a lag time for the
relationship. Lag is the number of time units from the start or finish of
an activity to the start or finish of its successor. Lag can be a positive or
negative value. For example, a start to start relationship with a three-day
lag indicates that the successor activity can start three days after the start
of its predecessor.
224

advanced scheduling
options, see Updating,
Scheduling, and Leveling
on page 295.
You can select a calendar to calculate the lag between predecessors and
successors for all activities. If you do not select a calendar, the
Successor Activity Calendar is used to calculate lag. You can calculate
lag based on the Predecessor Activity Calendar; the 24 Hour Calendar,
which uses continuous, 7 days/week, 24 hours/day workperiods; or the
Project Default Calendar, which is the calendar selected as Default for
New Activities on the Defaults tab of Project Details. To select the
calendar for scheduling relationship lag, choose Tools, Schedule. Click
Options. In the General tab, select a calendar in the Calendar for
Scheduling Relationship Lag field.
View relationships in the Gantt Chart To assign relationships in

the Gantt Chart, make sure relationships are displayed onscreen. Click
the Layout Options bar, then choose Bars. Click Options in the Bars
dialog box. Click the General tab in the Bar Chart Options dialog box
and mark the Show Relationships checkbox, then click OK.
While you are dragging the

relationship line between
two activities, a hint
window displays that
indicates the type of
relationship that will be
created when you release
the mouse button.
225
Create relationships in the Gantt Chart or Activity Network

Drag the mouse between any two activities that you want to connect.
Point to the left or right of the predecessor activity and drag the mouse
to the left or right of the successor activity. The mouse pointer changes
to a
as you define relationships.
Drag the mouse from the end of activity
A114380 to the start of A1143820 to
define a finish to start relationship.
To modify or delete a relationship, double-click the

relationship line.
226
Dissolving Activities
To maintain relationships when deleting activities, choose Edit,
Dissolve, in the Activities window. Dissolving deletes an activity and
joins its predecessor and successor activities with a finish to start
relationship. The selected activity to be dissolved must have a
predecessor and successor.
This sequence of activities above can be completed with just two activities.
Dissolve activity A114400. Activity A114390 and A114410 automatically join with
a finish to start relationship.
To assign a relationship
between projects, click the
Display Options bar in the
Assign Predecessors/
Assign Successors dialog
box, then choose Select
Project. Select activities to
define relationships the
same way as you would
from the same project.
Assign relationships using Activity Details In the Activities

window, select the activity to which you want to add a predecessor or
successor relationship. Display Activity Details by clicking the Layout
Options bar and choosing Show on Bottom, Activity Details, then click
the Relationships tab. Click Assign in either the Predecessors or
Successors section. Select the predecessor or successor activity you
want to assign, click the Assign button, then click the Close button.
Double-click the Relationship Type field, then select a relationship type.
Double-click the Lag field, then type the relationships lag time value.
227
Click the arrows to

move from one
activity to the next
activity in the
display.
To expand either the Predecessors or

Successors area, drag the split bar
separating the right and left panes.
You can also use the Predecessors or Successors tabs in

Activity Details to assign relationships. The Relationships tab
combines the predecessor and successor information in a
single tab. The data stored in the Relationships tab is
synchronized with the information in the Predecessors and
Successors tabs.
Trace Logic The Trace Logic layout enables you to examine a path
while still viewing the entire project. Click the Layout Options bar and
choose Show on Bottom, Trace Logic. In the Gantt Chart or Activity
Network upper layout, select the activity from which you want to begin
tracing logic.
To move through the chain of activities, click a predecessor or successor
of the selected activity. To modify the number of predecessor/successor
levels, click the Layout Options bar and choose Bottom Layout Options.
228
This Trace Logic layout

shows three levels for
both predecessors and
successors.
229
Displaying Activity Details for Assignments

Display the following Activity Details tabs so you can assign additional
project information:
Resources, which include the personnel and equipment that

perform work on activities across all projects. You can also assign
and remove project personnel job titles or skills, known as roles.
Codes, which are used to categorize activities according to your

organizational and project needs.
Notebook, which provide additional information that further

describes the activity according to specific categories of
information.
Steps, which divide activities into smaller units. You can apply a
weight to each step, which can be linked to the activitys physical
percent complete for the completed steps.
Feedback, which allows you to exchange notes with an activitys

primary resource to and from the Timesheets module.
WPs & Docs, which enable you to catalog and track all projectrelated work products and documents.
Expenses, which are one-time expenditures for nonreusable items.

You can associate predefined cost accounts with expenses to
categorize them.
Summary, which displays detailed cost and unit information for

the selected activity.
Contract Manager Docs, which enables you to view Contract

Manager (Expedition) documents associated with the selected
activity. This option is displayed when link data is entered in
Admin Preferences.
Modify Activity Details tabs In the Activities window, click the

Layout Options bar, then choose Show on Bottom, Activity Details.
Click the Layout Options bar, then choose Bottom Layout Options. In
the Available Tabs column, click the tab that you want to display, then
click the right arrow button. To shift the tab to the left in the Activity
Details display, select the tab name in the Display Tabs column and
click the up arrow button; to shift the tab to the right in the display, click
the down arrow button.
230
Assigning Resources and Roles

In the Activities window, select the activity to which you want to assign
a resource or role. Click the Resources tab in Activity Details.

establishing resources and
roles for your projects, see
Defining Resources and
Roles on page 115.
Click Add Resource to assign a resource to the selected activity; click

Add Role to assign a role to the selected activity. Select the resource or
role you want to assign. To assign multiple resources or roles, hold
down the Ctrl key, then click each resource/role you want to assign.
Click the Select button, then click the Close button.
Organizations who do not want to assign resources to
activities can use the activity Owner attribute to specify one
person who is responsible for an activity. P6 Web Access
users with the appropriate license can update progress for
activities they are associated with as activity Owner.
Additionally, to support oversight and approval processes, the
activity Owner designation can be combined with the use of
the new Reflection project feature, which provides the
capability to review changes before updating an active
project. For information about activity Owner and Reflection
project features, see the Project Management Module online
Help and the Administrators Guide. Also refer to Creating
and Using Reflections on page 407.

Resources tab columns to
include other information
for resources and roles.
Right-click in the Columns
area of the Resources tab,
then choose Customize
Resource Columns.
To define detailed information, double-click each appropriate cell and

enter the resources or roles information for the selected activity. To
replace a resource or role assigned to the activity, select the resource or
role you want to replace, click Add Resource or Add Role, then click the
Replace button. Select the new resource or role with which you want to
replace the existing resource/role, then click the Close button.
231
Recalculating Costs/Units for Assignments

If you want to calculate costs from the units indicated or to recalculate
units based on actual cost, include the Cost Units Linked column in
Activity Details. If you mark the assignments checkbox for the Cost
Units Linked column, the module notifies you that costs will be
recalculated. If no progress has occurred for the activity, the Planned
Cost/Units, Remaining Cost/Units, and At Completion Cost/Units are
equal. When you apply an actual start to the activity, and record an
actual quantity value or an actual cost value for the resource or role
assignment, the Planned Cost/Units value is retained and the Remaining
and At Complete Costs/Units are recalculated automatically.
Roles with specific skill sets can be assigned resources to enable
schedule and cost planning until specific resources are identified. You
can later replace the role with the correct resource, based on the
proficiency requirements established for the role.
To remove a role assigned to an activity, the activity must
have a resource assignment. In the Resources tab of Activity
Details, double-click the Role cell for the role you want to
remove. (Add the Role column if it is not included in the tab.)
Click the Clear button in the Select Role dialog box.
Assign resources to activities by role At least one role must be

assigned to activities to assign resources by role. Click Assign by Role;
the Assign Resources by Role dialog box lists the roles assigned to the
selected activity. The resources who can fulfill each role are listed below
it. Select the resources you want to assign. Click the Select button, then
click the Close button.
Once you assign a resource or role and specify the planned units
anticipated for its use on activities, you can use Activity or Resource
Usage Spreadsheets and Profiles to track its use as the project
progresses.
232
To analyze role use

per time-period or by
selected role, include
a Role Usage Profile
in the bottom portion
of your layout.
This Activity Usage

Spreadsheet is
organized by resource,
so you can see the
weekly spread of
resource use each
month over the course of
each activitys duration.
233
Choosing the Rate Source and Rate Type

for an Assignment
Up to five price/unit rates may be defined for each resource and role in
the database. When both a resource and a role share an assignment on
the same activity, you can choose to use the rate of the resource or role
to calculate costs, or enter a custom rate. If you choose to use the rate of
the resource or role, you can select which price/unit rate associated with
the resource or role you want to use to calculate costs for the
assignment.
Choose Project, Activities. Select the activity that contains the resource
and role assignment. Display Activity Details, then click the Resources
tab. Customize the tab to display the Rate Source, Rate Type, and Price/
Unit columns. Double-click in the Rate Source field and choose
Resource, Role, or Override.
When a resource and role
share an assignment on
the same activity, you can
choose to always use the
rate of the resource or the
rate of the role in the
Calculations tab of User
Preferences.
Choose Resource to calculate costs for the assignment based on the

resource's price/unit value. Choose Role to calculate costs for the
assignment based on the role's price/unit value. Choose Override if you
want to enter a custom rate in the Price/Unit column. If you choose
Resource or Role, select the rate type you want to use to calculate costs
for the assignment in the Rate Type field. (If rates have been defined for
the resource or role, some or all of the rate types have an associated
price/unit value.) When you select the rate type, the Price/Unit field
displays the price/unit value defined for the resource or role.
If only a resource is assigned to an activity, the rate source
must be Resource or Override. If only a role is assigned to an
activity, the rate source must be Role or Override.
234
Assigning Resource Curves to Resource or Role

Assignments
For information on creating
custom resource curves,
refer to Defining Custom
Resource Curves on
page 135.
You can assign a resource distribution curve to any resource or role

assignment on activities with a duration type of Fixed Duration and
Units/Time or Fixed Duration & Units. Resource usage and costs are
distributed evenly during an activity unless you specify nonlinear
distribution using custom curves (or manually enter future period values
as described in the next section).
You can also assign a resource curve in the Resources tab
in Activity Details.
To learn how to manually

plan future period
resource/role distribution,
refer to the next section,
Manually Planning Future
Period Assignments on
page 235.
Choose Project, Resource Assignments. Select the resource/role

assignment to which you want to assign a resource curve. To display the
Curve column, click the Display Options bar, then choose Columns,
Customize. Select Curve from the General group and add it to the
Selected Options list.
Double-click in the Curve

column, select the curve you
want to assign to the
resource/role assignment,
then click Select.
Remove a resource curve from a resource or role

assignment Choose Project, Resource Assignments. Select the
resource/role assignment from which you want to remove the resource
curve. Click in the Curve column, then click Clear in the Select Curve
dialog box. You can also remove curves from the Resources tab in
Activity Details.
235
Manually Planning Future Period Assignments

Your projects may contain activities for which you know work will be
performed sporadically and at varying levels of effort. For these
activities, it is difficult to plan a resource/role assignments work on an
activity using pre-defined or custom resource curves because the work
you plan to perform per period on an activity may not be fully reflected
by the curve. As a result, performance against the project plan cannot be
accurately measured.
For example, assume an activity has a planned duration of 28 days and
planned units of 80 hours. For this activity, you know that the actual
work will not be spread evenly across the duration of the activity; rather,
the planned units will be spread as follows:
After planning future period

resource allocation, you
can create a baseline from
the project plan. As the
current project schedule
progresses and you apply
actuals, you can track how
the project is performing
against plan by comparing
the current projects
planned future periods to
the current projects
actuals.
Week 1
Week 2
Week 3
Week 4
10h
30h
15h
25h
Assigning a pre-defined or custom resource curve to the resource/role

assignment may not reflect the actual work being performed on the
activity at any given time. To achieve the most precise resource/role
distribution plan, you can manually enter the planned resource/role
allocation per assignment in the timescale unit you choose (days, weeks,
months, quarters, years, or financial periods).
As the project progresses, if work on an assignment is not proceeding
according to plan, you can manually update the remaining units for an
assignment's future periods, enabling you to measure the remaining
work for an assignment without changing the original plan. You can
manually modify an assignments planned past and future periods at any
time, even if the activity associated with the assignment is in progress.
When you manually enter future period bucket values for an
assignment, the module automatically identifies the future
period values as a MANUAL resource curve.
236
There are many factors to

consider when manually
planning future period
resource distribution. For a
more detailed list of
guidelines and
considerations, refer to the
Future Period Bucket
Planning FAQ topic in the
Project Management
module Help.
Guidelines When manually planning future period assignment

buckets, adhere to the following guidelines:
You CANNOT enter
You CAN enter future period values for
future period values for . .
...
.
. . . assignments in the Resource Usage
Spreadsheet of the Resource Assignments and
Activities windows.
. . . all resource/role assignments.
. . . Planned Units and Remaining (Early)
Units.
. . . any other field.
. . . assignments to Task Dependent, Resource . . . assignments to milestone

Dependent, Level of Effort, and WBS
activities.
Summary activities.
. . . assignments to activities with duration
types of Fixed Duration & Units and Fixed
Duration & Units/Time.
. . . assignments to activities
with duration types of Fixed
Units and Fixed Units/Time.
Additionally, if the project-level setting 'Link Planned and At

Completion for not started activities' is marked (Project Details,
Calculations tab), the total planned values of the Planned Units and
Remaining (Early) Units for the assignment will always be equal for not
started activities. For example, when you enter a value for a future
period in the Planned Units field, the Remaining (Early) Units field is
automatically populated with the same value; the reverse is also true. If
this setting is not marked, you can enter different values for the same
future period in the Planned Units and Remaining (Early) Units fields;
in this case, the total values for each field are calculated independently
for the assignment.
Once an activity is in progress, the Planned Units and
Remaining (Early) Units fields are automatically unlinked.
When choosing the

spreadsheet fields to
display, you can also
display Actual Units to
compare the completed
work against the planned
and remaining work.
237
Display spreadsheet fields for future period bucket planning

in the Resource Usage Spreadsheet Display the Resource
Usage Spreadsheet in either the Activities window or the Resource
Assignments window. To display the Planned Units and Remaining
(Early) Units fields in the Resource Usage Spreadsheet, click the
Display Options bar and choose Spreadsheet Fields, Customize. Move
the Planned Units and Remaining (Early) Units fields to the Selected
Options list and, if desired, remove all other fields from the Selected
Options list. Click Apply, OK.
To sort the display in an

alphabetical list, click the
Available Options bar and
choose Group and Sort
By, List.
Create a future period bucket planning layout You can plan

future period resource/role assignments in any type of layout in the
Resource Assignments and Activities windows. Here are some helpful
hints to consider before you begin:
creating layouts, modifying
columns, and adjusting the
timescale, refer to
page 445.
Create or open a layout that enables you to easily identify

resources, the activities to which they are assigned, and the
activities associated projects (because the same activity name may
appear in different projects). Refer to the following image for
sample layouts.
Click the Layout Options bar and choose Columns, Customize.

Move the Curve, Planned Units, and Remaining (Early) Units
columns to the Selected Options list, then modify the remaining
columns as desired. Click Apply, OK. By displaying the Curve
column, you can determine which assignments already have an
assigned pre-defined or custom curve, or a defined manual curve.
When you manually enter or edit a value in a future period bucket
for an assignment, the module automatically enters a value of
Manual in the assignments associated Curve column.
238
For assignments that do not have a defined total Planned Units or

Remaining (Early) Units value, it is useful to display the Planned
Units and Remaining (Early) Units columns. When you display
these columns, you can enter or edit an assignment's total planned
or remaining units to spread the units evenly over the duration of
the assignment, then manually modify the future period distribution
as necessary.
Adjust the timescale in the Resource Usage Spreadsheet to reflect

the planning periods in which you typically plan future resource
distribution. For example, if you plan your work in daily buckets,
adjust the timescale to Week/Day and enter hourly planning unit
values.
If you track past period actuals per financial period and plan
to report performance against manual future period values,
you should enter future period planning values in financial
period timescale intervals. You can adjust the timescale to
reflect your predefined financial periods.

displaying the desired
data, refer to Grouping,
Sorting, and Filtering Data
on page 435.
If you are planning future period resource distribution for a project

that has already started, you may want to apply a filter to display
only the activities you want to plan, such as activities that dont
have an actual duration or that have a planned start after the current
date or data date. Alternatively, if a project has already started and
you want to update the remaining units for activities that are in
progress, you could apply a filter to display only activities that have
an Actual Start date and do not have an Actual Finish date.
If you use the Resource Usage Spreadsheet in the Activities
window to plan future period resource distribution, you can
only enter values for open projects.
239
Spreadsheet fields displayed for

Planned Units, Actual Units, and
Remaining Early Units.
Layout grouped
and sorted by
project and by
resource.
Change the
timescale
intervals to
reflect your
planning,
updating,
and reporting
periods.
List layout displaying

columns for Project,
Resource Name, Curve,
Planned Start, and
Planned Finish. Use a list
layout to sort the list in
ascending or descending
order for a specific
column by clicking on a
column heading.
When you edit a future period value for an

assignment, the Curve column automatically
displays a value of Manual, even if a pre-defined
or custom curve was previously assigned.
Editable future period

assignment values are
displayed in white cells;
uneditable values are
displayed in gray cells.
240
For samples of manuallyplanned future period

assignments using
different planning periods,
timescales, and user
preference settings, refer
to the Project Management
module Help.
Manually enter future period values You can manually enter

future period assignment values per bucket for labor, non-labor, and
material resource assignments, as well as for role assignments. After
you display the Resource Usage Spreadsheet, create a suitable future
period bucket planning layout, and display editable spreadsheet fields,
enter or edit the Planned Units and/or the Remaining (Early) Units for
each assignment bucket for the planned or remaining duration of the
activity.
If desired, you can apply a resource curve to an assignment before you
manually enter future period values for the assignment. For example, if
the assignment you want to manually plan has a planned resource
distribution that is similar to a defined resource curve's distribution, you
can apply the resource curve to the assignment. When you apply the
resource curve, future period values are spread across the duration of the
activity according to the resource curve distribution; you can then
manually modify the future period values as necessary. Once you
manually modify future period values, the resource curve you assigned
is automatically removed from the assignment.
Once an activity is in progress and changes occur to the
project plan, you can manually edit the activity assignments
past and future period Planned Units and future period
Remaining (Early) Units to reflect changes to the original
plan.
Before entering values in future periods, consider the following:
The values you should enter in future period buckets are dependent
on the duration of your planning periods (buckets), the timescale
you choose, and user preference settings.
The values you enter in the Planned Units and Remaining Units
fields are converted to the Unit/Time specified in the User
Preferences, Time Units tab. For example, if the Unit/Time user
preference is set to Hour and you enter 1d, the value is converted to
8h. To avoid planning mistakes, you should set the Unit/Time user
preference to the same time unit you use to plan your work. For
example, if you plan your work in hours, set the Unit/Time to
Hours.
You must have the 'Edit Future Periods' project privilege to

manually enter future period data.
241
Assigning Activity Codes and Adding Expenses

a code and value. Click the Codes tab in Activity Details.
establishing activity
codes and values, see
Establishing Activity
Codes on page 201.
Click Assign. Select the activity code value you want to assign. To
assign multiple codes and values, hold down the Ctrl key, then click
each code value you want to assign. Click the Select button, then click
the Close button.
Add expenses to activities In the Activities window, select the
activity to which you want to add an expense. Click the Expenses tab in
Activity Details.

columns to include other
information for the expense
assignments. Right-click in
the Columns area of the
Expenses tab and choose
Customize Expense
Columns.

setting up expenses for
your projects, see
Working with Cost
Accounts and Project
Expenses on page 257.
Click Add, then type the expenses name. Double-click the items
expense category listing, click the category you want to assign, then
click the Select button. Double-click the Accrual Type cell, then select
the expenses accrual type. Type the number of planned units you expect
the selected activity to use. Type the cost of each unit. The module
calculates and displays the expenses planned cost (planned units *
price/unit) in the Planned Cost field.
242

automatically calculating
actuals, see Updating,
on page 295.
To automatically calculate an expenses actual cost based on the

activitys planned completion percentage, mark the Auto Compute
Actuals checkbox.
To enter actual expense costs already incurred by the activity, type the
cost in the Actual Cost field. Type the name of the vendor business or
organization to which the expense is payable.
243
Viewing Activity Feedback and Posting Resource

Notes
In the Activities window, select the activity whose comments you want
to view. These comments are added in the Timesheets module by the
primary resource for the activity. Click the Feedback tab in Activity
Details. Review the notes in the Feedback from Primary Resource area.
In the Notes to Resources area, type any comments to the resources who
are working on the activity. The notes are then posted with the activity
in the Timesheets module for the resources to read.
Assign notes to activities In the Activities window, select the
activity to which you want to assign a note. Click the Notebook tab in
Activity Details.
Click Add. Select the notebook topics you want to assign. These topics
are predefined in the Notebook Topics tab of the Admin Categories
dialog box. To make the topics accessible for assignment to projects,
EPS nodes, WBS elements, and/or activities, mark the appropriate
checkboxes in the Admin Categories dialog box. To assign multiple
topics, hold down the Ctrl key, then click each notebook topic you want
to assign. Click the Assign button.
244
In the Description section of the Notebook tab, type a brief description

for the selected notebook topic. You can use HTML editing features,
information from other information fields (while retaining formatting),
and adding hyperlinks.
245
Assigning Work Products and Documents

Work products and documents enable you to catalog and track all
project-related documents and deliverables. This includes guidelines,
procedures, standards, plans, design templates, worksheets, and all types
of project deliverables. Choose Project, Work Products and Documents,
to set up the documents.
about work products and
documents, see
Maintaining a Projects
Document Library on
page 375.
Set up the categories for work products and documents by choosing

Admin, Admin Categories, then clicking the Document Categories tab.
Click the Document Status tab to establish the different status codes you
want to use for the documents. Categories and status codes are then
assigned to documents in the Work Products and Documents window.
a document. Click the WPs & Docs tab in Activity Details.
Click Assign and select the document you want to assign. To assign
multiple documents, hold down the Ctrl key, then click each item. Click
the Assign button, then click the Close button. Mark the checkbox for
the selected document to indicate that it is a work product.
To view detailed information about and/or open a document, select the
item, then click Details in the WPs & Docs tab.
246
Adding Steps
You can divide an activity into smaller task increments called steps and
then assign weights to the steps to calculate the activitys percent
complete. Weighted steps enable you to track the progress of an activity
based on the number of steps completed.
The percentage value is shown, relative to the weights of the other steps.
For example, three steps are assigned to an activity; the first step has a
weight of 2, and the second and third steps each have a weight of 1.
When you mark the first step (weight of 2) complete, the percent
complete is 50. When you mark the first and second steps complete, the
percent complete is 75. When all three steps are marked complete, the
percent complete is 100.
creating Activity Step
Templates and assigning
them to activities, refer to
the next section, Creating
and Assigning Activity Step
Templates.
You can add steps unique to each activity. You can also create Activity
Step Templates that capture a group of steps common to multiple
activities, then assign the step group to activities. This section describes
how to add unique steps to activities; the next section describes how to
create and assign Activity Step Templates.
Add steps In the Activities window, select the activity to which you
want to add a step. Click the Steps tab in Activity Details.
You may want to use

weighted steps to status
activities when a project
consists of large activities
that encompass distinct
tasks.
Click Add. Type the name of the new step. Type a brief description of
the step for the selected activity. You can use HTML editing features,
information from other information fields (while retaining formatting),
and adding hyperlinks. To move the step to an earlier stage of the
activity, click the up arrow. To move the step to a later stage of the
activity, click the down arrow.
247
To indicate that the step is complete, mark the Completed checkbox. To

add columns for percent complete, weight, weight percent, and userdefined fields, right-click over the columns in the Steps tab, and choose
Customize Steps Columns.
Step % Complete Percent complete indicates progress on the

step and can be used to calculate percent complete for the activity.
Step Weight The weight of the step indicates the steps importance. The higher the value, the greater the importance. The weight
can be any number between 0.0 and 999999.0 and is relative to the
other steps listed for the activity.
To change the weight of a step, double-click the Step
Weight column and type a new weight for the step.
Step Weight Percent The step weight percent value is calculated

based on the step weights assigned to the activity. This column is 0
percent for nonweighted steps.
User-defined fields You can change the title of user-defined

fields and use them to enter values such as finish date, start date,
cost, or number of hours worked for a step. Choose Enterprise, User
Defined Fields to assign and edit these titles.
Setting Options for Using Weighted Steps

You must select Physical as the percent complete type in the General tab
in Activity Details to use weighted steps to calculate an activitys
percent complete. The Physical % field in the Status tab of Activity
Details then becomes a calculated field, which displays the percent
complete based on the relative weights of the completed steps versus the
incomplete steps.
In addition, you must mark the Activity Percent Complete Based on
Activity Steps checkbox in the Project Details Calculations tab in the
Projects window to base percent complete on weighted activity steps.
If you do not set these options, you can still edit the Step Weight and
Completed fields in the Steps tab, but they will not be used in any
calculations. You will also be able to edit the Physical % field in the
Status tab of Activity Details.
248
Creating and Assigning Activity Step Templates

Your organization may have several activities that repeat within a
project or across projects. For example, every time you develop a new
software application, several specifications must be written and
approved. Developing a specification is a multi-step process that never
changes.
For example, the Write Specifications or System Design activity
could have the following steps:
Submit initial spec
Review initial spec
Revise initial spec
Final review
Final revision
These steps may apply to many or all Write Specifications activities in

a project or across all projects. Rather than manually inputting these
steps into each Write Specifications activity, you can create an activity
step template containing these steps and assign the template to each
applicable activity at once. You can create activity step templates
manually or convert existing step(s) into a template.
weighted steps, refer to
the previous section,
Adding Steps.
Creating activity step templates manually Choose Enterprise,

Activity Step Templates. In the top grid of the Activity Step Templates
dialog, click Add. Type a name in the Step Template Name field (e.g.,
Specification steps). To add steps to the template, click Add in the
bottom grid. Type a Step Name and a Step Weight. The Step Weight is
used to calculate the progress of an activity; the greater the weight of the
step, the more progress has been made on the activity when you mark a
step complete. You can add an unlimited number steps to a template.
You can customize the bottom grid to display user-defined field columns
in which you can add step data such as dates and costs. Any userdefined field data you enter in an activity step template is saved as part
of the template.
249
You can customize

these columns to
display user-defined
fields.
Converting existing step(s) into an activity step template In

the Activity Table, select the activity that contains the step(s) you want
to convert to a template. In the Steps tab of Activity Details, ctrl-click to
select the desired step(s), then right-click on the selected step(s) and
choose Create Template. Enter a name for the template when prompted.
The step(s) and their associated name, description, and weight are added
to the new template. You can also choose to add the steps UDFs to the
template.
Highlight the steps

to include in the
template, then rightclick and choose
Create Template.
Mark to add UDFs

assigned to the step(s) to
the step template.
250
The module automatically updates step UDF data in activity

step templates when a step UDF is added, deleted, or
modified in the User Defined Fields dialog box.
Assigning activity step templates to activities You can assign

an activity step template to activities separately or to several activities at
once. To assign a template to one activity, select the activity in the
Activity Table. Click the Layout Options bar and choose Show on
Bottom, Activity Details. In the Steps tab, click Add From Template. In
the Assign Activity Step Templates dialog, select the template you want
to add and click the Select icon (+ symbol). The Steps tab is
automatically populated with the steps listed in the template.
Click to add steps from

an activity step
template, then select
the template.
Click to add a template to

more than one activity (the
activities must be selected
in the Activity Table).
You can also assign an activity step template to multiple activities at

once. In the Activity Table, Ctrl-click each activity to which you want to
assign a template. From the Command Bar, click Steps to launch the
Assign Activity Step Templates dialog. Choose the template you want to
add to the selected activities, then click Assign.
251
Viewing Activity Summaries

In the Activities window, select the activity whose summary information
you want to view. Click the Summary tab in Activity Details.
To view summary information about the activitys units, choose Display

Units. To view summary information about the activitys costs, choose
Display Cost. To view all of the activitys start and finish dates, choose
Display Dates.
252
Viewing Contract Manager Documents

Contract Manager documents are documents from the Contract
Manager module (formerly known as Expedition) that are associated
with project activities. In the Activities window, select an activity that
has a Contract Manager document associated with it. Click the Contract
Manager Docs tab in Activity Details.
To view a document, select the document, then click View. For Contract
Manager version 8.5 (Expedition), the document displays in Contract
Manager Print Preview. For Contract Manager version 9.0 and higher,
the document displays in your default Web browser.
You can view Contract Manager documents only if your
project is linked to a project in the Contract Manager
module. Refer to Linking the Project Management and
Contract Manager Modules on page 529 for more
information. You must access the Contract Manager module
to associate a document with a project activity.
253
Using Global Change

The Global Change feature enables you to make changes to all
activities, or a selected group of activities, at one time. You can use
Global Change to edit existing values, assign new values, or delete a
group of activities from your project.
You can create global change specifications at varying levels, for
activities, activity resource assignments, or project expenses. For
example, create a statement to assign resource assignments to a group of
activities. In addition, you can save global change definitions you
define.
When you run Global Change, data exclusively locked by another user
does not change. To obtain exclusive access, before opening the project,
choose Exclusive in the Access Mode section of the Open Project dialog
box. Choose File, Open.
You must have access to the activities to which you want to
make global changes. If your security profile does not
enable you to access these activities, you will not be able to
save your changes.
Change data globally Use the Global Change dialog box to create,
edit, delete, or run global change specifications. Choose Project,
Activities, then choose Tools, Global Change. Select a global change
and click Apply Change. You can view the data changes in the Global
Change Report window. To accept the changes displayed in the Global
Change Report window, click Commit Changes; to cancel the global
change and return the data to its original state, click Cancel Changes.
254
Click and select a user name to make the

specification available to that user.
Choose to make the
selected global
change specification
available globally or
only to specified
users.
Click New to globally

change activities,
activity resource
assignments, or
project expenses.
Click Import to select
a PCF file to import
into another project.
Click Export to save
a PCF file to
another location.
Add or modify a global change statement Choose Tools, Global

Change. Select the subject area for the global change statement. To
select parameters for expressions that can affect all activity information,
choose Activities. To select parameters for expressions that can affect an
activity's resource information, choose Activity Resource Assignments.
Choose Project Expenses to select parameters for expressions that can
affect an activity's expense information.
Define If, Then, and Else statements to specify the data you want to
change. If statements control which project data changes. Then and Else
statements specify the changes to be made. You can define an unlimited
number of If, Then, or Else statements. All global change specifications
require at least one Then statement. If statements are optional. The
module applies a Then statement with no If statement to all activities in
the current filter. Click the If, Then, or Else section to select it, then
click Add to add a statement.
Changing some parameters of an If, Then, or Else
statement may affect the operators and criteria available in
the statement.
You can create

user-defined
parameters.
255
Click to
define
additional
If, Then,
and Else
statements.
Copy and paste a specification Choose Tools, Global Change.

Select the specification you want to copy, then click Copy. Click Paste.
The new specification is placed at the bottom of the list of
specifications.
Cut, copy, or paste a statement Choose Tools, Global Change.
Select the global change specification you want to edit, then click
Modify. Select the statement you want to cut or copy, then click either
Cut or Copy. Click the section into which you want to paste the
statement, and click Paste. The new statement is placed at the bottom of
the list of statements.
You cannot paste statements from the If section of the
Global Change dialog box into the Then or Else sections;
however, you can cut or copy and paste between the Then
and Else sections.
Store new values in user-defined fields To define user fields,

choose Enterprise, User Defined Fields. In the Modify Global Change
dialog box, use the custom user fields in a global change statement to
store custom values in a project database. For example, you can create a
Then statement assigning a value of COMPLETE to the text-type user
field defined for the Activities subject area called Production for
Development activities. You can display Production as a column in the
Activity Table to view the new values.
256
Changing the subject area of

a specification will clear all
existing If, Then, and Else
statements.
Combine text fields You can use Global Change to modify text data
items such as activity IDs and names, and activity codes, by linking two
text fields using the ampersand (&) operator. This is called
concatenation. The following statement adds the location activity code
value to the Activity ID field, if there is a value assigned to the activity:
Then: Activity ID = Activity ID & Location
Use a dash (-) or underscore (_) to represent spaces when
concatenating data.
the valid arithmetic
operators and calculations
available in Global Change,
along with examples of
date arithmetic, see the
Help.
Use arithmetic with Global Change You can use arithmetic

equations to change numeric data such as quantities, costs, and
durations. Use addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division to
calculate new values. Click the Operator column to list the various
operator symbols. Join text strings with an ampersand symbol (&).
Arithmetic operators can link two data items, a data item and a number,
or two numbers that you enter. Use arithmetic operators in Then and
Else statements to calculate new values for a data item. The module
does not use arithmetic operations in If statements, only comparisons.
257
Working with Cost Accounts and

Project Expenses
In this chapter:
Cost Account and Expense
Overview
Setting Up a Cost Account
Structure
Adding Expenses and Entering
Cost Information
Defining Expense Details
Analyzing Costs
Cost accounts enable you to track activity

costs and earned value throughout the project
life cycle. Set the default cost account at the
project level so that it is automatically
assigned to the projects activities. Cost
accounts are established in a hierarchy
available to all projects in the enterprise
project structure (EPS).
Expenses are nonresource costs associated
with a project and assigned to a projects
activities. They are typically one-time
expenditures for nonreusable items.
Examples of expenses include facilities,
travel, consulting, and training.
Read this chapter to learn how to set up cost
accounts and add expenses.
258
Cost Account and Expense Overview

You can create cost accounts that you can assign to activities in any
project. Cost accounts are hierarchical and they enable you to track
activity costs and earned value according to your organizations specific
cost account codes.
You can assign a

default parent cost
account for each
project in the
Projects window,
then assign the child
cost accounts when
associating
expenses with
activities.
You can also add expenses, assign expense categories to them, and
specify whether an expense accrues at the start or end of an activity or
uniformly over its duration. Each expense has a planned actual,
remaining, and at completion value for both cost and units.
Expenses are not the same as resources. Resources can be
time-based and generally extend across multiple activities
and/or multiple projects. Examples of resources are
personnel and equipment. Unlike resources, expenses are
project-specific and they are not time-based. The module
does not include expenses when leveling resources.
Working with Cost Accounts and Project Expenses
259
Setting Up a Cost Account Structure

Set up a cost account structure and assign codes to activities and/or
resources. Use the cost account structure to track the amount of work
accomplished against the amount of money spent.
Create a cost account hierarchy Choose Enterprise, Cost
Accounts. Click the Cost Account ID column label to display the cost
accounts hierarchy. An outline symbol in the Cost Account ID column
label indicates a hierarchy display.
Select the cost account immediately above and at the same level as the
cost account you want to add, then click Add. Type the cost accounts
ID and name. The cost account ID and name should identify a project
component, such as engineering, hardware, or research. Create cost
accounts beneath each main component to delineate the components
parts, such as coding and installation for hardware.
In the Cost Account Description area provide an optional, brief
summary of the cost account. You can use HTML editing features,
adding hyperlinks.
When you indent,

or create a lowerlevel cost account,
the module
automatically
prefixes the new
account with the
higher levels ID.
Use these
arrows to
indent/
outdent a
value in the
cost account
hierarchy
and to move
a selected
value up or
down in the
list.
260
Set the project default cost account Specify a default cost

account that will be used for resources assigned to activities and project
expenses in the selected project. Choose Enterprise, Projects, to open
the Projects window. Display Project Details by clicking the Display
Options bar and choosing Show on Bottom, Project Details. Click the
Defaults tab, select a project in the upper layout, then click the Browse
button in the Cost Account field. Select the default cost account, then
click the Select button.
The module only uses your default cost account for new
resource assignments to activities and new project expenses.
Changing this setting does not affect existing resource
assignments to activities or existing project expenses.
Edit a cost account Choose Enterprise, Cost Accounts. Make sure

the cost accounts hierarchy is displayed; an outline symbol in the Cost
Account ID column label indicates a hierarchy display. Select the cost
account you want to edit. Type a new cost account ID and name. To
change the cost accounts position in the cost accounts hierarchy, click
the appropriate arrow buttons.
If you change a cost accounts ID or name, the change
applies to all activity assignments.
261
Delete a cost account Choose Enterprise, Cost Accounts. Select

the cost account you want to delete, then click Del./Merge. If the cost
account is assigned to activities or projects, the Cost Account in Use
dialog box is displayed.
To delete the cost account and specify a replacement cost account,

choose Select Replacement Account, click OK, then select a
replacement account. To delete the cost account without specifying a
replacement cost account, choose Delete Account(s), then click OK.
Copy and paste cost accounts Choose Enterprise, Cost
Accounts. Make sure the cost accounts hierarchy is displayed; an outline
symbol in the Cost Account ID column label indicates a hierarchy
display. Select the cost account you want to copy, then click Copy.
Select the cost account to which you want to paste the copied account,
then click Paste.
262
The copied cost account

displays below the selected
cost account in the
hierarchy, and includes any
lower-level cost accounts in
the copied cost account.
You cannot copy a cost accounts activity and project

assignments.
Cut and paste cost accounts Choose Enterprise, Cost Accounts.

Make sure the cost accounts hierarchy is displayed; an outline symbol in
the Cost Account ID column label indicates a hierarchy display. Select
the cost account you want to cut and paste, then click Cut. Select the
cost account to which you want to move the cut account, then click
Paste.
When you cut and paste a cost account, the module
maintains the accounts activity and project assignments.
263
Adding Expenses and Entering Cost Information

Use the Project Expenses window to create, view, and edit expenses and
related cost information for the open project. You can assign a cost
account and corresponding work breakdown structure (WBS) code so
you can identify the project component associated with the expense, and
the area of work with which it is associated. The Project Expenses
window is displayed when you choose Project, Expenses. To include
Project Expense Details at the bottom of the Project Expenses window,
click the Display Options bar and choose Expense Details. (The box
next to Expense Details should be marked.)
For steps on adding

expenses to activities from
the Activities window, see
on page 211.
Add expenses Choose Project, Expenses. Click Add. Select the

activity that incurs the expense, then click the Select button. Group the
activities in the Select Activity dialog box so you can easily find the
activity.
Click the General, Activity, Costs, and Description tabs, and enter the
expenses information. For an explanation of the fields on these tabs,
refer to Defining Expense Details on page 266.
264
Enter cost information for expenses Choose Project, Expenses.

Select the expense whose cost information you want to enter, then click
the Costs tab. Type the number of units you expect the expenses
assigned activity to use, then supply the price for each unit. The module
calculates and displays the planned cost of the selected expense
(planned units * price/unit) in the Planned Cost field.
automatically calculating
actuals, see Updating,
on page 295.
To automatically calculate an expenses actual cost based on the

activitys completion percentage, mark the Auto Compute Actuals
checkbox. The module automatically updates the actual/remaining units
when project actuals are applied. This setting assumes that all work for
the activity proceeds according to plan.
Enter an expense accrual type Choose Project, Expenses. Select

the expense whose accrual type you want to enter, then click the
Activity tab.
Select one of the following accrual types:
Start of Activity, to accrue the entire expense on the date the

activity begins
End of Activity, to accrue the entire expense on the date the

activity ends
Uniform Over Activity, to evenly distribute the expense over the

course of the activitys duration
To set up expense
categories, choose Admin,
Admin Categories, then
click the Expense
Categories tab.
265
Assign an expense category Choose Project, Expenses. Select the

expense to which you want to assign an expense category. Expense
categories enable you to classify the type of cost and can be used to
group, sort, filter, and report the expense and cost information for your
projects. Click the General tab, then click the Browse button in the
Expense Category field. Select the category you want to assign, then
click the Select button.
Change an expense assignment Choose Project, Expenses.

Select the expense you want to reassign, then click the Activity tab.
Click the Browse button in the Activity Name field. Select the activity to
which you want to reassign the expense, then click the Select button.
266
Defining Expense Details

Use Expense Details to view and edit detailed information about the
selected expense item. Expense Details appear in the Project Expenses
window when you choose Expense Details from the Display Options
bar.
General information Use the General tab to define general
information for the selected expense item, such as the item name and
category. You can also specify the items vendor, cost account, and
document number.
The cost account assigned
to the activity that incurs
the selected expense
The name of the business or

organization to which the
selected expense is payable
The project administrator

defines expense categories
in the Admin Categories
dialog box.
The purchase order or invoice number
for the selected expense
Activity information Use the Activity tab to change the selected

expense items activity assignment and specify the expense items
accrual type. You can also view the items activity assignment according
to WBS element, activity status, activity start and finish dates, and
primary resource.
The ID and name of the
activity that incurs the
selected expense
The code for the WBS
element that contains the
selected expenses
assigned activity
The rate at which the selected

expense accrues
267
Costs Use the Costs tab to specify cost amounts for the selected
expense item, including price/unit, planned cost, actual cost, and
remaining cost. You can also indicate if you want to calculate an
expense items actual cost according to activity completion percentage.
Type a value to quantify the expense.
For example, type lbs for pounds.
Mark to indicate whether the actual and

remaining units for the expense are
computed automatically using the
planned cost and the activitys schedule
percent complete.
Description Use the Description tab to enter a description of the

selected expense item. You can type a new description. You can use
HTML editing features, which include formatting text, inserting
(while retaining formatting), and adding hyperlinks.
268
Analyzing Costs
Comparing actual costs to budgets is a simplistic approach to cost
control. Determining performance using earned value is more effective.
Measuring earned value involves three key indicators: planned value,
earned value, and actual cost. If you track these values over time, you
can see the past spending and schedule trends for the project, together
with a forecast of future costs.
The variance between the planned budget
and earned value amounts indicates an
unfavorable schedule variance.
Customize columns in the

Projects window to report
earned value for all
projects in the enterprise.
Use cost spreadsheets, profiles, and cost control reports to monitor

spending. For example, the following summary report lists the expenses
associated with each project and provides the total planned, actual, and
remaining costs for each expense.
269
EX-01 Expense Summary By Project
Expense Item
Activity ID
Computer Equipment
A20.190
Budgeted Cost
Actual Cost
Remaining Cost
$10,000.00
$0.00
Meeting Lunch
$10,000.00
A10.10
$100.00
$200.00
Trip expenses
$0.00
A10.20
$10,000.00
$15,000.00
$0.00
Meeting Lunches
A10.40
$300.00
$500.00
$0.00
Auto Milage
A10.30
$200.00
$150.00
$0.00
Printing
A10.50
$500.00
$1,000.00
$0.00
Binding
A10.50
$100.00
$0.00
$0.00
Shipping (FedEx)
A10.60
$500.00
$0.00
$500.00
$21,700.00
$16,850.00
$10,500.00
Budgeted Cost
Actual Cost
Remaining Cost
$10,000.00
$0.00
$10,000.00
Subtotal
Project Name
Russell Computers
Expense Item
Activity ID
Computer Equipment
A20.190
Meeting Lunch
A10.10
$100.00
$200.00
$100.00
Trip expenses
A10.20
$10,000.00
$15,000.00
$0.00
Page 7 of 12
The following Activity Usage Spreadsheet pairs activity duration

columns on the left with the corresponding cumulative cost information
on the right. You can see the cumulative remaining expense cost for
each activity per month, along with the totals for the WBS elements.
270
Produce activity profiles to see a graphical representation of cost flow

for all or selected activities in the Activities window. The histogram bars
in the following example indicate quarterly expenses for multiple
selected activities. Using a time-based graphic helps you gauge when
and where costs are expended, and enables you to see if spending is
staying within budget.
271

In this chapter:
Performing Top-down Estimation
Applying Saved Top-Down
Estimates To a Project
Top-Down Estimation enables you to apply

labor, nonlabor, and/or material resource
units to activities in a top-down manner
using assigned estimation weights.
Read this chapter to learn how to perform
and apply top-down estimation to WBS
elements and activities.
272
Performing Top-down Estimation

To perform top-down estimation, you must first assign estimation
weights to work breakdown structure (WBS) elements and activities.
You can assign estimation weights directly in the Project Management
module or import them from the Methodology Management module
using Project Architect.
For information on
assigning weights to WBS
elements and activities,
see Reviewing Work
Breakdown Structures on
page 139.
You can limit the scope of your estimate according to work breakdown
structure (WBS) element and resource. After you develop a top-down
estimate, save the estimate for later reference or use, or apply the
estimate to the project. If you apply an estimate, the module updates
planned labor/nonlabor units for all activities and activity resource
assignments that fall within the estimation scope you specify. Top-down
estimations do not affect project expenses.
When performing a top-down estimation, you should first determine the
total number of labor or nonlabor resource units you want to apply. You
can determine this number using either prior experience on similar
projects, or you can use the modules Function Point option, if you are
estimating an information technology project.
Unlike labor and nonlabor resources, a top down estimate
can not be applied to all material resources at once,
because their units of measure differ. You must select the
material resources individually.
For organizations using Primavera ProjectLink, top-down

estimation is disabled for Microsoft Project (MSP)-managed
projects. For more information on ProjectLink, click the Help
button on any ProjectLink screen to access the help in
Microsoft Project (available only if ProjectLink is installed).
Perform top-down estimations using prior experience

Choose Tools, Top Down Estimation. Choose to estimate labor or
nonlabor resource units. Click the Browse button in the WBS field to
select the WBS element whose activities you want to estimate, then
click the Select button. To estimate activities assigned to a specific
resource within the specified WBS element, such as a material type
resource, click the Browse button in the Resource field, select the
resource, then click the Select button.
273
The Total Activities field

reflects the number of
activities included
under the specified
WBS element.
To estimate the entire
project, select the root
WBS element.
Select an individual
resource whose
assigned activities you
want to estimate for the
Click to view detailed
information about and/or
apply a previously saved
top-down estimate.
Choose Prior Experience. Using the value displayed in the Current Units
field as a guide, type the estimate in the Estimated Units field. To apply
an adjustment percentage to the estimate, mark the Apply Adjustment
checkbox, then type the adjustment percentage you want to use. For
example, if the estimated units are 400 and you apply an adjustment of
50%, the module will add 200 (50% of 400) to the estimated units. The
Adjusted Units field will display 600 units.
To save the estimate without applying it, click Save As. Type a name
and any assumptions and notes about the estimate, then click Save.
Develop top-down estimations using function points Choose
Tools, Top Down Estimation. Choose to estimate labor or nonlabor
resource units, or select a material resource in the Resource field. Click
the Browse button in the WBS field to select the WBS element whose
activities you want to estimate, then click the Select button. Choose
Function Point, then click Function Points.
274
Type the Unadjusted Function Point Count (UFP) value you want to use,
or click Calculate to calculate the UFP.
If you choose to calculate the UFP, in the applicable boxes type the
number of low, average, and high complexity files and transactions to be
developed under the WBS element and resource, if any, you are
estimating.
Click Close. The Function Point Estimation dialog box reappears. Your
UFP value is listed in the Unadjusted Function Point Count (UFP) box.
275
Type the Total Degree of Influence (TDI) value you want to use, or click
Characteristics to calculate the TDI. If you choose to specify
characteristics, select a system characteristic, then choose the numeric
value that indicates the characteristics degree of influence on the WBS
element you are estimating. A 0 indicates no influence and 5 indicates
the strongest influence. When you select a value, the Value Description
box displays text describing the value for the selected characteristic.
Select a value for all system characteristics, then click Close.
The Function Point Estimation dialog box reappears. The TDI value is
listed in the Total Degree of Influence (TDI) box.
Type the average productivity value, then click Close.
To apply an adjustment percentage to the estimate, mark the Apply
Adjustment checkbox, then type the percentage you want to use. For
example, if the estimated units are 400 and you apply an adjustment of
50%, the module will add 200 (50% of 400) to the estimated units. The
Adjusted Units field will display 600 units.
To save the estimate without applying it, click Save As. Type a name
and any assumptions and notes about the estimate, then click Save.
Apply top-down estimations Click Apply to perform the top-down
estimation. Click Yes when prompted to confirm that you want to apply
a top-down estimate to the project. Click OK.
276
Applying Saved Top-Down Estimates To a Project

After you specify the number of units you want to apply, the module
distributes the total units to the selected activities, using the estimated
weights assigned to the projects WBS elements and activities. The
module uses these weights to calculate the proportion of resource units
that each WBS element and activity should receive in relation to other
WBS elements. The module also maintains a history of saved top-down
estimations.
Apply saved top-down estimations Choose Tools, Top Down
Estimation. Click History. Select the estimate you want to apply. Click
Apply.
View a projects top-down estimations Choose Tools, Top Down

Estimation. Click History.
277
The Applied column

indicates which estimates
were applied to the open
project from the Estimation
History dialog box.
To view an estimates
details, select the estimate,
then click these tabs.
To delete an estimate,
select it, then click Delete.
Part
Updating and Managing the

Schedule
In this part:
Managing Baselines
Updating, Scheduling, and Leveling
Project Issues and Thresholds
Managing Risks
Maintaining a Projects Document
Library
Tracking Projects
Comparing Projects with Schedule
Comparison
Creating and Using Reflections
Checking Projects In and Out
uccessful project management doesnt end after you develop

a project plan. You need to track daily events and update the
schedule with accurate data.
Managing Baselines describes how to create a copy of a
project that can be compared to the current schedule to gauge
progress, and Updating, Scheduling, and Leveling explains
how to update the schedule and level resources. Summarizing
Projects provides steps for summarizing project data as needed
or at regularly scheduled intervals. Read Project Issues and
Thresholds and Managing Risks to learn how these features
help you monitor project schedules to identify potential
problems early in the process. Maintaining a Projects
Document Library describes how to track project-related
documents and work products, while Tracking Projects shows
you how to create layouts that enable you to view summary data
for individual projects, as well as the entire enterprise project
structure (EPS). Read the Creating and Using Reflections
chapter to learn how to merge selected changes from a reflection
project into the original project while keeping active project data
intact. Read the Checking Projects In and Out chapter to learn
how to keep track of projects that are used outside of the
enterprise database.
281
Managing Baselines
In this chapter:
Creating and Maintaining
Baselines
Assigning Baselines to Projects
Comparing Current and Baseline
Schedules
Updating Baselines
A baseline is a complete copy of a project

plan that you can compare to the current
schedule to evaluate progress.
This chapter describes how to create
baselines and assign them to projects. You
will also learn how to modify a baseline,
update a baseline with new data, and
compare a projects current schedule to its
baseline.
282
Part 4: Updating the Schedule
Creating and Maintaining Baselines

Before you update a schedule for the first time, you should create a
baseline plan. The simplest baseline plan is a complete copy or
snapshot of the original schedule. This snapshot provides a target
against which you can track a projects cost, schedule, and performance.
Each baseline can be assigned a type that categorizes its purpose, for
example, initial planning baseline, what-if project plan baseline, or midproject status baseline. Baseline types are defined by the administrator
in the Admin Categories dialog box.
You can compare up to three baselines at one time. For example, you
might want to create a baseline of the original project schedule, and then
create two additional baselines at different stages of the project. You can
compare these to the current schedule to see how the project is
progressing according to the project plan. You can also create a project
baseline to use for summarization.
You must have at least one
project open to access
project baselines in the
Maintain Baselines or
Assign Baselines dialog
boxes.
Designate any existing project, or a copy of the current project, as a

baseline. The maximum number of baselines allowed is defined by the
administrator in the Admin Preferences dialog box.
Baseline projects do not exist as separate projects that you can access.
To copy or modify a baseline project manually, you must first unlink it
from its current project. The restored baseline project then acts as any
other project in the enterprise project structure (EPS). You can also
update a baseline project with new or modified project data from the
current project. The module only updates the data types you select when
you update a baseline.
Create project baselines Open the projects for which you want to
create a baseline or view assigned baseline projects. Choose Project,
Maintain Baselines. The Maintain Baselines dialog box groups the
currently open projects into individual bands, with any existing baseline
projects beneath its current project.
After creating a baseline, you can set a baseline as the
project, primary, secondary, or tertiary baseline in the Assign
Baselines dialog box.
Managing Baselines
283
Click to delete the currently

selected baseline project.
You can
rename each
baseline to
make it unique.
Assign a type to
baselines to help
categorize them
across multiple
projects.
Click to update the

selected baseline project
with new/modified data
from the current project.
To create a baseline project, select the desired project and click Add. If
multiple projects are open, you can create a baseline for the selected
projects. (To select a project Ctrl-click on its band.) Choose to save a
copy of the current project as a new baseline or convert another project
to a new baseline.
If you choose to save the current project as a baseline, the module
creates a baseline project with the same name and data date as the
current project. To distinguish the baseline project, the module appends
the name with B1 and increments each new baseline added. For
example, if Acme Project is saved with 3 baselines the new baselines
should be saved as:
ID
Name
ACME B1
Acme Project B1
ACME B2
Acme Project B2
ACME B3
Acme Project B3
284
Before you convert a

project as a baseline, you
should copy it; it will no
longer be available in the
project hierarchy.
If you choose to convert another project as a baseline of the current

project, you are prompted to select the project to designate as the
baseline from the project hierarchy. You cannot select a project that is
currently open, nor can you select a project that already has its own
assigned baseline. The module creates a baseline project with the same
name and data date as the selected project. (To distinguish the baseline
project, the module appends the name with B1.) This new baseline
project is then removed from the project hierarchy and is no longer
available as an individual project.
You can only convert one project at a time as a baseline. If
multiple projects are open, you must select one project
before you can create the baseline project.
After you create a baseline, you can change its name and assign a
baseline type to it.
Delete a baseline You can delete a baseline from the project
database. Select the project that contains the baseline you want to delete.
Choose Project, Maintain Baselines. Select the baseline, then click
Delete.
You cannot delete an active baseline. An active baseline is
any baseline designated as the primary, secondary, or
tertiary baseline in the Assign Baselines dialog box.
Modify a baseline manually As a project progresses and changes

occur, you may want to modify a baseline project. You can restore a
baseline project, making it available again as a separate project in the
project hierarchy. Open the project that contains the baseline you want
to restore. Choose Project, Maintain Baselines. Select the baseline you
want to restore, then click Restore. Click Yes. The restored project is
placed in the same node as the project to which it was linked as a
baseline.
To learn more about
updating baselines with
new or modified data from
the current project, refer to
Updating Baselines on
page 290.
Restoring a project to modify a baseline manually is different

from updating a baseline. When you update a baseline using
the Update Baseline tool, the module updates every instance
of every data type you select. If you want some, but not all,
changes to the current project for a specific data type (such
as resource assignments) reflected in the baseline, restore
the baseline and edit the data. If you want all changes to a
data type reflected in the baseline, update the baseline.
Managing Baselines
285
The restored baseline project can be

accessed in the project hierarchy along
with its current project.
Current project
After you make changes to a restored baseline project, you can return it
as a baseline to retain the changes for comparison against the current
project. For example, you may want to revise the baseline to indicate
scope changes once the current project is underway.
286
Assigning Baselines to Projects

Use the Assign Baselines dialog box to designate the current project or
an existing baseline as the project, primary, secondary, or tertiary
baseline. The project baseline is always used to summarize a project.
The project baseline or primary baseline can be designated as the project
to use when calculating earned value (based on a setting in the Settings
tab of Project Details). The primary, secondary, and tertiary baselines
are user-defined baselines used to compare projects.
Assign the baseline to use for summarization or earned
value To choose which baseline to use for summarizing a project, open
the project for which you want to select a project baseline. Choose
Project, Assign Baselines. In the Project field, select the project to
which you want to assign a project baseline. In the Project Baseline
field, select the desired baseline or the current project. If no baseline is
designated as active, the current project is used as the baseline project.
You can assign only one project baseline to a project. You
must have the appropriate security privileges to select the
project baseline.
Assign the baselines to use for the current project Use the
Assign Baselines dialog box to choose the primary baseline for a
project. Open the projects for which you want to select a baseline.
Choose Project, Assign Baselines. In the Project field, select the project
to which you want to assign a primary baseline.
Each baseline field in the Assign Baselines dialog lists the current
project and all existing baselines for the selected project. To use an
existing baseline as the primary baseline, select an existing baseline in
the Primary field. If you do not select a value for the primary baseline,
the current project is used as the primary baseline.
Assign baselines for comparison To assign an existing baseline
as the secondary or tertiary baseline, choose Project, Assign Baselines.
In the Project field, select the project to which you want to assign
baselines. In the Secondary and Tertiary fields, select an existing
baseline or the current project. You can assign the same project as
secondary and tertiary baselines.
You can assign only one primary, secondary, and tertiary
baseline to a project. Secondary and tertiary baselines are
not required.
Managing Baselines
Select a project from the list

of open projects.
287
Select the baseline to use

for summarization or
earned value.
Baseline assignments are user-specific, meaning that each

user can choose a different version for his/her active baseline
to the current project.
288
Comparing Current and Baseline Schedules

about updating the
schedule, see Updating,
on page 295.
After a project is updated, you can quickly evaluate progress and

performance onscreen. Use a layout that shows current and baseline bars
to identify tasks that start or finish later than planned. In the list of
activities, include columns for the planned value, actual costs to date,
and earned value to identify tasks that are behind schedule or over
budget. For detailed reporting, create schedule and activity matrix
reports and resource and cost graphics. Run the Earned Value report to
analyze cost and schedule variance using the project or primary
baseline. Displaying baseline and current bars in the Gantt Chart
indicates how the schedule is progressing according to the original plan.
BL appears before any

data item that is available
from a baseline project.
A target comparison makes it easy to see variances between the current

and baseline dates. Add columns in the Activity Table for almost any
data item from the baseline project. Display activity bars that represent
baseline dates. You can also display target and variance data on the
activity bars.
When the current project is open, you can view, but not
change, baseline data. To modify the baseline, you must first
restore it as a separate project. You can also update baseline
project data using the Update Baseline utility.
This layout includes current and baseline

columns for start and finish dates.
Managing Baselines
289
Setting preferences for baseline values Choose to calculate the

earned value from the Planned or At Completion values of the project or
primary baseline. For example, based on the settings chosen, you can
add the planned duration to the BL Start date to calculate the BL Finish
date, or you can use the duration at completion to calculate the actual
baseline finish date.
To choose the type of baseline you want to use to calculate earned value,
in the Projects window, select a project. On the Project Details, Settings
tab, choose to calculate earned value using the project baseline or the
baseline you have defined as your primary baseline.
To specify how earned value is calculated, choose Admin, Admin
Preferences. On the Earned Value tab, in the Earned Value Calculation
section, choose to calculate earned value using At Completion values
with current dates, Planned values with current dates, or Planned values
with planned dates.
290
Updating Baselines
As a project progresses, certain types of project data are likely to
change. When a project is in progress and data changes, the original
baseline you created for the project may not accurately measure
performance against the current project. Likewise, creating a new
baseline may not yield accurate results for measuring performance
because some data will change during the life of the project that should
be measured against the original project data.
For example, changes to any of the following data types can affect
results when comparing a project to its baseline:
Added/dropped activities
Modified activity data including dates, costs, resources, steps,

documents, notebooks, relationships, codes, expenses, and userdefined fields
Modified project-level data including details, documents, risks,

issues, thresholds, calendars, and codes
Using Primaveras Update Baseline utility, you can update the original
baseline plan with new activity, resource/role assignment, and project
data. When updating a baseline, you can choose to update all activities
or you can apply a filter to update activities that meet the filters criteria.
You can also specify the types of data to update, including specific data
related to activities, resources, costs, thresholds, and issues.
When updating a baseline, you can select to update specific User
Defined Fields (UDFs) related to projects, the WBS, activities, steps,
and expenses. Selecting to update specific UDFs provides greater
flexibility and control about what to update, while enhancing system
performance.
You can only update one baseline at a time. You must have
the Update Project Baselines project privilege to update a
baseline.
Managing Baselines
291
Update a project baseline To update a baseline, open the project

that contains the data you want to add to the baseline. Choose Project,
Maintain Baselines. Select the baseline you want to update. Click
Update.
Select the project-level data you want to update. Choose to update all
activities or select a filter to only update activities that meet the filters
criteria. Choose to add new activities from the current project, delete
activities no longer in the current project, and/or update existing
activities. If you choose to update existing activities, click Update
Options to select the types of activity and resource/role assignment data
you want to update. To save the results of the baseline update to a file
(including errors and warnings), enter a path or select a file. After
selecting options, click Update. When the update is complete, click
View Log to view the results of the update.
Select one of these options

to update project, product,
document, WBS, risk,
issue, or threshold data,
including specific, related
UDFs.
Choose one of these

options to update activity
data.
Choose this option to run the baseline

update faster. If you choose this option,
errors are not logged during the baseline
update (see the following note).
Click to specify the types of

data to update for existing
activities.
292
Select any of these

options to update
the baseline with
data related to
activities, including
relationships, code
assignments,
constraints, and
UDFs.
Select to update resource and role assignment data, budgeted

and actual units and costs, newly added resource and role
assignments, and UDFs for activity resource assignments.
Click Help on both of the

dialog boxes displayed
above to view important
information to consider
when selecting update
baseline options.
If errors occur when updating a baseline in optimized mode,

you will not be able to determine the data item that is causing
the update to fail. To determine the data item causing the
failure, turn off the Run Optimized option and rerun the
baseline update. After the update is complete, refer to the log
file to determine which data item is causing the update to fail.
Baseline update performance is further optimized when you

log in to Primavera as an Admin Superuser.
Managing Baselines
293
Ensuring Baseline Data Is Updated

When you update a baseline, the module stores the date on which the
baseline was last updated. You can view this date in the Last Update
Date field of the Maintain Baselines dialog box. The module does not
consider the last update date when you choose the Ignore Last Update
Date option in the Update Baseline dialog box.
Primavera recommends that you select the Ignore Last Update Date
option if you plan to update different data types at different times (for
example, you will not update all baseline data each time). If you do not
select this option, some data types may not be updated from the correct
date when you run the baseline update.
294
For example:
On June 1st, you run a baseline update that includes activity steps.
On June 8th, you run a baseline update that does NOT include
activity steps.
On June 15th, you run a baseline update that includes activity steps.
You do not select the Ignore Last Update Date option.
Given this scenario, when you run the baseline update on June 15th,
activity steps are only updated from June 8th because the baseline is
updated from the last update date. If you select the Ignore Last Update
Date option, all changes to activity steps are updated regardless of the
date the baseline was last updated.
295

In this chapter:
The Update Process
Choosing a Method of Updating
Highlighting Activities for
Updating
Updating Progress for
Spotlighted Activities
Estimating Progress
Automatically
Updating Using Timesheets
Updating Activities Manually
Interrupting Activity Progress
Applying Actuals
Storing Period Performance (Past
Period Actuals)
Scheduling Projects
Leveling Resources
Recalculating Resource and Role
Assignment Costs
Managing Resource Assignments
A good project schedule can serve as a key

management tool for making decisions and
predicting whether the project will finish on
time and within budget. Update your project
regularly so you can record progress and
identify potential problems.
You can update project progress by applying
actual data to activities directly in a project
or by using timesheet updates from the
Timesheets module.
After you update the project, schedule it to
calculate the earliest start and finish dates as
well as the latest start and finish dates for
each activity and for the entire project. Level
resources in your project schedule to ensure
that resource demand does not exceed
resource availability. When you level
resources, each activity is delayed until
sufficient resources are available.
Read this chapter to learn how to update and
schedule projects, and level resources.
296
The Update Process

Once a project is underway, it is important to keep the schedule up to
date. Actual durations will probably vary from your original estimates,
and the sequence of activities may change once the work begins. In
addition, you may need to add new activities and delete unnecessary
ones. Regularly updating schedules and comparing them with baseline
schedules ensures that you are using resources effectively, monitoring
project costs against budget, and keeping abreast of actual durations and
costs so you can initiate your contingency plan if necessary.
The project controls coordinator, along with the project managers,
establishes company procedures and communicates them to all
participants. Usually, several projects at various levels of progress occur
simultaneously. Project portfolio management can be complicated
further when project managers, key resources, or other employees
involved in the process are geographically dispersed. You must consider
these factors as you establish updating guidelines.
To help develop procedures, ask questions such as these:
What data need to be assembled for the update and what methods
will be used to collect the data?
How often should projects be updated?
Are resources local or offsite?
On which project teams are resources participating?
Who on each team will be gathering the information used for the
project update?
Who needs to see the results of the update and when do they need to
see them?
What types of information need to be generated after each update to

communicate progress before the next update?
The answers to these questions help determine how you will use the
module to update projects.
Identify the types of data to collect The data to collect may
depend on whether you are updating activities or individual resource
assignments. You can update activities by simply recording actual dates
and a remaining duration. For resource assignments, enter the actual
hours to date and the hours remaining. The module can also estimate
progress automatically.
297
Determine how data will be collected Will you automatically

collect timesheet entry data for each employee from the Timesheets
module? Does your organization need to collect status from project
team members who are not assigned resources or Timesheets users?
Will you import data from other systems supported by your company,
such as an accounting system? Or will updates be handwritten on
printouts of the schedule distributed to project participants, collected
weekly by the project manager or team leader, and entered in the
module?
If you answered Yes to one or more of these questions, your update
process will probably involve more than one procedureall handled
equally well by the module.
Determine how often data should be updated Depending on
how quickly your projects change, you may want to update monthly,
weekly, or even daily. Although no rules exist for update frequency,
consider these general guidelines: if your projects never seem to be
accurate, you are not updating often enough, or the scope of your
activities is too broadyou should divide activities into smaller ones. If
you spend too much time updating, youre updating too often, or the
scope of your activities is too narrow.
Analyze and communicate data Recording progress in the
module is only the beginning of the update process; after you produce
an updated schedule, you need to analyze the results.
Examine updated project schedules using the many display and print
options available. You can first view onscreen layouts to see immediate
results, then look at project data in more detail by generating reports.
Pinpoint potential problems by comparing the current schedule to the
target plan in the Bar Chart or by displaying a Resource Usage Profile
for a graphical representation of resource use. If problems exist, you
may want to perform what-if analyses before modifying the network.
Use existing report templates, create new template specifications by
modifying existing ones, or add your own template to produce the data
you need to see.
Effective communication to all project participants is also essential to
the success of every project. Use easily understood reports and layouts
to show the project team and management what is happening. Focus on
critical activities, resource and cost overloads, and slippages, and
identify actual and required future progress.
298
Choosing a Method of Updating

You can update project schedules in several different ways. Update
progress for all activities and resources as a whole, update activities and
resources individually, update progress from timesheets, or use a
combination of these methods.
More than likely, your projects do not progress as plannedmany
activities start out-of-sequence, activities take more or less time to
complete than originally planned, or actual resource use exceeds
planned use. In these cases, update activities and resources individually
to help you forecast the effects of unforeseen progress or lack of
progress and take appropriate corrective actions. You can update
activities and/or resources manually in the Project Management module,
collect timesheet data from the Timesheets module, or use P6 Web
Access to collect activity progress from project team members who are
designated as activity Owners.
Sometimes, you may only need to estimate progress. You can choose to
auto compute actuals, then simply specify the data date and apply
actual data. Before the first update, the data date is the project start date;
once the project begins, the data date is the date up to which you are
reporting progress. The module uses the data date to determine which
activities have progressed and how much, and to calculate the remaining
durations of activities that have started. The module also notes which
activities are complete and sets their remaining durations to zero.
Most projects progress somewhere between these two situations: some
activities occur as planned and some do not. If this is the case, you can
combine the two updating methods. Allow the module to calculate a
project schedule as if the project progresses exactly as planned and then
individually update those activities and resources that have deviated
from the plan.
299
Regardless of the method you choose, the update process should proceed
in the following order:
For information on
implementing the
Timesheets module, see
1 Establish a standard update procedure that includes which method

you will use to record progress.
Depending on the method you choose, set calculation variables for
percent complete type and duration type.
2 Create a baseline plan, as discussed in Managing Baselines on
page 281.
3 Record progress on activities automatically or manually in the Project
Management module and from Timesheets module data. Use P6 Web
Access to collect progress from designated activity Owners.
Recording progress includes entering actual start and/or finish dates
(see Types of Activity Dates on page 300), updating actual resource
use/cost to date, and estimating remaining work to complete.
If collecting timesheet data from the Timesheets module, review and
approve timesheets in the Timesheet Approval application, which is
accessible from within the Project Management module and P6 Web
Access, or as a stand-alone application (if properly configured).

about combining activity
owner and Reflection
project features to collect
activity status, see the
Project Management Help
and the Administrators
Guide.
If collecting progress from activity owners, use Reflection project

features to implement a review and approval process that enables you
to examine updates to activity status and specify which, if any, you
want to merge into the active source project.
4 Apply project actuals.
5 Calculate the schedule and level resources.
6 Compare the current schedule to the baseline plan and identify
variances.
7 Analyze data through layouts and reports.
8 Make adjustments and communicate the schedule updates.
300
Types of Activity Dates

Date Field
Definition
Start
The current start date of the activity. Set to the remaining start date until the
activity is started, then set to the actual start date. An A after the Start value
indicates that it is the Actual Start; an * indicates that a Start constraint is
applied to the activity.
Finish
The current finish date of the activity. Set to the activity planned finish date while
the activity is not started, the remaining finish date while the activity is in
progress, and the actual finish date once the activity is completed. An A after the
Finish value indicates that it is the Actual Finish; an * indicates that a Finish
constraint is applied to the activity.
Actual Start
The date on which the activity actually started.
Actual Finish
The date on which the activity actually finished.
Early Start
The earliest possible date the remaining work for the activity can begin. This date
is calculated by the project scheduler based on activity relationships, schedule
constraints, and resource availability.
Early Finish
The earliest possible date the activity can finish. This date is calculated by the
project scheduler based on activity relationships, schedule constraints, and
resource availability.
Late Start
The latest possible date the remaining work for the activity must begin without
delaying the project finish date. This date is calculated by the project scheduler
based on activity relationships, schedule constraints, and resource availability.
Late Finish
The latest possible date the activity must finish without delaying the project finish
date. This date is calculated by the project scheduler based on activity
relationships, schedule constraints, and resource availability.
Planned Start
The date the activity is scheduled to begin. This date is set equal to the early start
date by the project scheduler but can be updated manually by the project manager.
This date is not changed by the project scheduler once you apply an Actual Start
date.
Planned Finish
The date the activity is scheduled to finish. This date is set equal to the early finish
date by the project scheduler but can be updated manually by the user. This date is
not changed by the project scheduler once you apply an Actual Finish date.
Remaining Start
The date the remaining work for the activity is scheduled to begin. This date is
calculated by the project scheduler but can be updated manually by the user.
Before the activity is started, the Remaining Start is the same as the Planned Start.
This is the start date that Timesheets users follow.
Remaining Finish The date the remaining work for the activity is scheduled to finish. This date is
calculated by the project scheduler but can be updated manually by the user.
Before the activity is started, the Remaining Finish is the same as the Planned
Finish. This is the finish date that Timesheets users follow.
301
Date Field
Definition
Expected Finish
The date the activity is expected to finish. Typically, this date is entered in the
Timesheets module by the primary resource. When scheduling your projects, you
may choose to use or ignore the Expected Finish dates.
Constraint Date
The date for which the activitys constraint applies. Depending on the constraint
type, this date could be a start or finish date. For example, for a Finish On
constraint, the constraint date is the date on which the activity must finish. If the
activity does not have a constraint, this field will be empty.
External Early
Start
For an activity with an external relationship, the date the external relationship was
scheduled to finish. This date may be used to calculate the start date of the current
activity during scheduling. This field is populated on import when an external
relationship is lost.
External Late
Finish
For an activity with an external relationship, the late start date of the lost external
relationship. This date may be used to calculate the finish date of the current
activity during scheduling. This field is populated on import when a successor
relationship is lost.
Suspend Date
The date on which an activitys progress was, or is planned to be, suspended.
Resume Date
The date on which an activitys progress was, or is planned to be, resumed.
302
Highlighting Activities for Updating

The Progress Spotlight feature highlights the activities that should have
been worked on during a specified timeperiod. You can also drag the
data date line to a specific date to highlight the activities that fall
between the last data date and the new data date. Once you spotlight
activities, you can automatically status them, manually update them.
Unlike selected activities,
when Progress Spotlight is
active, activities remain
spotlighted even when you
click in another area of the
workspace.
Use the Progress Spotlight feature Choose View, Progress

Spotlight, or click the Progress Spotlight icon to highlight a timeperiod
equal to the smallest increment of the displayed timescale from the
previous data date. To increase/decrease the highlighted area between
the previous data date and the new date by one or more timescale
increments, drag the data date line to the right or the left.
Update activities as described later in this chapter, or reschedule the
project immediately according to the new data date by pressing F9.
Drag the data date line Click the data-date line; when it changes to
an arrow, drag the line to the right until you reach the new data date. The
Project Management module spotlights the activities between the last
data date and the new data date. Update activities as described later in
this chapter, or reschedule the project immediately according to the new
data date by pressing F9.

about the Update Progress
dialog box, see Estimating
Progress Automatically on
page 306.
Depending on the density of the timescale above the activity bars, you
may not be able to position the data date line on the exact date and time
you want to use. In this case, enter the data date in the Update Progress
dialog box and have the Project Management module estimate progress
as of that date before you update individual activities.
303
The Project Management module spotlights

activities that should have started,
progressed, or finished between the
previous data date and the new data date in
the Gantt Chart.
304
Updating Progress for Spotlighted Activities

If activities are progressing on schedule, you may want to estimate
progress for all activities as of the new data date you specify. The
Project Management module can quickly estimate activity dates, percent
complete amounts, and remaining durations when you use the Update
Progress dialog box to update a project.
Estimating activity progress is a quick and convenient way to update
your project. The Project Management module estimates progress only
for those activities that were supposed to take place. Since progress can
occur out of sequence, you may need to update additional activities
especially if you selected activities by dragging the data date line or by
using the Progress Spotlight feature. You should also review all
incomplete activities to make sure their remaining durations, actual
dates, and percent complete amounts are realistic. Once you spotlight
activities, you can quickly update the project as on time.
You can update projects automatically, update each activity manually, or
use both methods.
Estimate progress for all spotlighted activities Spotlight the
activities for which you want to estimate progress by dragging the data
date line or by using the Progress Spotlight feature. Choose Tools,
Update Progress. Select a new data date if the one shown is not accurate.
You can not drag the new data date line to a date that is
before the old data date line.
Choose to update all activities

scheduled to work during the
current update period or only
selected activities.
305
Click Apply. For each activity in the update, Project Management module
estimates percent complete amounts as of the data date, sets dates to actual
dates if they fall before the new data date, and estimates remaining
durations for activities that are not finished as of the data date. The Project
Management module also updates resource assignments based on each
activitys revised percent complete and remaining duration while adhering
to Autocost Rules. In addition, the Project Management module takes into
account only the first price per unit in the Resource Dictionary, if more
than one price per unit for varying through dates exists, when updating
resource assignments.
If you estimate progress for selected activities that do not fall
within the update period, those activities will show no progress.
When spotlighting activities, you can only estimate progress
percent complete, remaining duration, and so onfor activities
that are within the update period. If you manually update a
spotlighted activity then run Update Progress, the module will
overwrite your manual changes.
306
Estimating Progress Automatically

If you want to estimate progress as if activities are proceeding on
schedule, you can automatically calculate actual data based on activity,
resource, and/or expense data.
Estimating activity progress is a quick and convenient way to update
your project. The module estimates progress only for those activities
that were supposed to take place. Since progress can occur out of
sequence, you may need to update additional activities.
Set Auto Compute Actuals by activity If you set the Auto
Compute Actuals option by activity, the module determines actual dates,
percent complete amounts, remaining durations, and actual and
remaining units for all assigned resources. Choose, Project, Activities,
and open a layout that contains the activities you want to automatically
update. Add a column for the Auto Compute Actuals option and mark
the checkbox next to each activity.
You should not automatically compute actuals for those
activities from which you are collecting timesheet data from
the Timesheets module; otherwise, your timesheet data are
overwritten when you apply actuals.
Mark the Auto Compute Actuals
checkbox for each activity you
want to update automatically.
The Auto Compute Actuals option is

listed in the General section of Available
Options in the Columns dialog box.
307
Set Auto Compute Actuals by resource If you set the Auto

Compute Actuals option by individual resource, the module
automatically updates actual units and remaining units using the
planned units and the activitys percent complete. Choose Enterprise,
Resources, and select the resource that you want to automatically update
when actuals are applied. Click the Details tab and mark the Auto
Compute Actuals checkbox.
To set Auto Compute

Actuals for expenses,
choose Project, Expenses,
then click the Costs tab
and mark the Auto
Compute Actuals
checkbox. Actual and
remaining costs and units
are updated.
Mark to automatically calculate

actuals for the selected resource.
You can not automatically compute actuals for those

resources from which you are collecting timesheet data from
the Timesheets module. If you choose to disable the
timesheet usage, your timesheet data are overwritten when
you apply actuals.
308
Setting Auto Compute Actuals

Setting the Auto Compute Actuals option to ON for an activity
automatically updates actual and remaining units/costs for all resources/
expenses assigned to the activity, regardless of whether the individual
resources/expenses have the Auto Compute Actuals option set to ON. If
you dont want to update all assignments, turn OFF the activitys Auto
Compute Actuals option and turn it ON only for those resources/
expenses you want updated automatically. For example, you may be
collecting actual data from some, but not all, resources through the
Timesheets module. For those resources from which you are collecting
actual data, turn OFF the activity- and resource-level Auto Compute
Actuals option, and turn it ON for those resources not reporting data
through the Timesheets module.
applying actuals, see
Interrupting Activity
Progress on page 320.
Update progress automatically Once you set the appropriate Auto

Compute Actuals options, you can update progress automatically.
Choose Tools, Apply Actuals.
309
Updating Using Timesheets

For details on using the
Timesheet Approval
application, click Help in
the Timesheet Approval
window.
If employees are entering timesheet data using the Timesheets module,

you can update activities in the Project Management module (and P6
Web Access) based on their timesheet entries. Use the Timesheet
Approval application to process timesheets submitted by Timesheets
users.
To access Timesheet Approval, you must have one of the
required security privileges to approve timesheets and the
Timesheet Approval application must be properly configured.
When enabled, you can access Timesheet Approval from
within the Project Management module and P6 Web Access,
or as a stand-alone application. For more information on
configuring access to Timesheet Approval, refer to the
Administrators Guide or to the Project Management Help.
For information on
configuring resources to
use timesheets, see the
Approve timesheets Choose Tools, Time Approval. From the

Approving As drop-down list, if necessary, choose your designated time
approval role, which is determined by your security profile.
If you have privileges to approve timesheets as a Project
Manager or a Resource Manager, but not both, the
Approving As field is read only and displays your current
timesheet approval privilege. If a timesheet approval
manager has designated timesheet approval rights to you,
this field displays, for example, Project Manager Delegate for
<project managers personal name>.
A notification message
appears at the top right of
the window when you have
resubmitted timesheets to
review.
Select the timesheet period you want to review. In the top half of the
window, select the timesheet you want to review; the window refreshes
to display the timesheet details in the bottom half of the window. Rightclick the selected timesheet and select Approve to update the project
with activity progress, or select Reject to return a timesheet to a
Timesheets user.
If you choose to reject a timesheet, you are prompted to confirm the
rejection, and to send a rejection e-mail to the associated timesheet
resource(s). Mark the checkbox to send a rejection e-mail, then click
OK. You can edit the contents of the e-mail as necessary.
If a resources timesheet is unavailable, you can enter
progress for assigned activities.
310
Select a
timesheet
period.
Click to filter
timesheets by status,
such as Action
Required, Approved,
Rejected, or Not
Submitted.
Lists each resource
with a timesheet for
the selected period,
based on your
timesheet filter
selection.
Displays activity
information for the
selected timesheet.
311
Using Timesheet Approval

For more detailed
information on using
Timesheet Approval, click
Help in the Timesheet
Approval application, or
refer to the Project
Management or P6 Web
Access Help.
As a timesheet approval manager, you can approve or reject timesheets,

notify resources about timesheet status, add timesheet notes, and run
timesheet reports. You can also determine if a resource has not started or
not submitted a particular timesheet, and assign a delegate approval
manager to process your timesheets when you can not process them
yourself (for example, while you are on vacation).
Administrative settings in the Project Management module specify
whether Resource Managers or Project Managers (or both) must review
and approve timesheets.
If you are a Resource Manager, you can review timesheets for

resources to whom you have been assigned as timesheet
approval manager.
If you are a Project Manager, you can review timesheets for

resources who are assigned to activities within projects for
which you are responsible.
If you are a timesheet approval delegate for a Resource

Manager, you can review timesheets for resources to whom the
Resource Manager has been assigned as timesheet approval
manager.
If you are a timesheet approval delegate for a Project

Manager, you can review timesheets for resources who are
assigned to activities within the project(s) for which you have
been granted approval rights. A Project Manager can delegate
approval rights to different users for each project.
Timesheet Approval (as shown on the previous page) displays a

Timesheet table (top) and Activity table (bottom). The Timesheet table
lists all timesheets you are responsible for processing during the
selected timesheet period, based on filter criteria you select (Action
Required, Submitted, Not Submitted, etc.).
The Activity table displays a breakdown of the number of regular,
overhead, and total hours the resources associated with the selected
timesheets have allocated to project activities.
In both the Timesheet table and Activity table, you can group and sort
based on predefined criteria, customize the columns that display, search
for timesheets or activities, and print the contents of the table.
312
The following table displays some of the icons available in Timesheet

Approval and describes the purpose of each icon.
Icon
Description
Click to assign a delegate user to process your timesheets when you
are not able to process them yourself. After selecting a delegate for
your resources or projects, you can activate and disable the delegate's
approval rights at any time. You can assign any Primavera user as a
delegate, with limited restrictions; when you activate a delegates
approval rights, the delegate is granted the same approval rights and
access to timesheets as you.
Click to approve the selected timesheet. You can approve any
timesheet with a status of Submitted, Resubmitted, PM Approved, or
RM Approved. The PM Approved and RM Approved status types are
only valid when two timesheet approval levels are required based on
administrative settings.
Click to reject the selected timesheet. You can reject any timesheet
with a status of Submitted, Approved, Resubmitted, PM Approved, or
RM Approved. The PM Approved and RM Approved status types are
only valid when two timesheet approval levels are required based on
administrative settings.
In the Timesheet Table, click to filter timesheets by one of the
following status types: Action Required, Submitted, Resubmitted,
Not Submitted, Approved, Rejected, or All. The Action Required
filter, which is selected by default, displays all timesheets that
currently require your approval. The Resubmitted filter displays all
resubmitted timesheets that require your approval, regardless of the
selected timesheet period. The Approved filter displays only
timesheets that you have personally approved.
In the Activity Table, click to filter activities by All Activities,
Regular Activities, or Overhead Activities. Regular Activities are
activities related to project work, while Overhead Activities are
activities not related to project work, such as vacation time.
In the Timesheet Table, click to group timesheets by None, Status,
Last Reviewer, Reviewed Date, or Timesheet Period. The Timesheet
Period grouping option is only available when you also select either
the Action Required or Resubmitted timesheet filter.
In the Activity Table, click to group activities by None, WBS,
Project, Role, or Status.
Above the appropriate table, click to customize the columns you want
to display.
Icon
313
Description
Click to send an e-mail reminder to the resource(s) associated with
the selected timesheet(s). When you choose to send an e-mail, the
subject and body of the e-mail are automatically populated based
your timesheet filter selection; you can edit the subject and body of
any e-mail.
Click to run a standard or custom timesheet report. Standard reports
are pre-defined reports and can not be edited. Custom reports are
defined by a timesheet administrator in the Project Management
module and customized for your organization.
When you run a report as a resource manager, the report displays data
for all resources whose timesheets you are responsible for processing.
When you run a report as a project manager, the report displays data
for those projects to which you have OBS access.
Next to the appropriate timesheet, click to add or view notes for the
timesheet. To quickly view the last note added for a timesheet, hover
over the icon. This icon does not appear for Not Started timesheets.
To sort the list of timesheets or activities in ascending order,

click in the heading row of the column you want to sort by.
Click the column heading again to sort in descending order.
314
Updating Activities Manually

You can also manually
update future period unit
values for assignments to
activities. For more
information, refer to
Managing Resource
In addition to updating activities automatically or using timesheets, you

can manually update data for each activity. Record actual dates, actual
resource use, and costs incurred up to the data date or time now. There
are different activity types, percent complete types, and duration types
to accommodate your scheduling requirements. You should set these
variables at the start of the project when you establish your update
procedures.

defining activity and
duration types, see
on page 211.
Set percent complete type An activitys percent complete can be

calculated according to activity duration, activity units, or a physical
percent complete that you enter for each activity. Choose Project,
Activities, and display the Activity Details General tab or add a column
for Percent Complete Type in the Activity Table.
You can add a column to

review or modify the
percent complete type.
Select the percent complete

type for the activity.
315
Select the percent complete type based on how you report progress for
the activity.
Select Physical Percent Complete when activity progress can most

easily be reported based on personal judgment. Enter the activity
percent complete.
Select Duration when activity progress can be easily reported in

terms of actual calendar days of work remaining.
Duration% Cmp = [(Planned Duration Rem Duration) / Planned Duration]
x 100
Select Units when progress is best reported based on the work effort
that has been accomplished and how much effort remains. Enter the
actual and remaining units.
Units % Cmp = [Actual Units / At Completion Units] x 100
Update actual dates Once an activity is underway, update its start

and finish dates and other status information. Choose Project, Activities
and display the Activity Details Status tab. If the activity has actually
started, mark the Started checkbox, then specify the actual start date in
the Started field. If the activity is complete, mark the Finished
checkbox, then specify the actual finish date in the Finished field.
To update any other
activity data, such as
remaining duration or
actual units, you must first
enter an actual start date
for the activity.
Update activities with Duration percent complete type In the

Activities window, select the activity to update and display the Activity
Details Status tab. In the Remaining field, type the remaining number of
workperiods needed to complete the selected activity. When you
schedule or apply actuals, the actual duration is calculated as the total
working time from the actual start date to the current data date (for inprogress activities) or to the actual finish date (for completed activities),
using the activitys calendar.
If resources are assigned to the activity, each resources remaining units
are calculated as the activitys remaining duration multiplied by its
remaining units per time.
316
Type a new remaining duration for the activity.
Update activities with Physical percent complete type In the

Activities window, select the activity to update and display the Activity
Details Status tab. Enter the physical percent complete and the
remaining duration for the activity. If resources are assigned, you must
also update each resources actual regular units.
Type the percent complete for the activity when
the percent complete type is Physical.
The module calculates the actual

duration for the activity when you apply
actuals or schedule the project.
Type a new remaining duration for the activity.
Update activities with Units percent complete type If you are

updating activities with the Units percent complete type, most likely
your focus is on resource planning and scheduling. (You may also have
specified the activity type as Resource Dependent and the Duration type
as Fixed Units/Time.) You should update the labor units (and/or
nonlabor units) for the activity, rather than the duration. If multiple
resources are assigned to an activity, you should update each resource
individually in the Resources tab. In the Activities window, select the
activity to update and display the Activity Details Resources tab.
Actual Regular Units for a

resource indicate the
actual amounts without
considering overtime units.
Actual Units include Actual
Regular Units plus Actual
Overtime Units.
317
When you update activities manually, you should turn off Auto
Compute Actuals settings; otherwise, your changes are
overwritten when you apply actuals or calculate the schedule.
Update the actual regular units and

the remaining units for each
resource.
When you update units in the

Resources tab, the Started
checkbox in the Status tab is
automatically marked.
The Labor Units amounts in the Status

tab total the amounts for all resources
assigned in the Resources tab.
The units % complete is calculated from

the actual and at completion amounts.
318
How Activity Duration, Units, and Resource

Units/Time Are Synchronized
The module automatically synchronizes the duration, labor/nonlabor units,
and resource units/time for activities so that the following equation is
always true for each activity: Duration = Units / (Resource Units/Time).
Since three variables are involved (duration, units, and units/time), when
you change the value of one variable, the module must alter the value of a
second to balance the equation.
The Duration Type setting for an activity allows you to control how the
module synchronizes these variables when any one of the equations
variables are changed.
The following table lists the value that is automatically changed to
synchronize these variables whenever the value of one of the duration type
variables is changed.
When you
change units,
this value
changes...
When you
change the
duration, this
value changes...
When you
change units/
time, this value
changes...
When you add

the first
resource, this
value changes...
When you add

additional
resources, this
value changes...
Fixed Units/
Time
Duration
Units
Duration
Units
Duration
Fixed Duration
& Units/Time
Units/Time
Units
Units
Units
Units
Fixed Units
Duration
Units/Time
Duration
Units
Duration
Fixed Duration
& Units
Units/Time
Units/Time
Units
Units
Units/Time of
each resource
Activity
duration type
319
Removing Progress from Activities

You can remove progress from an activity by removing the Actual Start
and/or Actual Finish from the activity. When the actual start or actual
finish is removed from an activity, the activitys planned units and its
durations are recalculated. How the module calculates these changes is
based on the project setting in the Project Details, Calculations Tab.
Depending on the option selected, the module will either redistribute the
remaining work on the activity by setting the planned duration equal to
the remaining duration, and setting the planned units equal to the
remaining units; or, the module can distribute the planned work by
setting the remaining duration equal to the planned duration, and setting
the remaining units equal to the planned units.
the Project Details,
Calculations tab, refer to
the Help.
If the Link Planned and At Completion for Not Started Activities

checkbox is cleared in the Resource Assignments section in the Projects
window, Calculations tab, only activity and assignment dates will be
adjusted when progress is removed from an activity.
Choose to re-distribute the remaining

work or the planned work for activities,
when progress is removed.
320
Interrupting Activity Progress

At some point in the project, you may need to stop work on an activity
for a period of time. Indicate this interruption by specifying suspend and
resume dates in the Status tab of Activity Details.
Suspend an activitys progress Display the Activity Details,
Status tab. In the Activity Table, select the activity you want to suspend,
then enter a Suspend date. When the activity resumes, enter a Resume
date. The activity must have an actual start date before you can enter a
suspend date.
Record the Suspend date as the end of the last

day on which work occurred for the activity. When
work begins again, record the Resume date.
The module calculates an actual duration for all activities based on the
amount of time actually worked. The amount of time an activitys
progress is suspended is considered nonworktime based on activity and
resource calendar definitions. You can use bar necking to graphically
display the suspended activitys nonworktime. In the Bars dialog, Bar
Settings tab, select the Calendar nonwork time option under Bar
Necking Settings. You can also show suspend and resume dates as
columns.
You can only enter suspend and resume dates on Task
Dependent and Resource Dependent activities. When you
enter a suspend or resume date, the activity is suspended or
resumed at the beginning of the specified day.
321
If you manually plan future period allocation for assignments

to activities, the Planned Units values you enter for an
assignment are not affected when you enter a suspend and
resume date for an activity; the values remain in the same
future period buckets in which you originally entered them.
However, an assignments manually-planned future period
Remaining (Early) Units are pushed out to the resume date
once you schedule the project.
322
Applying Actuals
Once progress is recorded by approving timesheets, entering actual data,
and/or setting Auto Compute Actuals options, you must apply actuals.
Applying actuals schedules activities with progress and/or that have the
Auto Compute Actuals option set. When you apply actuals, you move
the data date or time now. The module schedules activities only within
the specified timescale (between the current data date and new data
date) and calculates progress for those activities that are set to
automatically calculate actuals.
Apply actuals Open the project or EPS node that contains the
projects to schedule. Choose Tools, Apply Actuals. If you opened an
EPS node that contains multiple projects, you can choose to use the
same data date for all projects and then specify the date, or you can
choose to use a different data date for each project and then select the
dates.
Double-click to select a new data date for
the corresponding project.
Choose to use a
different data date
for each project.
If you choose to always

recalculate, all activities
are treated as Fixed Units
and Fixed Units/Time.
Click to update
the schedule.
323
Apply actuals as a service You can use Job Services to

automatically apply actuals to selected projects/EPS nodes at regularly
scheduled intervals. Choose Tools, Job Services, then click Add. Select
Apply Actuals in the Service Type field. Specify a number in the Job #
field to indicate the sequence in which the service should be performed,
if more than one service is listed. Type a brief description of the service
in the Job Name field. In the Status field, select Enabled to activate the
apply actuals service. You can suspend a service at any time by selecting
Disabled in the Status field. In the Run Job area on the Job Details tab,
schedule when the service should be run: every day at a specific time, or
weekly, every two weeks, or monthly on a day and time you specify.
Click the Job Options tab to

select the projects/EPS
nodes to which the job
service will apply actuals.
Mark the checkbox for the

project you want to use as
the Default Project. The
value of the activity
remaining duration setting
for each project is taken from
that of the Default Project.
Select the date up to which
you want to apply the open
project's/EPS nodes actuals.
You must have the appropriate access rights to set up job

services. The Job Service does not interact with the module
client when running jobs. All jobs are run on the server(s) on
which the Job Service is installed.
324
Storing Period Performance (Past Period Actuals)

Using the Store Period Performance feature, you can track actual to date
units and costs. For example, if you increase the actual this period by 50,
the Project Management module increases the actual to date by the same
amount. At the end of each financial period, reset the actual this period
values of all activities and assignments to zero by choosing Tools, Store
Period Performance. Resetting the actual this period values does not
affect actual to date values; rather, it prepares you to begin tracking new
use for the current period.
Storing period performance records actuals for the selected financial
period along with earned value and planned value, so you can track
previous periods and compare current and future trends. If past period
data changes after you store period performance, you can edit the data in
financial period columns of the Activity Table, Resource Assignments
window, and the Resources tab of Activity Details.
Your projects may be scheduled to update every two weeks, monthly, or
even quarterly. To track actual costs and progress recorded, update your
schedule at the times established in the Financial Periods dictionary,
then store period performance at the end of the update period and before
the start of the next schedule update.
To run Store Period Performance, you must be assigned the
Store Period Performance and Add/Edit Project Activities
Except Relationships project privileges.
Organizations using Primavera ProjectLink cannot run

Store Period Performance on Microsoft Project (MSP)managed projects in the Project Management module. For
more information on Primavera ProjectLink, click the Help
button on any ProjectLink screen to access the help in
Microsoft Project (available only if Primavera ProjectLink is
installed).
Link actual and actual this period units and cost To store
period performance on a project, the actual and actual this period units
and cost must be linked. Choose Enterprise, Projects. Click the Layout
Options bar and choose Show On Bottom, Project Details. In the Project
Details, Calculations tab, mark the Link Actual and Actual This Period
Units and Cost option.

For details on defining
financial periods in the
Financial Periods
dictionary, refer to the
Primavera Administrators
Guide.
325
Post actual amounts for the period Choose Tools, Store Period
Performance. The Store Period Performance dialog box lists all open
projects. For each project you want to store period performance for,
double-click in the Financial Period column to select a financial period.
The Select Financial Period dialog box lists all financial periods
predefined in the Financial Periods dictionary. If you do not want to
store period performance for a project, remove the mark from the
corresponding checkbox in the Selected column.
If any open project is read-only or checked out, the Store
Period Performance menu option is disabled.
Click to run Store Period

Performance for the
selected periods.
Double-click in the
Financial Period
column to select a
financial period.
Unmark the checkbox if you do not want to

store period performance for that project.
Click Store Now. The Project Management module stores the actual this
period values in the selected financial period for each project (regardless
of the data date or actual start dates), then sets actual this period values
to zero in anticipation of the next schedule update period.
326
You can store period performance for the same financial

period in a project more than once. When you store period
performance after it has already been stored for a period, the
module appends any new values to the period and does not
overwrite existing values (except for earned value and
planned value data which is calculated as usual; the new
earned value and planned value data overwrites the existing
period data). Also, you do not have to store period
performance sequentially (i.e., you can skip periods).
View or edit past period actual data You can view and edit past
period actual data for each financial period. To choose the range of
financial periods that are available for display as columns choose Edit,
User Preferences. In the Application tab, Columns section, select a
range of financial periods.
You must select a financial period range to display as
columns, as described above. If you do not select a range,
financial period columns are not available.
If your resources use the Timesheets module to enter time,

you should not edit past period actuals in the Project
Management module.
displaying columns, refer
to Modifying Columns on
page 446.
In the Activity Table, you can display columns for actual this period
labor and nonlabor units; labor, nonlabor, material, expense, earned
value, and planned value cost; and, earned value and planned value labor
units. In the Resource Assignments window and the Activity Details,
Resources tab, you can display columns for actual units and cost. The
available financial period columns are listed in the Financial Period
Value section. Once you display a financial period column, you can edit
the data in any field of that column.
327
Available financial period

columns in the Activity Table
When you create a financial

period, the default name is
YYYY-MM-DD (e.g., 2004-0401). The Columns dialog box
lists financial period columns
alphanumerically rather than in
the order listed in the Financial
Periods dictionary. To ensure
the proper order, you should
use the default name or add a
letter or number to the
beginning of the name (e.g., 1
Fiscal Month, 2 Fiscal Month,
etc.)
Available financial period columns in the

Resource Assignments window and the
Resources tab of Activity Details
You cannot edit past period actual data for activities that do
not have an actual start date. You can edit past period actual
data for activities that have resource assignments in the
Resource Assignments window or in the Resources tab of
Activity Details.
You can also view past period actual spreads in the Activity Usage
Profile/Spreadsheet, Resource Usage Profile/Spreadsheet, Tracking
window (in the Project Gantt/Profile and Resource Analysis layouts),
time-distributed reports, and P6 Web Access.
328
Scheduling Projects
The module employs the Critical Path Method (CPM) scheduling
technique to calculate project schedules. CPM uses activity durations
and relationships between activities to calculate project dates. This
process is performed in two phases or passes over the activities in a
project.
The first pass or forward pass calculates the early start and finish dates
for each activity, based on the start or finish dates of predecessor
activities as well as the duration of the activity.
The second pass or backward pass calculates the late start and finish
dates for each activity, based on the start or finish dates of successor
activities as well as the duration of the activity. The free float and total
float for each activity are recalculated.
You can schedule one project or all projects in a particular
EPS node.
To display and/or use the

default scheduling settings,
click Default in the
Schedule Options dialog
box.
Schedule a project Open an individual project or the node that

contains the projects you want to schedule. Choose Tools, Schedule.
The Schedule dialog box lists the number of projects to be scheduled,
along with the earliest data date of all open projects. You can change the
data dates for individual projects directly in the Projects window, or
when you apply actuals (choose Tools, Apply Actuals).

additional scheduling
options, refer to the Help.
A forecast start date is shown if you manually changed the start date of a
project by dragging the project bar to a new timeframe in the Portfolios
section of P6 Web Access or in Tracking layouts. You can choose to use
this new date instead of the projects planned date and current data date
when you schedule the project. Mark the Set Data Date and Planned
Start to Project Forecast Start During Scheduling option. If multiple
projects are open, each with a project forecast start date, the forecasted
start date is used from each project during scheduling.
Organizations using Primavera ProjectLink cannot schedule
Microsoft Project (MSP)-managed projects in the Project
Management module. For more information on Primavera
ProjectLink, refer to the Primavera ProjectLink Help in
Microsoft Project (available only if Primavera ProjectLink is
installed).You can access the help by clicking the Help button
on any ProjectLink screen.
329
If more than one project is

open, this changes to Earliest
Data Date.
Mark to record your scheduling

results in a log file, then click
the Browse button to specify a
filename and location.
When the option to ignore external

relationships is selected, mark this option
if all open-ended activities with no
successors, or with successors to
external projects are to be made critical.
Otherwise, the total float of the activities
is computed using the Schedule Finish of
the project.
Leave this option cleared to preserve activity

dates dependent on external relationships to
projects that are not included in the opened
projects.
Mark to level resources while

scheduling the open projects.
Mark to recalculate resource and
role assignment costs after you
schedule the project(s).
Select to define critical activities

either by total float or by activities
that constitute the longest path.
Choose to calculate float using the

finish date of each project for openended activities. Selecting Each
Project uses the Schedule Finish
date of each project as the latest
finish date of all activities in the
project.
Selecting Opened Projects ignores each
ects finish date and uses the latest finish
e of all projects to calculate late dates for
all activities. The Schedule Finish date for
each project is the same and equal to the
latest finish date.
Select the method for calculating total float for all activities.
Start Float is the difference between the early and late start
dates (Start Float = Late Start Early Start); Finish Float is
the difference between the early and late finish dates (Finish
Float = Late Finish Early Finish); and Smallest of Start
Float and Finish Float use the most critical float value.
330
Calculates critical float path and subpaths based on total float. Normally, the
path with Float path of 1 will be the path
made of activities that drive the activity
with the least total float.
Calculates critical float path and

sub-paths based on total float. In
this case, the float path assigned the
number 1 is comprised of activities
that drive the activity with the least
total float.
Select the WBS activity to represent

the end of the float paths. If this
option is left blank, then the entire
project is (or multiple, selected
projects are) considered in
determining all float paths.
Click the Advanced tab to specify additional options

for determining critical activities based on multiple
float paths.
Calculates the critical float path and subpaths based on free float. In this case, the
most critical path is the longest path, or the
path the drives the Schedule Finish of the
project back to the project start date.
Enter the number of float paths to
calculate; more float paths will take
longer to calculate.
331
Setting Float Paths for Multiple Projects In the Advanced tab of

the Scheduling Options dialog box, you can calculate multiple float
paths for one or more projects. Mark the Calculate multiple float paths
check box, then choose Total Float to calculate the critical float path, or
Free Float, to identify the critical path as the longest float path based on
the sequence and start and end dates of activities in the projects. In the
Display multiple float paths ending with an activity field, click the
Browse button to choose an activity or milestone to be the end of the
critical float paths. In the Specify the number of paths to calculate field,
choose the number of float paths to calculate from the total number of
activities across all projects. Enter a low number (10 or less) to optimize
performance. When you are finished, click Close.
Automatic scheduling and leveling You can also choose to
calculate the schedule each time activity data change, rescheduling
activities that have changed significantly and rescheduling any activities
affected by the change to the first activity. Mark the Schedule
Automatically When a Change Affects Dates checkbox in the General
tab of the Schedule Options dialog box to recalculate the schedule each
time a significant change is made to an activity, relationship, or
resource. If you turn off automatic scheduling, changes to activities will
not be reflected in the schedule until you calculate the schedule again.
You can also choose to level resources during automatic scheduling. To
enable leveling of resources, mark the Level Resources During
Scheduling checkbox in the General tab of the Schedule Options dialog
box.
After the forward pass, if a Must Finish by Date is specified in
the Project Details Dates tab, the backward pass is
calculated using the must finish by date rather than the
schedule end date.
Schedule project data as a service Choose Tools, Job Services,

then click Add. Select Schedule in the Service Type field. Specify a
number in the Job # field to indicate the sequence in which the service
should be performed, if more than one service is listed. Type a brief
description of the service in the Job Name field. In the Status field,
select Enabled to activate the scheduling service. You can suspend a
service at any time by selecting Disabled in the Status field. In the Run
Job area on the Job Details tab, schedule when the service should be
run: every day at a specific time, or weekly, every two weeks, or
monthly on a day and time you specify.
332
Click the Job Options tab to

select the projects/EPS
nodes the job service will
schedule.
In this example, projects are

scheduled each week on
Friday.
Mark to log information
about the service to a file
you specify.

333
Leveling Resources
Level resources in your projects to ensure that resource demand does
not exceed resource availability. Resource leveling is an automated
process that changes the start of certain activities. During leveling, the
resource requirements of all scheduled activities are compared to the
maximum quantity available at the time of leveling. An activity is
delayed if too few resources are available at any time during the
activitys duration.
Expenses are not included
when leveling resources.
You can select the resources to be leveled, and you can add leveling
priorities that specify which project or activity is leveled first when a
conflict occurs.
The maximum amount of work that a resource is capable of
performing for a given timeperiod is defined by the resources
Max Units/Time in the Units & Prices tab in the Resources
window.
Organizations using Primavera ProjectLink cannot level

resources for Microsoft Project (MSP)-managed projects in
the Project Management module. For more information on
Primavera ProjectLink, refer to the Primavera ProjectLink
Help in Microsoft Project (available only if Primavera
ProjectLink is installed). You can access the help by clicking
the Help button on any ProjectLink screen.
Level resources Open the projects that contain the resources you
want to level. Choose Tools, Level Resources. You can set several
resource leveling options to meet your requirements. Click Level after
you make your selections.
334
Mark to automatically level resources each time

you schedule a project.
Mark to recalculate all

resource and role
assignment costs after you
level resources.
Mark to level all resources,

or clear and click Select
Resources to specify the
resources to be leveled.
Mark to delay activities with
resource conflicts only up to
their late finish dates, then
type the minimum amount
of total float and specify the
maximum percentage by
which the resource
availability can be
increased.

leveling options, refer to
the Help.
For example, if resources are assigned across multiple projects, you can
determine whether to consider the resource assignments in other
projects when leveling. A leveling priority number is assigned to each
project when you add the project (in the Projects Details General tab.) In
the Level Resources dialog box, mark the checkbox to consider
assignments in other projects and specify the priority value you want to
consider.
If you mark the Preserve Scheduled Early and Late Dates checkbox, the
projects current early dates are retained before leveling. To review the
leveled early dates, choose to show the Remaining Start/Finish dates or
the Start and Finish dates. In addition, when you preserve these dates,
the module only forward-levels the schedule, which means that the early
dates of activities from the start to the finish of the project are
scheduled.
When preserving early and late dates, shows

early dates before leveling
335
Shows leveled dates
Shows leveled dates
If you clear the Preserve Scheduled Early and Late Dates checkbox, the
module also performs backward leveling. Backward leveling schedules
activities to occur as late as possible without delaying the project finish.
The module reverses the leveling process, beginning at the projects late
finish and working towards the beginning of the project. If insufficient
resources are available to schedule an activity on its late dates, the
activity is advanced to an earlier date. When the schedule is leveled
forward and backward (by clearing the checkbox to preserve scheduled
early and late dates), the projects early and late start/finish dates are
updated.
Prioritize activities during leveling To handle scheduling
conflicts that may occur during leveling, you can add priorities that
specify which project or activity is leveled first. In the Leveling
Priorities section of the Level Resources dialog box, click Add to add a
blank leveling priority to the list of leveling priorities. Select the type of
priority, then select the order in which the item specified in the priority
will be leveled. Add priorities in the order in which you want the
module to consider them.
To remove a priority, select it, then click Remove. To change the
information specified for a priority, double-click the Field Name
column, then select a new field name and/or double-click the Sort Order
column, then select Ascending or Descending.
336
Leveling priority definitions The following table defines several of

the priority and order options you can specify for leveling resources.
Priority
Ascending (Lower)
Descending (Higher)
Activity Leveling Levels higher priority

Priority
activities first
Levels lower priority

activities first
Project Leveling
Priority
Levels higher priority

projects first
Levels lower priority

projects first
Planned Start
Levels activities with earlier Levels activities with later

planned start dates first
planned start dates first
Planned Finish
Levels activities with earlier Levels activities with later

planned finish dates first
planned finish dates first
Planned Duration Levels activities with shorter Levels activities with longer
planned durations first
planned durations first
Remaining
Duration
Levels activities with shorter Levels activities with longer

remaining durations first
remaining durations first
Total Float *
Levels activities with less

total float or more critical
activities first
Early Start
Levels activities with earlier, Levels activities with later,

early start dates first
early start dates first
Early Finish

early finish dates first
early finish dates first
Late Start

late start dates first
late start dates first
Late Finish

late finish dates first
late finish dates first
Levels activities with more

total float or less critical
activities first
Indicates that the priority is available only if you mark the Level Resources
Only Within Activity Total Float checkbox in the Level Resources dialog
box.
337
Recalculating Resource and Role Assignment Costs

When changes are made to resource or role cost information, you are
prompted to recalculate costs, so that the correct values display for
activity costs in all open projects. The Recalculate Assignment Costs
command ensures that project costs reflect any updated price per time
values on activities.
For example, you should recalculate costs if you change a resources
price/time and the resource is assigned to activities, or if a resource/role
has multiple prices and the activity dates change, because the activity
cost calculation is based upon the activity start date.
In some cases, you will be prompted to recalculate costs. You can also
run this command from the Tools menu, if you have access rights to
View Resource and Role Costs.
Recalculate Assignment Costs is disabled if you do not
have the View Resource and Role Costs global privilege.
Recalculate assignment costs To update assignment costs for

activities in an open project, choose Tools, Recalculate Assignment
Costs. Click Recalculate.
Choosing this command recalculates activity costs in all
open projects.
Mark this to
synchronize overtime
factors.
The recalculate utility ignores any assignment with a Rate

Type set to Custom. The customized, manually entered
price is not overwritten when you synchronize prices.
338
In the Resources window, Details tab, you must mark the setting to
Calculate Costs from Units to recalculate assignment costs. In the
Resources window, choose View, Details, then click the Details tab.
Calculate cost when using multiple resource rates The total

cost for a resource assignment considers any changes in the price/unit
over the course of the activity. Enter a price/unit for each rate type
(defined in Admin Preferences, Rate Types tab) in the Units & Prices
tab in the Resources window. Select the rate type you want this
assignment to use in the Resources tab in Activity Details. The cost of
the resource assignment is based on the rate type assigned to the
resource assignment.
using multiple resource
rates and rate types, see
the Help.
For example, a three-day activity has a resource that works 8 hours a

day. The price/unit for the resource for the first two days is $10/hour,
and the price/unit for the third day is $30/hour. The cost of the first 16
hours of the resource assignment is $160 (16 hours x $10.00/hour). The
cost for the last 8 hours of the resource assignment is $240 (8 hours x
$30.00/hour). The total cost for the resource is $400.00 ($160.00 +
$240.00).
If you have resources with shifts that use timesheets, costs
are calculated using the price of the first shift for the
resource.
339
Managing Resource Assignments

Use the Resource Assignments window to add and view all resource
assignments, grouped by resource, for the currently opened project. In
the Resource Usage spreadsheet, you can display resource cost and
quantity information and manually update future period assignment
data.
Display the Resource Usage Spreadsheet Choose Project,
Resource Assignments, or from the Activities view, click the Options
display bar, select Show on Bottom, then choose Resource Usage
Spreadsheet. This following image is from the Resource Assignments
view:
When grouped by Resource, click to assign
an activity to the resource.
Use the details tabs to

view or assign resource
assignment properties
such as cost account,
price/unit, rate type, and
planning information.
Group and sort resource assignments Click the Display

Options bar and choose Group and Sort. Choose one of the predefined
group and sort options, or choose Customize.
340
You can manually plan

allocation for an
assignment before or after
progress has started on the
assignment. For detailed
instructions on manually
planning/updating future
period assignment buckets,
refer to Manually Planning
Future Period
Assignments on page 235,
then refer to the Help for
detailed guidelines to
consider.
Manually update assignment data In the Resource Usage

Spreadsheet (in both the Activities and Resource Assignments
windows), you can manually update values for an assignments
Budgeted Units and Remaining (Early) Units. For example, if work on
an activity is not proceeding according to plan, and the future work
planned to be performed on an activity cannot be accurately captured by
using linearly spread units, you can manually update the assignments
Budgeted Units and/or Remaining (Early) Units to reflect the new plan.
341
In this chapter:
Setting Summarization Options
Summarizing Project Data
You can summarize and save resource

quantity, cost, and/or custom user field
information from an enterprise project
structure (EPS) node or a projects work
breakdown structure (WBS). You can then
view summary data such as original budget
and other cost values at various levels of the
EPS in the Project Management module, as
well as in P6 Web Access.
This chapter explains how to summarize data
on-the-fly or at a regularly scheduled
interval you specify.
342
Setting Summarization Options

Before you can summarize information, you need to specify which
projects should be summarized and the work breakdown structure
(WBS) level to which data should be summarized. For example, you
may want to analyze only specific projects in the enterprise project
structure (EPS) or concentrate on information that resides at a particular
WBS level or below.
Administrators can further
define summarization
options by editing registry
settings and administrative
preferences. Refer to the
Administrators Guide for
more information.
Set summarization options Choose Enterprise, Projects. Select the

project you want to summarize. Click the Settings tab in Project Details.
In the Summarize to WBS Level field, specify the maximum WBS level
to which the project can be summarized.
This number
indicates the level to
which others will be
able to display within
P6 Web Access.
The Last Summarized On field displays the date when data were last
summarized for the project.
Mark the Contains Summarized Data Only checkbox if you
plan to link to project data in other applications.
On the Options tab of Admin Preferences, your administrator

can choose to summarize resource and role assignment data
by calendar intervals, financial period intervals, or both.
These settings determine how summarized assignment data
is displayed in charts and spreadsheets in P6 Web Access.
For example, if assignment data is not summarized by
financial period, financial period timescale intervals are not
available in P6 Web Access. For more information on these
options, refer to the Primavera Administrators Guide.
343
Summarizing Project Data

You can summarize data at any time, using the Tools, Summarize
command, or you can use the Job Services option to schedule a time
when data are regularly summarized. For example, set the module to
summarize every Monday at 8:00 a.m. In each case, project data are
summarized according to the settings you specify and the new summary
values are saved to the project database, overwriting any previously
calculated summary data.
You can view and report on summarized data in the Project
Management module and in P6 Web Access.
You can also summarize a
single project or a specific
group of projects. Select
the projects you want to
summarize in the EPS,
then right-click and choose
Summarize Project.
Click Yes.
Summarize project data manually Choose Enterprise, Projects.

Choose Tools, Summarize, then select to summarize the open projects in
the current view, all projects in the EPS (includes both open and closed
projects but excludes summary only projects), or summary-only projects
(those projects for which the Contains Summarized Data Only checkbox
is marked in the Project Details Settings tab).
If you choose to summarize all projects, data are also
summarized for each EPS node after the project summaries
are saved to the database.
Summarize project data as a non-distributed job service

Choose Tools, Job Services, then click Add. Select Summarize in the
Service Type field. Specify a number in the Job # field to indicate the
sequence in which the service should be performed, if more than one
service is listed. Type a brief description of the service in the Job Name
field. In the Status field, select Enabled to activate the summary service.
You can suspend a service at any time by selecting Disabled in the
Status field. In the Run Job area on the Job Details tab, schedule when
the service should be run: every day at a specific time, or weekly, every
two weeks, or monthly on a day and time you specify.
344
In this example, projects

are scheduled and then
summarized at the end of
each two-week period.
Mark to summarize
projects immediately
after they are scheduled.

about the service to a file
you specify.

the Primavera Distributed
Job Service, refer to the
Summarize project data as a distributed job service

Primavera distributed job services (PDJS) enable large summarization
jobs to be separated into smaller jobs by running the services
concurrently on multiple servers. For example, you can summarize an
EPS with four EPS nodes (projects) in two, three, or four separate
summarization jobs.
345
Refer to the following two figures. The first figure shows that Job #1 is
summarizing 2 EPS nodes (Custom and Specs). The second figure
shows that Job #2 is summarizing two different EPS nodes (Assembly
and Facilities). These EPS nodes are all part of the same EPS.
Job 1 is summarizing the

data in two EPS nodes of
a single project, Custom
and Specs.
346
Job 2 is also
summarizing the data
in two EPS nodes of a
single project,
Assembly and
Facilities.
The PDJS will run Job #1 and Job #2 concurrently on different PDJS
servers. When Job #2 is complete, the PDJS will summarize the
enterprise-level data as a separate job.
Before running the PDJS, consult your administrator to
confirm that the PDJS has been installed and configured on
your network.
When running concurrent jobs, do not mix Summary jobs

with non-Summary jobs. If you mix different job types with
Summary jobs, the PDJS will run the jobs in sequence (not
concurrently). As a result, the enterprise-level data will not be
summarized.
347
To set up a PDJS summarization job, choose Tools, Job Services, then

click Add. Select Summarize in the Service Type field. Specify a
should be performed. Type a brief description of the service in the Job
Name field. In the Status field, select Enabled to activate the summary
service. You can suspend a service at any time by selecting Disabled in
the Status field. For Job 1, in the Run Job area on the Job Details tab,
schedule when the service should be run: every day at a specific time, or
weekly, every two weeks, or monthly on a day and time you specify. For
each subsequent job, in the Run Job area on the Job Details tab, select
the option to run the job Immediately after previous job# (as shown in
the following figure). For each job, in the Job Options tab, assign the
EPS nodes you want to include in the job (as shown in the previous
figures).
348
Ideally, the number of concurrent jobs running at any one

time should not exceed the number of machines configured
to run the PDJS (Controller and PDJS servers). There is no
restriction on the maximum number of concurrent jobs
allowed to run, however there may be performance issues if
the number of concurrent jobs exceeds the number of
machines.
349
How Data Is Summarized

You can summarize data for all projects in the EPS. Summary
information is calculated and displayed for costs and quantities, custom
user fields, dates, durations, float, progress, baselines, variances, and
special cases for activity, resource, and cost data. The following
paragraphs explain how the module summarizes specific data.
Costs and quantities Cost and quantity data items, such as planned
cost and planned quantity, are totaled by adding the values for each
activity in the summary.
User-defined fields User-defined fields are summarized according
to type. For example, items representing start dates show the earliest
start date, and items for finish dates show the latest finish dates. A
numeric user-defined field is totaled for the summarized activities. A
text-based user-defined field displays a blank unless values for all
activities are the same.
Dates If you display early dates, the earliest early (or actual) start date
and the latest early (or actual) finish date are shown. The same rules
apply for late dates and baseline early and late dates.
Durations Planned and remaining duration values are summarized.
For activities with no progress, the planned and remaining durations are
the number of workperiods between the earliest early start and the latest
early finish dates.
If the summary activity has an actual start date, planned duration is
calculated from the actual start date to the latest early finish date; the
remaining duration is calculated from the internal early start date to
the latest early finish date.
(The module keeps track of the early start date for each activity, even
when you assign an actual start date; this is referred to as the internal
early start date of the remaining duration.)
If the summary activity is 100 percent complete, planned duration is
calculated as the difference between the actual start date and the actual
finish date; the remaining duration is zero.
350
Float You can base total float of the summarized data on the start
dates, finish dates, or most critical dates. To set this option, choose
Tools, Schedule, Options. On the General tab, select how you want to
calculate total float in the Compute Total Float As field. On the
Advanced tab, choose how you want to calculate multiple float paths.
Progress The simplest measure of percent complete uses duration to
compare the amount of time remaining to complete the activities to their
planned duration. In this case, the following ratio is used for each group:
[(Summary Current Planned Duration Summary Remaining Duration) /
Summary Current Planned Duration] x 100
Baseline data, comparison data, and variances You classify

each baseline, comparison, or variance data item as either a date or a
duration data item. See the Dates and Durations sections on the
previous page.
351

In this chapter:
Adding Issues
Assigning Tracking Layouts to
Issues
Using the Issue Navigator
Adding Thresholds
Threshold Parameter Definitions
Monitoring Thresholds
Assigning Tracking Layouts to
Thresholds
Issues are known problems within a project

plan that require attention or corrective
action. You can manually create issues and
you can generate issues automatically by
defining project thresholds. You can
associate these issues with work breakdown
structure (WBS) elements, activities, or
resources.
Create a threshold by selecting a parameter,
such as start date variance; setting a lower
threshold value for the threshold, such as 2
days; and applying the threshold to a specific
WBS element, or area, of your project plan.
After you define a threshold, the module
monitors and generates the thresholds issues
for you.
This chapter describes how to add issues and
thresholds and use them to help you manage
your projects.
352
Adding Issues
Issues identify problems within a schedule that must be addressed
before the project can be completed. Issues can be added manually to
projects, or you can use thresholds to generate them automatically. (See
Adding Thresholds on page 358.) Once you create an issue, you can
assign a priority level, tracking layout, and responsible manager to it.
You can also e-mail the issues details, along with your comments, to
any member of the projects staff. Use the Issue Navigator feature to
quickly view all the information associated with an issue.
Add an issue Choose Project, Issues. If Issue Details are not
displayed, click the Display Options bar, then choose Issue Details (the
box next to the command should be marked). Click Add, then click the
General tab. Type the issues name. Select the manager responsible for
addressing the issue. Responsible managers are defined in the
organizational breakdown structure (OBS). Click the Browse button in
the Tracking Layout field to select the layout that best displays the issue.
The system date is automatically entered in the Date Identified field.
Click the Browse button if you need to select a different date. Your user
name is automatically entered in the Identified By field. You can type
another user name of the individual who identified the issue. If the issue
was generated by running the threshold monitor, Monitor is displayed.
353
You can group and sort

issues by various detail
items, such as project, EPS,
or WBS. Click the Display
Options bar, then choose
Group and Sort By.
Use the Date Identified and Resolution Date

fields to track how long an issue is open and how
long it took to resolve closed issues.
You can only modify fields

in the Details tab for issues
you have added; these
fields are Read-Only if the
issues are generated by a
monitoring threshold.
The issue status is

automatically set to
Open; the priority is set
to Normal. Change
these fields as required.
Define an issues details and add notes Choose Project, Issues.

Click the Details tab, then type the issues actual (numeric) value in the
Actual Value field. To associate the issue with a WBS element other
than the root WBS element, click the Browse button in the Applies to
WBS field and select the element. You can also associate the issue with
a resource or activity.
To enter additional information about the issue, click the Notes tab, then
type your notes. You can use HTML editing features, which include
formatting text, inserting pictures, copying and pasting information
from other document files (while retaining formatting), and adding
hyperlinks.
If the threshold monitor generated the selected issue, the
parameter name is listed in the Threshold Parameter field in
the Details tab.
354
To change the list of

recipients, click the Display
Options bar on the Assign
Recipients dialog box, and
choose Resources or
Users.
Send e-mail about an issue In the Project Issues window or the

Issue Navigator dialog box (choose Tools, Issue Navigator), select the
issue about which you want to send e-mail, then click Notify. To specify
the individuals to whom you want to send e-mail, click Add. Choose
Select Recipient from a Dialog to select a recipient from a list of
resources or users, click OK, then select a recipient from the Assign
Recipients dialog box. Click the Assign button. To remove a recipient
from the recipient list, select the recipient, then click Remove.
Click to add recipients to the

e-mail, then choose how you
want to select recipients.
To type a recipients e-mail address directly, choose Manually

Add a New Recipient, click OK, then type the recipients
information.
Type a subject for the e-mail, then type any additional comments about
the issue in the Contents area. Click Send All.
355
View and add to an issues history Choose Project, Issues. Select

an issue, then click Issue History.
Type any additional

comments about the
issue, then click Add.
356
Assigning Tracking Layouts to Issues

Assign a tracking layout to an issue to graphically display the
information surrounding the issue, then use the Issue Navigator (choose
Tools, Issue Navigator) to open this layout in the Tracking window.
Assign a tracking layout to an issue Choose Project, Issues. If
Issue Details are not displayed, click the Display Options bar, then
choose Issue Details (the box next to the command should be marked).
Select the issue to which you want to assign a tracking layout. Click the
General tab, then click the Browse button in the Tracking Layout field.
Select the tracking layout you want to assign, then click the Select
button.
This tracking layout shows

total costs over time.
357
Using the Issue Navigator

The Issue Navigator helps to provide you with the information you need
regarding a particular issue so you can quickly resolve it. Select an issue
that you added or was generated automatically and choose to jump to its
associated tracking layout; activity, WBS, or resource assignment; or
more details. You can also send an e-mail to notify other users about the
issue.
Use the Issue Navigator Choose Tools, Issue Navigator. Select the
issue whose details you want to view, click the appropriate button to
display the information you want to view about the issue. For example,
click Tracking to immediately display the Tracking window already
open to the issues associated tracking layout. The associated tracking
layout, activity, WBS, and/or resource for an issue are specified in the
Project Issues window (if manually entered), or in the Project
Thresholds window (if generated automatically).
If a button is unavailable, it
means the issue is not
associated with that topic.
You can automatically display the Issue Navigator each time

you open the module. Choose Edit, User Preferences, then
click the Application tab. Mark the Show the Issue Navigator
Dialog at Startup checkbox.
358
Adding Thresholds
Project thresholds consist of parameters assigned to WBS elements;
they are used to monitor projects and generate issues. For example, you
may set a threshold with the Cost % of Planned parameter and an upper
threshold value of 100 percent. When the actual cost of the specified
WBS element reaches 100 percent of the planned cost, the module
generates an issue.
You can assign thresholds to WBS elements at the activity or WBS
level. If you monitor a project at the WBS activity level, the module
reviews and reports issues for each activity that violates the threshold. If
you monitor a project at the WBS level, the module reviews and reports
the WBS summary level data rather than at the activity level. For
example, if an activity within a particular WBS level has a start date
variance of 1, but the start date variance at the WBS level is 0, an issue
is not generated even though you may be monitoring for a lower
threshold of 1.
about each parameter, see
Threshold Parameter
Definitions on page 361.
Add a threshold Choose Project, Thresholds. Click Add, then click

the General tab. Select a threshold parameter. If you enter a lower and
upper threshold limit, an issue is generated for any WBS element/
activity that falls outside the specified range. For example, enter 2 days
as the lower limit and 10 days as the upper limit for a total float
threshold. You are notified when any WBS element/activity has a total
float less than or equal to 2 days and greater than or equal to 10 days.
The module automatically enters the type of value that corresponds to
the selected threshold.
Select the WBS element you want the threshold to monitor, then select
whether to monitor it at the WBS or activity level. If you select activity,
the threshold will review activities in the specified WBS and in lowerlevel elements of that WBS.
The manager responsible for addressing the issues generated by the
threshold is automatically assigned when you select a WBS element.
Responsible managers are defined in the OBS. Click the Browse button
in the Tracking Layout field to select the layout that best displays the
threshold problem area.
359
The threshold status is automatically set to Enabled. If you do

not want to use it to monitor the project, select Disabled. You
can also change the thresholds issue priority.
Specify the timespan to monitor Choose Project, Thresholds.

Select the threshold whose details you want to define, then click the
Details tab. Click the Browse button in the From Date and To Date fields
and select the dates for which the threshold should monitor WBS
elements or activities. The module checks only those WBS elements or
activities whose start dates are after the From Date and whose finish
dates are before the To Date.
To monitor all defined
thresholds, choose Tools,
Monitor Thresholds.
Monitor the threshold Once you define a threshold parameter, you

need to monitor it to generate any applicable issues. In the Project
Thresholds window, select the threshold you want to monitor, then click
Monitor. A list of any issues generated are displayed in the Details tab.
360
View threshold issues You can quickly view the issues generated
by a particular threshold. Select the threshold whose issues you want to
review, then click the Details tab. Select the issue whose details you
want to view, then click Go To.
Click to jump to the Issues

window for the selected issue.
View a list of issues for the

selected threshold.
Group, sort, and filter thresholds From the Project Thresholds

window, click the Display Options bar, then choose Filter By or Group
and Sort By and the option that describes how you want to view
thresholds.
361
Threshold Parameter Definitions

A threshold consists of a parameter, or type, and a lower and/or upper
threshold value. The module generates an issue automatically when a
threshold parameter is below or equal to the lower threshold or equal to
or above the upper threshold value.
The following paragraphs define the available threshold parameters.
Accounting Variance (AV) An Accounting Variance (AV) threshold
value is expressed as a monetary value. An issue is generated if the
Accounting Variance (the difference between the activitys planned cost
according to the schedule and the actual cost of performing the activity)
falls beyond the threshold values.
Accounting Variance is computed as AV = Planned Value Cost Actual
Cost.
A negative value indicates that actual costs have exceeded the scheduled
costs. A positive value indicates that actuals costs have not reached the
scheduled costs.
If the lower threshold value is zero, an issue is generated as soon as
actual costs are greater than scheduled costs.
Cost % of Planned Cost % of Planned threshold values are expressed
as a percentage. An issue is generated if the ratio of the activitys actual
cost to its planned cost (actual cost / planned cost * 100) falls beyond
the threshold values.
Actual cost is the same as Actual Cost, and planned cost is the same as
Budget at Completion (BAC).
The Cost % of Planned will reach 100 percent when the actual cost
reaches the planned cost. The Cost % of Planned may be greater than
100 percent.
CPI Cost Performance Index A Cost Performance Index (CPI)
threshold value is expressed as a ratio. An issue is generated if the CPI
falls beyond the threshold values.
The Cost Performance Index is computed as CPI = Earned Value Cost /
Actual Cost. A value less than one indicates that actual costs have
exceeded the value of work performed.
362
If the lower threshold value is one, an issue is generated whenever the

actual costs exceed the value of the work performed.
Cost Variance (CV) A Cost Variance (CV) threshold value is
expressed as a monetary value. An issue is generated if the CV (the
difference between the activitys earned value and the actual cost of
performing the activity) falls beyond the threshold values.
Cost Variance is computed as CV = Earned Value Cost Actual Cost. A
negative value indicates that actual costs have exceeded the value of
work performed, which may be considered a cost overrun.
If the lower threshold value is zero, an issue is generated as soon as
actual cost of the work is greater than the value of the work. A larger
negative value for the threshold indicates that a certain amount of cost
overrun may be tolerated before an issue is generated.
Cost Variance Index (CVI) A Cost Variance Index (CVI) threshold
value is expressed as a ratio. An issue is generated if the CVI (the ratio
of the cost variance to the earned value of work performed) falls beyond
The Cost Variance Index is computed as CVI = Cost Variance (CV) /
Earned Value Cost.
A value less than zero indicates that actual costs have exceeded the
value of work performed.
If the lower threshold value is zero, an issue is generated whenever the
actual costs exceed the value of the work performed.
Duration % of Planned A Duration % of planned threshold value is
expressed as a percentage. An issue is generated if the ratio of the
activitys actual duration to its planned duration (actual duration /
planned duration * 100) falls beyond the threshold values.
The ratio of actual duration to planned duration may be greater than
100.
Finish Date Variance A Finish Date Variance threshold value is a
specified number of days. An issue is generated if the difference
between the activitys planned and current finish date (calculated as
Planned Finish Date Finish Date) falls beyond the threshold values.
363
If an activitys status is Not Started or Active, then the Finish date will
be the Planned Finish date, and the finish date variance is always zero. If
an activitys status is Completed, then Finish date is the actual finish
date.
A negative value for Finish Date Variance indicates that the current
finish date is later than the planned finish date.
Free Float A Free Float threshold value is a specified number of days.
An issue is generated if an activitys free float (the amount of time the
activity can be delayed without delaying the Early Start of any successor
activity) falls beyond the threshold values.
Free Float threshold monitoring can only be applied at the activity level,
not at the WBS level.
Schedule Performance Index (SPI) A Schedule Performance
Index (SPI) threshold value is expressed as a ratio. An issue is generated
if the Schedule Performance Index (the ratio of the earned value of work
performed to the planned cost of work that was scheduled) falls beyond
The Schedule Performance Index is computed as SPI = Earned Value
Cost / Planned Value Cost. A value less than one indicates that less work
was actually performed than was scheduled.
If the threshold value is one, an issue is generated whenever the value of
the work performed falls below the expected cost of performing that
work, according to the schedule.
Start Date Variance A Start Date Variance threshold value is a
specified number of days. An issue is generated if the difference
between the activitys planned and current start dates (calculated as
Planned Start Date Start Date) falls beyond the threshold values.
If an activitys status is Not Started, then the Start date will be the
Planned Start date, and the start date variance is always zero. If an
activitys status is Started or Completed, then Start date is the actual
start date.
Schedule Variance (SV) A Schedule Variance (SV) threshold value
is expressed as a monetary value. An issue is generated if the Schedule
Variance (the difference between the activitys earned value and the
planned value) falls beyond the threshold values.
364
Schedule Variance is computed as SV = Earned Value Cost Planned

Value Cost. A negative value indicates that less work was actually
performed than was scheduled. The activity may be considered behind
schedule.
If the threshold value is zero, an issue is generated as soon as the earned
value of the work performed falls below the amount of work that was
supposed to be performed, according to the schedule. A larger negative
value for a Schedule Variance threshold indicates that an activity may be
behind schedule by that amount before an issue is generated.
Schedule Variance Index (SVI) A Schedule Variance Index (SVI)
threshold value is expressed as a ratio. An issue is generated if the
Schedule Variance Index (the ratio of the schedule variance to the
planned value) falls beyond the threshold values.
The Schedule Variance Index is computed as SVI = Schedule Variance
(SV) / Planned Value Cost. A value less than zero indicates that the
value of the work performed is less than what was scheduled.
If the threshold value is zero, an issue is generated whenever the value
of the work performed falls below the expected cost of performing that
work, according to the schedule.
Total Float A Total Float threshold value is a specified number of
days. An issue is generated if an activitys total float (the amount of time
the activity can be delayed without delaying the project finish date) falls
beyond the threshold values.
Variance at Completion (VAC) A Variance at Completion (VAC)
threshold value is expressed as a monetary value. An issue is generated
if the Variance At Completion (the planned total cost latest total cost
estimate) falls beyond the threshold values.
Variance At Completion may also be expressed as VAC = Budget at
Completion (BAC) Estimate At Completion (EAC).
A negative value indicates an estimated total cost overrun. If the
threshold value is zero, an issue is generated as soon as the latest
estimate for total cost exceeds the planned total cost. A larger negative
value for a Variance At Completion threshold indicates that a certain
amount of estimated total cost overrun may be tolerated before an issue
is generated.
365
Monitoring Thresholds
You can run all the thresholds assigned to a project at one time, or you
can run only individual thresholds as needed.
Monitor all thresholds at once When the project is open, choose
Tools, Monitor Thresholds. To use the timeperiod specified for each
threshold, choose Use Original Threshold Monitor Windows. To specify
a new timeperiod that will apply to all thresholds, choose Use New
Threshold Monitor Window, then click the Browse buttons in the From
Date and To Date fields to select a new set of dates. Click Monitor.
Monitor a specific threshold Choose Project, Thresholds. Select

the threshold you want to monitor. Click Monitor.
You cannot monitor a threshold whose status is Disabled. To
change a thresholds status, double-click the status you want
to change in the Project Thresholds window.
366
Assigning Tracking Layouts to Thresholds

Assign a tracking layout to a threshold to graphically display the
information surrounding the threshold and the issues it generates, then
use the Issue Navigator (choose Tools, Issue Navigator) to open this
layout in the Tracking window.
Assign a tracking layout to a threshold Choose Project,
Thresholds. Select the threshold to which you want to assign a tracking
layout. Click the General tab, then click the Browse button in the
Tracking Layout field. Select the tracking layout you want to assign,
then click the Select button.
Select the tracking layout to

associate with the threshold
when an issue is generated.
Any issues that are
generated display using this
tracking layout.
367
Managing Risks
In this chapter:
Adding Risks
Calculating Exposure Values
Calculating a Risks Impact
Creating and Deleting Risk Types
Customizing Risk Layouts
The integrated risk management feature

enables you to identify, categorize, and
prioritize potential risks associated with
specific work breakdown structure (WBS)
elements and resources. You can also create
risk control plans and assign a probability of
occurrence and an organizational breakdown
structure (OBS) element to each risk. A
risks assigned OBS element is the person or
project manager responsible for managing
the risk.
This chapter describes how to add risks and
risk types, calculate a risks impact, and
customize how you view risks.
368
Adding Risks
Identify a risk by entering its name, status, risk type, priority level, and
date it was identified. You can also specify which WBS element and
resources the risk will affect and the OBS element responsible for
controlling the risk.
Add a risk Choose Project, Risks. Click the Display Options bar, then
click Risk Details (the checkmark next to the command should be
marked). Click Add, then click the General tab. Type the risks name,
then select the WBS element and the resource that the risk will affect. If
you do not specify a resource, the module considers all resources in the
selected WBS.
Select the manager responsible for controlling the risk. Responsible
managers are defined in the organizational breakdown structure (OBS).
Select the type of risk you are creating, and specify the priority level to
assign to the risk.
To specify a risk identification date other

than the current date, click the Browse
button and select a new date.
Managing Risks
369
Add a risk description and control plan Click the Description

tab, then type a description of the risk. To enter a description of the
risks control plan, click the Control tab, then type the description in the
Risk Control Plan field. You can use HTML editing features in both
tabs; these features include formatting text, inserting pictures, copying
and pasting information from other document files (while retaining
formatting), and adding hyperlinks.
370
Calculating Exposure Values

The module uses a risks probability of occurrence, date of potential
impact, and resource unit and expense estimates to calculate a risks net
exposure values. These exposure values are then used to determine the
risks impact on the projects cost, float, and finish date. The current
project data are not changed.
Calculate a risks exposure values Choose Project, Risks. Click
the Display Options bar, then click Risk Details (the checkmark next to
the command should be marked). Select the risk whose exposure values
you want to calculate, then click the Impact tab. In the Impact area,
specify the as-of impact date. The module considers only those
activities for the selected WBS/resource that are scheduled to start on or
after the impact date. Type the estimated number of labor and nonlabor,
or material, time units and the estimated total cost of expenses the risk
will incur, if the risk occurs. Type or select a percent estimate of the
probability that the risk will occur. The module calculates and displays
the risks exposure values as Exposure = Impact x Probability.
This number is calculated using the
The Current fields contain the remaining number of labor

and nonlabor, or material, time units and the current
remaining expenses, for the WBS and resource assigned
to the currently selected risk.
Managing Risks
371
Calculating a Risks Impact

The module uses the top-down estimation method to apply a risks
exposure values and calculate impact on a projects schedule, cost, and
duration. The module applies these values to activities that finish on or
after the risks impact date. This does not include completed, locked, or
milestone activities.
When applying exposure values, the module uses any WBS elements
and activities the WBS contains, along with resource assignments and
information (such as price and availability), then schedules the project
according to your current scheduling preferences.
You must first determine a risks exposure values on the
Impact tab before calculating a risks impact.
Calculate a risks impact Schedule the project whose risk impact

you want to calculate, then choose Project, Risks. Select the risk whose
impact you want to calculate. Click Calc Impact in the command bar.
The module applies any resource units, then schedules the project using
the current scheduling options.
Use this dialog box to view the
selected risks effect on the
projects schedule cost and
duration.
The number of activities the risk will

affect. This is not the total number of
activities contained in the WBS element.
372
Creating and Deleting Risk Types

You can create risk types, or categories of possible risks, that you can
assign to risks in any project. You can use risk types to classify and
standardize risks for all projects.
Add a new risk type Choose Admin, Admin Categories. Click the
Risk Types tab, then click Add. Type the name of the new risk type.
To move a risk type up or down in the list,
select it, then click Shift Up or Shift Down.
Delete a risk type Choose Admin, Admin Categories. Click the Risk
Types tab, then select a risk. Click Delete. Click Yes to delete it.
Managing Risks
373
Customizing Risk Layouts

Use the Columns dialog box to specify which columns you want to
display in the current risk spreadsheet layout.
Customize risk layout columns In the Project Risks window, click
the Display Options bar and choose Columns, Customize.
Double-arrow buttons add/remove all available

columns in the current layout; single-arrow buttons
add/remove selected items in the current layout.
Click to change the column

title of a selected item.
Modify the columns shown in the risk layout by clicking the right/left
arrow buttons to move data items between the Available Options and
Selected Options columns.
Items listed in the Selected Options column will appear in the current
layout when you click OK. Click Apply to see your changes without
closing the dialog box.
Filter, group, and sort risk layouts You can select the risks you
want to view and specify how you want to display them, and you can
restrict which risks you view. In the Project Risks window, click the
Display Options bar. Choose Filter By or Group and Sort By and the
option that best describes how you want to view risks.
374
This risk layout is grouped

by WBS element and
filtered by open risks for
quick analysis.
375
Maintaining a Projects Document

Library
In this chapter:
Viewing a Document Library and
Adding/Deleting Work Products
and Documents
Specifying Document Location
References
Assigning Work Products and
Documents
Use the Work Products and Documents

feature to catalog and track all projectrelated documents and deliverables. This
includes guidelines, procedures, standards,
plans, design templates, worksheets, and all
types of project deliverables.
This chapter describes how to maintain your
projects library of work products and
documents.
376
Viewing a Document Library and Adding/Deleting

Work Products and Documents
A document can be a reference document for an activity, by providing
standards and guidelines for performing an activity's work, or it can be
formally identified as a project standard. A document can also be a work
product or activity output, such as testing plans and blueprints. You can
also identify project deliverables, or documents that will be delivered to
the end user or customer at the end of the project.
Use the Work Products and Documents feature to maintain general
information about project documents, such as revision date, location,
and author. Store the document files on a network file server,
configuration management system, or Web site, depending on your
project requirements.
You can assign work products and documents from WBS Details (and
assign them to specific WBS elements to track work) or from Work
Products and Documents Details. You can also indicate whether the
documents are public or private.
View a projects document library Choose Project, Work
Products and Documents. Click the Display Options bar and choose WP
& Doc Details. (The checkbox next to the command should be marked.)
Add a work product or document Open the project to which you
want to add a work product or document. Choose Project, Work
Products and Documents. Click the Title column label to display the
documents hierarchy. (An outline symbol in the Title column label
indicates a hierarchy display.) Select the document immediately above
and at the same level as the document you want to add, then click Add.
Click the General tab in Work Products and Document Details. Type a
name for the document, then add general information about the
document.
Maintaining a Projects Document Library
377
Enter the selected

documents reference
or catalog number.
Track the documents version

by entering the corresponding
number and last update date.
Set up document categories by choosing Admin,

Admin Categories; use categories to organize
different types of documents.
Mark to indicate the

document is a project
deliverable.
Set up a document
status by choosing
Admin, Admin
Categories.
Enter a document description Click the Description tab and type

a description for the document. You can use the HTML editing features,
adding hyperlinks.
Delete document records Choose Project, Work Products and
Documents. Select the document or group of documents you want to
delete, then click Delete. Click Yes when prompted.
Deleting a document deletes only the documents link, not the
documents actual, physical file.
378
Specifying Document Location References

You can specify two types of document location references, private
location and public location. Private location references can be viewed
only by Project Management module users. Public location references
can be viewed by all project participants, including Timesheets users.
For this reason, public location references typically refer to files stored
in a widely accessible network location, an intranet, or the Internet.
Enter document location references In the Work Products and
Documents window, select the document record for which you want to
enter a location reference. Click the Display Options bar and choose WP
& Doc Details. (The checkbox next to the command should be marked.)
Click the Files tab.
If you want to define the
document as private, type
the file location in this field, or
click the Browse button to
select the location.
If you want to define the
document as public, type
the file location in this field,
or click the Browse button to
select the location.
Open a work product or document Choose Project, Work

Products and Documents. Select the document you want to open. Click
the Files tab. To view a documents private file, click Launch next to the
Private Location field. Only Project Management module users can
view this file. To view a documents public file, click Launch next to the
Public Location field. All project participants can view this file.
Maintaining a Projects Document Library
379
Assigning Work Products and Documents

You can assign work products and documents to both activities and
WBS elements. For example, during a projects early planning stages,
you may assign a document to a WBS element. Later, you can assign the
same document to one or more activities as your projects activity
details develop.
For instructions on
assigning documents from
the Activities and Work
Breakdown Structure
windows, see Working
with Activities on
page 211 and Reviewing
Work Breakdown
Structures on page 139.
Assign documents from the Work Products and Documents

window Select the document you want to assign. To assign multiple
documents, hold down the Ctrl key, then click each document. Click the
Display Options bar and choose WP & Doc Details. (The box next to
WP & Doc Details should be marked.) Click the Assignments tab.
Click Assign. From the pop-up dialog box, select the activity or WBS
element to which you want to assign the selected document. Click the
Assign button. To remove a document assignment from an activity or
WBS element, select the item in the Assignments tab, then click
Remove.
To change the sort order

of any column, click the
column labels.
Mark this checkbox to indicate that the

assigned document is a work product.
381
Tracking Projects
In this chapter:
Creating Tracking Layouts
Working with Tracking Layouts
Customizing Tracking Layouts
Grouping, Sorting, and Filtering
Data in Tracking Layouts
The Tracking feature enables you to access,

display, and manipulate summarized or live
project data in a variety of formats to
perform schedule, cost, and resource
analyses.
This chapter describes how to create and
maintain tracking layouts. You will also
learn how to customize the format and level
of information that each tracking layout
displays.
382
Creating Tracking Layouts

The Tracking window is divided into two or more panes, depending on
the type of layout displayed. The upper left pane, or Project Explorer
window, shows the enterprise project structure (EPS) and contains
information about the available projects. The upper right pane, or Top
Layout window, always displays the current layout and layout options.
Depending on the type of layout you open, the left and right panes may
be split horizontally to display additional panes on the lower half of the
window. These include the Resource Explorer window on the lower left
and the Bottom Layout window on the lower right.
Top Layout window
Project Explorer window
Hide this column by choosing

View, Hide Left Columns, or
by dragging the split bar.
about user preferences,
see Setting User
Preferences on page 49.
see Summarizing
Tracking layouts display summarized data when you select closed

projects in the Project Explorer window and when you choose to open
only global data when you first start the module. (Summarized data are
available when projects have been summarized in the module.) If you
select open projects in the Project Explorer window, tracking layouts
display live data. You can change this setting to display summarized
data by choosing one of the closed projects options in the Resource
Analysis tab of the User Preferences dialog box (Edit, User
Preferences).
Tracking Projects
383
View project details Right-click a project in the Project Explorer

window and choose Project Details to review additional information
about the project. For example, the Summary tab displays the date the
summarizer was last run for the selected project. This will give you an
idea of how current your summary data is. The summary tab also
displays information about the WBS level to which the project was
summarized. For example, a project may use four WBS levels, but may
have been summarized to WBS level 2. As a result, Tracking window
data shows rolled up values to the second WBS level for that project,
when viewed in Summary mode. You can also review general
information, such as the projects status and responsible manager,
project codes, and project dates.
Tracking layout types You can create four types of tracking layouts:
Project Tables display project data in a table format. (Top Layout

window only)
Project Bar Charts display project data in a horizontal Bar Chart

format. (Top Layout window only)
Project Gantt/Profiles display project information in columns and

Gantt Chart format (in the Top Layout window) and timedistributed project data in either spreadsheet or profile format (in
the Bottom Layout window).
Resource Analysis layouts display resource/project usage

information in columns and Gantt Chart format (in the Top Layout
window) and time-distributed total resource allocation data in either
spreadsheet or profile format (in the Bottom Layout window).
384
All tracking layouts enable you to survey projectsfirst at a

comprehensive level, then at more detailed levels according to EPS,
project, work breakdown structure (WBS), organizational breakdown
structure (OBS), phase, or specific WBS data elements. You can also
use features such as filtering and grouping to customize the format and
level of information you want to include in a tracking layout.
Tracking layouts can be accessible to all users (global) or to a specific
user only. You can assign tracking layouts to thresholds and issues to
help monitor a projects problem areas.
For step-by-step
instructions on creating
each type of tracking
layout, see Tracking
Projects in the Help.
Create a tracking layout Choose Enterprise, Tracking. In the

Project Explorer window, choose the project or EPS node for which you
want to create a layout. Click the Display Options bar in the Top Layout
window (on the right side), then choose Layout, New. In the New
Layout dialog box, type the new layouts name. In the Available To
field, choose to make the layout available to you (Current User) or to
everyone (All Users).
Choose the type

of layout you
want to create...
...then customize it.
Tracking Projects
385
Working with Tracking Layouts

Open a tracking layout by choosing Enterprise, Tracking. In the Project
Explorer window, choose the project or EPS node for which you want to
open a layout. Click the Browse button in the Layout Name field in the
Top Layout window. Select the layout you want to open and click OK.
You can also click the Display Options bar in the Top Layout window,
then choose Layout, Open.
When you create and save
a layout, only the
presentation options are
saved, not the data. This
enables you to use the
layout with different
projects.
Save a layout In the Top Layout window, click the Display Options
bar, then choose Layout, Save or Save As. If you choose Save As, type a
new name for the layout and indicate whether the layout should be
available to All Users, the Current User, or Another User. If you select
Another User, click the Browse button in the User field, then select the
user.
Share a layout You can share a layout with other users in several
different ways:
For information on
publishing tracking layouts
to a Web site, see
Publishing a Project On
the Web on page 519.
When you first create the layout, you can specify that it be available
to All Users.
You can save an existing layout using a different name and then
specify that it be available to All Users or Another User. If you
specify Another User, you can then select a specific user.
You can export the layout to a file and then e-mail the file or its
location to other users.
You can publish the layout to a Web site.
Delete a layout In the Top Layout window, click the Display Options
bar, then choose Layout, Open. Select the layout you want to delete,
then click Delete. Click Yes.
Export a layout In the Top Layout window, click the Display Options
bar, then choose Layout, Open. Select the layout you want to export,
then click Export. Specify the drive and folder to which you want to
export the layout, type a name for the layout, then click Save. The layout
is saved in .PLF format.
Import a layout In the Top Layout window, click the Display Options
bar, then choose Layout, Open. Click Import. Locate the layout (*.PLF)
you want to import and select it, then click Open.
386
Customizing Tracking Layouts

Depending on the type of tracking layout displayed, you can customize
various aspects of the Tracking window. For example, you can display
only the top or bottom window in a layout, and you can select the
columns of information displayed in layouts that contain tables and
spreadsheets.
For step-by-step
instructions on
customizing each type of
tracking layout, see
Tracking Projects in the
Help.
Customize a Project Table You can customize the columns that

display in a Project Table. Click the Display Options bar in the Top
Layout window and choose Columns. See Customizing Layouts on
page 445 for more information on customizing columns.
Customize a Project Bar Chart You can customize the bar options
that appear in a Project Bar Chart. Click the Display Options bar in the
Top Layout window and choose Top Layout Options, Bars.
Show up to three bars.

Choose the data you want
the bar to represent and
its color.
To change the timeperiod

for the layout, move the
mouse over a year in the
timescale until the mouse
pointer changes to a hand.
Drag to the right to move
backward in time and to
the right to move forward in
time.
Customize a Project Gantt/Profile You can customize the

columns that appear in the Project Gantt Chart (Top Layout window),
and the data/timescale that appears in the profile (Bottom Layout
window). To customize columns, click the Display Options bar in the
Top Layout window and choose Columns. To customize profile options,
click the Display Options bar in the Bottom Layout window and choose
Bottom Layout Options, Profile Settings or Timescale. See
Customizing Layouts on page 445 for more information.
Tracking Projects
387
Customize a Resource Analysis layout You can customize the

columns and bars that appear in the Top Layout window, and the data/
timescale that appears in the profile (Bottom Layout window). To
customize the Top Layout window, click the Display Options bar in the
Top Layout window. Choose Top Layout Options, then the item you
want to customize. To customize profile options, click the Display
Options bar in the Bottom Layout window and choose Bottom Layout
Options, Profile Settings or Timescale. See Customizing Layouts on
page 445 for more information.
388
Grouping, Sorting, and Filtering Data in Tracking

Layouts
Grouping data allows you to organize information into bands, based on
a common attribute such as a hierarchy, code value, or resource. You can
choose to group data using the standard data groupings provided in the
module, or you can create a customized grouping. Sorting enables you
to determine the sequence of data in the layout.
This Project Bar Chart is grouped by

Project. You can group and sort by
other default groupings, or customize
your own.
customized grouping,
sorting, and filtering data,
see Grouping, Sorting,
and Filtering Data on
page 435.
Group and sort data in tracking layouts In the Top Layout

window, click the Display Options bar, then choose Top Layout
Options, Group and Sort By. Select the data grouping you want to apply
to your layout, or customize the grouping. If you choose Customize,
double-click the Group By field and select the field by which you want
to group data. Click Sort to select a sort order for the grouping, then
click Apply to preview your selections or OK to save them.
Tracking Projects
389
Filter data in tracking layouts Use filters to display only the data
youd like to see. A filter contains a formula that restricts your view to
only the data you require. Click the Display Options bar in the Project
Explorer window and choose Filters. Click Add. In the new row, click
the Parameter field and select a value. Double-click the Is cell and select
a filter criteria. Type a value and click OK.
Click to add another row and
enter additional filter criteria.
Click to preview
changes.
Click to delete a selected

row in the filter.
The filter term Any of the following is the same as OR. All
of the following is the same as AND.
391
Comparing Projects with Schedule

Comparison
In this chapter:
Schedule Comparison Overview
Comparing Projects/Baselines
Comparison Data
Schedule Comparison provides the

capability to compare two projects, or a
project and an associated baseline, to
determine what data has been added, deleted,
or modified from the schedules. Based on the
data fields you select for comparison, this
feature creates a project plan comparison
report in one of three file formats.
392
Schedule Comparison Overview

You can use Schedule Comparison to generate a comparison report
between revised and original projects you have access to, or between
revised projects you have access to and their associated baselines. You
can select up to five project or project/baseline comparisons to include
in a report. For each comparison report, you can specify the project and
activity data fields you want to compare, choose the format of the report
output file, and specify whether you want to group activity data by
activity, rather than by data type.
Comparing Projects with Schedule Comparison
393
Comparing Projects/Baselines
Schedule Comparison is available from the Tools menu of the Project
Management module. If Schedule Comparison is configured to use the
same database instance as the Project Management module, log in is
automatic. If Schedule Comparison is configured to use a different
database instance, or configured to use multiple database instances, you
will be prompted to log in.
Start Schedule Comparison Choose Tools, Schedule Comparison.
If login is required, type your login name and password. If applicable,
choose the database you want to connect to, then click OK.
If more than one database instance is configured, a dropdown list displays beneath the password field, so you can
select the database you want to use.
After a successful login, the Schedule Comparison main window

displays and you can select the projects/baselines and specific data
fields you want to compare.
394
Select projects/baselines to compare To compare a project to its

baseline or to another project, in the Schedule Comparison main
window, select the revised project, then select the project or baseline to
which you want to compare it. Choose a format, name, and destination
for the comparison report output file and specify Advanced options to
select the data fields you want to compare.
Click to select the
revised project.
Click to select the original

project or baseline.
Select output
format and
report
location.
Select project and

activity data fields
to compare.
To remove a project or baseline from the list of items to

compare, click inside the corresponding row, then press
Delete.
395
Select a revised project To select a revised project, click in a row,

then click the Browse button that displays.
The Select Project dialog box shows all projects to which you have
access, grouped by EPS. A + symbol indicates that more nodes or
projects are rolled up beneath the selected node. Click + or double-click
the node to display additional levels in the hierarchy. Select the desired
project, then click OK.
Click the Find button to search for a project by name. The
found projects are displayed in a flat list, not according to the
EPS. To return to the original EPS tree, click the Clear button.
396
The Find function always searches through all of the projects

and not only those currently displayed.
Select an original project or baseline To select an original

project or baseline, click in a row, then click the Browse button that
displays. Choose the option to display projects or baselines. The
Projects option displays all of the projects you have access to, grouped
by EPS. The Baselines option displays all baselines associated with the
revised project you selected. After locating the desired project or
baseline, select it and click OK.
Select whether to
display projects or
baselines.
When the Baselines option is selected, project baselines are

displayed in a flat list, not according to the EPS.
Click the Find button to search for a project or baseline by

name. See Select a revised project on page 395 for details.
397
Set advanced options Click the Advanced... button to select the

project and activity data fields you want to include in the report.
Project data
Activity data
All project and activity options are selected by default. To exclude an

option, unmark the corresponding checkbox.To include an option in the
comparison report, mark the checkbox next to the item name.
To group the comparison report activity data by activity, instead of by
data field type, mark the Group report by activity checkbox. When this
option is enabled, the items you select in the Activity data section are
grouped by activity in the report. Project items display at the top of the
report and not grouped by activity.
Click OK to save your selected options.
Set the output format In the Send Report To section, choose one of
the available formats:
HTML (default)
CSV
ASCII text
When the output format is ASCII text, select a field delimiter and text
qualifier from the drop-down list.
Available field delimiters
comma (,)
398
pipe (|)
dot (.)
Available text qualifiers:
none
double quotes (")
single quote (')
dollar sign ($)
Set the output file location To set the filename and location to save
the comparison report, use one of the following options:
In the Output File field, type the full path and filename.
Ensure that you enter the proper file extension, based on the
output format you selected. If the wrong file extension is
specified, the report will not display properly when opened for
viewing.
If you specify only a filename and do not specify a location,

the report is saved to the module installation directory.
Click the Browse button next to the Output File field. Browse to the
desired output destination, type a filename (no file extension is
needed), and click Save.
View reports automatically To view reports automatically after

they are generated, mark the checkbox next to View the file when done.
When this option is selected, reports are automatically opened in the
default module that is associated with the reports output format (e.g.,
HTML reports are opened by the systems default browser).
Generate the comparison report When you have finished setting
all of the report and output options, click Compare to generate the
report.
If any of the revised projects listed for comparison do not
have an associated original project/baseline selected, an
error message is displayed. Ensure that an original project/
baseline is selected for each revised project that is listed.
399
If the output file already exists, a warning is displayed. To overwrite the

existing file, click Yes. To cancel the comparison and select a different
filename, click No.
While Schedule Comparison is working, a dialog is displayed that
shows the progress of the comparison. To stop the comparison before it
is completed, click Cancel.
When the comparison is complete, a confirmation dialog listing the
location of the report is displayed. Click OK to continue.
400
Comparison Data
The following table lists the business objects, and the fields within those
business objects, that are compared by Schedule Comparison.
Some fields are for reporting or uniqueness verification only
and are not compared. These are identified by an asterisk.
Option
Business Object
Fields
General Project Data
Project
DataDate
FinishDate
MustFinishByDate
OBSName
PlannedStartDate
StartDate
Status
General WBS Data
WBS
AnticipatedFinishDate
AnticipatedStartDate
OBSName
Status
Added/Deleted WBS
WBS
Code
Name
Project Budget Data
Project
CurrentBudget
CurrentVariance
DistributedCurrentBudget
TotalBenefitPlan
TotalBenefitPlanTally
TotalSpendingPlan
TotalSpendingPlanTally
UnallocatedBudget
UndistributedCurrentVariance
Option
Business Object
Fields
Scheduling Options
ScheduleOptions
ComputeTotalFloatType
401
CriticalActivityFloatThreshold
CriticalActivityPathType
IgnoreOtherProjectRelationships
LevelResourcesDuringScheduling
MakeOpenEndedActivitiesCritical
OutOfSequenceScheduleType
RecalculateAssignmentCosts
RelationshipLagCalendar
StartToStartLagCalculationType
UseExpectedFinishDates
Added/Deleted Activities
Activity
ID
Name
General Activity Data
Activity
CalendarName
FreeFloat
IsCritical
TotalFloat
WBSCode
WBSName
402
Option
Business Object
Fields
Costs
Activity
ActualExpenseCost
ActualLaborCost
ActualMaterialCost
ActualNonLaborCost
AtCompletionExpenseCost
AtCompletionLaborCost
AtCompletionMaterialCost
AtCompletionNonLaborCost
PlannedExpenseCost
PlannedLaborCost
PlannedMaterial Cost
PlannedNonLaborCost
RemainingExpenseCost
RemainingLaborCost
RemainingMaterialCost
RemainingNonLaborCost
Option
Business Object
Fields
Units
Activity
ActualLaborUnits
403
ActualNonLaborUnits
AtCompletionLaborUnits
AtCompletionNonLaborUnits
PlannedLaborUnits
PlannedNonLaborUnits
RemainingLaborUnits
RemainingNonLaborUnits
Durations
Activity
ActualDuration
AtCompletionDuration
PlannedDuration
RemainingDuration
Dates
Activity
ActualFinishDate
ActualStartDate
EarlyFinishDate
EarlyStartDate
LateFinishDate
LateStartDate
PlannedFinishDate
PlannedStartDate
Percent Complete
Activity
DurationPercentComplete
PhysicalPercentComplete
UnitsPercentComplete
Constraints
PrimaryConstraintDate
PrimaryConstraintType
SecondaryConstraintDate
SecondaryConstraintType
404
Option
Business Object
Fields
Added/Deleted Assignments
ResourceAssignment
ActivityID
ActivityName
ResourceID
ResourceName
General Resource Assignment
ResourceAssignment
ActivityID*
ActivityName*
ActualCost
ActualUnits
AtCompletionCost
AtCompletionUnits
CostAccountName
IsPrimaryResource
PlannedCost
PlannedDuration
PlannedUnits
PricePerUnit
RemainingCost
RemainingDuration
RemainingUnits
RemainingUnitsPerTime
ResourceID
ResourceName
RoleID
RoleName
Added/Deleted Expenses
ActivityExpense
ActivityID
ActivityName
ExpenseItem
Option
Business Object
Fields
General Expenses
ActivityExpense
ActivityID*
405
ActivityName*
ActualCost
AtCompletionCost
CostAccountName
ExpenseItem*
ExpensePercentComplete
PlannedCost
PricePerUnit
RemainingCost
Relationships
Relationships
Lag
PredecessorActivityID
PredecessorActivityName*
SuccessorActivityID
SuccessorActivityName*
Type*
Activity Codes
CodeValue
Description
Notebook Topics
ActivityNote
NotebookTopicName
Steps
ActivityStep
ActivityID*
ActivityName*
Name*
PercentComplete
Weight
WeightPercent
407

In this chapter:
Reflection Overview
Reflection Guidelines
A reflection is a copy of an active project

that contains a link to the original project.
This allows you to make changes to the
reflection and then merge selected changes
back into to the original project, keeping
active project data such as timesheet
information intact.
408
Reflection Overview
A reflection is a copy of a project that has the following characteristics:
Has the same name as the original source project with reflection
appended to it.
Internally, contains a link to the source project that allows the

application to merge changes to the reflection into the source
project.
Has a what-if status.
After creating a reflection, you can make changes to it. If desired, you
can then merge selected changes back into the source project keeping
active data in the source project intact. Creating a reflection facilitates
the following work flows and processes:
Creating a sandbox area to test different project scenarios.
Reviewing changes made by team members to activities they own

in a reflection. Using the reflection as an intermediary project lets
you review and accept changes before merging the reflection back
into the source project.
Reviewing changes to a project by exporting a reflection as an

.XER file. You can send the .XER file to outside users who can
import the file into their database. After making changes to the
project, the outside users can export the file and send the resulting
.XER file back to you. By importing the .XER file back into your
reflection, you can decide which changes to keep when you merge
the reflection back into the source project.
409

Creating and using reflections involves the following process: Create a
reflection. Make changes to the reflection. Preview the changes to the
project. If desired, print a report of the changes to the project. Then
merge selected changes into the source project.
Create a reflection
In the Projects view, right

click on the project for
which you want to create
a reflection.
In the context menu,

click Create Reflection.
If the project does not
contain any baselines,
the system responds by
creating a reflection.
If the project does not contain any baselines, the system

responds by creating a reflection. Otherwise, the system
responds by displaying the Copy Baselines dialog box.
For any baselines you want to copy, mark the
checkbox(es) in the Copy column of the Copy Baselines
dialog box and click OK. The system responds by creating
a reflection.
Make changes in the Reflection

Once a reflection has been created, you can make changes to the
reflection as needed to explore alternative project scenarios.
410
Preview changes to be merged
In the Projects view, right

click on the reflection that
you want to merge with the
source project.
In the context menu, click
Merge Reflection into
Source Project. If there
are any changes to
merge, the system
responds by displaying
the Preview Changes to
Project dialog box.
411
Choose changes to merge

Next, choose changes from the reflection to merge into the source
project.
There are two ways the

changes can be viewed,
or grouped, in the Preview
Changes to Project dialog
box: by subject area or by
activity.
When you view the
changes by activity,
check boxes appear in
the Merge column for
activity rows. This allows
you to select which
activities to merge into
the source project.
412
Merge the Changes
Determine any actions the

application should take
prior to merging
Determine any actions
the application should
take after merging
If for whatever reason, you decide not to merge the

changes in the Reflection into the Source project, click
Cancel and no changes will be made to the source
project.
Otherwise, click Merge Changes to merge the
changes into the source project.
413
Reflection Guidelines
Several factors determine whether you can create or merge reflections of
particular projects:
Guidelines for creating reflections You use the Create Reflection
right click option to create a reflection of a project. This option is
disabled when you do not have access to create projects within the EPS
node. Additionally, the right click option is hidden when any of the
following is true:
A group band node is selected
More than one project is selected
A summary-only project is selected
An MSP-managed project is selected
Guidelines for merging reflections You use the Merge Reflection

into Source Project right-click option to merge changes. This option is
disabled when any of the following is true:
The source project has been checked out
The source project and/or the reflection has been opened

exclusively by another user
You do not have super user privileges to both the source project and
the reflection
Additionally, the right-click option is disabled when any of the

following is true:
A group band node is selected
More than one project is selected
A non-reflection project is selected (i.e. the project does not contain

a source project field value)
The selected project contains a source project field value, but it

does not have a what-if status
The selected project has a what-if status but it does not contain a
source project field value
415

In this chapter:
Managing Remote Projects
Checking Out Projects
Checking In Projects
The Project Check In/Check Out feature

enables you to keep track of projects that are
used outside of the enterprise database. For
example, a project manager may check out a
project and take it along to a project site,
updating or modifying the project while at
that site. When the project manager returns
to the office, the project is checked back in,
updating the enterprise database.
This chapter describes the XER file format in
which you can check projects in and out of
the module; it also explains how to check in
and check out projects using the XER
format.
416
Managing Remote Projects

You can check projects out to work on them at remote locations. When a
project is checked out, it cannot be modified in the module until it is
checked back in.
You can check projects out in the Primavera proprietary format (XER).
This format enables you to use activity, cost, resource, and other types
of project information with other installations of the Project
Management module, regardless of the database being used (Oracle,
Microsoft SQL Server, or SQL Server Express).
about converting projects,
see the Administrators
Guide.
Track check out status You can easily determine whether a project
has been checked out. Choose Enterprise, Projects, click the Display
Options bar, then choose Show on Bottom, Project Details.
The checkmark on the

project symbol indicates
that this project is
checked out.
Click the General tab to

check or change the
status of the project.
The name of the user that checked out

the project. This field is blank when the
Check Out Status is Checked In.
The date and time the user checked out

the project. This field is blank when the
Check Out Status is Checked In.
417
Checking Out Projects

The Check Out wizard guides you through the steps for checking out
projects. Before you start the wizard, open the projects that you want to
check out.
Check out projects Choose File, Check Out.
You can check out

multiple projects to
the XER format.
Select the projects that you want to check out. For projects that you do
not want to check out, clear the Check Out checkbox.
If the project you want to check out is not on the list, click
Cancel, open the project, and restart the wizard.
For organizations using Primavera ProjectLink, Microsoft

Project (MSP)-managed projects are not available for check
out in the Project Management module. MSP-managed
projects must be checked out in Microsoft Project using
ProjectLink. For more information on Primavera ProjectLink,
refer to the Primavera ProjectLink Help in Microsoft Project
(available only if Primavera ProjectLink is installed). You can
access the help by clicking the Help button on any
ProjectLink screen.
Specify the name of the file and the location where the file will be
saved, then click Finish.
418
Click the
Browse
button to
select the
file
location.
If you check out multiple projects to a single .XER file, the

interproject relationships between activities in all the projects
included in the file are preserved.
419
Checking In Projects
Projects previously checked out of the Project Management database
can be checked back in to any Project Management module installation.
Check in projects Choose File, Check In. Click the Browse button
to select the file that you want to check in, then click Next.
The relationships between

all of the projects in the
XER file are preserved.
Specify check in project options An XER file can contain data

from several projects. The first column in the Check In Project Options
dialog box lists all the projects included in the XER file. If a project
with the same name already exists in the current module installation, the
Match checkbox next to it is marked. To prevent data in the module
database from being overwritten when you check in the XER file,
double-click the Import Action field next to each project, then select one
of the following options:
Update Existing Project The existing project is updated with any

new/modified data in the XER file; adds new data if the record does
not exist. Select the project to update in the Import To field. You
can further define how data should be updated when matches occur.
Refer to Choose update project options on the next page for more
information.
Replace Existing Project The existing project is deleted and then

replaced with the project checked in from the XER file. Select the
project to be replaced in the Import To field.
420
Ignore this Project The project is not checked in.
Choose update project options Click Next to select a layout

configuration to use when checking in project data. The options
specified in the layout configuration determine how the module handles
data in the file that match data in the database. You can create and save
several different configurations; however, only one configuration can be
used to check in the file. Select Yes in the Use field next to the
configuration you want to use.
Click to
customize
the layout
configuration
.
Modify a layout configuration The options specified in a layout

configuration determine how data are updated when projects are
checked in. To modify these options, select the layout configuration in
the Update Project Options dialog box, then click Modify.
421
Mark to delete risks,

relationships to external
projects, thresholds,
activities, activity
relationships, and activity
resource assignments that
are in the project being
updated, but that are not
included in the file. To keep
the data, clear the
checkbox.
which you can set options. Mark the Delete checkbox next to a data type
to remove data that exist in the project you are updating but that are not
included in the file you are checking in. For example, if several
thresholds are defined in the project that you are updating, but they are
not included in the file you are checking in, mark the checkbox in the
Delete column to remove the thresholds from the project being updated.
The Delete field applies only to risks, relationships to external
projects, thresholds, activities, activity relationships, and
activity resource assignments. Global data types are not
affected by this setting.
Select one of the following in the Action field to indicate how the data
type is updated:
422
Keep Existing Retains data in the existing project and does not
overwrite them with the updated data; adds new data if the record
does not exist.
Update Existing Overwrites data in the existing project with

updated data; adds new data if the record does not exist.
Insert New Retains data in the existing project and adds any new
data items. For example, if a new role was added to the data, but
you dont want to change the existing roles, choose Insert New to
add the new role to the existing project.
Do Not Import Retains data in the existing project and does not
import the updated data.

Next. Click Finish to complete check in.
Part
Customizing Projects
In this part:
Working with Layouts

Grouping, Sorting, and Filtering Data
Customizing Layouts
Customizing Reports
Printing Layouts and Reports
Publishing a Project On the Web
ead this part to learn how to customize your desktop and

create layouts that help you see the data you need to manage
your projects. Working with Layouts describes the types of
layouts you can create and explains how to add, open, and save
layouts. It also describes how to import and export layouts to
share with other users. Read Grouping, Sorting, and Filtering
Data to learn how to display only the data you need to see in a
layout. Customizing Layouts shows you how to change the
look and content of layouts by modifying columns, formatting
Gantt Charts, adjusting the timescale, and editing fonts and
colors. Customizing Reports discusses how to create reports
and assign them to report groups and batches. Printing Layouts
and Reports describes the printing options, and Publishing a
Project On the Web explains how to create a project Web site.
425

In this chapter:
Layout Types
Creating, Opening, and Saving
Layouts
Exporting and Importing Layouts
Copying and Pasting Resource
Spreadsheet Data to Microsoft
Excel
You can create layouts that display the data

you need to see, in the format you need to
see them. Customize the top and bottom
areas of the layout to include tables, graphs,
charts, Activity or Project Details, and more.
Once you are satisfied with your layout, you
can save it so you or other team members can
use it again.
This chapter describes the different layout
types and explains how to create, open, save,
export, and import layouts. It also describes
how to copy and paste spreadsheet data to
Microsoft Excel.
426
Layout Types
You can open WBS, projects, and resource assignment layouts, and the
following types of activity layouts: Activity Tables, Activity and
Resource Usage Spreadsheets and Profiles, Gantt Charts, Activity
Networks, Activity Details, and Trace Logic. Split the Activities
window into top and bottom panes to display different types of layouts
at the same time. For example, show an Activity Table in the top pane
and a Resource Usage Profile in the bottom pane.
Click the Layout Options bar

to display a menu of options
that you can use to
customize the top and
bottom panes of the
Activities window.
Click Show on Top and Show

on Bottom to select the layout
type displayed in each area
of the Activities window.

about layout types and
examples of sample
layouts, see Quick Tour
on page 31.
Refer to the following examples:
427
Click the Show/Hide Bottom Layout button to

display the top layout in an expanded view.
Activity Table
Displays activity
information in
spreadsheet format. Use
this type of layout to
quickly update a project.
You can use filters and

data grouping to see
only those activities that
occur in your current
status cycle.
Activity Usage
Spreadsheet
Displays units, costs, or

earned value data by
activity over time. Use
this type of layout to
review per period and
rolled up activity
resource/cost data.
428
Click the Relationship Lines

button to view relationships in the
Gantt Chart.
Gantt Chart
Provides a graphical
display of activity
progress over the
course of the project.
Use this layout to
review or analyze the
schedule.
Activity Network
To quickly zoom in on an Activity

Network box, hold down the Alt key,
then click and drag your mouse in the
Activity Network section.
display of activities,
including logical
relationships. Activity
Network can be
displayed in the top
layout only. The left
side of this example
displays the WBS
hierarchy, while the
right side shows the
activity flow in
graphical format. Use
this layout to change
the sequence of
activities as your
project evolves.
429
Activity Details
Displays and enables

you to modify detailed
information for an
activity you select in
either the Activity Table
or Activity Network.
This type of layout can
be displayed in the
bottom layout only. Use
this layout type to add
and update activities.
To show or hide any of the
Detail tabs, right-click on a tab
title and choose Customize
Activity Details.
Activity Usage Profile
Displays a time
distribution of activity
units and costs in a Bar
Chart format. This
profile can be displayed
in the bottom layout
only. Use this layout type
to review the labor use
for activities in a specific
timeperiod.
You can display usage for all
activities, or choose Selected
Activities to display usage for
only the highlighted
activities.
430
Resource Usage
Spreadsheet
Displays resource data

in spreadsheet format.
This spreadsheet can be
displayed in the bottom
layout only. Use this
layout type to view
resource allocation over
time, according to a
timescale you specify.
You can display activities by selected resource or assignment.
Resource Usage
Profile
Displays a time
distribution of resource
units and costs in
relation to activities in a
Bar Chart format. This
profile can be displayed
in the bottom layout
only. Use this layout
type to analyze resource
levels with the schedule.
To display a pop-up box

containing totals for a
specific month, doubleclick that months bar in
the graph.
You can also display the

profile as a histogram
using different colors
and patterns for multiple
resources. Click the
Display Options Bar and
choose Stacked
Histogram.
431
Trace Logic
display of dependency
relationships for an
activity you select in
either the Activity
Table or Activity
Network. Trace Logic
can be displayed in the
bottom layout only.
Use this layout type to
easily move forward
and backward through
the plan to view the
critical path.
To quickly zoom in on a box, hold down the

Alt key, then click and drag your mouse in
the Trace Logic layout.
432
Creating, Opening, and Saving Layouts

Once you create a layout, you can save it and use it again at other stages
of the project or with different projects. Make layouts available to all
users (global) or to a specific user only.
Choose Layout, Open, to

apply an existing layout to
the current project or
projects.
For detailed instructions on

customizing the top and
bottom layouts, see
page 445.
Add a new layout Customize the top and bottom layouts to create a
new layout, then save the layout using a name you specify. Click the
Layout Options bar, then choose Layout, Save As. Type the layout
name, then select who will be able to use this layout: All Users, the
Current User, Another User, or Project. If you select Another User, click
the Browse button in the User field, then select the users name. (If you
save a layout and specify a user other than yourself, you will no longer
be able to access the layout.) If you select Project, click the Browse
button and specify a project in the Select Project dialog box.
Once you have selected who will be able to use the layout, click Save.
Open a layout Click the Layout Options bar, then choose Layout,
Open. Select the layout you want to open, then click Open. To preview
the layout without closing the Open Layout dialog box, click Apply.
Save changes to a layout Click the Layout Options bar, then
choose Layout, Save. To save a copy of the layout using a different
name, choose Layout, Save As. Type a name for the layout copy, then
click Save.
433
Exporting and Importing Layouts

If you want to share a layout with other users, export it to a central
location from which they can then import the layout to use with their
own projects.
Export a layout Click the Layout Options bar, then choose Layout,
Open. Click the name of the layout you want to export, then click
Export. Specify a name and location for the export file, then click Save.
Import a layout Click the Layout Options bar, then choose Layout,
Open. Click Import, then select the location of the layout file you want
to import. (Primavera layout files have a .PLF extension.) Click Open. If
you want to make the layout available to all users, click Yes when
prompted.
To overwrite the current layout with your changes, click the

Layout Options bar and choose Layout, Save.
434
Copying and Pasting Resource Spreadsheet Data to

Microsoft Excel
You can copy resource spreadsheet data from the Project Management
module and paste it in Microsoft Excel. Choose Project, Resource
Assignments. Select a row, then choose Edit, Copy. You can also select
multiple rows. All associated data, as well as row and column headers
and values, is copied to the clipboard.
You may need to expand column widths to display all the
project information.
In Excel, right-click in the spreadsheet, then choose Paste. Any edits

made in Excel cannot be returned to your Project Management module
project. Use this feature for reporting only.
Excel may reformat data pasted into a spreadsheet. To
prevent this, reformat the cells as text before pasting the
data, or paste the data into a different spreadsheet
application.
435
Grouping, Sorting, and Filtering

Data
In this chapter:
Grouping Data
Sorting Data
Filtering Data
Grouping organizes activities or projects into

categories that share a common attribute. For
example, focus on activities by resource,
responsibility, or dates. Sorting arranges
activities, resources, or projects in any order
you select, such as by start date.
Filters enable you to narrow your selection to
a specific data group. Use the standard filters
provided or add new filters.
Read this chapter to learn how to group, sort,
and filter data in your projects.
436
Grouping Data
Group to organize information in categories that share a common
attribute, such as enterprise project structure (EPS), work breakdown
structure (WBS), code value, or resource. Use predefined grouping
options; for example, when displaying the Expenses window, group by
vendor, WBS, or category.
Use these predefined

grouping and sorting
options for the WBS,
expenses, work products
and documents,
thresholds, and risks
windows.
You can also customize group criteria when you are working with
projects, activities, and resources. Group by simple, one-level lists of
information, such as dates, durations, costs, and other numeric data. You
can also group by multiple data items in the same layout. For example,
group by project, then total float. Each group band can have a unique
color and font.
Group criteria can also be arranged in hierarchies of data at multiple
levels (up to 20). These items include projects, WBS, project codes, and
activity codes. Choose whether to indent each level in the hierarchy, and
specify up to which level to show. If you limit the number of levels, you
can group by additional data items.
437
This layout is
grouped by multiple
levels of the WBS.
You can also specify

customized grouping and
sorting criteria when a
Resource Usage
Spreadsheet is shown as
a bottom layout in the
Activities window.
Customize grouping In the Activities window, click the Layout

Options bar, then choose Group and Sort. You can also click the Display
Options bar from the Projects or Resources window and then choose
Group and Sort By, Customize.
In the Group By field, select the data item by which you want to group
data. Mark the Show Group Totals checkbox if you want to display total
rolled up values for each item you select in the Group By field. For
example, if you choose to group by WBS, each WBS band displays the
sum of the values for the activities included in that WBS item.
438
Mark the Show Group Totals to display totals in

the grouping bands. Clear the checkbox to
hide any totals in the grouping bands
When grouping by a hierarchical item, such as

WBS, mark the Indent checkbox to indent each
level, and specify how many levels to show.
Mark Show Grand Totals

to display a grand total
band at the top of the
window. Mark Show
Summaries Only if you
only want to display bands
for the data items you
select in the Group By field
(for example, if you want to
display WBS bands and
hide the WBSs activities).
Mark to decrease the
space taken by indenting
levels on the hierarchy and
allow for the display of
additional data.
To select the data item by
which you want to group
data, click the Group By
field and select a value
from the drop-down list.
These settings apply

to the Group By field
selected above.
When grouping by numbers, dates, or

durations, choose an interval for each
group. For example, group activities by
actual costs in increments of $3000.
Mark or clear the checkboxes to choose the text to display on the

grouping bands. To display the field name on the grouping band, mark
the Show Title checkbox. To display the ID or Code value on the
grouping band, mark the Show ID/Code checkbox. To display the Name
or Description on the grouping band, mark the Show Name/Description
checkbox. To sort the grouping bands alphabetically rather than their
order in their respective hierarchy, mark the Sort Grouping Bandings
Alphabetically checkbox. To hide group title bands that do not contain
activities within the group, mark the Hide If Empty checkbox.
You must select either Show ID/Code or Show Name/
Description.
439
Set as a user preference To display a label on grouping bands for

windows/dialog boxes where you cannot access a Group and Sort dialog
box, choose Edit, User Preferences. Click the Application tab. In the
Group and Sorting section, mark Show ID/Code, Show Name/
Description, or both.
Mark to immediately
rearrange updated activity
data to reflect the group
and sort criteria.
440
Sorting Data
Sorting determines the sequence in which projects, activities, or
resources are listed in the current window. You can sort alphabetically,
numerically, or chronologically based on the data item you choose. For
example, sort by total float to see critical activities first, or sort by
percent complete in descending order to see completed or in progress
activities at the top of the layout.
Specify sort order In the Activities window, click the Layout
Options bar, then choose Group and Sort. Click Sort. You can also click
the Display Options bar from the Projects or Resources window and
choose Group and Sort By, Customize, Sort.
To select a data item to use

as the sort method, doubleclick the Field Name cell and
select the field.
Click Add to
specify
additional sort
criteria.
To select a sort order, doubleclick the Sort Order cell and

choose Ascending or
Descending.
Reorganizing Data
You can mark the Reorganize Automatically checkbox on the
Applications tab of User Preferences to immediately reorganize the
current view or layout each time you add an activity or change activity
data. However, if you have many changes to make and you choose not to
mark the setting in User Preferences, you can select Tools, Reorganize
Now to organize the project. When you change views, apply a filter, cut,
copy, paste, or refresh data, the module will reorganize the data,
regardless of whether the Reorganize Automatically checkbox is
marked or cleared.
441
Filtering Data
Use filters to focus on specific data. A filter is a set of instructions that
determines which data display in the current window. You can create
one set of filters for activities and one set for projects, or use predefined
filters. Filters can be user-defined, global or layout. User-defined filters
are filters that you define. They are available only to you for all projects
to which you have access. Global filters are available to all users for all
projects. Layout Filters are only available to the currently open layout.
Select a filter To select activities for the project currently open, in the
Activities window click the Layout Options bar, then choose Filters. To
filter the projects in the Projects window, click the Display Options bar,
then choose Filter By. Mark the checkbox beside each filter you want to
apply. You can also customize individual filters when creating tracking
layouts or reports using the Report Wizard.
Click to view all activities
(and remove all filters).
Choose All or Any to combine multiple filters.

Combining filters further narrows the selected data.
Click to see
how a filter
works
before you
commit to
it.
These
predefined
filters are
available when
you select
activities in the
Activities
window. A
different set of
predefined
filters is
provided when
you filter by
projects in the
Projects
window.
To convert
a userdefined or
layout filter
into a
global filter,
select it,
then click
Make
Global.
Choose to replace the activities that

appear in the layout or highlight a subset of
the activities in the layout.
Click to create a layout filter from a

default or global filter.
442
To view a user-defined,
layout, or global filters
settings before applying it,
select it, then click Modify.
To view the criteria for a
predefined filter, first copy
and paste it. The filter is
copied to the user-defined
list, which you can then
modify.
Create a user-defined filter In the Activities window, click the

Layout Options bar, then choose Filters. You can also click the Display
Options bar from the Projects window and choose Filter By, Customize.
Click New. Type a filter name. Click the Parameter cell and select a data
item. Double-click the Is cell to select a filtering criteria. Specify a value
in the Value field. If the values require a specific entry, you can select
from a drop-down list. For example, if filtering by activity type, you
must select from a list of the available types.
Click Add to define multiple selection criteria. Specify whether all
criteria must be met or at least one criterion.
If you specify that all criteria must be met, each
statement is joined with an And. If any criteria can
be met, an Or is used.
You can nest criteria to create multiple levels of selections. If you

specify the topmost parameter as All of the Following, each successive
level selects from only the activities/projects that meet the criteria of
previous levels. If you specify Any of the Following as the highest
parameter, each group of criteria is separated by an Or.
443
A second set of criteria is

joined by an And because
All of the Following is
specified as the highest
parameter. This filter
selects all activities with
negative float that belong
to the Specifications
project and have either a
testing or marketing
resource assigned.
To nest a set of criteria within another

set, select the line of criteria, then use
the arrow keys to indent it.
Create a layout filter In the Activities window, click the Layout

Options bar, then choose Filters. Select a default or global filter, then
click the Copy As Layout button. Modify the copied filter, as needed.
Remove filters Click the Layout Options bar, then choose Filter. To
remove a specific filter, clear the Select checkbox for the filter you want
to remove. To remove all filters, mark the All Activities or All Projects
checkbox. To preview your changes, click Apply.
Delete user-defined activity filters Click the Layout Options bar,
then choose Filter. Select the filter you want to delete, then click Delete.
You can delete only global and layout filters.
444
Combining Filters
To create a filter that selects any activity from one selection criteria and
any activity from another selection criteria, you must define two
separate filters and then combine them when you run the filters. For
example, to select any activity belonging to the Corporate IT group that
is not complete, you might create one filter that selects any activity that
falls under various WBS levels (specific to the Corporate IT group), and
another filter that selects any activity with remaining labor units greater
than zero. To run the filters, choose All Selected Filters and mark the
checkboxes for the two filters on the Filters dialog box.
Displays the name of the filter

currently applied to the layout.
445
Customizing Layouts
In this chapter:
Modifying Columns
Adjusting the Timescale
Formatting Activity Network
Layouts
Modifying Resource and Activity
Usage Profile Settings
This chapter describes how to customize

layout rows and columns, set the timescale,
modify Gantt Chart bars, specify the look of
Activity Network boxes, and modify
Resource and Activity Usage Profile settings
to help you monitor project performance.
Refer to Printing Layouts and Reports on
page 509 for instructions on setting page and
print options, previewing and printing
layouts and reports, and publishing layouts
and reports in HTML format.
446
Modifying Columns
You can customize the look and content of the columns included in
tables and spreadsheets in the Activities window. Choose which
columns you want to include; change the column widths, the order in
which columns are displayed, and the row height; specify column fonts
and colors; edit column titles; and copy column formats from other
layouts.
To move a column,
click and drag it to a
new location.
Click a column title to toggle the sort

order from ascending to descending.
The down arrow indicates that the
data are sorted in descending order.
You can also customize

the columns displayed in
most windows, such as
Projects, Resources,
WBS, and Issues.
To view more columns, click and drag

the divider bar.
Customizing Layouts
447
Add or remove columns In the Activities window, click the Layout

Options bar, then choose Columns.
To include a column in the layout, select it in
the Available Options list, then click the right
arrow. To remove a column from a layout,
select it in the Selected Options list, then click
the left arrow. Click the double-arrows to add
or remove all columns at once.
The sequence of columns in the

layout will be the same as their
order in this list. Click the up and
down arrows to move columns
higher or lower in the list.
Copy column format from another layout In the Columns dialog

box, click the Copy From button. Select the layout and click Open.
Edit column titles, widths, and alignments In the Available
Options or Selected Options area of the Columns dialog box, select the
column name you want to change. Click Edit Column. Type the new
name, then specify the maximum number of characters for the column
width. Choose how the title will be aligned in the column header.
448
Change column fonts, colors, and row height From the

Activities window, click the Layout Options bar, then choose Table Font
and Row. To change a font, click the Font button, then select a new font.
To change a color, click the Color button, then select a new color.
Click these fields to

customize the font and
color of your table.
Click to restore
the standard
table fonts and
colors.
Mark to show the symbols that identify the different

levels of information included in columns.
You can also specify the height for rows:
The Keep Current Row Heights option enables you to retain all
custom row heights manually set in the layout during your current
user session.
Clear the Keep Current Row Heights checkbox to automatically

size each row based on cell content, font size, and column width or
to specify a height for all rows in the layout. If you choose to
Optimize Height by Row Content, you can set a value to limit the
amount of lines per row that are automatically adjusted during text
wrapping.
Customizing Layouts
449
Adjusting the Timescale

Your timescale settings
significantly affect your
ability to manually plan
distribution in the
Resource Usage
Spreadsheet. For details,
refer to the Future Period
Bucket Planning FAQ topic
in the Help.
Gantt Charts, Activity and Resource Usage Spreadsheets, and Activity

and Resource Usage Profiles display a timescale that starts just before
your project begins and extends until your finish date. This timescale
can be shown in different time units, such as years, quarters, and days.
You can expand or condense the timescale view to control the size of the
bars or columns that appear in the layout.
To show data for different

months in the layout, click
and drag a months
column.
To manually expand or
condense the timescale,
click and drag the date in
a month. You can also
right-click in the Bar area
and choose Timescale to
change the timescale
settings.
Change the timescale of a profile, spreadsheet, or Gantt

Chart In the Activities window, open a profile, spreadsheet, or Gantt
Chart. Click the Layout Options bar and choose Timescale. In the
Projects window, right-click in the bar area of a Gantt Chart and choose
Timescale.
450
To select the date from which the timescale should start for the profile,
spreadsheet, or Gantt Chart, in the Timescale Start field click the
Browse button. Select the date intervals at which data are displayed. If
you choose Day/Shift as the date interval, click the Browse button to
select the corresponding shift in the Shift Calendar field. To change the
font and color settings, click the font button to specify the font style,
size, and color for the timescale and column headings. Click the Default
Font button to change the timescale font and color to the default
settings. Choose to display Primary or Ordinal Dates. If showing
Primary Dates, choose the format in which to display date intervals:
Calendar, Fiscal, or Week of Year. If the profile or spreadsheet is
displaying past period actual values, choose a financial period Date
Interval.
Choose to show two or three

time units on the timescale.
The Date Interval options differ
depending on the Type you
choose. If the profile or
spreadsheet is displaying past
period actual data (rather than
actual to date values), choose
Calendar or Fiscal as the Type. In
the Date Interval field, select a
financial period timescale to view
past period actual data per
financial period. If the profile or
spreadsheet is not displaying
past period actual values, choose
any Type and Date Interval.
Timescale settings apply to both the top and bottom layouts.

summarizing assignment
data by financial period,
refer to the Administrators
Guide or the Help. For more
information on storing
period performance, refer
to Storing Period
Performance (Past Period
Actuals) on page 324.
If assignment data is summarized by financial period (which

is controlled by an administrative preference), Financial
Period timescale intervals display all summarized assignment
data (past period actual and actual to date) in profiles and
spreadsheets. For periods with stored performance, financial
period intervals display summarized past period actuals; for
periods without stored performance, financial period intervals
display summarized actual to date values.
Customizing Layouts
451
Average the timescale for Activity and Resource Spreadsheets You can display the timescale in the Activity and Resource
Spreadsheet based on a calculated average. Mark the Base On Hours Per
Timeperiod checkbox to divide the timescale interval totals by
automatic increments, based on the date interval selected. When you
choose this option, the Divide Interval Totals By field displays the
division increment based on the division increment specified in User
Preferences for the corresponding date interval: 1h for Hour date
interval, 2h for Shift date interval, 8h for Day date interval, 40h for
week date interval, and so on.
Mark to specify the values

you want to use to divide
the timescale interval totals
in the Divide Interval Totals
By field.
Specify the unit of measure
for the timescale intervals.
452

A bar in a Gantt Chart can represent many things, such as a milestone,
early and late dates for an activity, or summarized data. To visually
distinguish the different bars included in a Gantt Chart, specify unique
colors, shapes, and patterns. You can display the Gantt Chart in the
Projects window when reviewing the EPS, or in the Activities window
when reviewing specific projects.
Add and delete bars Click the Layout Options bar (Activities
window) or Display Options bar (Projects window), then choose Bars.
Click Add. Type a name for the new bar, then select the timespan the bar
represents from the Timescale drop-down list. Double-click the Filter
field, then mark each filter you want to apply. Click OK.
To delete a bar, select it in the Bars dialog box, then click Delete.
Mark to show
or hide a bar.
Use these
fields to
change the
selected
bars shape,
color, and
pattern.
To combine bars, specify the same row number for each

one. For example, to display the Actual Bar and Remaining
Bar on the same line, specify Row 1 for each bar.
Customizing Layouts
453
Change a Gantt Chart bars timespan Click the Layout Options

bar (Activities window) or Display Options bar (Projects window), then
choose Bars. Select the Gantt Chart bar for which you want to change
the timescale. Double-click the Timescale column, then select the new
timescale.
To represent this value:
Select this bar:
Start Date to Finish Date
Current Bar
Percent Complete
% Complete Bar
Performance Percent Complete
Performance %
Complete Bar
Planned Start Date to Planned Finish Date
Plan Bar
Actual Start Date to Actual Finish Date
Actual Bar
Remaining Start Date to Remaining Finish Date
Remain Bar
Primary Baseline Planned Start Date to Primary

Baseline Planned Finish Date
Primary Baseline Bar
Secondary Baseline Planned Start Date to Secondary

Secondary Baseline
Bar
Tertiary Baseline Planned Start Date to Tertiary

Tertiary Baseline Bar
Early Start Date to Early Finish Date
Early Bar
Late Start Date to Late Finish Date
Late Bar
Remaining Finish Date to Late Finish Date
Float Bar
Remaining Finish Date to Late Finish Date with

Remaining after the late date
Neg Float Bar
User start and end dates defined in the activity

columns
User Defined Bars
Apply Gantt Chart settings from another layout In the Bars

dialog box (Activities window), click Copy From. Select the layout with
the Gantt Chart settings you want to apply. To apply the selected
layouts settings and close the dialog box, click Open.
454
Change a Gantt bars style In the Bars dialog box, select the Gantt
Chart bar you want to change. Click the Bar Style tab. To specify the
shape, color, and pattern of the bars Start Endpoint (first field), the
height and thickness of the bar (second field), and the Finish Endpoint
(end field), click each corresponding field and select a shape.
Change a Gantt bars settings In the Bars dialog box (Activities
window), select the Gantt bar you want to change. Click the Bar
Settings tab. In the Grouping Band Settings section, mark the Show Bar
When Collapsed checkbox to include the selected bar when you display
summary level information. Mark Show Bar for Grouping Bands to
display the selected bar as a summary bar only.
Select how to show activity nonwork time in the Bar Necking Settings
section. Mark the Calendar Nonwork Time checkbox to show the
activity calendars nonwork time as a neck in the selected bar. Mark the
Activity Nonwork Intervals checkbox to show the selected bars
nonwork time based on the activitys suspend/resume dates and other
gaps of time, such as when using out of sequence progress.
Change a Gantt Chart bars label You can choose to display a bar
label, which acts like a title in describing the bars purpose. In the Bars
dialog box, select the Gantt Chart bar you want to change. Click the Bar
Labels tab. To add a label, click Add. Click in the Label field, then select
the label value. To remove a label, select it in the Bar Labels tab, then
click Delete.
To change the position of a label, select it, then click in the Position
column and select a new position.
You can use the Table, Font and Row dialog box to change
the font for text that appears within layout rows, including
Gantt Chart bar labels. To access this dialog box, click the
Layout Options bar from the Activities window. Then choose
Table Font and Row. To change the font, click the Font button,
then select a new font.
Customizing Layouts
455
Display notebook items in the Gantt Chart You can attach

notebook items to the bars in a Gantt Chart. Notebook items might
include anticipated problems, core requirements, entry criteria, exit
criteria, metrics, scope, status, and other information. You can print
notebook items with the layout, or publish them with the layout to the
project Web site. In the Bars dialog box, click the Bar Labels tab. To add
a notebook item, click Add. Select a position for the label, then select a
notebook item from the drop-down list.
You can attach notebook items to Gantt Chart bars in the Bar
Labels tab. Only one notebook item can be attached to each
bar in the Gantt Chart.
Set the default size for notebook items in the Gantt Chart In
the Bars dialog box, click Options. Click the General tab. Type or select
a new width and height for the notebook items you want to display in
the Gantt Chart.
These settings are used only the first time a notebook item is
displayed next to the bar. Once you resize the notebook item
manually, the default settings are disregarded.
You can also click the

Relationship Lines button
in the toolbar to show and
hide relationship lines.
Show or hide relationship lines in the Gantt Chart In the Bars

dialog box, click Options. Click the General tab. Mark the Show
Relationships checkbox to display relationship lines in the Gantt Chart,
or clear the checkbox to hide relationship lines.
In the Activities view, mark

to show relationships
between activities.
These settings are used

only the first time a
notebook item is displayed
next to the bar. Once you
resize the notebook item
manually, the default
settings are disregarded.
456
Show or hide the Gantt Chart legend In the Bars dialog box,
click Options. Click the General tab. Mark the Show Legend checkbox
to display the Gantt Chart legend, or clear the checkbox to hide the
Gantt Chart legend.
Set the text limit for bar labels in the Gantt Chart In the Bars
dialog box, click Options. Click the General tab. To limit the amount of
text characters that show on the bars, mark the Limit Text Label
Characters To checkbox and then type or select the character limit at
which you want to allow the text label to be displayed.
When showing collapsed
bars, only Notebook Items
that contain all text will
display.
Customize collapsed bars in the Gantt Chart You can format

collapsed bars to display as a single bar or as individual bars in the Gantt
Chart in the Activities window. In the Bars dialog box, click Options.
Click the Collapsed Bars tab. Choose the Collapse to Grouping Bands
option to display the activity bars as a single bar. If the Show
Relationships checkbox in the General tab is marked, you can mark the
Show Relationships for Collapsed Bars to show relationship lines from
the collapsed bar to other collapsed and individual bars.
In the Show Bar Necking For section, mark the Calendar Nonwork Time
checkbox to show nonwork time from the activitys calendar as a neck,
or thin bar, on the collapsed bar. Mark the Activity Nonwork Intervals
checkbox to show a neck, or thin bar, for activity and/or calendar
nonwork time, including suspend/resume dates.
Choose to place each

individual bar as close to the
grouping band as possible,
under its timescale date.
Mark to allow bar labels
and bars to overlap when
minimizing space in the
Gantt Chart.
The collapsed Bar tab is available when formatting bars in the

Activities window.
Customizing Layouts
457
Customize the data date line You can change the style, size, and
color of the data date line to more easily distinguish it on-screen and in
printouts. In the Bars dialog box, click Options. Click the Data Date tab.
To change the style of the data date line, select a style from the drop
down list. The line can be solid, or contain a series of dashes and dots.
To change the thickness of your data date line, select a value between 1
and 10 pixels in the Size field. This option only applies to the solid line
style. Click in the Color field to select a color from the color palette.
If your line style is

something other than
the solid line and you
increase the size to a
number greater than
one, the bar style
switches to a solid line.
Change the background lines in the Gantt Chart In the Bars

dialog box, click Options. Click the Sight Lines tab. To show
background horizontal lines before every Summary bar, mark the Show
Major Lines checkbox in the Horizontal Lines section and then select a
line style from the drop-down list. To show background horizontal lines
before every X number of rows, mark the Show Minor Lines Every
checkbox and then type or select the row interval at which you want to
the minor lines to be displayed. Next, select a line style from the dropdown list.
To show background major vertical lines for every X amount of time,
mark the Show Major Lines checkbox in the Vertical Lines section, and
then type or select the number of intervals and time unit to display the
major vertical lines. Next, select a line style for the vertical lines from
the drop down list. To show background minor vertical lines before
every X amount of time, mark the Show Minor Lines Every checkbox
and then type or select the number of intervals and time unit to display
the minor vertical lines. Next, select a line style from the drop-down list.
458
Display the
sight lines
based on
the selected
time unit.
Highlight a timeperiod in a Gantt Chart Use the Curtain

Attachment dialog box to highlight a specific timeperiod in a Gantt
Chart. In the Activities window, choose View, Attachments, Curtain,
Add Curtain. Mark the Display Curtain Attachment checkbox. Click the
Browse buttons to select the start and finish dates. Click Delete to
remove the curtain from the layout. In the layout, to manually shift the
curtain, move the mouse cursor over the curtain and click and drag it to
the new dates. To change the start and finish dates of the display, click
and drag the sides of the curtain to the new dates.
To hide all curtains displayed in the layout, choose View, Attachments,
Curtain, Hide All. To display curtains that may be hidden in the layout,
choose View, Attachments, Curtain, Show All. Double-click on the
curtain to edit the curtain date range, color and fill pattern.
Clear to hide the

curtain attachment
in the Gantt Chart.
Click to select the
color for the curtain
attachment.
Click to select
the curtain
pattern.
Customizing Layouts
459
Add text to a Gantt Chart Use the Text Attachment dialog box to
create formatted text and insert it in a Gantt Chart. The text displays in
the foreground of the Gantt Chart, whenever you click in the layout. In
the Activities window, select the activity to which you want to add text.
Click the Layout Options bar and choose Attachments, Text.
Click to select the texts

font and style.
Modify and remove text in a Gantt Chart In the Gantt Chart,

double-click the text to select it, then modify it in the Text Attachment
dialog box. To manually shift the text attachment, move the mouse
cursor over the text, click to select the attachment, and drag it to the new
location. To remove a text attachment in the Gantt Chart, click the text
attachment you want to remove, then click Delete.
460
Formatting Activity Network Layouts

The Activity Network layout displays a project as a diagram of activities
and relationships, according to the work breakdown structure (WBS).
You can control nearly every aspect of the Activity Network, including
the appearance of activities, the contents of activity boxes, and the
spacing between activities.
You can use an Activity Network layout to
Easily view relationships among activities and the flow of work

through a project
Examine and edit an activity and its predecessors and successors
Focus on the driving relationship path
An Activity Network box visually represents a project activity. When

customizing boxes, you can specify particular fonts and colors, set
spacing and positioning, and copy styles from another layout.
Customizing Layouts
Activity ID
461
Total Float
Planned Duration
Activity Name
Remaining Duration
Early Start
Early Finish
Choose an Activity Network box template With an Activity

Network layout displayed in the Activities window, click the Layout
Options bar, then choose Activity Network, Activity Network Options.
Click the Activity Box Template tab.
Click to display a list of predefined
activity box templates.

selected activity boxs
font and colors.
Click to customize the selected

activity box template.
Customize an Activity Network box template You can use one

of the predefined activity box templates, or customize your own. With
an Activity Network layout displayed in the Activities window, click the
Layout Options bar, then choose Activity Network, Activity Network
Options. Click the Activity Box Template tab. From the drop-down list,
select a template that is similar to the one you want to create, then click
Box Template. You can add rows for inserting new fields and determine
how high and wide the field cells should occupy within the activity box.
462
Click to add a
new row to the
activity box.
Use the Width

and Height
fields to
customize the
size of the new
data items cell.
Double-click in Field
Name field and choose
the data item to add to
the box.
Customize the Activity Network layout With an Activity

Click the Activity Network Layout tab.
Aligns activity boxes towards

the top of the Activity Network
window, in relation to their
predecessors/successors
Centers activity boxes in
relation to their
predecessors/successors
Choose to display the
activity networks with the
longest or shortest path of
linked activities on top.
When an activitys predecessor/successor is not immediately adjacent to

its activity in the Activity Network, the relationship line may not be
visible because of other activity boxes. To reposition activity boxes so
that all relationship lines are visible, mark the Adjust to Show All
Relationships checkbox.
Customizing Layouts
463
To have the module automatically determine the view that best shows all
activity boxes in the layout after you have reorganized it, mark the
Always Zoom to Best Fit After Reorganize checkbox.
To have the module indicate progress by drawing an X on a completed
activity or a slash on an activity in progress, mark the Show Progress
checkbox.
To change the amount of vertical space between activity boxes in the
Activity Network, specify a spacing factor that is a percentage of the
height of activity boxes in the Activity Network table.
To change the horizontal space between activity boxes in the Activity
Network, specify a horizontal spacing factor that is a percentage of the
width of activity boxes in the Activity Network table.
Copy from another Activity Network layout With an Activity
Click Copy From. Select the Activity Network layout whose attributes
you want to copy. Click Open.
In the Activity Network, when you select a data item for
grouping, the hierarchy on the left side of the window
contains the WBS so you can filter activities according to the
hierarchy.
Save an Activity Network layout You can save the Activity

Network layout as an .ANP file to use later or email to another project
user. To save an Activity Network layout, click the Layout Options bar,
then choose Activity Network, Save Network Positions.
Open a saved Activity Network layout To open the saved layout,
click the Layout Options bar, then choose Activity Network, Open
Network Positions. Select the file and click Open.
464
Modifying Resource and Activity Usage Profile

Settings
The Activity Usage Profile displays a time distribution of activity units
and costs in a Bar Chart format. You can customize all aspects of this
display, and you can also filter the information it contains.
The Resource Usage Profile displays a time distribution of resource
units and costs in relation to activities in a Bar Chart format. You can
also customize and filter the settings for this layout.
You can customize Resource and Activity Usage Profiles in several
different ways. Select the type of information you want to display,
change the timescale, and/or customize the bars and background.
You can also click this button to display the
Resource Usage Profile in the bottom layout.
Click the Display

Options bar and
choose Show All
Projects to show
data for all projects.
If you do not choose
this option, only
data for open
projects are shown.
To move the legend, click and hold
the mouse button, and drag the
legend anywhere in the Profile.
When showing all projects, resource distributions are

calculated at the resource level. When showing open
projects, calculations are made at the activity assignment
level.
Customizing Layouts
465
Format resource data settings Display the Resource Usage

Profile in the bottom pane of the Activities window. Click the Layout
Options bar, choose Show on Bottom, Resource Usage Profile. Next,
click the Display Options bar for the Resource Usage Profile, and
choose Resource Usage Profile Options. Click the Data tab, then specify
the type of data to display in the profile and the way it will be
represented. You can also right-click in the Resource Usage Profile area
and choose Resource Usage Profile Options. The data options differ
slightly depending on whether you are showing data for all projects or
only open projects.
Mark to display past period actual values (rather than
actual to date values). If projects are summarized by
financial period (which is controlled by an
administrative setting), this option is ignored. Click
Help in this dialog box for more detailed information.
hoose the type of information to

display in the profile.
Mark the checkbox for each

type of cost/unit value to
display. Determine whether
you want to show these data
by date (as a bar) or as a
curve representing
cumulative value. Select the
color for each bar/curve.
When showing all projects,
mark to show resource/role
limits, available units, and
overallocation. Mark to show
allocation limit and overtime
when showing open projects
only.
For detailed instructions on

customizing Activity and
Resource Usage Profiles,
refer to the Help.
You can also show the limit and overallocation when

displaying open projects only. You can only show the
planning limit when displaying data in units.
466
The Resource Usage Profile displays past period actual data

for the Actual, Show Overallocation, and Show Available
Units options if you choose the option to Display Actual using
Financial Period data.
When showing all project data, choose how to display remaining unit or
cost distributions for early and late dates.
Format the resource data settings for the stacked
histogram Display the Resource Usage Profile in the bottom pane of
the Activities window. Click the Layout Options bar, choose Show on
Bottom, Resource Usage Profile. Next, click the Display Options bar
and choose Stacked Histogram. Then click the Display Options bar and
choose Resource Usage Profile Options. Click the Data tab, then specify
the type of data to display in the profile and the way it will be
represented. You can also right-click in the Resource Usage Profile area
and choose Resource Usage Profile Options.
Customizing Layouts
467
Mark to display past period actual values (rather than

actual to date values). If projects are summarized by
financial period (which is controlled by an
administrative setting), this option is ignored. Click
Help in this dialog box for more detailed information.
Choose the type of

information to display in the
profile.
Choose to show one total
curve or individual curves
representing cumulative
value in the color selected
for each resource filter.
Add a filter to select
the resources to
include in the
profile. Select a
pattern and color for
each resource filter.
Use the arrow keys to
arrange the order you want
to display the resource
filters in the stacked
histogram.
In the profile, the

legend displays the
resource filter/group
name as specified in
the options.
For detailed
instructions on
customizing Stacked
Histograms, refer to
the Help.
Double-click on the individual bar to display the value for

each resource/role group for the selected time period.
468
Format resource graph settings Click the Graph tab. Mark the
checkbox next to each time unit (major or minor) for which you want to
display a vertical line in the background. Choose the type of horizontal
line you want to display for each number along the side of the profile,
then select the line color. If the option is available, mark the Show
Legend checkbox to display a legend for the profiles bars. To display
the profiles bars in 3D, mark the 3D Bars checkbox. To change the
profiles background color, click Background Color and select a new
color. To divide the timescale into increments you specify, mark the
Calculate Average checkbox. Specify the Unit of Measure for the
timescale increments.
Options when Stacked Histogram is selected for
the Resource Usage Profile.
Specify the value the module

will use to divide the
timescale interval totals. Or,
display the division
increment based on the
increment specified in the
User Preferences for the
corresponding date interval.
Customizing Layouts
about setting user
preferences, see Setting
User Preferences on
page 49.
469
Set user preferences for resource analysis Click Preferences in

the Resource Usage Profile Options dialog box to specify whether to
include data from open and closed projects, or only the projects
currently open in the module, when calculating remaining units and
costs. (Closed projects are any projects in the enterprise project structure
(EPS) that are not currently open in the module.) For data displayed in
the Resource Usage Profile, Resource Usage spreadsheet, tracking
layouts, and time-distributed P6 Web Access charts, specify the
following:
choose to use remaining or forecast start and finish dates to

display resource units and cost values
select the interval at which live resource and cost calculations

are performed
choose to display role limits based on custom role limits defined

in the Roles dictionary or based on the limit defined for each
roles primary resource
470
Format activity data settings Display the Activity Usage Profile in

the bottom pane of the Activities window. Click the Layout Options bar,
Show on Bottom, Activity Usage Profile. Click the Display Options bar
for the Activity Usage Profile, choose Activity Usage Profile Options.
Click the Data tab. Mark the checkbox next to each type of filter you
want to use to select the data included in the profile. Then, select the
pattern that will be used to display each data type. Mark the Total
checkbox to display the total cost. Select more than one filter to see a
combination of values in the Activity Usage Profile.
Choose the type of information
to display in the profile.
Mark to display past period
actual values (rather than
actual to date values). If
projects are summarized by
financial period (which is
controlled by an
administrative setting), this
option is ignored. Click Help
in this dialog box for more
detailed information.
type of cost/unit value to
display. Determine whether
you want to show these data
by date (as a bar) or as a
curve representing the
cumulative value. Select the
color for each bar/curve.
type of cumulative curve to
display. Select the color for
each curve.
The Activity Usage Profile displays past period actual data for
the Actual bar and curve and the Planned Value, Earned
Value, and Estimate at Completion curves if you choose the
option to Display Actual and Earned Value using Financial
Period data.
Customizing Layouts
471
Format activity graph settings Click the Graph tab. Mark the
checkbox next to each time unit (major or minor) for which you want to
display a vertical line in the background. Mark the checkbox next to the
type of horizontal line you want to display for each number along the
side of the profile. Then select the line color. To display a legend for the
profiles bars, mark the Show Legend checkbox. To display the profiles
bars in 3D, mark the 3D Bars checkbox. To change the profiles
background color, click Background Color and select a new color. To
display the timescale in increments you specify, mark the Calculate
Average checkbox. Specify the Unit of Measure for the timescale
increments.
Specify the value the module

will use to divide the
timescale interval totals. Or,
display the division increment
based on the increment
specified in the User
Preferences for the
corresponding date interval.
473
Customizing Reports
In this chapter:
Reports Overview
Opening Reports
Creating and Modifying Reports
Using the Report Editor
Adding Data Sources and Rows to
Reports
Adding Text Cells to Reports
Sorting Report Data Sources
Customizing a Report with the
Report Editor: an Example
Using Report Groups
Setting Up Batch Reports
Reporting is a key part of monitoring a

project and communicating its progress to
team members and executive management.
This chapter discusses how to open standard
reports, create new reports, and modify
existing reports. It also describes how you
can organize reports in hierarchical groups.
Refer to Printing Layouts and Reports on
page 509 for instructions on setting page and
print options, previewing and printing
layouts and reports, and publishing layouts
and reports in HTML format.
474
Reports Overview
You can create new reports, or modify existing ones, using the Report
Wizard or Report Editor. A large library of standard reports is provided
for your use.
The Report Wizard enables you to create a wide variety of complex
reports very rapidly using a wizard-style interface. You can also use the
wizard to modify reports created using the wizard.
The Report Editor is a what-you-see-is-what-you-get (WYSIWYG)
report writer that allows you to group, sort, filter, and roll up project
information. You can also display time distributions for units and costs,
and include graphics and HTML links in reports. Use the Report Editor
to modify and custom tailor reports created in the Report Wizard.
The report icon shows whether it was created in the Report Wizard or
the Report Editor.
Indicates the
reports were
created using
the Report
Wizard
Indicates the
reports were
created using
the Report
Editor
After you create a report, you can preview, print, or save it to a text or
HTML file. Saving the report to a file enables you to import data to a
spreadsheet program, e-mail it, archive it, or publish it on a Web site.
Customizing Reports
475
Opening Reports
Use the Reports window to create, edit, run, and delete global and
project reports. You can also use the Reports window to export and
import reports to and from other module installations.
Open the Reports window Choose Tools, Reports, Reports.
Reports can be global or project specific.
Print
single or
batch
reports.
Click the
Display Options
bar to sort and
filter the reports
listed in this
window and to
define screen
fonts and colors.
Click to
build
reports
using the
Report
Editor.
Click to
easily
create ad
hoc
reports.
Each report can belong to one report group. To add, modify, or
delete these groups, choose Tools, Reports, Report Groups.
476
Creating and Modifying Reports

about creating and
modifying reports using
the Report Wizard and
Report Editor, refer to the
Help.
You can create and modify reports using the Report Wizard or Report
Editor. Use the Report Wizard to quickly create a report using the
wizard interface. Use the Report Editor to modify and custom tailor
your reports according to your needs.
The Report Wizard quickly guides you through creating ad hoc reports
and enables you to group, sort, and filter the data. If a report is modified
using the Report Editor, and you decide to change it again using the
Report Wizard, the changes made in the Report Editor will be lost.
To include a new report in a particular report group, select the
report group in the Reports window before you start the
wizard. When you finish creating the report, it will be saved in
the selected report group.
Create a report with the Report Wizard Choose Tools, Report

Wizard, and follow the prompts. Using the Wizard, you can select
multiple subject areas for the report. For each selected subject area you
can customize columns and apply group, sort, and filter options. When
you are finished defining the report parameters, click Finish.
The subject
area selected
here...
...determines the
additional subject areas
available for the report.
Customizing Reports
477
Select the subject area to

configure. You can customize
columns and apply group,
sort, and filter options.
Click to change the name of a field

as it appears on the report.
478

using the Report Editor,
refer to the next section,
Using the Report Editor.
Create a report with the Report Editor To create a blank report

with the Report Editor, you need to select an existing report first. If you
do not want to modify your original report, make a copy of it before you
edit it with the Report Editor. Once you select a report, click Modify,
and confirm that you want to use the Report Editor. Within the Report
Editor, click the new report icon and confirm your decision. You have
now a blank report that you can customize.
Click the New Report

icon to create a blank
report.
Modify a report You can modify reports using the Report Wizard or
the Report Editor. In the Reports window, select the name of the report
you want to modify. To use the wizard, click the Wizard button. To use
the Report Editor, click Modify.
Customizing Reports
479
Using the Report Editor

The Report Editor is an elaborate tool that enables you to create highly
customized, custom-tailored reports. The Report Editor allows you to
create, edit, and organize report components, where a report component
may be a data source, a row, or a cell. The Report Editor consists of the
following main parts: Toolbar, Ruler, Left Margin, Report Canvas, and
the right-click menu.
In the Reports window, select a report, then click Modify to open it with
the Report Editor.
Toolbar
Ruler
Left Margin
Report Canvas
480
Using the Toolbar The Toolbar provides shortcuts to the main

functions of the Report Editor.
Toolbar
The New Report button deletes the displayed reports

settings and creates a new report.
The Add Data Source button adds a data source, or category

of information, to the displayed report. This button is
available only if the selected report area is a Detail Area.
The Add Row button adds a row to the selected area of the
displayed report.
The Add Text Cell button adds a text cell to the selected
row.
Customizing Reports
481
The Add Image Cell button adds an image cell to the

selected row.
The Add Line Cell button dds a line cell to the selected row.
Line cells contain horizontal lines only.
The Print Preview button displays a preview of the

displayed report.
The Properties button allows you to define the selected

report component's properties. You can also double-click a
component.
The Report Wizard button allows you to modify the current
report settings using the Report Wizard. Launching the
Report Wizard within the Report Editor removes any report
settings that were added using the Report Editor. Report
settings configured by the Report Wizard will not be
removed.
Using the Ruler The Ruler indicates the horizontal position of each
report component. A blue, shaded area indicates the position and width
of the selected cell. A red, vertical bar indicates your cursors position
on the Report Canvas.
Using the Left Margin The Left Margin helps you identify each data
source and row. To help you identify data sources, the Left Margin
displays each data sources name and grouping, if any, in the upper-left
corner of the data source area. To help you identify rows, the Left
Margin displays each rows type in the upper-left corner of the row. The
icon indicates rows that are part of a header area. The icon
indicates rows that are part of a footer area.
Using the Report Canvas The Report Canvas enables you to view
each components position in the overall report. The Report Canvas also
provides visual cues that identify each components properties as
follows:
482
Data sources are color-coded. If a data source is embedded, or

nested, in a parent data source, then each data source displays in an
original color.
Text cells are coded according to the type of data they report. To
determine a text cells type, you can refer to the icons that appear in
the upper-right corner of the cell.
- indicates a Custom Text cell, or a cell that contains text you
specify.
- indicates a Field Data cell, or a cell that compiles and reports
information from a field you specify.
- indicates a Field Title cell, or a cell that contains the name of a
field you specify.
- indicates a Variable cell, or a cell that reports information
related to the overall report, rather than a specific data source.
Text cells that appear in red indicate that the cells properties either have
not been defined or conflict with the properties of the data source that
contains the cell. To view a cells properties, double-click the cell.
Selecting a report component A blue border indicates the
selected report component. To select a component, click the component.
To increase the scope of the selected area, press Esc. For example, if a
text cell is selected, pressing Esc selects the report row that contains it.
Pressing Esc again selects the data source that contains the row.
Double-click a component
to open the Properties
window. While the window
is open, you can select any
component in the Report
Canvas and modify its
properties.
Modifying properties In addition to viewing a reports layout, you

can also use the Report Canvas to edit a report directly. To view a
components properties, or settings, double-click the component. You
can also use the context sensitive help if you right-click on a component.
Deleting a component Some of the components you can delete by
pressing the Delete button or choosing Delete from the right-click menu.
However, if you cannot delete the selected component this way, press
ESC first to increase the scope of the selected area, and press Delete
again.
Customizing Reports
483
Adding Data Sources and Rows to Reports

Use the Report Editor to add or remove data sources and rows. The
Report Canvas provides you the following main areas for data sources:
Area
Description
Page Header
Area
Report components that appear at the top of each page of the

compiled report. The Page Header Area may contain rows
and cells. The Page Header Area is different from the
standard header you specify in the Page Setup dialog box. If
you specify a standard header, the standard header appears
at the top of the page, followed by the report's Page Header,
in the compiled report.
Report Header
Area
Report components that appear before the compiled report's

details and on the first page of the report only. The Report
Header Area may contain rows and cells.
Data Source
Header Area
If the report contains a data source, report components that

appear before the data sources records in the compiled
report. The Data Source Header Area may contain rows and
cells.
Detail Area
The area where most report information is compiled. If the

report contains a data source, the Detail Area indicates
which information the data source compiles and the
informations layout in the compiled report. The Detail Area
may contain data sources, rows, and cells.
Data Source
Footer Area
If the report contains a data source, report components that

appear after the data sources details in the compiled
report.The Data Source Footer Area may contain rows and
cells.
Report Footer
Area
Report components that appear after the compiled report's

details and on the last page of the report only. The Report
Footer Area may contain rows and cells.
Page Footer Area Report components that appear at the bottom of each page
of the compiled report. The Page Footer Area may contain
rows and cells.The Page Footer Area is different than the
standard footer you specify in the Page Setup dialog box. If
you specify a standard footer, the standard footer appears at
the bottom of the page, after the report's Page Footer, in the
compiled report.
484
You can only add a data

source to a reports Detail
Area, or to another data
sources Detail Area.
Add data sources to reports

1 In the Report Editor, click the gray Detail Area, then click
You can also use the right-click menu on the Detail Area.
2 Click the Source tab, then, in the Loop Through list, select the type
of information you want to report in the new data source.
To group the data sources information according to a related
category, click the Group By arrow, then select a grouping category.
The list of available categories reflects the data source you select
from the Loop Through list.
Embed data sources By embedding data sources, or adding data

sources to other data sources, you can outline relationships between
different types of information. For example, if you embed an activity
data source in a WBS data source, the compiled report will list activity
information according to WBS.
1 Click the Detail Area of the data source in which you want to
embed the new data source, then click
.
2 Click the Source tab, then, in the Loop Through list, select the type
of information you want to report in the new data source. The list of
available data sources reflects the new data sources relationship to
the parent data source.
Customizing Reports
485
To group the data sources information according to a related

category, click the Group By arrow, then select a grouping category.
The list of available categories reflects the data source you select
from the Loop through list.
Define layout options for data sources
1 Double-click the data source whose layout options you want to
define.
2 Click the Source tab.
3 Select when you want to insert page breaks in the compiled report.
4 To specify the number of hierarchy levels you want to include in the
compiled report, specify a number in the Max level field. To include
all hierarchy levels, select 0.
The Max level field is available only if the data source reports
hierarchical information.
5 To report information in hierarchy order, mark the Organize Hierarchically checkbox.
The Organize Hierarchically checkbox is available only if the data
source reports hierarchical information.
6 To hide, or exclude, the data sources report components if the data
source does not produce any records, mark the Hide If Empty
checkbox. This includes the data sources header and footer.
7 To hide, or exclude, parent data source records from the compiled
report, if its children data sources do not produce any records, mark
the Hide Record If No Children checkbox.
486
The Report Editor does

not display the actual
height, or amount of
vertical space, the row will
occupy in the compiled
report. To view the rows
actual height in the
compiled report, click Print
Preview.
Add rows to reports

1 In the Report Editor, click the report area to which you want to add
a row, then click
.
2 Click
3 Click the Row tab, then type the height of the new row.
To change the rows background color, click Color, then select a
new color.
Copy (or cut) and paste rows

1 Right-click the row you want to copy (or cut) and paste, then
choose Copy (or Cut).
To copy/cut a row that contains cells, click a cell in the row, press
Esc, then press Ctrl+C to copy or Ctrl+X to cut.
2 Right-click the report area where you want to paste the copied/cut
row, then choose Paste.
Remove rows from reports Right-click the row you want to
remove, then choose Delete. To delete a row that contains cells, click a
cell in the row, press Esc, then press Delete.
Customizing Reports
487
Adding Text Cells to Reports

The Report Editor enables you to add four types of text cells to reports:
Field Title cells, Field Data cells, Variable cells, and Custom Text cells.
Field Title cells contain the name of a Project Management module
field you specify. Field Title cells are helpful when you want to add a
label to a column or another text cell. Examples of field titles are WBS
Code and Activity Name.
Field Data cells compile and report information from a Project
Management module field you specify. For example, if you add a Field
Data cell that refers to the field WBS Code, then the cell will report
codes for WBS elements.
Variable cells report information related to the overall report, rather
than a specific data source. Report name and page number are examples
of Variable type information.
Custom Text cells contain custom text that you specify.
Select the type of cell you

want to add to the report.
488

about adding rows to
reports, see the preceding
section.
Add field title or field data cells to reports

1 In the Report Editor, select the row to which you want to add a field
title or field data cell.
2 Click
3 Click the Cell tab, then select Field Title or Field Data as the cell
type.
If the cell is part of a data source, select the category of information
that contains the field title you want to report in the cell.
4 Select the field whose title you want to report in the cell for a Field
Title cell; for a Field Data cell, select the field whose information
you want to compile and report in the cell.
Field Title and Field Data are only functional when the
selected report cell is within a data source.
Add variable or custom text cells to reports

1 In the Report Editor, select the row to which you want to add a
variable or custom text cell.
2 Click
3 Click the Cell tab, select Variable or Custom Text as the cell type.
4 Select the type of variable information you want to report in the
cell, or type the custom text you want to appear in the cell.
Add image cells to reports

1 In the Report Editor, double-click the row to which you want to add
an image cell.
2 Click
from the Image tab of the Properties dialog box.
Customizing Reports
489
3 Click Select Image, then click Load.

4 Select the drive that contains the images file.
5 In the Look in field, double-click the folder(s) that contains the
images file, select the file, then click Open.
To expand the image to the size of the selected image cell, mark the
Stretch Image checkbox.
6 Click OK.
The Report Editor supports BMP and JPG files.
You can also change a

cells width directly in the
Report Editor. Place your
pointer over the cells left or
right edge. When the
pointer changes to a
double-headed arrow, drag
the cells edge to a new
position.
Define layout options for image cells

1 Double-click the image cell whose layout options you want to
define.
2 Click the Image tab, then click the Image alignment arrow
To use your mouse to drag the cell to the appropriate position in the
row, select None.
To position the cell relative to the left margin, select Left, then type
the cells left indent in the Left field.
To position the cell flush against the right margin, select Right.
To extend the cell across the entire row, select Center.
3 In the Width field, type the cells numeric width, or the distance you
want the cell to occupy between the reports left and right margins.
If the cells alignment is Center, you cannot enter the cells width.
Define HTML settings for image cells The Project Management
module enables you to specify how you want to include an image in a
report if you compile the report to an HTML file.
1 Double-click the image cell whose HTML settings you want to
define.
2 Click the Image tab, then click Select Image.
To copy the images file, type a location and name for the copied
image file, relative to the reports HTML directory, in the Relative
Image Path field. Copying an image file allows you to maintain a
stable HTML directory for the report.
490
To reference the images file, rather than copy the file, mark the
Reference Image Instead checkbox, then type the location and
name of the images file in the Relative Image Path field.
Referencing an images file is helpful when the images content
frequently changes.
Add line cells to reports
1 In the Report Editor, select the row to which you want to add a line
cell.
2 Click
3 Click the Line tab, then specify the number of lines to include in the
new line cell.
You can also change a

cells width directly in the
Report Editor. Place your
pointer over the cells left or
right edge. When the
pointer changes to a
double-headed arrow, drag
the cells edge to a new
position.
Define layout options for line or text cells

1 Double-click the line or text cell whose layout options you want to
define.
2 To define options for a line cell, click the Line tab, then click the
Line alignment arrow. To define options for a text cell, click the
Cell tab, then select the cell alignment.
To use your mouse to drag the cell to the appropriate position in the
row, select None.
Customizing Reports
491
To position the cell relative to the left margin, select Left, then type
the cells left indent in the Left field.
To position the cell flush against the right margin, select Right.
To extend the cell, or line, across the entire row, select Center.
3 Type the cells numeric width, or the distance you want the cell to
occupy between the reports left and right margins.
If the cells alignment is Center, you cannot enter the cells width.
Add borders to text cells in reports
1 In the Report Editor, double-click the text cell to which you want to
add borders.
2 Click the Cell tab, then click Borders.
3 Mark the appropriate checkboxes to add borders to the cell.
Cell borders always appear in black. You cannot change the
color of a cells borders.
Clear the appropriate

checkboxes to remove
the cells borders.
Format text in text cells

1 Double-click the cell whose text you want to format.
492
2 Click the Cell tab.

To change the position of the cells text relative to the cells left and
right edges, select a new alignment.
To apply a style to the cells text, select a new font style.
To apply a custom style to the cells text, select Custom as the font
style, then click Custom Font to select new formatting options.
Change a text cells background color
1 Double-click the text cell whose background color you want to
change.
2 Click the Cell tab, then click Color.
You can use the Color dialog box to either select a color from the
Basic Colors palette or define a custom color with the color
spectrum.
To select a color from the Basic Colors palette, under Basic Colors,
click the color you want to apply to the text cell, then click OK.
To define a custom color
1 In the color spectrum, click the color you want to apply, then drag
the slider at the right of the dialog box to adjust the colors
attributes.
You can also type the colors numeric values in the RGB (Red,
Green, Blue) and HLS (Hue, Luminescence, Saturation) fields.
2 Click Add to Custom Colors, then click OK.
Clear this checkbox to disable

the HTML link for the cell.
Customizing Reports
The Link Prefix field will

most likely be the URL
prior to the file you wish to
link to, for example http://
www.foo.com/. Likewise,
the Enable Link Field
checkbox and the Link
Suffix field will be used to
generate the actual
filename and extension
you wish to link to. If
Enable Link Field is
marked, then the Link
Object and Link Field fields
will determine the filename
and the Link Suffix field will
provide the extension of
the file you wish to link to,
for example .html. If
Enable Link Field is not
marked, then the Link
Suffix field will provide both
the filename and extension
of the file you wish to link
to, for example foo.html.
493
Add HTML links to image or text cells

1 Double-click the cell to which you want to add an HTML link.
2 Click the appropriate tab for the type of cell for which you want to
add the link: Cell tab for text cells or Image tab for Image cells,
then click HTML links.
3 Type the Internet address of the Web page to which you want the
selected text cell to link, or type the prefix of the Internet address to
which you want the selected image cell to link.
4 If you want each report record to be a hot-link to another file, mark
the Enable Link Field checkbox.
To disable the link if a specific field does not produce any records in
the compiled report, mark the Disable Link If Empty Value
checkbox. Select an object, or category of information, and a field
from the Link Object and Link Field lists. The list of available
objects and fields reflects the type of information reported by the
cells row.
5 Type the suffix of the Internet address to which you want the
selected cell to link.
6 To create a link to a specific frame in the Web page, if the Web page
uses frames, type the name of the frame.
Both Link Prefix and Link Suffix are used to build the URL link
for the text or image cell. The URL is built as follows: [Link
Prefix]+[Link Field]+[Link Suffix], if the Enable Link Field
checkbox is marked. If the Enable Link Field checkbox is not
marked, then the URL is built like this: [Link Prefix]+[Link
Suffix].
494
If the background image is

smaller than the reports
page, the Project
Management module tiles,
or repeats, the image to fill
the reports background
area. If the background
image is larger than the
reports page, the Project
Management module
positions the image in the
upper-left corner of the
report page, then excludes
those areas of the image
that do not fit within the
reports right and bottom
margins.
Add background images to reports

1 In the Report Editor, click
2 Click the Report tab, then click Background Image.

3 Click Load.
4 Select the drive that contains the images file.
5 Under Look In, double-click the folder(s) that contains the images
file, select the file, then click Open.
Remove background images from reports
1 In the Report Editor, click
2 Click the Report tab, then click Background Image.

3 Click Clear, then click OK.
Copy (or cut) and paste cells

1 Right-click the cell you want to copy (or cut), then choose Copy (or
Cut).
2 Right-click the row in which you want to paste the copied cell, then
choose Paste.
To paste the cell to a row that contains other cells, select a cell in
the row, press Esc, then press Ctrl+V.
Remove cells from reports Right-click the cell you want to
remove, then choose Delete.
Customizing Reports
495
Sorting Report Data Sources

You can sort a reports records by applying a sort order to one or more of
the reports data sources, and edit a reports sort order by changing the
sort settings for one or more of the reports data sources.
Sort a report
1 Double-click the data source whose records you want to sort.
2 Click the Source tab, then click Add.
3 Select the field by which you want to sort the data sources records.
The list of available sorting fields reflects the sort object you select
from the Sort by Object list.
4 To sort records in ascending order, choose Ascending. To sort
records in descending order, choose Descending.
5 Click OK.
To sort by additional objects and fields, repeat steps 2 through 4.
Edit sort orders for reports Double-click the data source whose
sort order you want to edit; click the Source tab.
To add a new field to the sort order, click Add, then type the sort
criteria. Click OK, then change the fields position in the sort order,
if necessary.
To delete a field from the sort order, select a sort row, then click
Delete.
To change a data types position in the sort order, select its sort row,
then click the appropriate arrow button.
To edit a sort rows sort object or field, select the row, then click
Edit.
496
Customizing a Report with the Report Editor: an

Example
In this example, we use the Report Editor to customize a report,
originally created with the Report Wizard. To view the original report,
select the
PP-01 EPS, Project Details report under the report group Project/
WBS details. The original report, depending on your project data should
be similar to this:
Customizing Reports
497
After customizing, the same report has the following layout:

b) Only projects that have more than
one activity are displayed.
a) Sorted by Strategic
Priority order.
c) Double
line
separator.
c) If Risk Level is High

or Very High, the field
is highlighted in red.
d) The new column,

Project Status, displays
only if the Risk Level is
High or Very High.
To customize the original report in the Report Editor:

1 In the Reports window, select the original report created in the
Report Wizard (PP-01 EPS, Project Details).
2 Click Copy.
3 Click Paste.
4 Double-click the name of the copied report and rename it, so you
can remember which one is customized.
498
5 While the new report is selected, click Modify... .

Since the original report was created in the Report Wizard, a
warning appears that you are about to modify the report. Confirm
your decision by clicking the Yes button.
The Report Editor displays.
Filtering and sorting the data source The current report displays
all projects, regardless how many activities they contain. You may want
to filter the data source to show projects that have more than one
activity. You may also want to sort these projects by Strategic Priority.
To filter and sort the data source:
1 Double-click on the Data Source Header Area.
The Properties window displays.
Customizing Reports
499
The selected tab

shows what
components
properties you can
modify currently.
Click to edit the filter

criteria for the data
source.
Click to sort the
source data by a field.
2 Click the Edit filter... button.

The current filter criteria displays all Project and EPS nodes but
filters out the WBS nodes.
3 Click Add.
4 Set the filter criteria to show data only if the Total Activities is
greater than one.
500
5 Change the (Any of the following) logical operator to (All of the

following).
To create a new filter

line, you can copy/
paste an existing one,
and then modify its
properties.
6 Click OK.
7 Click the Add button on the Properties window to sort the data
source.
8 Select Project for the Sort by Object field and Strategic Priority for
the Sort by Field.
9 Click OK.
10 Close the Properties window by clicking the x at the top right hand
corner.
11 Click the preview icon to view the current report.
The Report Canvas does not display the actual height, or amount of
vertical space, each report component will occupy in the compiled
report. To view the report's vertical spacing and your progress, you
can always click the preview icon to view the report.
Customizing Reports
501
Adding a new filtered column To display the project status, you

have to add a new column to the report. You may want to show the
Project Status field only if the Risk Level is High or Very High.
To add a new filtered column
1 Select the row that you want to add the new column.
The row is highlighted in blue.
2 Right-click the row and choose Add Text Cell.
The Properties window displays, now showing the Cell properties.

3 Set the Cell Object to WBS, and the Cell field to Project Status.
You may want to set the cell properties to adjust position and
alignment as well.
If you accidently
moved or resized a
cell, you can set the
exact position and
size here.
502
4 Click the Edit filter and set the filter criteria to display the cell only
if the Risk Level is High or Very High.
The window title displays
the scope of the filter. In
this case, the filter applies
to the selected Cell.
To quickly create the

second filter condition,
select the first one first,
copy/paste (Ctrl+C/
Ctrl+V) it, then change
the value, Very High to
High.
Make sure you set the logical operator to (Any of the following).
Note that this time the filter criteria apply to this cell only and not to
the whole report.
5 Click OK.
6 Close the Properties window.
7 Add a header, titled Project Status to the new column.
You can either follow the steps above to add this header to the
Project Status column, or you can copy/paste the Strategic Priority
cell first, then simply move it to the right and edit its properties.
These cells are Custom Texts. Custom Texts do not display data,
they show exactly what you type in the Custom Text field.
8 Click the Preview icon to view the current report.
The new column should display only if the Risk Level is High or
Very High.
Customizing Reports
503
Highlighting the Risk Level field You may want to call attention
to projects that have a risk level of High or Very High by displaying
the field value in red. It is not possible to change the property of a field
at run-time but the following tip may help to achieve the same result.
To highlight the Risk Level field in red:
1 Select the Detail Area.
2 Choose Add Row from the right-click menu.
3 Copy the cells from the first row and paste them into the second
one.
If you preview the report now, you see double records, since we
created two rows with the exact same data.
4 Double-click the Risk Level cell in the second row.
5 Set the Font Style to Custom, and click Custom Font... to change
the color to red.
Do not close the Properties window yet. You can work on the
Report Canvas while the Properties window is still open. It may
speed up your work with setting properties of different components
on the screen.
6 Click the first row in the Detail Area.
Since the Properties window is still open, it should display the Row
tab now. Make sure you click the row and not a cell in the row.
7 Click the Edit filter... on the Row tab.
8 Set the filter criteria to display data only if the Risk Level is not
equal to High or Very High.
504
9 Click OK.
This condition allows to display the selected row only if the
condition is true. In this case, the data displays only in this row if
the Risk Level is not equal to Very High or High.
10 Click the second row in the Detail Area.
11 Click Edit filter, and set the filter criteria to show data only if the
Risk Level equals to High or Very High.
12 Close the Properties window and preview the report.
The conditions we set for the rows allow us to show only one row at
a time. If the Risk Level is High or Very High, the second row
displays, if the Risk Level is neither High or Very High, the first
row displays. Since all the cells are the same in the two rows, except
the Risk Level color, it seems as if the cell was highlighted in the
report.
Customizing Reports
For specific details refer to

the help. Click the Help
button on the dialog box to
open the context sensitive
help.
505
Working with lines Lines are displayed in Line Cells. You may want
to use a double line, instead of a single line under the column headers.
To modify line properties, double-click the Line Cell under in the Page
Header area, and set the number of lines to two.
If you preview the report now, it should resemble to the layout we
wanted to achieve. Close the Report Editor, and confirm that you want
to save the current report. You can now run the report by clicking the
Run Report... button on the Reports view.
506
Using Report Groups

Report groups are a hierarchical way to organize global and project
reports. Each report can belong to one report group.
Add a report group Choose Tools, Reports, Report Groups. Click
Add, then type the name of the new report group.
Click to list report
groups in ascending or
descending order or as
a hierarchy.
Click to move
groups up and
down and to
indent/outdent
to denote
hierarchy
level.
Report groups can have

multiple levels.
Assign a report to a report group Choose Tools, Reports,

Reports. Select the report you want to add to a report group, then click
the Browse button in the Report Group field at the bottom of the Reports
window. Select the group to which you want to add the report, then click
Select.
Also use this field to

remove the selected report
from a report group and/or
reassign the report to a
different report group.
Customizing Reports
507
Setting Up Batch Reports

Batch groups allow you to run a series of reports at one time. A report
can have only one batch group assignment.
Create a batch report group Choose Tools, Reports, Batch
Reports. Choose Global or Project. Click Add, then type the name of the
new group. Click Close.
Add reports to a batch report group Choose Tools, Reports,

Batch Reports. Select the batch report group, then click Assign. Select
the reports you want to assign to this group and click the Assign button.
When you are finished assigning reports, click the Close button.
Run a batch report From the Reports window, click Run Batch,
select the batch you want to print, then click OK.
Click to run the

batch report.
Select the batch report.
508
Run a batch report as a service Choose Tools, Job Services, then

click Add. Select Batch Reports in the Service Type field. Specify a
should be performed, if more than one service is listed. Type a brief
description of the service in the Job Name field. In the Status field,
select Enabled to activate the batch report service. You can suspend a
service at any time by selecting Disabled in the Status field. In the Run
Job area on the Job Details tab, schedule when the service should be
run: every day at a specific time, or weekly, every two weeks, or
monthly on a day and time you specify.
Click to select the projects/

EPS nodes for which you
want to run the batch report.
Select the batch report you

want the job service to run.
Add a separate job service
for each batch report you
want to run.

client when running jobs. All jobs are run on the server on
509

In this chapter:
Defining Page Settings
Previewing Layouts and Reports
Publishing Layouts and Reports
in HTML Format
Printing layouts and reports for distribution

is an effective way to communicate project
data. This chapter discusses how to define
page settings (such as page orientation,
margins, and header/footer settings), preview
layouts/reports, and print them (including
how to convert them to Web reports).
510
Defining Page Settings

You can customize printed layouts and reports in a number of ways. For
example, customize header and footer settings and change margins for
the printed page.
Define page settings From the Print Preview window, click the
Page Setup button. Click the Page tab to set orientation, scaling, and
paper size.
Portrait orientation prints

vertically on the page;
landscape orientation prints
horizontally on the page.
Use Print Preview to see the

number of pages the layout
will span. Choose this option
to compress spacing by
specifying the number of
pages. This option is
available for layouts only.
To increase or reduce
the size of the printed
layout/report, specify a
percentage in the
Adjust To field. To
increase or reduce the
number of pages to be
printed horizontally and
vertically, choose Fit to,
then specify a value in
the Pages Wide field.
511
Set page margins Click the Margins tab, then specify the values for
each margin.
Add headers and footers You can customize the header and footer.
You can also insert a graphic, such as your company logo, in the header
or footer. Click the Header or Footer tab.
Type or select the amount of sections
to divide the header or footer into.
Select when you want to

print the header/footer.
Select the height of

the header/footer.
Click to add a logo to

the selected section.
Click to change the font,
then specify font
settings and click OK.
In the Text/Logo section,
add text to the header or
footer by typing directly in
the selected tab. Do not
modify any text between
square brackets [ ].
Select a global variable and

click Add. Global variables
include portfolio properties
(earliest project start, earliest
data date, and so on).
512
In the Define Header/Footer section, mark the Show Section Divider

Lines checkbox to display lines between each section of the header or
footer. Define the values you want to insert in the header or footer.
Choose Text/Logo to add text variables or a logo, such as your company
logo. Choose Revision Box to allow space in the header/footer to be
able to enter dates, approvals, and revision information. If displaying the
Gantt Chart in your layout, you can choose to display the Gantt Chart
Legend in the header or footer.
Add a logo to a header or footer Click the Header or Footer tab,
in the Define header/footer section, choose Text/Logo for the selected
section. In the Add Text section, click the Picture button. Click the
Browse button in the Picture dialog box, then select a filename and click
Open. Specify the layout and spacing options and click OK. The logo
image is displayed in the Header or Footer Sample area.
If you change the report page setup from the Print Preview
dialog box, the changes will be applied only to the current
printing. To save changes to the report page setup
permanently, make the changes from the Properties palette
in the Report Editor.
513
Specify layout options Use the Options tab to select the layout
areas and timeframe to include in the printed layout.
Mark this checkbox if you

want each group printed on
its own page. For example,
you may want to group
your activities by resource
and distribute a printout to
each individual.
The Options tab contains different options when printing

reports.
514
Previewing Layouts and Reports

The Print Preview option enables you to review the layout or report
before sending it to a printer.
Open Print Preview To preview a layout, display the layout in the
Activities window, then choose File, Print Preview. To preview a report,
in the Reports window, select the report you want to preview, then click
Run Report. Choose Print Preview, then click OK.
Use these buttons to move to the beginning of
the layout/report, scroll through it one page at a
time, or move to the end of the layout/report.
Click to zoom in
and out of the
displayed page.
Click to select the default

printer, paper size, and
orientation.
When you are satisfied
with the look of the
layout/report, click to
print it.
The status bar indicates the size at which the layout/report is

currently magnified, the number of the page that is currently
displayed, and the total number of pages in the layout/report.
As you move your mouse over the Print Preview window, the pointer
changes to a magnifying glass. Click the Zoom In button in the toolbar
to zoom in on details and the Zoom Out button to zoom back out.
515

You can print layouts and reports by sending them directly to a printer,
publishing them as HTML files, or printing them to ASCII text files
(reports only).
Print a layout To send a layout directly to your printer, open the
layout you want to print, then choose File, Print. You can also click the
Print button from the Print Preview window.
Print a report From the Reports window, select the name of the
report you want to print. Click Run Report.
1 Select the destination for

the report. For an ASCII
text file, you can also
specify the character to
use to separate fields and
text.
2 For HTML and ASCII files,
specify a name and
location for the saved file.
3 Click to
run the
report.
You can also publish a report to an HTML file through Print

Preview. For more information, see Publishing Layouts and
Reports in HTML Format on page 517.
516
Selecting a Printer
You can select a printer, other than the current default for the operating
system, to print your layouts and reports. The printer settings will
remain the same until you log out. Choose, File, Print Setup.
Click to adjust
the features
and settings
provided by
the selected
printer.
517
Publishing Layouts and Reports in HTML Format

Use Print Preview to publish layouts and reports as HTML files and post
them to a Web site to share with other project team members.
1 Click the Publish button.
2 Select the drive and

folder where the file
should be stored.
3 Type a name for the file.
4 Click Save.
518
The layout/report opens in your Web browser.
519

In this chapter:
Project Web Site Overview
Publishing a Project Web Site
Customizing the Appearance of a
Project Web Site
Publishing Activity and Tracking
Layouts
To share project data, you can publish

project plans in HTML format using the
Project Web Site Publisher. This chapter
describes how to publish project data to a
Web site in HTML format, customize the
appearance of the Web pages on the project
Web site, and publish activity and tracking
layouts as HTML pages.
520
Project Web Site Overview

To share project data between company offices local or worldwide,
publish project plans to a project Web site that can be accessed by
anyone via the World Wide Web or only employees on your office
intranet. Using a Web browser, users can then view project documents
that contain hypertext links, or jumps, to other pages in the structure,
allowing them to move between projects and reports and from page to
page within a report.
A project Web site enables users to browse a project plan at a high level
and then quickly view more detailed information about specific project
data. The Project Web Site layout is divided into three panes.
The upper pane contains a navigation
toolbar for quick access to the various
sections of the Web site.
Select the data to

view in the left, or
Navigation, pane...
...and the details for the

selected element are
displayed in the right pane.
521
Navigate a project Web site using the projects work breakdown

structure (WBS), resource hierarchy, roles, work products and
documents outline, activity codes, issues, and risks. For example, select
a resource in the left pane and view the resources information and
activity assignments in the right pane. Similarly, select a work product
or document and view the documents details and WBS and activity
assignments. The level of detailed information that can be viewed
depends on the information you choose to publish.
Also view reports, activity layouts, and tracking layouts in the project
Web site. The list of reports or layouts appears in the left pane, and the
selected report or layout is displayed in the right pane.
System requirements Refer to the Administrators Guide for
system requirements for your Web server.
522
Publishing a Project Web Site

When publishing a project Web site, you control the level of detail
published, as well as the project reports and layouts included.
Publish a project Web site Open the project you want to publish.
Choose Tools, Publish, Project Web Site.
Click the General tab to specify general information about the Web site.
The Web site name and

description appear on
the Web site opening (or
splash) screen.
Type the location of the
Web site files. Choose a
folder that contains no
existing files.
Mark to preview the Web
site in your Web browser
after creating the files.
Click the Topics tab to determine the detailed data to publish to the Web
site. If all checkboxes are cleared, only WBS data are published. Mark
the checkbox next to each type of information to include.
Move the mouse over a

checkbox to view a
description of it here.
523
Click the Graphics tab to select existing activity and tracking layouts to
publish to the projects Web site. Define activity layouts in the Activities
window and tracking layouts in the Tracking window.
Mark to include the selected

activity and tracking layouts
on the projects Web site.
Click the Reports tab to select existing reports to publish to the projects
Web site. Reports are defined in the Reports window.
Mark to include the reports

on the projects Web site.
Click Publish to create the project Web site.
524
Customizing the Appearance of a Project Web Site

Use the standard, or default, Web site scheme to build your project Web
site; you can also customize the scheme or create a new scheme.
Customize a Web site scheme Choose Tools, Publish, Project
Web Site. Click the General tab, then click Edit Scheme. Select a Web
site element from the Item field and modify its settings. Click OK.
Click to specify the

Web site icon...
...then select the icon

file and location.
You may want to create a copy of the default scheme and

then make your changes to the copy. Click Save As, then
type a new name.
525
Publishing Activity and Tracking Layouts

You can also save individual activity and tracking layouts as HTML
files, which can be posted to a Web site or your corporate intranet.
These layouts are not linked to any project Web site that you may have
created previously.
For activity layouts:
The timescale begins on the date defined by the selected layout.
The columns displayed in the Web pages are defined by the selected
layout.
Activity layouts are not interactive. They are a picture of your

project only.
For tracking layouts:
The elements displayed in the Web pages are defined by the

selected layout.
Tracking layouts are not interactive. They are a picture of your

project only.
Publish an activity layout Choose Tools, Publish, Activity

Layouts. Select the layout and click the Select button. Specify the
location and name of the HTML file to which the layout will be saved.
Click Open.
526
Publish a tracking layout Choose Tools, Publish, Tracking

Layouts. Select the layout and click the Select button. Specify the
location and name of the HTML file to which the layout will be saved.
Click Open.
If you clear the Include in Project Web Site checkbox in the
Graphics tab of the Publish Project Web Site window, when
the Web site is published, activity and tracking layouts are
saved as HTML files without being linked to the project Web
site.
Part
Importing and Exporting Data

In this part:
Linking the Project Management and

Contract Manager Modules
Transferring Data to Other Project
Management Module Users
Transferring Methodology Data
Transferring Data Using Microsoft
Project Files
Transferring Data Using Microsoft Excel
Files
Transferring Data Between P3 and the
Project Management Module
Transferring Data to Primavera
Contractor Users
his part describes how to exchange Project Management

module data with other applications.
Linking the Project Management and Contract Manager
Modules describes how to link Project Management module
projects to and from the Contract Manager module.
Transferring Data to Other Project Management Module Users
describes how to use XER, Primaveras proprietary exchange
format, to back up or exchange project/resource/role data
between project management databases. You can also use XML
to backup and exchange projects between project management
databases. To export methodologies from the Methodology
Management module and import them into the Project
Management module, refer to Transferring Methodology Data.
To transfer data between the Project Management module and
Microsoft Project, read Transferring Data Using Microsoft
Project Files. To transfer data using Microsoft Excel, read
Transferring Data Using Microsoft Excel Files. To convert
Primavera Project Planner (P3) 3.x projects to Project
Management module format, or vice versa, read Transferring
Data Between P3 and the Project Management Module. To
export project or resource data for use with Primavera
Contractor, read Transferring Data to Primavera Contractor
Users.
529

and Contract Manager Modules
In this chapter:
Module to Contract Manager
Linking a Project Management
Project to a Contract Manager
Project
Importing Contract Manager Data
to a Project Management Module
Project
Primaveras Contract Manager module

(formerly known as Expedition) is a contract
management and project administration tool.
From the Project Management module, you
can set up access to Contract Manager and
create a link to import Contract Manager
data (version 8.5 or later) to update schedule
dates, cost information, the Activity Codes
dictionary, and the Costs Accounts
dictionary. You can also view Contract
Manager documents associated with your
projects activities and, if your organization
is set up to access Contract Manager version
9.0 or higher, you can view project-level
Contract Manager information in P6 Web
Access.
This chapter explains how to link the Project
Management and Contract Manager
modules, link projects, and import data.
530
Linking the Project Management Module to Contract

Manager
To connect the Project
Management module to a
Contract Manager HTTPS:/
/ URL, the SSL library must
be loaded. Refer to the
readme.txt file located in
the
\Documentation\Technical
Documentation\Connect
P6 to a Contract Manager
HTTPS URL folder of
Primavera installation
located in the
\Documentation\<languag
e> folder of the P6 physical
media or download.
To set up access to Contract Manager data, you must first create a link
between the Project Management module and Contract Manager
(formerly known as Expedition).
Link to Contract Manager Use the Admin Preferences dialog box
to set up a link with Contract Manager and choose the Contract Manager
product version you are connecting to. Choose Admin, Admin
Preferences, then click the Options tab. Mark the Enable Link to
Contract Manager Module checkbox, then choose the version you are
connecting to. Click Close.
If connecting to Contract
Manager 9.x or higher, type
the URL and port number to
the Contract Manager Web
server.
When connecting to Contract Manager 9.x and higher For http, the
default port number is 80, but you do not have to enter it. If you are not
going to use port 80, you must enter the port number (or name or IP
address). For example: http://10.12.14.168:110.
For https, the default port number is 443. You must always enter the port
number, including the default port number, at the end of the URL. For
example: https://10.12.14.189:443.
Linking the Project Management and Contract Manager Modules
531
To create a link between the Project Management and

Contract Manager modules, you must have the required
security privilege, Edit Admin Preferences and Categories.
532
Linking a Project Management Project to a Contract

Manager Project
Once the link between the Project Management and Contract Manager
modules is established, you can then create a link from your project to
an Contract Manager project to enable users to import and view
Contract Manager data in the Project Management module. If you are
connecting to Contract Manager version 9.x or higher, creating a link
between your project and a Contract Manager project additionally
enables users to view Contract Manager data in Project Workspace
portlets in P6 Web Access. Connecting to version 9.x or higher also
enables users to launch Contract Manager from P6 Web Access.
Link to a Contract Manager Project Choose Enterprise, Projects,
then display project details. Select the project to which you want to link
a Contract Manager project. If the Contract Manager tab is not
displayed, right click on a tab at the bottom (for example, General) to
display the Project Details dialog box, and move Contract Manager into
the Display Tabs section. On the Contract Manager tab, mark the 'Allow
this project to link with a Contract Manager Project' checkbox. Click the
browse button (in version 9.5 and above) to the right of the Group
Name:Project Name field to choose the Contract Manager project to
which you want to link your project.
If you are connecting to Contract Manager version 8.5
(Expedition), the Group Name and Project Name appear as
separate fields, as shown in the following image. Type the
name of the Contract Manager database and project you
want to link to your project.
Choose whether users are

prompted for a user login
and password when
retrieving Contract Manager
data. If you choose for users
to log in without being
prompted, type a login name
and password.
To link your project to a Contract Manager project, you must

have the project privilege, Edit Contract Manager Link.
533
If an identical username and password do not already exist in both

Contract Manager and the Project Management module, you will be
prompted to enter the Contract Manager Name and Password. If an
identical username and password already exist in both Contract
Manager and Project Management module, the Select Project Manager
Project popup menu will display for you to select the project.
From Contract Manager, you can additionally create a link
from a Contract Manager project to a Project Management
project schedule. A link from within Contract Manager
enables you to review dates from the project schedule to see
how schedule delays or other factors affect the project. For
more information on creating a link from Contract Manager,
please refer to the Contract Manager Users Guide.
534
Importing Contract Manager Data to a Project

Management Module Project
After linking the Project Management and Contract Manager modules,
and linking a Project Management project to a Contract Manager
project, you can import specific types of Contract Manager data to the
Project Management module.
Importing Contract Manager data To import Contract Manager
project data, open the Project Management project to which you want to
import data. Choose File, Import from Contract Manager. Select the
types of schedule, cost, and dictionary data you want to import. Click
Import.
Before data is imported, the Contract Manager Import Report is

displayed listing all the information that will be imported to your
project. Click Commit Changes to import the data. To save the report to
a log file, click Yes and specify a filename and location. Click Close.
Click Yes to save any changes you made to the import settings or No to
discard changes.
535
Import considerations This section details how the Project

Management module imports data from Contract Manager.
Global activity codes The Spec Section code is available to all

projects in the Project Management module. For Contract Manager
8.54 (Expedition) data, this activity code is referred to as SPCS.
Project activity codes The Responsibility, Contracts, Bid Package,

and Submittal activity codes are imported as project activity codes.
For Contract Manager 8.54 (Expedition) data, these activity codes
are referred to as RESP, CNTR, BIDP, and ISSB, respectively.
The Responsibility code is imported from the Contacts subsection
of the Project Information section. The Abbreviation and Company
Name columns are used as the code value and description,
respectively.
The Contracts code is imported from the Contracts and Purchase
Orders subsections of the Contract Information section. The No.
and Description columns are used as the code value and
description, respectively.
When you import the Submittal Activity code, the activity is
assigned the code value Yes to indicate that the item is a submittal.
How activity codes are imported If the code or value does not
exist, the imported code or value is added to the dictionary.
If the code exists but the value does not, the value is added to the
dictionary.
If the code and value exist, but the value assigned to the activity
does not match the imported value, the value on the activity is
overwritten.
If the activity does not exist, it is created.
Cost accounts Cost codes in Contract Manager are imported to the

Cost Accounts dictionary. The Cost Accounts dictionary is
available to all projects in the Project Management module. All
items in the Cost Worksheet are imported as cost accounts and
placed under a root node having the same name as the imported
Contract Manager project. The Cost Code and Title columns are
imported as the Cost Account ID and Cost Account Name,
respectively.
Cost information Cost information from Contract Manager is

imported as Expenses for activities.
537
Transferring Data to Other Project

Management Module Users
In this chapter:
Exporting Projects
Exporting Roles or Resources
Importing Projects
Importing Roles or Resources
Project, resource, and role data can be transferred from one Project Management or
Methodology Management module to
another by exporting and importing XER
files, Primaveras proprietary exchange
format. Project data can also be exchanged
between Project Management and other
applications in XML format. This chapter
describes how to use the Export and Import
wizards to share project information, roles,
and resources.
538
Exporting Projects
importing XER and XML
files, see Importing
For information about the
tables and fields that are
converted in XER format,
see the XERPROJECTS.PDF
file, located in the
Documentation\Data
Mapping Docs folder
located in the
media or download.
You can transfer project data between Project Management and

Methodology Management application as XER files or XML files,
which can be used with any other Project Management module
installation, regardless of the database type on which it runs. The Export
wizard allows you to export Project Management projects to other
applications.
Timesheets and baselines are not exported when you export
project data. With the appropriate access, you can export
secure codes and secure code assignments to XML format;
however, you cannot export them to XER format. For more
information about secure codes, refer to Primaveras
Primavera ProjectLink users can export a Microsoft Project

(MSP)-managed project to XER format, but not to XML
format. When you do export an MSP-managed project, the
project contained in the XER file is no longer considered
MSP-managed. For more information on Primavera
ProjectLink, click Help on the Primavera ProjectLink toolbar
in Microsoft Project (available only if Primavera ProjectLink is
installed).
If you want to make backup copies of a project, export the

project as an XER file, then store the exported file.
Primavera's proprietary format (XER) supports all project,
resource, and role information developed using the
Primavera suite of project management tools. The Primavera
PM/MM XER file format enables you to export data between
PM and MM release 5.0 and more recent versions, for use
within the Project Management module, Methodology
Management module, and P6 Web Access.
The Contractor XER format is supported to import data from
Contractor 4.0 and subsequent versions into PM 6.2.
The XER format supports all project data, while the XML
format does not. You should not use the Export wizard to
back up your entire database.
539
Differences Between XML and XER Export Formats

The following table compares the features and benefits of both formats
for exporting project data between Project Management modules. A
checkmark represents that a particular format is better suited for that
functionality.
Functionality
XML
Data formats
XML is an industry-standard format, while XER
is proprietary.
XER
Multiple projects
XER supports exporting multiple projects at
once, to a single XER file.
XML exports only one project at a time to a
separate XML file.
Job Service
XER supports scheduling exports on a regular
basis as services.
XML does not.
540
Exporting Projects in XER Format

Select export type and projects Open the projects in the Project
Management module that you want to export. Choose File, Export.
Choose Primavera PM/MM (XER), then click Next.
Choose Project as the export

type, then click Next.
541
Clear the Export checkbox next to each project that should not be
exported, then click Next.
Lists only projects that are currently open

in the Project Management module
Specify filename and location Type a name for the XER file. To
specify a different location to store the file, click the Browse button. If
you do not specify a folder, the file is stored in the My Documents
folder of the current user. Click Finish to export the project to a single
file with an XER extension.
542
Export projects as a service

With the XER format, you can export projects as a service. Choose
Tools, Job Services, then click Add. Select Export in the Service Type
field. Specify a number in the Job # field to indicate the sequence in
which the service should be performed, if more than one service is
listed. Type a brief description of the service in the Job Name field. In
the Status field, select Enabled to activate the export service. You can
suspend a service at any time by selecting Disabled in the Status field. In
the Run Job area on the Job Details tab, schedule when the service
should be run: every day at a specific time, or weekly, every two weeks,
or monthly on a day and time you specify.
Click the Job Options

tab to select the
projects/EPS nodes
you want to export.
In this example,
projects are exported
every day at 5pm.

about the service to a
file you specify.
You must have the appropriate access rights to set up job services. The
Job Service does not interact with the Project Management client when
running jobs. All jobs are run on the server on which the Job Service is
installed.
543
Exporting Projects in XML Format

Select export type and project Open the project that you want to
export in the Project Management module. Choose File, Export. Choose
Primavera PM (XML), then click Next.
If multiple projects are open, select the Export checkbox next to the
single project that you want to export. You can select only one project
when exporting to XML format. Then click Next.
Lists only projects that are currently open

in the Project Management module
544
Specify filename and location Type a name for the XML file. To
folder of the current user. Click Finish to export the project to a single
file with an XML extension.
545

converted, see
XERRESOURCES.PDF or
XERROLES.PDF, located in
the
Documentation\Data
Mapping Docs folder
located in the
media or download.
The Project Management module enables you to export only the roles or
resources in your enterprise resource hierarchy to XER files. You might
want to choose this option to include existing roles or resources in a new
database.
When you export roles and resources, secure codes and
secure code assignments related to the roles and resources
are not exported. For more information about secure codes,
refer to Primaveras Administrators Guide.
Export roles or resource data In the Project Management module,

choose File, Export. Choose Primavera PM/MM, then click Next.
Choose Resource Only or Role Only as the

export type, then click Next.
546
Type a name for the XER file. To specify a different location to store the
file, click the Browse button. If you do not specify a folder, the file is
stored in the My Documents folder of the current user. Click Finish to
export the roles or resources to a single file with an XER extension.
Click to select the location where the

file will be stored.
547
Importing Projects
For information on
exporting project data, see
Exporting Projects on
page 538.
converted in XER files, see
the XERPROJECTS.PDF file,
located in the
Documentation\Data
Mapping Docs folder
located in the
media or download.
You can transfer project data to the Project Management module as

XER files (Primavera proprietary exchange format) or XML files, which
can be used with any other Project Management module installation,
regardless of the database type on which it runs. You can use the Import
wizard to bring XER or XML files into the Project Management
module. You can also use a command line (batch) interface to import
XER files. You might want to use these methods to quickly restore one
or more projects. The Import wizard guides you through the steps for
importing projects.
When you import project data, some data is not imported,
including timesheets and baselines. You can import secure
codes and secure code assignments to XML format, if you
have the correct access; however, you cannot import them to
XER format. For more information about secure codes, refer
to Primaveras Administrators Guide.
If resource security is enabled in the Project Management

module, some restrictions apply when importing activity
resource assignments. Refer to the Help for more details.
For information on
importing material
resources, see Importing
Roles or Resources on
page 567.
XER files exported from version 5.0 and subsequent versions

of the Project Management module, or from Primavera
Contractor 4.1, 5.0, and 6.1 can be imported into P6 Project
Management version 6.2.
548
Differences between XML and XER Import Formats

The following table compares the features and benefits of both formats
for importing project data between Project Management modules. A
checkmark represents that a particular format is better suited for that
functionality.
Functionality
XML
Security
XML always enforces individual user security
settings, and never violates your security
restrictions. If there is a security conflict, the
import will try will continue and ignore data that
a user should not have access to; if it is not
possible to continue while ignoring data, the
import is stopped. Security is never bypassed
when updating data.
XER allows updates to all data if you have the
Import Global Data security privilege set.
Exclusive Project Access

XML always opens a project as exclusive, and
will stop the import if it cannot gain exclusive
access. This ensures that other users are not
changing data during the import process.
XER accesses projects as shared, which means
other users can update data in the middle of the
import process.
Committing Data
XML will not commit partial data. If an import
action for a specific transaction fails before all
data is committed, XML rolls back the data;
global and project-specific imports are treated as
separate transactions.
XER can end up with partial commits of data.
Work Shift Handling

XML replaces any existing work shifts.
XER tries to insert work shifts, which can
potentially corrupt your shift definitions.
Broad Range of Actions

XER supports the full range of import actions,
including Update Existing Project, Create New
Project, Replace Existing Project, Ignore this
Project, and Add into Existing Project.
XML supports only Update Existing Project and
Create New Project.
XER
XML
Functionality
549
XER
Resources and Roles

XER supports importing resources and roles.
XML does not.
Multiple projects
XER supports the import of multiple projects at
once, from a single XER file.
XML imports only one project at a time from a
separate XML file.
Documents
XER supports importing documents that are not
stored in the content repository, such as work
products and other documents.
XML does not.
Version Checking
XER checks project versions while importing,
and ensures you cannot import projects older
than 2 prior releases.
XML does not; instead, if there is a version
incompatibility, bad data is ignored.
550
Importing Projects in XER Format with the Import Wizard

Select import type and file In the Project Management module,
choose File, Import. Choose Primavera PM/MM (XER), then click
Next.
Choose Project as the import type, then

click Next.
551
Click the
Browse
button to
select the file
you want to
import.
Click Next.
If you include more than

one project in an XER file,
the relationships between
the projects are preserved.
External dependencies
with projects you did not
export are also preserved.
Specify import project options An XER file can contain data

from several projects. The first column in the Import Project Options
dialog box lists all the projects included in the XER file. If a project
with the same name already exists in the current installation of the
Project Management module, the Match checkbox next to it is marked.
552
To prevent data in the project management database from being

overwritten when you import the file, double-click the Import Action
field next to each project, then select one of the following options:

new/modified data in the XER file; adds new data if the record does
not exist. Select the project to update in the Import To field. All
currently open projects are listed. You can further define how data
should be updated when matches occur. See Choose update project
options on page 553.
Create New Project The existing projects data remains the same.
A new project is created. Click the Import To field to select where
the new project will be placed in the EPS. A number is appended to
the end of the project name. When the import is complete, you can
rename the project. For example, if you are creating a new project
from the existing project, AUTO, the new project is named AUTO1.
You must select the Create New Project option if you want the
Project Management module to import past period actual
data. If you choose any other option, past period actual
values are not imported. If you select the Create New Project
option, past period actual data will only be imported if the
defined financial periods are exactly the same in both
databases.
Replace Existing Project The existing project is deleted and

replaced with the project imported from the XER file. Select the
project to be replaced in the Import To field.
Baselines and timesheets assigned to projects are deleted
when you select the Replace Existing Project import option.
Ignore this Project The project is not imported in the Project

Management module.
Add Into Existing Project You can merge the project you are
importing within an existing project. Click the Import To field, then
select a specific WBS level within an existing project. The imported
project is appended to the selected WBS.
553

configuration to use when importing project data. The options specified
in the layout determine how the Project Management module handles
data in the import file that matches data in the database. You can create
configuration can be used to import the file. Select Yes in the Use field
next to the configuration you want to use.
The Update Project Options dialog box appears, regardless
of the import option you select. For example, if you choose to
create a new project, you still must select a configuration for
importing global data.


554

configuration determine how data is updated when projects are
imported. To modify these options, select the layout in the Update
Project Options dialog box, then click Modify.
The import of activities, their

relationships, and their resource
assignments is dependent on
one another. For example, if you
choose to update one of these
items, all three are updated
automatically.
If the XER file you are
importing was exported
from Primavera
Contractor, do not check
Delete for activities if the
Project Management
module project you are
updating contains WBS
Summary tasks. If you
choose to delete
activities, the WBS
Summary tasks will be
deleted.
Mark to delete specific items

that are in the project being
updated, but are not included
in the import file.
which you can set options. Mark the Delete checkbox next to a data item
to remove data that exists in the project you are updating, but is not
included in the file you are importing. For example, if several activities
are defined in the project you are updating, but they are not included in
the file to be imported, mark the checkbox in the Delete column to
remove the activities from the project being updated.
The Delete field applies only to risks, relationships to external
projects, thresholds, activities, activity relationships, and
activity resource assignments. Global data types are not
affected by this setting.
555
type is updated:
overwrite it with the updated data; adds new data if the record does
not exist.

Insert New Retains data in the existing project and does not
overwrite them with updated data from the import file; adds new
data for all records in the import file, even if the same record exists
in the project you are updating.
Choosing the Insert New option will result in duplicate
records after import when the same record exists in both the
existing project and the import file. For example, if the same
calendar is present in the import file and the existing project,
choosing this option adds the calendar to the project you are
updating while preserving the original calendar in the
updated project.
If you manually plan future period assignments to activities,
be sure to select the appropriate import action when
importing data; otherwise, manually-planned future period
assignment values may be lost. For example, if you are
updating an existing project with imported data and you
choose to import activity resource assignments, future period
assignment values that exist in the project you are importing
will overwrite future period assignment values in the project
you are updating. Therefore, if the project you are importing
does not contain manually-planned future period assignment
values and the project you are updating does contain
manually-planned future period assignment values, the
manually-planned future period values will be lost when the
same assignment exists in both projects.
The action you choose for importing the items in the Activity Data Type
group are dependent on each other. For example, if you choose to update
existing relationships, you must also update existing resource
assignments and activities associated with the relationships.
556
The action for activity data

types are dependent on
one another.
The Delete field for these

items can be independent.
The Activity Resource Assignments item under Activity Data

Type includes role assignments.
If a relationship type was updated when the project was

exported, to import the modified relationship type, you must
choose to Update Existing and mark the Delete field for
activity relationships; otherwise, a new relationship will be
added. For example, suppose you have Activity 100 with a
finish to start relationship type. If you import a project that
has Activity 100, but the relationship type has been changed
to a start to start type, the import process results in Activity
100 with both the finish to start relationship and the start to
start relationship when you do not mark the Delete field. You
must mark the Delete field to remove the original relationship
type of finish to start.

Next.
Select a currency If the import file does not specify a currency, or if
the currency does not match a currency defined in the Project
Management module, the Currency Type dialog box appears. Click the
Browse button to select a currency that matches the one found in the
import file. If your currency is not listed, cancel the Import wizard and
add the currency in the Currencies dialog box (Admin, Currencies).
You will not see this dialog box if the import currency is the
same as the base currency.
Click Next, then click Finish to import the project.
557
Importing Projects in XML Format with the Import Wizard

To import XML files, you must have access to all resources.
For more information on defining access to resources, see
Primaveras Administrators Guide.

choose File, Import. Choose Primavera PM (XML), then click Next.
Click the
Browse
button to
select the
file you
want to
import.
Click Next.
558
Specify import project options An XML file can contain data

from only one project. Select the appropriate import action and click
Next.
To prevent data in the project management database from being

overwritten when you import the file, double-click the Import Action
field, then select one of the following options:

new/modified data in the XML file; adds new data if the record
does not exist. Select the project to update in the Import To field.
All currently open projects are listed. You can further define how
data should be updated when matches occur. See Choose update
project options on page 553.
A new project is created. Click the Import To field to select where
the new project will be placed in the EPS. A number is appended to
the end of the project name. When the import is complete, you can
rename the project. For example, if you are creating a new project
from the existing project, AUTO, the new project is named AUTO1.
559
Choose update project options Click Next to modify the layout

configuration used when importing project data. The options specified
data in the import file that matches data in the database.
560

Mark to delete specific items

that are in the project being
updated, but are not included
in the import file.
to remove data that exists in the project you are updating, but is not
are defined in the project you are updating, but they are not included in
the file to be imported, mark the checkbox in the Delete column to
remove the activities from the project being updated.
The Delete field applies only to risks, thresholds, activities,
activity relationships, and activity resource assignments.
Global data types are not affected by this setting. External
relationships are not treated as a separate data type in XML
import; they are in XER import.
561
type is updated:
not exist and you have the appropriate security privileges.

data items. For example, if a new role was added in the XML file,
but you dont want to change the existing roles, choose Insert New
to add the new role to the existing project.
import the new or updated data.
The Activity Resource Assignments item includes role
assignments.
If a relationship type was updated when the project was

exported, to import the modified relationship type, you must
choose to Update Existing and mark the Delete field for
activity relationships; otherwise, a new relationship will be
added. For example, suppose you have Activity 100 with a
finish to start relationship type. If you import a project that
has Activity 100, but the relationship type has been changed
to a start to start type, the import process results in Activity
100 with both the finish to start relationship and the start to
start relationship when you do not mark the Delete field. You
must mark the Delete field to remove the original relationship
type of finish to start.

Next.
562
Importing Projects in XER Format with the Command Line

Interface
You can use a Windows command line interface to import XER files,
which also enables you to do so from a batch file or programmatically.
When you import projects with the command line interface,
you can create only new projects, you cannot update an
existing project.
If there are multiple projects in an XER file, they are created

under the same EPS when you use the command line
interface.
You cannot filter out specific projects within an XER file.
To use the Windows command line interface to import an XER file, do

the following:
1 Copy the file actiontemplate.xml from the \Support\CmndLineImport folder located in the \Documentation\<language> folder
of the P6 physical media or download) and edit it to specify the EPS
you want to import the project to, the layout you want to use, and
the XER file you want to import from.
You can specify more than one import action in a single file, by
including multiple <action> nodes.
563
The following is a sample actions.xml file that imports 2 XER files

from the same script. All tags must appear in the file; however, you
can leave some tags empty, as noted below. Values in bold are
literal values you must enter as is. Values in italics are samples that
will vary with your configuration.
<actions>
<action>
<type>import</type>
<importFormat>XER</importFormat>
<importType>PROJECT</importType>
<importAction>CREATE</importAction>
<importTo>EPS1</importTo>
<importConfiguration>MyConfig1</importConfiguration>
<importFile>c:\somefile1.xer</importFile>
</action>
<action>
<type>import</type>
<importFormat>XER</importFormat>
<importType>PROJECT</importType>
<importAction>CREATE</importAction>
<importTo>EPS2</importTo>
<importConfiguration>MyConfig2</importConfiguration>
<importFile>c:\somefile2.xer</importFile>
</action>
</actions>
Tag
Description
<type>
Required. The type of action to take. Currently

the only supported value is import.
<importFormat>
Required. The format being imported. Value

must be XER
<importType>
Required. The type data being imported. Value

must be PROJECT.
<importAction>
Required. The action to take while importing.

Value must be CREATE.
564
Tag
Description
<importTo>
Optional. The short name of the EPS element

you are importing to. This name must exist in
the destination database. If you do not provide a
name, the default EPS is used.
<importConfiguratio Optional. The import configuration to use while

n>
importing. This name must exist in the
destination database. If you do not provide a
name, the default import configuration is used.
<importFile>
Required. The full path to the XER file you want

to import.
565
Internationalization Notes
If you include non-English characters in the actions.xml file, save the
file as Unicode, and use the XML encoding attribute to specify the
language, prior to the <actions> tag. For example, to specify German or
French encoding:
<?xml version=1.0 encoding=windows-1252?>
If you are using a batch file, use the chcp command to specify the appropriate language encoding. See Microsoft.com for details.
2 Close the PM module if it is running.
3 From the Windows command line, a batch file, or code, issue a
command in the following form from the folder where PM.EXE is
located:
PM.EXE /username=<name> [/password=<name>] [/alias=<name>]
/actionScript=<path> [/logfile=<path>]
Parameter
Description
/username=<name>
Required. The username to log in to the PM

module.
/password=<name>
Optional. The password for the username, if

there is one for the username.
/alias=<name>
Optional. The name of an existing destination

database alias. If you do not specify an alias, the
most recently accessed alias is used.
/actionScript=<path> The full path to the edited actions.xml file. Must

include the file name.
/logfile=<path>
Optional. The full path for creating the log file

that contains processing results. Must include
the file name. If you do not specify a log file,
the default is
c:\<PM.exe folder\PrimaveraCmdLineLog.txt
566
For example:
PM.EXE /username=admin /password=admin /alias=PMDB
/actionScript=c:\somefolder\importprojects.xml /
logfile:c:\somefolder\myLog.txt
If any values include spaces, enclose the value in double quotes

(). For example:
PM.EXE /username=admin /password=admin /alias=PMDB
/actionScript=c:\some folder\importprojects.xml
/logfile=c:\some folder\myLog.txt
Processing results are written to the log file, or you can echo them to the
command line interface. Possible results are:
Code
Description
Success.
Invalid alias.
Invalid username or password.
XML file not found.
Invalid action type (did not specify CREATE).
Insufficient security privileges.
Failure while processing the import action. Could

include invalid or missing values in the xml file.
214783647
Unhandled exception, including invalid characters.
If the command does not include all the required parameters, the PM
module opens.
567

converted, see
XERRESOURCES.PDF or
XERROLES.PDF, located in
the
Documentation\Data
Mapping Docs folder
located in the
media or download.
The Project Management module enables you to import XER files that
contain only roles or resources. You might want to choose this option to
add new roles/resources to the resource hierarchy or overwrite the
existing role/resource hierarchy. Roles and resources are defined at the
global level.
When you import roles and resources, secure codes and
secure code assignments related to the roles and resources
are not imported. For more information about secure codes,
refer to Primaveras Administrators Guide.

module, some restrictions apply when importing resources.
Refer to the Help for more details.
XER files exported from version 5.0 and subsequent versions

of the Project Management module, or from Primavera
Contractor 4.1, 5.0, and 6.1 can be imported into P6 Project
Management version 6.2.
568

choose File, Import. Choose Primavera PM/MM, then click Next.
Choose to import Resource Only or Role Only data. Click Next.
Click the Browse button to select the

file you want to import. Click Next.
The data in the import file must match the type being
imported. For example, you cannot import resource data from
an XER file that contains project data.
569
Choose update role or resource options Click Next to select a

layout configuration to use when importing role or resource data. The
options specified in the layout determine how the Project Management
module handles role or resource data in the import file that matches data
in the database. You can create and save several different configurations;
however, only one configuration can be used to import the file. Select
Yes in the Use field next to the configuration you want to use.


570

configuration determine how data is updated when roles/resources are
imported. To modify these options, select the layout in the Update Role/
Resource Options dialog box, then click Modify. The Modify Import
Configuration dialog box lists the data types for which you can set
options. The Delete field does not affect the import of resources or roles.
This field applies only to activities, risks, relationships to external
projects, and thresholds.
Double-click to select the

action to take when duplicate
data is encountered.
Select one of the following in the Action field to indicate how the roles
or resources are updated:
Keep Existing Retains roles/resources in the global dictionary and

does not overwrite them with the updated data; adds new data if the
record does not exist.
Update Existing Overwrites roles/resources in the global

dictionary with updated data; adds new data if the record does not
exist.
Insert New Retains roles/resources in the global dictionary and

adds any new roles/resources.
Resource assignments to the roles are not included when
exporting only roles. To maintain resource role assignments
when selecting Insert New, resource data must be exported/
imported.
Do Not Import Retains existing roles/resources in the global

dictionary and does not import the updated roles/resources.
571
Click OK to save changes to the modified configuration, then click

Next.
the currency does not match a currency defined in the Project
Click Next, then click Finish to import the resources/roles.
573

In this chapter:
Exporting Methodologies
Importing Methodologies
Importing Projects as
Methodologies
Methodology data can be transferred

between Project Management module users
by exporting and importing XER files
(Primavera proprietary exchange format).
This chapter describes how to use the Export
and Import wizards in the Methodology
Management module to transfer
methodologies between Methodology
Management module users, export
methodologies to the Project Management
module as project plans, and import a project
from the Project Management module as a
new methodology.
574
Exporting Methodologies
about importing
methodologies as XER files,
see Importing
Methodologies on
page 578.
Methodologies can be transferred from the Methodology Management

module as XER files, Primaveras proprietary exchange format, and
used with any other Methodology Management installation, regardless
of the database type on which it runs.
Use the Export wizard to export methodologies to XER files. Use the
Import wizard to bring XER files into the Methodology Management
module.
Although the wizards quickly can back up and restore one or
more methodologies, they should not be used to back up
your entire database.
Select export type and methodology In the Methodology

Management module, open the methodology that you want to export.
Choose File, Export. Choose Methodology, then click Next.
Choose Methodology as
the export type, then
click Next.
575
Specify filename and location. Type a name for the XER file. To
folder of the current user. Click Finish to export the methodology to a
single file with an XER extension.
576

The Methodology Management module enables you to export roles or
resources in your enterprise resource hierarchy to XER files. You may
want to choose this option to include existing roles or resources in a new
database.
Export roles or resource data In the Methodology Management
module, choose File, Export. In the Export Type dialog box, choose
Resource Only to export resource data, or Role Only to export role data,
then click Next.
Choose to export Resource Only data, then click Next,

or . . . choose to export Role Only, then click Next.
577
Type a name for the XER file. To specify a different location to store the
file, click the Browse button. If you do not specify a folder, the file is
stored in the My Documents folder of the current user. Click Finish to
export the roles or resources to a single file with an XER extension.
Click to
select
the
location
where
the file
will be
stored.
578
Importing Methodologies
exporting methodologies,
see Exporting
Methodologies on
page 574.
Methodologies can be transferred from the Methodology Management

module as XER files, Primaveras proprietary exchange format, and
used with any other Methodology Management installation, regardless
of the database type on which it runs.
Use the Export wizard to export projects to XER files. Use the Import
wizard to bring XER files into the Methodology Management module.
The wizards quickly can back up and restore one or more methodologies
Select import type and file In the Methodology Management
module, choose File, Import. Choose Methodology, then click Next and
choose Methodology.
Click the Browse button to select the

file you want to import. Click Next.
579
Select the action to take with the imported data If you have a
methodology open when you import, you are prompted to choose an
action. Choose one of the following actions, then click Next:
Create a New Methodology The existing methodologys data

remains the same. A new methodology is created. This action is
performed automatically if no methodology is open when you
import.
Add into the Current Methodology You can merge the

methodology you are importing within an existing methodology.
Click Next, then select a specific WBS level within the
methodology. The imported methodology is appended to the
selected WBS.
Replace the Current Methodology The existing methodology is

deleted and replaced with the one imported from the XER file.
580
Choose update methodology options Click Next to select a

layout configuration to use when importing methodologies. The options
specified in the layout determine how the Methodology Management
module handles data in the import file that matches data in the database.
You can create and save several different configurations; however, only
one configuration can be used to import the file. Select Yes in the Use
field next to the configuration you want to use.
The Update Methodology Options dialog box displays,
regardless of the import option you select. For example, if
you choose to create a new methodology, you still must
select a configuration for importing global data.

Click to customize the layout

configuration.

configuration determine how data is updated when methodologies are
Methodology Options dialog box, then click Modify.
581

activities, or activity cores
that are in the methodology
being updated, but are not
included in the import file.
to remove data that exists in the methodology you are updating, but is
not included in the file you are importing. For example, if several
activities are defined in the methodology you are updating, but are not
included in the file to be imported, mark the checkbox in the Delete
column to remove the activities from the methodology being updated.
The Delete field applies only to activities, activity cores, and
risks. Global data types are not affected by this setting.
type is updated:
Keep Existing Retains data in the existing methodology and does

not overwrite it with the updated data; adds new data if the record
does not exist.
Update Existing Overwrites data in the existing methodology with

data; adds new data if the record does not exist.
Insert New Retains data in the existing methodology and adds any
new data items. For example, if a new role was added in the XER
file, but you do not want to change the existing roles, choose Insert
New to add the new role to the existing methodology.
Do Not Import Retains data in the existing methodology and does

not import the updated data.
582

Next.
the currency does not match a currency defined in the Methodology
Click Next, then click Finish to import the methodology.
583
Importing Projects as Methodologies

exporting project data, see
the Importing Projects in
XER Format with the
Import Wizard on
page 550.
Project data can be transferred from the Project Management module as

XER files (Primavera proprietary exchange format) and imported as a
methodology. You can capture the best practices of a successful project
by importing the project as a methodology. Use the Export wizard in the
Project Management module to export projects to XER files; use the
Import wizard in the Methodology Management module to bring XER
files in as methodologies.
To import a project as a methodology, the XER file must
contain only the project you are importing. XER files exported
from Project Management 5.0 and subsequent versions can
be imported into the P6 Methodology Management module.

module, choose File, Import. Choose Project, then click Next.
Choose Project as the import type,

then click Next.
The data in the import file must match the format being
imported. For example, you cannot import a project from an
XER file that contains only role or resource data.
584
Click the
Browse
button to
select the
file you
want to
import.
Click Next.
Select action to take with the imported data If you have a

methodology open when you import, choose one of the following
actions:
Create a New Methodology The existing methodologys data

remains the same. A new methodology is created. This action is
performed automatically if no methodology is open when you
import.
Add into the Current Methodology You can merge the

methodology you are importing within an existing methodology.
Click Next, then select a specific WBS level within the
methodology. The imported methodology is appended to the
selected WBS.
Replace the Current Methodology The existing methodology is

deleted and replaced with the one imported from the XER file.
585
Select the source data for estimates You use either the actual
effort and cost data from the project or the projects planned data as the
basis of the methodologys effort and cost estimates.

in the layout determine how the Methodology Management module
handles data in the import file that matches data in the database. You can
create and save several different configurations; however, only one
586
The Update Project Options dialog box appears, regardless

of the import option you select. For example, if you choose to
create a new methodology, you still must select a
configuration for importing global data.




activities, or activity cores
that are in the methodology
being updated, but are not
587
to remove data that exists in the methodology you are updating, but is
not included in the file you are importing. For example, if several
activities are defined in the methodology you are updating, but are not
included in the file to be imported, mark the checkbox in the Delete
column to remove the activities from the methodology being updated.
The Delete field applies only to activities, activity cores, and
risks. Global data types are not affected by this setting.
type is updated:
Keep Existing Retains data in the existing methodology and does

not overwrite it with the updated data; adds new data if the record
does not exist.
Update Existing Overwrites data in the existing methodology with

Insert New Retains data in the existing methodology and adds any
new data items. For example, if a new role was added in the XER
file, but you dont want to change the existing roles, choose Insert
New to add the new role to the existing methodology.
Do Not Import Retains data in the existing methodology and does

not import the updated data.

Next.
Click Next, then click Finish to import the project.
588

The Methodology Management module enables you to import XER
files that contain only roles or resources. You may want to choose this
option to add new roles/resources to the enterprise resource hierarchy or
overwrite the existing role/resource hierarchy. Roles and resources are
defined at the global level.
XER files exported from Project Management 5.0 and
subsequent versions can be imported into the P6
Methodology Management module.

module, choose File, Import. Choose Resource Only to import resource
data, or Role Only to import role data, then click Next.
Choose Resource Only or Role

Only, then click Next.
589
Click the Browse button to

select the file you want to
import. Click Next.
The data in the import file must match the format being
imported. For example, you cannot import resource data from
an XER file that contains project data.
Choose update role or resource options Click Next to select a

layout configuration to use when importing role or resource data. The
options specified in the layout determine how the Methodology
Management module handles role or resource data in the import file that
matches data in the database. You can create and save several different
configurations; however, only one configuration can be used to import
the file. Select Yes in the Use field next to the configuration you want to
use.
590

Click to customize the layout

configuration.

configuration determine how data is updated when roles/resources are
imported. To modify these options, select the layout in the Update Role/
Resource Options dialog box, then click Modify. The Modify Import
Configuration dialog box lists the data types for which you can set
options. The Delete field does not affect the import of resources or roles.
This field applies only to activities, risks, and activity cores.
Double-click to select
the action to take
when duplicate data is
encountered.
591
Select one of the following in the Action field to indicate how the roles
or resources are updated:
Keep Existing Retains roles/resources in the global dictionary and

does not overwrite them with the updated data; adds new data if the
record does not exist.
Update Existing Overwrites roles/resources in the global

dictionary with updated data; adds new data if the record does not
exist.
Insert New Retains existing roles/resources in the global dictionary

and adds any new roles/resources.
Resource role assignments are not included when exporting
only roles. To maintain the resource role assignments when
selecting Insert New, resource data must be exported/
imported.
Do Not Import Retains roles/resources in the existing global

dictionary and does not import the updated data.
Click OK to save changes to the modified layout configuration.

Click Next.
Click Next, then click Finish to import the roles/resources.
593

Project Files
In this chapter:
Exporting Projects
Exporting Resources
Importing Projects from Microsoft
Project
Importing Resources from
Microsoft Project
Use the Microsoft Project import and export

options to transfer project and resource
information between the Project
Management module and Microsoft Project
2002 or a more recent version.
Project Management shares data with
Microsoft Project 2002, 2003, and 2007 via
Microsoft Project XML files. Microsoft
Project is not required to be installed on the
same computer as Project Management to
import XML files.
You can also use the Microsoft Project
option to import or export MPX files, which
integrate with third-party applications that
support MPX versions 4.0 and 4.1.
and Import wizards to share information
using the Microsoft Project format.
594
Exporting Projects
fields that are converted,
see MSPMAPPINGS.PDF or
MPXMAPPINGS.PDF,
located in the
Documentation\Data
Mapping Docs folder
located in the
media or download.
Exporting project data from Project Management to an MPX, MPP, or

XML format allows you to import the file into Microsoft Project. MPX
files can also be imported into other software applications that support
the MPX format. The Export wizard guides you through the steps for
exporting projects. You can convert multiple projects at a time to MPX,
MPP, or XML formats.
When you export project data, secure codes and secure
code assignments related to the project are not exported. For
more information about secure codes, refer to the Primavera
P6 Administrators Guide.
The Project Management module does not export past

period actual data to Microsoft Project.
For additional export
considerations regarding
manual assignment values
(manual curves), refer to
the Project Management
module Help.
Microsoft's actual units for manual assignments, referred to

as manual curves, are not imported to Project Management
when using the Microsoft XML format. The total actual units
are imported and spread linearly.
To export manual assignment values to MPP format, you are
required to have installed Microsoft Project 2000 or a
subsequent version. Microsoft provides a conversion utility to
upgrade your to Microsoft Project 2002. For more
information, refer to http://www.microsoft.com/downloads.
If you plan to exchange project data containing manual
assignment values with Microsoft Project, you can achieve
the most accurate conversion results using Microsoft Project
2003 or 2007. For more information on manually planning
future period assignments, refer to Manually Planning Future
Period Assignments on page 235 or the Project
Management module Help.
Select export type and project In the Project Management

module, open the projects that you want to export. Choose File, Export.
Choose Microsoft Project and select the type of file to which you want
to export, then click Next.
Transferring Data Using Microsoft Project Files
595
Microsoft Projects MPX file format does not support resource

curves. If the projects you export contain resource curves or
manual assignment values, such as manual curves, select a
different export file format to retain these values. Manual
curves are not imported to Project Management when using
the Microsoft XML format.
You are required have installed Microsoft Project 2002 or a

subsequent version on your computer to export to MPP
format.
Suspend and resume dates can only be exported to MPP

format.
You can export to MPX, MPP, XML 2002/

2003, or XML 2007 formats. The file formats
displayed in the pull-down menu are based
on the version of Microsoft Project you have
installed on your computer. If a version of
Microsoft Project or another application that
supports the MPP format is installed, it will
cause MPP to be displayed in the list.

596
By default, all projects are selected in the Project to Export screen. Clear
the Export checkbox next to each project that should not be exported.
Double click in the Export File Name field if you want to change the
name and location of the Microsoft Project file. If you do not specify a
folder, the file is stored in the My Documents folder of the current user.
Click Next.
Modify template options Add a new template or modify the

existing template, which contains options for exchanging data with
Microsoft Project.

template.

selected template.
597
Click the General tab in the Modify Template dialog box. If you
previously selected to export to XML format, the following screen is
displayed.
In the Select a currency field, click the button. In the Select Currency
dialog box, select the type of currency used for expressing project and
activity costs.
Select one of the 10 Microsoft Project

baselines to export for planned and
budgeted values. Selecting 0 indicates the
current baseline.
Mark to import Microsoft Project summary
tasks as WBS summary activities.
598
If you previously selected to export to MPP or MPX format, the

following screen is displayed.
activity costs.
Select one of the 10 Microsoft Project baselines to

export for planned and budgeted values. Selecting 0
indicates the current baseline.
Mark the check box to summarize the project
to the WBS level after the import.
Mark the check box to schedule the

project after the import.
599
Click the Activity tab in the Modify Template dialog box. In the Export
section, choose the text field to which to export the Activity ID from the
Project Management module. If you choose not to export the Activity
ID to a text field in Microsoft Project, in which case, the checkbox is not
marked, the Project Management Activity ID is not exported to
Microsoft Project.
From the pull-down menu, you can

select up to 30 task IDs.
Mark to export activity IDs to
Microsoft Projects task field.
600
Click the Notebooks tab in the Modify Template dialog box. Notebook
fields are defined in the Project Management module in Admin
Categories (choose Admin, Admin Categories, then click the Notebook
Topics tab). These notebook fields can be exported to project, WBS, and
activity notes fields in Microsoft Project.
Mark to export all notebook

topics defined in the Project
Management module.
Otherwise, only the
notebooks selected for the
Project, WBS, and Activity
notes are exported.
601
Click the Custom Field Mappings tab in the Modify Template dialog
box. To export your user-defined fields to a particular Microsoft Project
field, select the user-defined field in the Project Management Field
column.
You can map custom fields

defined for WBS, projects,
resources, activities, or
activity resource
assignments.
Click OK to save your modifications to the template. Click Next to

review the settings for your export, then click Finish.
WBS Summary activities in the Project Management module
convert to Summary Tasks in Microsoft Project.
MPX and MPP formats have separate template options.
602
Exporting Resources
MPXMAPPINGS.PDF,
located in the
Documentation\Data
Mapping Docs folder
located in the
media or download.
The Project Management module enables you to export only the

resources in your enterprise resource hierarchy. When you export the
Project Management modules resource data to MPX or MPP format,
you can import the file into Microsoft Project. MPX files can also be
imported into other software applications that support the MPX format.
The Export wizard guides you through the steps for exporting resources.
When you export resources, secure codes and secure code
assignments related to the resources are not exported.
For more information about secure codes, refer to
Primaveras Administrators Guide.
Export resource data In the Project Management module, choose

File, Export. Choose Microsoft Project and select the type of file to
which you want to export, then click Next.
You are required to have Microsoft Project 2002 or a more
recent version installed on your computer to export to MPP
format.
You can export resource data to MPX.
603
Choose Resource Only as the

export type, then click Next.
604
Type a name for the MPX or MPP file. To specify the location where the
file will be stored, click the Browse button. If you do not specify a
folder, the file is stored in the My Documents folder of the current user.
Click to
select the
location
where the
file will be
stored.

existing template, if necessary. The template contains options for
exchanging data with Microsoft Project.

template.

selected template.
605
Click the Resources tab in the Modify Template dialog box. Choose to
import Microsoft Project fields by the resources name or initials, to
manage existing resources, or to import a resource to be displayed under
a specific resource in the Microsoft Project resource tree.
Select to import the Resource ID by

the resources name or initials.
Opens the Select Resource dialog box in which you

can search for and select a specific resource under
which to import a resource.
If an imported resource already exists, you

can select to keep it in its current form,
update it, or include it as a new resource.
606
box. Choose Resources from the drop down list. To export your userdefined fields to a particular Microsoft Project field, select the userdefined field in the Project Management Field column.

review the settings for your export, then click Finish to export the
resources to a single file with an MPX or MPP extension.
607
Importing Projects from Microsoft Project

MPXMAPPINGS.PDF,
located in the
Documentation\Data
Mapping Docs folder
located in the
media or download.
Transferring data from Microsoft Project to the Project Management

module is determined by the version of Microsoft Project you use. You
can import the following file types:
MPX files Microsoft Project or similar applications
MPP files from Microsoft Project 2002 and 2003
MSP XML files from Microsoft Project 2002, 2003, and 2007.
To import XML or MPX files, Microsoft Project is not required to be

installed on your computer. The Import wizard guides you through the
steps for importing projects.
When you import project data, secure codes and secure
code assignments related to the project are not imported. For
more information about secure codes, refer to the Primavera
P6 Administrators Guide.
For users importing MPX files, review the export table in

Microsoft Project before you generate the MPX file. The
default export table settings in Microsoft Project do not
contain some data fields supported by the MPX format.
For example, assume you have a custom field mapped to the
task field Start1. By default, Start1 is not included in the
Microsoft Project export table. In this case, you must add the
Start1 field to the export table to accurately generate and
import the MPX file.
For third-party MPX tools, refer to the vendors
documentation for information on how to export additional
data fields. Refer to the Microsoft Project online help to learn
how to edit the export table.
If your Microsoft Project software is not activated, you are

prompted to activate the software through the Microsoft
Office Activation Wizard the first time you attempt to export
data from MS Project to the Project Management module (by
selecting File, Export, in MS Project). You are required to
activate Microsoft Project the first time you are prompted,
otherwise, the import will not be successful.
608
Microsoft Jet 4.0 users are required to install Service Pack 6.

Import errors may occur on computers running Microsoft Jet
4.0 Service Pack 5 or earlier.

module, certain restrictions apply when importing activity
resource assignments. Refer to the Help for more details.
Select import type and file Choose File, Import. Choose Microsoft
Project, then click Next.
You can import MPX, MPP, XML 2002/2003,

or XML 2007 formats. The file formats
Note: If you select the XML option in

the Import Format screen, the Import
Type screen is not displayed.

then click Next.
Project and Resource Only buttons
become available when XML, MPX, or
MPP is selected.
The Summary Only button becomes
available when XML or MPP is selected.
609
Click Select to choose the files you want to import. If a password has
been set on the Microsoft Project file, enter the password to ensure that
the project will be imported.
Suspend and resume dates can only be imported from MPP
files (not MPX files). When an activity contains multiple
suspend and resume dates in Microsoft Project, the first
suspend and resume dates (split task dates in Microsoft
Project) are imported into the Project Management module.
Any remaining suspend and resume dates are ignored.
Double click the Import Action field to select how the Microsoft Project
file should be imported:
A new project is created. Select the level of the EPS at which the
project should be imported. Click the Browse button in the Import
To field to select an EPS node.
Add into Existing Project Click the Browse button in the Import
To field to select a specific WBS level within an existing project.
The imported project is appended to the selected WBS. The
existing project must be open in the Project Management module.
Replace Existing Project The existing project is deleted without

preserving information and replaced with the project imported from
the Microsoft Project file. Click the Browse button in the Import To
field to select the project to replace. The existing project must be
open in the Project Management module.
Baselines and timesheets assigned to projects are deleted
when you select the Replace Existing Project import option.
For additional import

considerations related to
manual assignment values
(manual curves), refer to
the Project Management
module Help.
The MPX file format does not support time-phased data, and
therefore, does not support manual assignment values
(manual curves). When you import an MPX file, if you choose
the Replace Existing import action and the project you are
replacing contains manual assignment values, all manual
values will be deleted.
610
Organizations using Primavera ProjectLink cannot import

MSP-managed projects when selecting Add into Existing
Project or Replace Existing Project in the Project
Management module. For more information on ProjectLink,
click Help on any ProjectLink screen to access the Primavera
ProjectLink Help in Microsoft Project (available only if
ProjectLink is installed).

existing template (if necessary). The template contains options for

template.

selected template.
611
Click the General tab in the Modify Template dialog box. If you
previously selected to import XML format, the following screen is
displayed.
activity costs.
Select one of the 10 Microsoft Project

baselines to export for planned and
budgeted values. Selecting 0 indicates the
current baseline.
Mark to import Microsoft Project summary
tasks as WBS summary activities.
612
If you previously selected to import MPP or MPX format, the following

screen is displayed.
activity costs.

Mark the check box to schedule

the project after the import.
613
Click the Activity tab in the Modify Template dialog box. In the Import
section, choose how you want to import milestone activities that have
resource assignments. You can import them into the Project
Management module as Start Milestone activities with associated
expenses, or as Task Dependent activities with associated resource
assignments. Then, choose to import the Task ID from Microsoft Project
to the Activity ID field in the Project Management module or to a
selected user-defined text field. Select if you want to import MSPs
fixed costs as project expenses. If you do not choose this option, fixed
costs are not imported.
If you choose this option but

DO NOT select the 'Import
Microsoft Project's fixed costs
as expenses' option, the
milestones are imported but
expenses associated with the
start milestones are not.
If you choose not to import
the Task IDs from
Microsoft Project, the
Project Management
module creates Activity
IDs for each activity.
Unmark this checkbox if
you do not want to import
expenses.
The fields are relevant for export only.
614
Click the Resource tab in the Modify Template dialog box. Choose
whether you want to import the Resource Initials or the Resource Name
from Microsoft Project to the Resource ID field in the Project
Management module.
If you select Resource Initials, only one resource is imported if

multiple resources in Microsoft Project use the same initials.
If you select Resource Name, up to the first 20 characters of the

name are imported (based on your setting in the Admin
Preferences, ID Lengths tab in the Project Management module). If
multiple resources in Microsoft Project use the same characters up
to the specified ID Length, only one resource is imported.
Choose how to handle resources that already exist in the project

management module database but are also contained in the Microsoft
Project import file.
Keep existing resource Retains the resource in the project

management database and does not overwrite it with the resource
from the Microsoft Project file.
Update existing resource Overwrites the resource in the project

management database with the resource from the Microsoft Project
file.
Add new resource Retains the resource in the project management

database but also adds the resource from the Microsoft Project file.
615
Choose whether you want to add a new resource if the resource does not
already exist in the project management module database but is
contained in the Microsoft Project import file. Then, select the level of
the hierarchy at which resources should be imported. Click the Browse
button, then select the resource under which to place all resources from
the Microsoft Project file.


616
Click the Notebooks tab in the Modify Template dialog box. Project,
WBS, and activity notes from Microsoft Project are imported into
Notebook fields in the Project Management module. Notebook fields
are defined in the Project Management module in Admin Categories
(choose Admin, Admin Categories, then click the Notebook Topics tab).
Select the Notebook fields into which you want to import the Microsoft
Project notes.
617
box. You can import information from Microsoft Project into userdefined fields in the Project Management module. For each Microsoft
Project field you want to import, select a user-defined field in the Project
Management Field column.
You can map Microsoft

Project fields to user-defined
fields related to WBS,
projects, resources,
activities, or activity resource
assignments.
Click OK to save your modifications to the template. Click Next to review

your import settings, then click Finish to import the Microsoft Project
files.
Summary Tasks in Microsoft Project import as WBS
Summary activities in the Project Management module.
618
Importing Resources from Microsoft Project

MPXMAPPINGS.PDF,
located in the
Documentation\Data
Mapping Docs folder
located in the
media or download.
Transferring data from Microsoft Project to the Project Management

module is determined by the version of Microsoft Project you use. You
can import the following file types:
MPX files Microsoft Project or similar applications
MPP files from Microsoft Project 2002 and 2003
The Import wizard guides you through the steps for importing
resources.
When you import resources, secure codes and secure code
assignments related to the resources are not imported. For
more information about secure codes, refer to Primaveras

module, certain restrictions apply when importing resources.
Refer to the Help for more details.
Microsoft Jet 4.0 users should install Service Pack 6. Import

errors may occur on computers running Microsoft Jet 4.0
Service Pack 5 or earlier.
619
Select import type and file Choose File, Import. Choose Microsoft
Project, then click Next.
You can import MPX, MPP, XML 2002/2003,

or XML 2007 formats. The file formats
Note: If you select the XML option in the

Import Format screen, the Import Type
screen is not displayed.
The Import Type screen is available for
MPX and MPP formats, only. The screen
contains the following options:
then click Next.
Project and Resource Only buttons

become available when XML, MPX, or
MPP is selected.
The Summary Only button becomes
available when XML or MPP is selected.
620
Click Select to choose the files you want to import. If there is a

password on the Microsoft Project file, type the password. If you do not
enter a password on a protected file, the resources will not be imported.

existing template (if necessary). The template contains options for
Click to create a new template.

selected template.
621
Click the General tab in the Modify Template dialog box. The following
screen is displayed, supporting the MPP or MPX options.
activity costs.

Mark the check box to schedule

the project after the import.
622
Click the Activity tab in the Modify Template dialog box. In the Import
section, choose how you want to import milestone activities that have
resource assignments. You can import them into the Project
Management module as Start Milestone activities with associated
expenses, or as Task Dependent activities with associated resource
assignments. Then, choose to import the Task ID from Microsoft Project
to the Activity ID field in the Project Management module or to a
selected user-defined text field. Select if you want to import MSPs
fixed costs as project expenses. If you do not choose this option, fixed
costs are not imported.
If you choose this option but

DO NOT select the 'Import
Microsoft Project's fixed costs
as expenses' option, the
milestones are imported but
expenses associated with the
start milestones are not.
If you choose not to import
the Task IDs from
Microsoft Project, the
Project Management
module creates Activity
IDs for each activity.
Unmark this checkbox if
you do not want to import
expenses.
These fields are relevant for export only.
623
Click the Resource tab in the Modify Template dialog box. Choose
whether you want to import the Resource Initials or the Resource Name
from Microsoft Project to the Resource ID field in the Project
Management module. If you select Resource Initials, only one resource
is imported if multiple resources in Microsoft Project use the same
initials. If you select Resource Name, the first 20 characters of the name
import (based on your setting in the Admin Preferences, ID Lengths tab
in the Project Management module).
Choose how to handle resources that already exist in the project
management database but are also contained in the Microsoft Project
import file.
Keep existing resource Retains the resource in the project

management database and does not overwrite it with the resource
from the Microsoft Project file.
Update existing resource Overwrites the resource in the project

management database with the resource from the Microsoft Project
file.
Add new resource Retains the resource in the project management

database but also adds the resource from the Microsoft Project file
624
Choose whether you want to add a new resource if the resource does not
already exist in the project management database but is contained in the
Microsoft Project import file. Then, select the level of the hierarchy at
which resources should be imported. Click the Browse button, then
select the resource under which to place all resources from the
Microsoft Project file.


625
box. You can import information from Microsoft Project into userdefined fields in the Project Management module. Choose Resources
from the drop-down list. For each Microsoft Project field you want to
import, select a user-defined field in the Project Management Field
column. The Field column is sorted by field type.

review the settings for your import, then click Finish to import the
Microsoft Project resources.
627

Excel Files
In this chapter:
Exporting Project Data to
Microsoft Excel
Updating Project Data in
Microsoft Excel
Importing Projects from Microsoft
Excel
Use the Spreadsheet import/export option to

transfer project and resource information
between the Project Management module
and Microsoft Excel.
and Import wizards to share information
using the Spreadsheet (XLS) format.
628
Exporting Project Data to Microsoft Excel

converted, see the
XLSmappings.PDF file,
located in the
Documentation\Data
Mapping Docs folder
located in the
media or download.
When you export Project Management project data to XLS file format,
you can then open the file in Microsoft Excel. You can also import the
file into other software applications that support the XLS file format.
The Export wizard guides you through the steps for exporting projects.
To import data from an XLS file, you must have the Project
Superuser security profile.This setting is available in the
Project Access tab in the Admin, Users dialog box.
Export does not support the sub-unit time format. Make sure
the Sub-unit checkboxes are clear in the Edit, User
Preferences, Time Units tab.
The Project Management module ignores external project

relationships when exporting activity relationship data to XLS
files.
Transferring Data Using Microsoft Excel Files
629
Select export format and subject area Open the project in the
Project Management module you want to export. Choose File, Export to
start the Export wizard. Choose Spread Sheet, then click Next.
Select the
subject areas you
want to export,
then click Next.
If you choose multiple subject areas, Export will create an

individual worksheet for each subject area in the spreadsheet
file.
630
If you choose Resources as the only subject area to export,

you do not have to select a project to export. This step is
skipped during the Export wizard. The Project Management
application exports all resources in the Project Management
database.
Select the data types to export,

then click Next.
Mark the appropriate checkbox next

to the projects you want to export.
631

existing template. The template contains options for exchanging data
with Microsoft Excel or other spreadsheet applications. Click Modify to
customize the selected template.
Single-click to rename the

template.

template.
Select a Subject Area in the Modify Template dialog box to modify its
options. In the Columns tab, select the fields to export. The available
options are based on the selected subject area.
You cannot remove a subject areas required columns from
the Selected Options section.
632
Click to expand the list of

data items.
Click to apply the default columns to

the export template.
633
In the Modify Template dialog box, click the Filter tab to select the
activities you want to export for the selected subject area. If using more
than one filter, choose to show activities that meet all selection criteria
in each filter, or to show activities that must meet only one selection
criteria in each filter. Select the filter(s) to use for the export file. If
necessary, click Modify to edit the selected user-defined filter. The
fields available for filtering are based on the selected subject area.
Mark to include all the data

items that export with the
selected subject area.
634
Click the Sort tab in the Modify Template dialog box to apply order to
the columns during export. Select the sort order for each field name.
Click OK to save your modifications to the template.
Click to define a sort order for
the selected subject area.
Click Next to define the location to save the export file. Double click in
the File Name field and click the Browse button if you want to change
the name and location of the export file.
Click Next to view the summary information for the export file. Click
Finish to export the project data to an XLS file.
635
Updating Project Data in Microsoft Excel

The Project Management module exports subject areas as individual
sheets within the XLS file. In the export file, each field within a subject
area displays as a column in the excel sheet. You can update each
subject area in its own sheet.
To successfully import data, do not delete the USERDATA
sheet. This sheet contains the user preference settings for
the Project Management application.

sheet names for subject
areas, refer to the
Primavera Project
Management module Help.
Update unit, cost, duration, percent complete, and date

fields When updating unit, cost, duration, and percent complete fields,
you may want to import one updated field at a time into the Project
Management module. For example, you can export the Activities
subject area, and update the activity percent complete and the remaining
duration in the export file. When you import the Excel file, PM updates
the activity data. However, to update other activity values related to the
remaining duration and percent complete, PM needs to know which
field was updated first. In PM, you cannot update these fields
simultaneously.
To update unit, cost, duration, and percent complete fields, make a copy
of the export file you want to update.
The activity expenses have been exported to Excel.
In the copied file, update the necessary field for an activity. In that
activity row, blank out the remaining fields that are not marked (*) to
give it a null value. As a result, during import, PM will not update the
fields with null values in the project, and PM will calculate the other
fields as necessary.
636
Updated field
The other cost fields are blank in the

export file. Import will only update the
Budgeted Cost field for activity A1000.
Do not remove or null the value of unique fields. Refer to

Table 1 to view the list of unique fields.
In PM, choose File, Import to import the Excel file into the selected
project. Repeat these steps for each unit, cost, duration, percent
complete, and date field.
Delete a row To delete a row in the exported file, place a D or d
in the Delete This Row column in the export file. This is placed as the
last column in the export file. When you import, the deleted row is
moved from the project database.
Update unique fields If you modify unique columns, such as
Activity ID, Relationship type, and Resource ID, import adds new data
instead of updating the existing information. For example, if you modify
the Activity ID and import the file, import adds a new activity to the
project. To successfully update the existing activity ID, or other unique
fields, copy and paste the existing row, update it, then delete the original
row.
For example, to change the relationship between two activities, select
the row of the relationship you want to modify in the TASKPRED sheet
in Excel. Choose Edit, Copy, and then choose Edit, Paste to place a copy
of the activity row in the same sheet. Change the value in the
Relationship Type field of one of the rows. Type a D or d in the
other row to delete it. As a result, Project Management adds a new
relationship and deletes the old relationship.
637
Table 1 lists the unique fields for each subject area.

Subject Area
Column(s)
Activities
Activity ID
Activity
Relationships
Successor, Predecessor, Relationship Type
Expenses
Activity ID, Expense Item
Resource
Assignments
Activity ID, Resource ID, Role ID, Cost Account ID
638
Importing Projects from Microsoft Excel

converted, see the
XLSmappings.PDF file,
located in the
Documentation\Data
Mapping Docs folder
located in the
media or download.
You can import data that has been exported and updated in Microsoft
Excel into the Project Management module. However, you cannot
import any global data that does not currently exist in the database, such
as resources, codes, cost accounts. If Microsoft Excel does not reside on
your computer, you can still import XLS files that may have been
created in other third-party applications. The Import wizard guides you
through the steps for importing projects.
The User Preference settings are stored in the USERDATA
sheet of the exported file. If this sheet is deleted, information
will not be imported based on the user preference settings
that were used while exporting data.
The Project Management module ignores past period actual

columns when importing data from XLS files.
When you import multiple fields, fields are updated in the

order reflected in the XLSmappings.PDF, not in the order of
the Excel spreadsheet.

importing, refer to the
Project Management Help.
Select import format Choose File, Import. Choose Spreadsheet,

then click Next.
639
Select the Excel file to import Type the location of the XLS file or
click the Browse button to select the file you want to import. Click Next.
Select import type and options Choose the subject areas to

import into the project. Click Next.
Each subject area is exported to a separate worksheet in the
XLS file. The Import wizard will not import a subject area if its
title has been changed in the worksheet within the XLS file. If
the title has been changed, the subject area will be grayed
out on the Import Type window.
640
In the Project Management module, users cannot import any

global data that does not currently exist in the Project
Management database, such as resources, codes, cost
accounts.
Select the project to update The existing project is updated with

any new/modified data in the XLS file. Click the Browse button in the
Import To field to select the project to update. The project must be open
in the Project Management module to use this option.
Click Next to display information about the import file. Click Finish to
complete the import.
641
Import errors are recorded in the import log file

PRM_XLSIMPORT.LOG. If errors occur, Import will prompt
you to view this file in the user's temp directory.
643
Transferring Data Between P3 and

the Project Management Module
In this chapter:
Exporting Projects to P3 3.x
Importing P3 3.x Projects to the
Project Management Module
Project data from Primavera Project Planner

(P3) version 3.x can be converted and
opened in the Project Management module,
and Project Management projects can be
converted and opened in P3 3.x. If you are
using the Project Management module,
however, Primavera recommends that you
convert your P3 3.x projects to Project
Management format, as the Project
Management module contains many features
and fields that cannot be converted to P3 3.x
format.
and Import wizards to share project information between P3 and the Project
Management module.
644
Exporting Projects to P3 3.x

about data that is
transferred from the
Project Management
module to P3 3.x, see
Special considerations on
page 648.
You can convert an existing Project Management project to Primavera

Project Planner (P3) 3.x format, for example, when you need to share
data with a subcontractor who does not use the Project Management
module. Because the Project Management module uses many structures
and features that P3 3.x does not support, some data is not converted.
The Export wizard guides you through the steps for exporting projects.
You can convert only one project at a time to P3 3.x format.
Select export type and project Open the project you want to
export. Choose File, Export. Choose Primavera Project Planner, then
click Next.
Transferring Data Between P3 and the Project Management Module
645
Mark the Export checkbox next to the project you want to export, then
click Next.
Type a name for the P3 3.x file.
Type a four-character name

for the project.
Click the Browse button to

select the location where the
P3 3.x file will be stored.
646
Select planning unit Choose the planning unit (hours or days) that
you want P3 3.x to use to schedule project data. The Project
Management module uses only hourly planning units. If you choose
Days, you can select to export the resource units as hours or days. Click
Next.
See Advanced conversion options on page 677 to change

the number used to calculate days.
Choose cost calculation rules You can set several Autocost rules
for the exported project. Default settings are used for all other Autocost
rules. These calculations apply only when the project is scheduled in P3
3.x. You can change these settings when you open the project in P3 3.x.
647
Yes, link remaining duration and schedule percent complete:

This rule automatically links each activitys schedule percent
complete (PCT) with its remaining duration (RD). When you
update either value, P3 3.x calculates the other. Clear this checkbox
if the schedule percent complete for your activities does not
typically indicate their remaining duration.
Yes, freeze resource units per timeperiod: Mark this checkbox to

freeze the units per timeperiod and calculate a new estimate to
complete when the remaining duration changes:
Estimate to Complete = Units per Timeperiod x Remaining Duration
Estimate at Completion = New Estimate to Complete + Actual to Date
When this checkbox is cleared, P3 3.x can adjust the units per
time-period when the estimate to complete or the remaining
duration changes:
Units per Timeperiod = Estimate to Complete / Remaining Duration
When resources quantities are updated, P3 should use current

unit prices to recompute the following costs: Budget, Actual to
Date, Estimate to Complete: Mark any checkbox for this rule if
you want P3 3.x to calculate the cost of the resources budget,
actual to date, or estimate to complete as the product of its unit
price (from the Resource dictionary) and the quantity.
648
P3 3.x uses the following formulas:

Budgeted Cost = Budgeted Quantity x Price per Unit
Actual Cost = Actual Quantity to Date x Price per Unit
Cost to Complete = Quantity to Complete x Price per Unit
Because the cost at completion depends on the newly calculated

costs, P3 3.x recalculates the cost at completion as
Cost at Completion = Cost to Complete + Actual Cost
After selecting the cost calculation rules, click Finish to export the
project. P3 3.x files are created in the folder specified. These files can be
opened directly through P3 3.x.
Special considerations The following list describes the data items
that are transferred from the Project Management module to P3 3.x.
Duration types The Project Management modules duration types

control the way resource and activity dates are scheduled. Duration
types are similar to Autocost rules in P3 3.x. When the duration
type in the Project Management module is Fixed Units or Fixed
Units/Time, the resource assignment becomes driving in P3 3.x.
When the duration type in the Project Management module is Fixed
Duration & Units/Time or Fixed Duration & Units, the resource
assignment becomes nondriving in P3 3.x. Using Fixed Duration &
Units/Time is comparable to marking the Freeze Resource Units
per Timeperiod checkbox in P3 3.x.
Resources The Project Management module contains a global

dictionary of resources that are used for all projects in the
enterprise. P3 3.x stores resources at the project level. Only
resources assigned to activities in the project being exported are
imported into P3 3.x. The resource ID in the Project Management
module can contain 15 characters; resource IDs in P3 3.x can
contain eight characters. P3 3.x truncates resource IDs to 8
characters. If duplicate IDs exist, P3 3.x automatically increments
the last two characters of the ID.
Notebooks In the Project Management module, each activity is

assigned a Notebook field, which can contain up to 32,000
characters. P3 3.x contains 99 log records. Each log can contain 48
characters. Notebooks are converted to logs in P3 3.x, but the
information is truncated if it does not fit in the 99 log records.
649
Units and costs To calculate quantities in P3 3.x, labor and

nonlabor units from the Project Management module are added. To
calculate costs in P3 3.x, labor, nonlabor, and material costs,
expenses, and overtime costs from the Project Management module
are added.
Activity IDs In the Project Management module, activity IDs can

contain 20 characters, while in P3 3.x, they are limited to 10
characters. P3 3.x truncates the Project Management modules
activity IDs to 10 characters. When duplicate IDs exist, the first
eight characters of the activity ID are converted and P3 3.x
increments the last two characters starting with 00. For example,
the Project Management modules activity IDs
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST and ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPPPP
are converted to ABCDEFGHIJ and ABCDEFGH00 in P3 3.x.
Cost accounts The Cost Accounts Dictionary in both P3 3.x and

the Project Management module can contain an unlimited number
of cost accounts; however, in the Project Management module the
dictionary is global, while in P3 3.x it is project-specific. Only the
cost accounts assigned in the Project Management project are
converted to P3 3.x. In the Project Management module, cost
accounts can contain 15 characters; in P3 3.x they can contain 12
characters. P3 3.x truncates cost accounts to 12 characters. When
duplicate accounts exist, P3 3.x automatically increments the last
two characters of the account.
Calendars In the Project Management module you can create an

unlimited number of global, project, and resource calendars. Global
and project calendars can be assigned to activities; global and
resource calendars can be assigned at the resource level. In P3 3.x,
you can create one global calendar, 31 project calendars, and an
unlimited number of resource calendars. When you import a Project
Management project to P3 3.x, the global calendar in P3 3.x is not
changed. All resource calendars are imported to P3 3.x.
Resource holidays and exceptions are not converted to P3
3.x. Only the standard worktime is converted. For example, if
a resource calendars standard worktime is three days per
week, then the resource calendar is imported with a standard
worktime of three days per week. No other nonworktime is
imported.
650
If the Project Management module contains less than 31 calendars

(global plus project), the calendars are imported directly to the
project calendars in P3 3.x. However, if the Project Management
module contains more than 31 calendars, only the first 30 calendars
assigned are exported. These calendars are assigned numbers 2 to
31 in P3 3.x. Any activity in the Project Management module
assigned to a calendar that is not exported is assigned to Calendar 1,
the standard five-day, eight-hour calendar in P3 3.x.
You can define work hours in the Project Management module in
half hour increments. The smallest unit in P3 3.x is hour. If one half
of an hour is work time and the other half is nonworktime in the
Project Management module, the entire hour will be nonworktime
in P3 3.x.
Activity codes P3 3.x supports up to 10 characters for the activity

code value length; the Project Management module allows a
maximum of 20 characters. P3 3.x truncates the Project
Management module code values to 10 characters. The maximum
number of activity codes in P3 3.x is 20, and the total of the lengths
assigned to the codes cannot exceed 64. You can create an
unlimited number of codes in the Project Management module.
When you export a Project Management project to P3 3.x, only the
first 64 characters of activity codes are converted to P3 3.x.
Also, the Project Management module exports the first four letters
of the activity code description to P3 3.x as the activity code name.
For example, if the activity code description is Responsibility in the
Project Management module, the module will export RESP as the
activity code name in P3 3.x.
Project codes P3 3.x supports up to 10 project codes. All project

codes assigned to the Project Management project are exported.
However, only the first 10 project codes exported are imported to
P3 3.x.
WBS The Project Management module supports a maximum of 25

levels with an unlimited number of characters. P3 3.x supports 20
WBS levels with a limit of 48 characters. The Project Management
module will export as many levels as possible until the limit of 48
characters or 20 levels is reached.
WBS descriptions are converted only if the WBS node is
assigned to activities.
651
Custom data items The first eight custom data items in the Project
Management module are converted to P3 3.x.
Suspend and resume dates In P3 3.x, a suspend date indicates

that an activity is suspended at the end of the specified day. In the
Project Management module, a suspend date indicates that an
activity is suspended at the beginning of the specified day. Due to
this discrepancy, actual and remaining durations are affected for
daily projects. Hourly projects are not affected.
For example, an activity suspend date of 05OCT04 (beginning of
the day) in the Project Management module will export to P3 as
05OCT04 (the end of the day). In P3, the actual duration for the
activity will be one day greater than it was in the Project
Management module because P3 progresses the work through the
suspend date.
Scheduling options The following advanced scheduling options
convert to P3 3.x:
Project Management
P3 3.x
Make open-ended activities critical
Show open ends as (Critical or

Noncritical)
For activities started out of sequence

use (Retained logic or Progress
override)
When scheduling activities apply

(Retained logic or Progress override)
Calculate start-to-start lag from (Early Calculate start-to-start lag from

Start or Actual Start)
(Actual start or Early start)
Compute Total Float as (Start float,
Finish float, or Smallest of start float
and finish float)
Calculate total float as (Most critical,

Start float, or Finish float)
In the Project Management module, you can choose the calendar to

use for scheduling relationship lag. Regardless of your setting in the
Project Management module, P3 3.x always uses the predecessor
calendar.
Project level calculations In the Project Management module, you
can choose how you want to update resource assignments. Choose
to Add Actual to Remaining or Subtract Actual from At
Completion when updating Actual Units or Costs. In P3 3.x this
setting is the same as the autocost rule, Add actual to ETC or
Subtract actual from EAC.
652
The Recalculate Actual Units and Cost when duration % complete

changes setting determines if the actual units and cost are updated
when the % complete is updated. If the setting is marked, both the
Actual quantity to date and Actual cost to date fields are marked in
the autocost settings in P3 3.x. If it is not marked in the Project
Management module, neither field is marked in P3 3.x.
The Link Actual and Actual this Period Units and Cost field
converts to the Link actual to date and actual this period autocost
rule in P3 3.x.
Expenses All expenses become resource assignments in P3 3.x. An

expense cost account is assigned to the resource assignment if a
cost account is not already assigned.
Data not converted The following data is not converted to P3 3.x:
Constraints on Level of Effort activities
Enterprise project structure (EPS)
EPS Codes
Feedback (from resources)
Financial periods
Issues
OBS
Past period actuals
Resource curves
Future period buckets
Risks
Roles
Secure codes
Steps
Thresholds
Timesheet data
Work products and documents
653
Importing P3 3.x Projects to the Project Management

Module
You can import an existing P3 3.x project to the Project Management
module. In most cases, you will be upgrading your P3 3.x schedules to
the project hierarchy in the Project Management module. The Import
wizard guides you through the steps for importing P3 3.x projects to the
Project Management module.
module, some restrictions apply when importing resources
and activity resource assignments. Refer to the Help for more
details.
Select import type In the Project Management module, choose File,

Import. Choose Primavera Project Planner, then click Next.
654
Choose project group(s) to import When converting P3 projects

to the Project Management module, you can import multiple project
groups (master projects) simultaneously or import project groups
individually. You should select multiple project groups only when you
want to import all subprojects contained in those projects. You should
import project groups individually when you want to specify the
subprojects to import. The projects cannot be open in P3. The existing
P3 projects remain intact.
The import wizard displays different screens and options
when you import a single project group versus multiple
project groups. Determine if you want to import single or
multiple project groups, then follow the corresponding
instructions detailed in this section.
To import multiple project groups:

In the P3 3.x Project Directory field, click the Browse button to select
the location of the projects you want to import, then select the project
groups to import. Click Next and skip to the next section, Specify
import project options on page 657.
655
To import a single project group:

In the P3 3.x Project Directory field, click the Browse button to select
the location of the projects you want to import, then select the project
group to import. Click Next.
Choose subprojects to import The selected project group (master

project and its associated subprojects) is displayed on the next wizard
screen. By default, all projects (master project and subprojects) are
selected for import. Unmark the checkbox next to each project you do
not want to import. You do not have to import the master project.
The project group you chose to import may not contain
subprojects; however, you still must choose to either combine
subprojects or create separate projects as described below. If
the project group contains subprojects and you choose to
combine subprojects, you must select at least one
subproject.
Choose to combine subprojects or create separate projects for each

selected subproject. Mark the Combine subprojects option if you want
to import the selected projects as one project rather than separating them
into individual projects. For example, in P3 3.x, the project group APEX
contains three projects, AUTO, BLDG, and CONV (as shown in the
following image). If you select the Combine subprojects option, the
Project Management module imports one project named APEX with all
selected subprojects as WBS levels.
656
Mark the Create separate projects option if you want to import each
selected subproject as an individual project. If you select this option,
you cannot import the master project. For example, in P3 3.x, the project
group APEX contains three subprojects, AUTO, BLDG, and CONV.
This group is converted to three individual projects (APEX is not
converted). Before the import, create an EPS node to select as the
location for the converted projects.
Regardless of whether subprojects exist for the selected
project group, f you choose to combine subprojects, project
activity codes are imported as global activity codes; if you
choose to create separate projects, project activity codes are
imported as project activity codes.
Mark to import the selected

projects as one project with the
subprojects representing WBS
levels. If you select this option,
you must select at least one
subproject (if a subproject
exists). You do not have to
select the master project.
Select this option if you want to

import each selected subproject
as an individual project. If you
select this option, you cannot
select the master project.
657
Specify import project options Choose how the P3 3.x projects

should be imported. Beside each project name, click the Import Action
field, then click the down arrow to select the type of import. Normally,
you will choose the Create New Project option when moving your P3
projects to the Project Management module. You can also choose to
update or replace an existing Project Management module project.
The projects listed on the wizard screen depend on your
selections on previous screens, as described in the following
images.
If you are importing

multiple project groups
simultaneously, the
wizard displays the
project group names.
If you are importing a single

project group and chose to
combine subprojects in the
previous wizard screen, the
Project ID will always be the
name of the project group
(master project), even if you
do not import the master
project itself.
If you are importing a single

project group and chose to
create separate projects in the
previous wizard screen, each
subproject is listed separately.
658
Create new project The existing projects data remains the same.
A new project is created. If the project does not fit within the
existing EPS, create a new level before importing the project. Click
the Browse button in the Import To field to select the level of the
EPS at which the project should be imported.
Replace existing project The existing project in the Project

Management module is deleted (without preserving any
information) and replaced with the project imported from P3 3.x.
Click the Browse button in the Import To field to select the project
to replace. The project must be open in the Project Management
module to use this option.
Update existing project The existing project is updated with any

new or modified data in the P3 3.x file and adds new data if the
record does not exist. Click the Browse button in the Import To field
to select the project to update. The project must be open in the
Project Management module to use this option.
For additional import

considerations regarding
future period bucket
planning, refer to the
Contractor application
Help.
When you import a P3 project to a Contractor project that

contains manual future period assignment buckets, the
manual values are deleted if you choose the Replace
Existing or Update Existing import option.
If you chose Create New Project in the Import Action field, click the
Browse button in the Import To field to select the level of the EPS at
which the project should be imported. To keep your projects organized,
it is best to set up a basic EPS before you import projects.
If you chose Update Existing Project or Replace Existing Project in the
Import Action field, click the Browse button in the Import To field to
select the project you want to update or replace.
659
If you choose to create a

new project, select the
location in the EPS for
the imported project.
If you choose to replace or

update an existing Project
Management module project,
select the project to replace
or update.
660
Select location for resources For each project, select the level of
the hierarchy at which resources should be imported. Click in the Import
To field, then click the Browse button. Select the resource under which
to place all resources from the P3 3.x project. To better organize your
resources, it is best to set up a basic resource hierarchy before you
import projects. If you leave the field blank, the Project Management
module creates a root node with the same name as the P3 project. The
resource field is disabled for the Replace Existing Project and Update
Existing Project import types.
module, users with restricted resource access will only have
the option to select their assigned resource access node.
Resources contained in the import file that do not exist in
Project Managements resource dictionary are added to the
users resource access node. Users with no resource access
cannot import resources.
Select the location in

the resource hierarchy
for the selected
projects resources.
661
Select location for activity logs P3 3.x activity logs are converted
to notes in the Project Management module. Notebook topics are
predefined categories in the Project Management module that help to
organize your project notes. Choose to create a new notebook topic for
the notes, or select from the existing list of notebook topics. To display
notes in the Project Management module, in the Activities window click
the Layout Options bar, then choose Show on Bottom, Activity Details.
Click the Notebook tab.
662

data in the import file that matches data in the database. You can create
The Update Project Options dialog box appears regardless of
the import option you select. For example, if you choose to
create a new project, you still must set update options for
global data.


663

configuration determine how data is updated when projects are imported
that contain duplicate data. To modify these options, select the layout in
the Update Project Options dialog box, then click Modify.
Mark to delete
relationships to external
projects, activities, activity
relationships, and activity
resource assignments that
are in the project being
updated, but are not
The import of activities, their

relationships, and their
resource assignments is
dependent on one another.
For example, if you choose to
update one of these items, all
three are updated
automatically.
to remove data that exists in the project you are updating but is not
are defined in the project you are updating, but are not included in the
file to be imported, mark the checkbox in the Delete column to remove
the activities from the project being updated.
The Delete field applies only to relationships to external
projects, activities, activity relationships, and activity resource
assignments. Global data types are not affected by this
setting.
664
type is updated:
not exist.

data items. For example, if a new calendar was added in the P3 3.x
file, but you dont want to change the existing calendars, choose
Insert New to add the new calendar to the existing project.
The actions you choose for importing the items in the Activity Data
Type group are dependent on each other. For example, if you choose to
update existing relationships, you must also update existing resource
assignments and activities associated with the relationships.
The action for activity data

types are dependent on one
another.
The Delete field for these

items can be independent.
If a relationship type was updated when the project was exported, to

import the modified relationship type you must choose to Update
Existing and mark the Delete field for activity relationships; otherwise,
a new relationship will be added. For example, suppose you have
Activity 100 with a finish to start relationship type. If you import a
project that has Activity 100, but the relationship type has been changed
to a start to start type, the import process results in Activity 100 with
both the finish to start relationship and the start to start relationship
when you do not mark the Delete field. You must mark the Delete field
to remove the original relationship type of finish to start.
The Activity Resource Assignments item under Activity Data
Type includes roles.
665
Calculate cost values Click Advanced in the Update Project

Options dialog box to display options specific to existing P3 3.x projects
regarding how you want costs handled in the Project Management
module.
Indicate whether you want the Project Management module to

recalculate the cost values from the unit prices and assigned
resource quantities.
When importing a daily project that has resources with a blank unit
of measure in P3 3.x, choose to convert the resource assignments in
days or hours. If you choose hours, the Project Management
module retains the resource values as-is. If you choose days, the
Project Management module multiplies all resource values by a
factor of eight (assuming 8 hr/day). You can change the multiplier
in the PRMCONVERT.INI file. Refer to Advanced Conversion
Options section later in this chapter.
Choose whether to import resource assignments that only have cost

information (no quantity information) associated with them as
expenses or as resource assignments with a planned cost.
666
Choose additional project options Use the Project Options

dialog box to specify the following additional options. Click Finish to
begin the import process.
This option only appears

when you are importing
multiple project groups.
Click to
import the
P3 project.
Merge subprojects Mark this setting to import each project group

as one project rather than separating them into individual projects.
For example, in P3, the project group APEX contains three
projects, AUTO, BLDG, and CONV. Merging the subprojects
imports only one project named APEX with all activities under that
project. This option is only available when you choose to import
multiple project groups simultaneously.
Projects are merged automatically when your Import Type is
Replace Existing Project. If your Import Type is Update
Existing Project, projects are merged automatically only
when you import multiple project groups or multiple
subprojects (in a single project group).
When you merge subprojects, all activity codes convert to

Project Management as project activity codes. Otherwise,
they convert as global activity codes.
Schedule project after import Mark this setting to automatically

schedule the project in the Project Management module after the
import.
667
Import WBS codes as a global activity code Mark this setting to

import the WBS codes from P3 into the Project Management
module as global activity codes assigned to the activities. The
global activity code name created, P3 WBS - Proj, where Proj is the
name of the project group in P3, will store the WBS values.
Import unused WBS codes Mark this setting to keep all the WBS
codes within each project, even if they are not assigned to any
activities.
Special considerations Most data is converted directly from P3 3.x

to the Project Management module. This section explains how data is
handled after it is imported into the Project Management module and a
direct match does not exist; it also identifies data that is not converted.
See Data not converted on page 652 for additional cases.
Planning unit You can only convert projects with an hourly or

daily planning unit. Weekly and monthly planning units are not
supported. To display duration units in hours, choose Edit, User
Preferences, Time Units. Choose Durations as the time unit and
Hour as the unit.
Activity codes The Project Management module contains global

and project activity codes. Global activity codes are provided with
the sample data delivered with the Project Management module. If
you choose to create separate projects (rather than combine them)
in the Import wizard, all activity codes, activity ID codes, and alias
codes from P3 3.x import as global activity codes in the Project
Management module, so they are available to all projects. If you
choose to combine subprojects into one project to import, the
activity codes, activity ID codes, and alias codes import as projectspecific activity codes.
Activity code values assigned to activities in P3 3.x that do
not exist in the Activity Codes Dictionary are not converted to
the Project Management module.
When activity codes are imported into the Project Management

module, the P3 activity code description is used as the activity code
in the Project Management module. For example, if the activity
code name in P3 is RESP and the description is Responsibility, then
Responsibility is imported as the activity code in the Project
Management module. If there is no description associated with an
activity code, then the four-character name is imported as the
activity code.
668
Project codes The Project Management module contains a global

project codes dictionary which is available to all projects in the
enterprise. You can assign a project code value to projects for each
project code you create. All 10 project codes defined in the P3 3.x
project and their assignments are imported.
If the import option Combine subprojects (when importing a
single project group) or Merge Subprojects (when importing
multiple project groups) is marked in the Import wizard, the
project codes and values assigned to the master project are
imported.
Activity type The Project Management module supports the

following activity types that correspond to activity types in P3 3.x: .
P3 3.x Activity Type
Project Management Activity

Type
Task
Task Dependent
Independent
Resource Dependent
Start Milestone
Start Milestone
Finish Milestone
Finish Milestone
Meeting
Resource Dependent
Start Flag
Start Milestone
Finish Flag
Finish Milestone
Hammock
Level of Effort
WBS
WBS Summary
Activity IDs In P3, numeric Activity IDs are right-justified. In

Primavera Contractor, all activity IDs are left-justified. When you
import a P3 project that uses numeric activity IDs into Primavera
Contractor, they are left-justified. However, leading blanks are not
removed.
669
Duration types The Project Management module allows you to

specify each activity's duration type as Fixed Units/Time, Fixed
Duration and Units/Time, Fixed Units, or Fixed Duration and Units.
When all resource assignments on the P3 3.x task are non-driving,
the duration type becomes Fixed Duration & Units/Time, which
indicates that an activity's duration will not change, regardless of
the number of resources assigned to the activity or the amount of
work required to finish the activity.
When any resource assignment on the P3 3.x task is driving and
Freeze Resource Units per Timeperiod is marked in the autocost
rules, the duration type becomes Fixed Units/Time.
When any resource assignment on the P3 3.x task is driving and
Freeze Resource Units per Timeperiod is not marked in the autocost
rules, the duration type becomes Fixed Units.
Percent complete type Each activity in the Project Management

module must be assigned one of the following percent complete
types: physical, duration, or units. When you import P3 3.x
activities to the Project Management module, they are assigned the
percent complete type of Duration, which specifies that the
activity's percent complete is calculated from the actual and
remaining durations.
Suspend and resume dates In P3 3.x, a suspend date indicates

that an activity is suspended at the end of the specified day. In the
Project Management module, a suspend date indicates that an
activity is suspended at the beginning of the specified day. Due to
this discrepancy, actual and remaining durations are affected for
daily projects. Hourly projects are not affected.
For example, an activity suspend date of 05OCT04 (end of the day)
in P3 will import to the Project Management module as 05OCT04
(the beginning of the day). In the Project Management module, the
actual duration for the activity will be one day shorter than it was in
P3 because P3 progresses the work through the suspend date (while
the Project Management module suspends progress at the beginning
of the day).
670
Custom data items P3 3.x custom data items are converted to the
following user-defined data items in the Project Management
module.
P3 3.x Custom Data

Item Type
Project Management Project Management

Activity User Field
Resource User Field
Character (C)
User Text
User Text
Start (S)
User Start Date
User Start Date
Finish (F)
User End Date
User End Date
Numeric (N)
User Integer
User Integer
Precision (P)
User Number
User Number
You can display converted activity custom data items as columns in

the Project Management modules Activity Table. In the Activities
window (with an Activity Table or Gantt Chart displayed on top),
click the Layout options bar, then choose Columns. Select the
appropriate user-defined fields from the list of Available Options
and add them to the layout.
You can also display your converted resource custom data items as
columns in the Project Management module. In the Activities
window, click the Layout options bar, then choose Show on
Bottom, Activity Details. Click the Resources tab to display
resource information. Right-click in the column area, and choose
Customize Resource Columns. Select the appropriate user-defined
fields from the list of Available Options and add them to the table.
WBS codes In the Project Management module, a WBS must exist

and all activities must be assigned to a WBS code. If the imported
P3 3.x project uses a WBS, it is converted to the Project
Management module. If no WBS exists, the Project Management
module creates a WBS root node and names it PROJ, where PROJ
is the P3 3.x project name. All activities are assigned to this WBS
code.
671
Because the Project Management module uses the WBS to define a

project structure, you should not assign the same WBS code to
different activities across projects within a project group in P3 3.x.
For example, if activity CS300 is part of the Conveyor System
project, it should not be assigned a WBS code that belongs to the
Automation System project. If the conversion program encounters
this situation, it duplicates the code's entire branch in both projects.
To distinguish the projects, the program and project names are
added as a prefix to the WBS code structure. For example, for the
APEX project, APEX.CONV.AM.01 and APEX.AUTO.AM.01
would be included as branches in the WBS.
Resources The Project Management module contains one master

resource pool across all projects. A sample resource hierarchy is
provided when you install the Project Management module. When
you import a project, the resources are imported to the location in
the hierarchy you specify in the Import wizard. If duplicate
resource IDs are encountered during the import process, you can
choose how to resolve each conflict by modifying the import
configurations in the Import wizard.
In the Project Management module, resources are classified as
labor, nonlabor, or material. Any resource in P3 3.x with a unit of
measure equal to most variations of a time unit, such as h, hr, or
hour, is converted as a labor resource. Any resource in P3 3.x with a
unit of measure equal to those defined in the Admin Categories,
Units of Measure tab in the Project Management module is
converted as a material resource. All other resources are classified
as nonlabor. Labor units are displayed as hrs/day. You can change
the display unit by choosing Edit, User Preferences, and then
clicking the Time Units tab.
You can customize how the import program classifies
resources. See Advanced conversion options on page 677
for more information.
672
All time-based calculations in the Project Management module are

based on hourly units. If your project in P3 3.x is planned in days,
the Project Management module refers to each resources unit of
measure to determine how to convert resource assignments. If the
resource unit of measure is equal to most variations of an hourly
time unit such as, hr or mh, then the Project Management module
assumes the resource assignment is based on hours and converts it
as-is. If the resource unit of measure is something other than hours
such as, day or d, then the Project Management module assumes the
resource assignment is in days and multiplies all resource values by
a factor of eight (assuming 8 hr/day). In this case, decide if eight is
the correct multiplier. If the resource is classified as a material
resource, the resource units are not multiplied; they convert as-is.
You can change the multiplier in the PRMCONVERT.INI file. You
can also modify the list of unit of measure abbreviations that the
Project Management module refers to during the conversion. Refer
to Advanced Conversion Options section later in this chapter.
For resources that have a blank unit of measure, use the Import
wizard to decide how to handle the assignments, as described
earlier in this chapter.
The conversion process creates additional levels in the
resource structure for P3 3.x hierarchical resources. The
Project Management module supports only maximum limits
for resources. Normal resource limits are not converted.
Resources assigned to milestone activities in P3 3.x become

expenses in the Project Management module. The resource name is
used for the expense name, and the resources budgeted cost is the
expenses planned cost. The first resource found on the milestone
becomes the primary resource in the Project Management module.
Resource curves You can specify the allocation of resources and

costs over the duration of an activity using resource curves. All
resource curve definitions assigned to the projects being exported
from P3 3.x, are imported into the Project Management module.
The curve name is prefaced by the P3 3.x project name in the
Project Management module (e.g., APEX - Triangular). The
resource curve assignments are also imported.
673
P3 3.x divides the activitys duration into 11 increments (points)

from 0 through 100 percent. Each increment indicates resource use.
The value for 0% represents the amount of resource already used
when the activity begins; the value for 10% represents the usage
between the start and 10% completion. Curves in the Project
Management module are defined using 21 points. The first point
from P3 3.x imports directly into the Project Management module.
The other 10 curve values are split in half and rounded to the
nearest 10th.
For example:
P3 3.x Bell Shape 0 1 3 8 15 23 23 15 8 3 1
Project Management Bell Shape: 0 .5 .5 1.5 1.5 4 4 7.5 7.5
11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 7.5 7.5 4 4 1.5 1.5 .5 .5
Costs In P3 3.x, the estimate to complete can be a negative value to

account for cost overruns on an activity. All negative cost values
import to the Project Management module as expenses, so the cost
overruns can be tracked. Lump sum costs can be converted as
expenses or resource assignments with a budgeted cost in the
Project Management module. From the Import Wizard, click on the
Advanced button in the Update Project Options dialog box to select
your preference.
Cost accounts Cost accounts are converted from P3 3.x to the

Project Management module. Cost accounts are global across all
projects in the Project Management module. A sample cost account
hierarchy is provided when you install the Project Management
module. When you import a project, the Project Management
module creates a branch for the project cost accounts, and the
project name is added to the beginning of each cost account. The
cost category in P3 3.x becomes part of the cost account in the
Project Management module. For example, cost account 11101
from project APEX creates the following branch in the Project
Management module:
APEX
APEX.11101
APEX.11101.L
If duplicate cost accounts are encountered when you import a P3

3.x project, you can choose how to resolve each conflict by
modifying the import configurations in the Import wizard.
674
Calendars The Project Management module supports global,

resource, and project calendars. Global calendars in the Project
Management module apply to all projects. Sample global calendars
are provided with the Project Management module. When you
import a project, all base calendars are added to the list of existing
global calendars. Resource calendars from P3 3.x are converted to
resource calendars in the Project Management module.
The Project Management module does not support the ability to
designate repeating holidays. If you convert a daily P3 3.x project,
the repeating holidays from the P3 3.x project are applied directly
to the global calendars in the Project Management module. For
example, if July 4 is a repeating holiday in P3 3.x, it is designated
as a nonworkday in the global calendars for each applicable date
from the project start date to the project finish date in the Project
Management module.
Constraints The Project Management module supports two

constraints per activity. Review the following conversion table:
P3 3.x Constraint Type
Project Management
Constraint Type
Early Start (start no earlier than)
Start On or After
Late Start (start no later than)
Start On or Before
Early Finish (finish no earlier than)
Finish On or After
Late Finish (finish no later than)
Finish On or Before
Start On
Start On
Expected Finish
Expected Finish Date
Mandatory Start
Mandatory Start
Mandatory Finish
Mandatory Finish
Zero Total Float
Not Converted
Zero Free Float
As Late As Possible
Target projects You can convert target projects just as you would
any other project; however, the target designators are not converted.
To designate a target project in the Project Management module,
choose Projects, Maintain Baselines. Click Add and choose
Convert Another Project to a New Baseline of the Current Project.
Select the converted target project as the baseline for the current
project.
675
Scheduling options The following scheduling options convert to

the Project Management module:
P3 3.x
Project Management
Show open ends as (Critical or

Noncritical)
Make open-ended activities critical
When scheduling activities apply

(Retained logic or Progress override)
For activities started out of sequence

use (Retained logic or Progress
override)
Calculate start-to-start lag from (Actual Calculate start-to-start lag from (Early
start or Early start)
Start or Actual Start)
Calculate total float as (Most critical,
Start float, or Finish float)
Compute Total Float as (Start float,

Finish float, or Smallest of start float
and finish float)
In P3 3.x, relationship lag is always calculated using the

predecessor calendar. An advanced scheduling option in the Project
Management module enables you to choose the calendar you want
to use. This setting will default to predecessor calendar for
imported P3 3.x projects.
In the Project Management module, float calculations for
subprojects converted as individual projects are always based on the
finish date of each individual project.
The Project Management module always rolls up resources
assigned to an activity, which then determine the activitys
durations and schedule dates.
Autocost rules P3 3.x provides automatic resource/cost calculation

rules by which P3 3.x calculates costs and estimates resource use
when you update activities. These rules convert to the Project
Management module.
The autocost rule, Add actual to ETC or Subtract actual from EAC
converts to the Add Actual to Remaining or Subtract Actual from
At Completion when updating Actual Units or Costs field in the
Calculations tab in the Projects window.
676
P3 3.x provides an autocost rule to choose whether you want to use

the updated percent complete to calculate actual quantity to date,
actual cost to date, both (mark both checkboxes), or neither (clear
both checkboxes). If both checkboxes are marked in P3 3.x, the
setting in the Project Management module, Recalculate Actual
Units and Cost when duration % complete changes, is marked. If
neither checkbox is marked in P3 3.x, the setting is not marked in
the Project Management module. If one checkbox is marked and
the other is not, the setting in the Project Management module is
not marked.
The Link actual to date and actual this period autocost rule in P3 3.x
converts to the Link Actual and Actual this Period Units and Cost
field in the Calculations tab in the Projects window in the Project
Management module.
Data not converted This section lists the data items that are not
converted from P3 3.x to the Project Management module. Refer to
Special considerations on page 648 for additional cases.
Refer to the Primavera

Administrators Guide for
more information on
defining financial periods
in the Project Management
module.
Layouts, filters, Global Change specifications, and report and

graphic specifications Layouts, filters, Global Change
specifications, and report and graphic specifications are not
converted with the project; however, sample data is provided for
these items in the Project Management module.
Access rights Access rights are not converted in the Project

Management module. Your system administrator must set up global
and project profiles that determine privileges.
Leveling options and leveling priorities Choose Tools, Level

Resources, to set options for leveling in the Project Management
module.
Financial periods and past period actuals In the Project

Management module, financial periods are global. Financial
periods and past period actual data are not converted to the Project
Management module because financial periods are project-specific
in P3. Choose Admin, Financial Periods, to define financial periods
in the Project Management module. After you define financial
periods choose Tools, Store Period Performance, to store past
period actuals per financial period.
677
Advanced conversion options The Conversion utility provides

additional options that you can set in an INI file. You can also use
command-line parameters to convert multiple projects at one time.
The PRMCONVERT.INI file is created in your Windows or Winnt
folder the first time an import is run. Add any of the following options to
the file:
[WBS]
WbsAsActCode=[0,1] Choose 1 to enable the import process to import
all WBS codes as a global activity code. The global activity code name
created, P3 WBS - Proj, where Proj is the name of the project group in
P3, will store the WBS values. If this option is set to 0, the WBS will
import to the WBS structure in the Project Management module. The
default setting is 0.
AutoSelect=[0,1] Choose 1 to enable the conversion process to attempt
to match the WBS with the project hierarchy structure. A unique WBS
branch will be created for each project within the project group. The
[Settings]
NoUI=[0,1] Choose 1 to remove the GUI screens when using command
line conversions. For example, if you are using a batch file to perform
many conversions, and you do not want any GUI to show, select 1. The
678
DailyMultiplier=[#] Select an integer to use as a multiplier when

exporting/importing daily P3 3.x projects. The default multiplier is 8.
For example: P3 3.x to Project Management: If a duration is one day in
P3 3.x and the daily multiplier is set to 12, the duration in the Project
Management module will be 12 hours.
Project Management to P3 3.x: If a duration is 40 hours in the Project
Management module and the daily multiplier is set to 10, the duration in
P3 3.x will be four days.
[Resource Units]
The conversion process uses the unit of measure for resources in P3 3.x
to determine whether to categorize a resource in the Project
Management module as labor, nonlabor, or material. If a resource in P3
3.x contains one of the following units of measure, it is converted as a
labor resource in the Project Management module: h, h., hr, hr., hrs, hrs.,
hour, d, d., day, days, w, w., wk, wk., wks, wks., week, m, m., mnth, y,
y., yr, yr., yrs, yrs., year, md, md., mds, mds., mh, mh., mhs, mhs.
If a resource in P3 3.x contains one of the following units of measure, it
is converted as a material resource in the Project Management module:
feet, ft, ft., sqft, cyds, cyd, cyd., yard, yrd, yrd., yrds, yd, yd., yds, yds.,
inch, ton, tons, in, in., lf, lnft, lft, ea, each, unit, u.
All other resources are converted as nonlabor. The unit of measure
conversion is not case-sensitive.
Labor=[unit of measure] Specify unit of measure strings to add to the
default labor list; use commas to separate each string.
NonLabor=[unit of measure] Specify unit of measure strings to add to
the default nonlabor list; use commas to separate each string.
Material=[unit of measure] Specify unit of measure strings to add to
the default material list; use commas to separate each string.
In the following example, a1, test, and bbb will be added to the default
list above, hrs and hr. will be removed from it and added to the nonlabor
list, and lb, lbs will be added to the default material list:
679
[Resource Units]
Labor=a1,test,bbb
NonLabor=hrs,hr.
Material=lb,lbs
BlankIsLabor=[0,1,2]
Set to 0 to convert blank resource unit of measure fields to nonlabor
resources in the Project Management module; set to 1 to convert blank
resource unit of measure fields to labor resources; set to 2 to convert
blank resource unit of measure fields to material resources. The default
setting is 1.
HourlyAdd=[comma-delimited string] Specify resource unit strings
to be added to the default list of units treated as hourly.
HourlyRemove=[comma-delimited string] Specify resource unit
strings to be removed from the default list of units treated as hourly.
DailyAdd=[comma-delimited string] Specify resource unit strings to
be added to the default list of units treated as daily.
DailyRemove=[comma-delimited string] Specify resource unit
strings to be removed from the default list of units treated as daily.
In the following example, the unit strings a1, test, and bbb are treated as
hourly units:
[Resource Units]
HourlyAdd=a1,test,bbb
The default string for Hourly =
h,h.,hr,hr.,hrs,hrs.,hour,mh,mh.,mhs,mhs., rh,rh.,rhs,rhs.,ph,ph.,phs,phs.
The default string for Daily = d,d.,day,days,md,md.,mds,mds.,rd,rd.,
rds,rds.,pd,pd.,pds,pds.
680
[UOM Mapping]
UOM1=unit of measure=unit of measure string
Specify the units of measure used in P3 that are equivalent to the unit of
measure specified in the Admin Categories in the Project Management
module.
In the following example, all abbreviations of cubic yard listed in the
unit of measure string will convert to the standard cubic yard (cu. yard)
unit of measure defined in the Project Management module:
[UOM Mapping]
UOM1 =cu. yard=cy, cuyd, cuy, kf
681
Transferring Data to Primavera

Contractor Users
In this chapter:
Exporting Projects
Exporting Resources
Data can be transferred from a Project

Management module user to a Primavera
Contractor 5.0 or 6.1 user by exporting XER
files, Primaveras proprietary exchange
format. This section describes how transfer
project and resource information from the
Project Management module for use with
Primavera Contractor 5.0 or 6.1.
You cannot export data for use with
Primavera Contractor 4.1; however, you can
transfer data from Primavera Contractor 4.1
to a Project Management module user using
the import process described in Importing
682
Exporting Projects
about importing Primavera
Contractor XER files, see
Importing Projects in XER
Format with the Import
Wizard on page 550.
Use the Export wizard to export Project Management module projects to

Primavera Contractor 5.0 or 6.1 XER files. The Export wizard guides
you through the steps for exporting projects.
Select export type and project Open the project(s) in the Project
Management module you want to export. Choose File, Export. Choose
Primavera Contractor 6.1 or later, or 5.0, then click Next. Choose
Project as the export type, then click Next.

Transferring Data to Primavera Contractor Users
683
Mark the Export checkbox next to the project that you want to export.
You can only export one project at a time. Click Next.
Lists only projects that are

currently open in the
Project Management
module. You can only
select one project to
export.
Specify filename and location Type a name for the XER file. To
specify the location where the file will be stored, click the Browse
button. If you do not specify a folder, the file is stored in the My
Documents folder of the current user. Click Finish to export the project
to a single file with an XER extension.
Click to
select the
location
where the
file will be
stored.
684
Data not available in Primavera Contractor Primavera

Contractor does not contain some of the functionality available in the
Project Management module. To enable Primavera Contractor to import
an XER file exported from the Project Management module, the
following data is contained in the XER file but not imported into
Primavera Contractor:
Budget data
EPS Codes
Financial periods
Funding data
Issues
Issue Codes
Manual resource curves
Multiple critical float paths
Past period actuals
Portfolios
Project Codes
Resource Shifts
Risks
Roles
Thresholds
Work products and documents
Transferring Data to Primavera Contractor Users
685
Exporting Resources
about importing Primavera
Contractor XER files, see
Importing Roles or
Resources on page 567.
The Project Management module enables you to export only the

resources in your resource hierarchy to Primavera Contractor 5.0 or 6.1
XER files. Use the Export wizard to export Project Management module
resources to Primavera Contractor XER files. use the Import wizard to
bring XER files into the Project Management module. The Export
wizard guides you through the steps for exporting projects.
Export resource data In the Project Management module, choose
File, Export. Choose Primavera Contractor 6.1 or later, or 5.0, then click
Next. Then, choose Resource Only as the export type and click Next.
Choose Resource Only as the export type,

then click Next.
686
Type a name for the XER file. To specify the location where the file will
be stored, click the Browse button. If you do not specify a folder, the file
is stored in the My Documents folder of the current user. Click Finish to
export the resources to a single file with an XER extension.
Click to
select the
location
where the
file will be
stored.
687
Index
A
Access rights 87
Accrual types, expenses 264, 266
Active
project status 87, 93
WBS elements 147
Activities 211256
adding 213
expenses to 241
in Activity Network 214
steps to 246
assigning
activity codes to 241
notes to 243
resources to by role 231
auto compute actuals, setting 306
calendar, specifying 218
codes 201209
assigning 241
converting project to global 206
creating
EPS 203
global 202
project 205
values 205
grouping and summarizing by 207
values, creating global 202
cost 222
critical 99
dates 300, 301
defining
general information for 215
schedule information for 219
Details 40, 429
assigning relationships using 226
including/excluding tabs 215
modifying tabs 229
displaying Activity Details for assignments 229
dissolve 226
duration
entering 219
type 318
units, and resource units/time,
synchronizing 318
entering
at completion duration estimate 220
start and finish dates for 220
expected finish date 220
float
free 221
total 221
labor units 222
layouts, publishing to Web site 525
level of effort type 216
milestone type 216
overview 212
primary resource 218
prioritizing for leveling 335
profile 41
relationships, establishing 223
resource dependent type 216
resources and roles, assigning 230
responsible OBS 218
resume 320
selecting WBS element for 218
setting default type 97
Spreadsheet 40
step templates
assigning to activities 250
creating 248
steps 116, 246
converting to template 249
suspend 320
Table 40, 427
grouping and summarizing using codes 179
using to add activities 212213
task dependent type 216
688
Index
type, identifying 216

update with
duration percent complete type 315
physical percent complete type 316
units percent complete type 316
updating
manually 314
progress for all 306
Usage Profile 429
customizing 470
formatting 470
modifying 464
Usage Spreadsheet 427
WBS summary type 216
Activity Details 40
Activity Network 40, 428
adding activities in 212, 214
box template
choosing 461
customizing 461
copying from another layout 463
formatting layout 460, 462
opening saved layout 463
saving 463
activity Owner 230, 298, 299
Activity step templates
creating 248
Activity Table 40
Activity Usage Profile 41
Activity Usage Spreadsheet 40
Actual
finish date 300
start date 300
units, calculating automatically 120, 267
Actual dates
setting for updated activities 305
Anticipated
finish date 95, 146
start date 95, 146
API xiv
Apply actuals 322
setting as a job service 323
Approved status for budget changes 167
Arithmetic operators 256
Assign button 177
Assigning estimation weights to activities 157
Assigning estimation weights to WBS elements 156
Assignment costs
calculating with time-varying resource rates 337
recalculating for roles 337
Assignments, manually planning 235, 340
Assistance options, setting 55
Auto compute actuals 298

setting
by activity 306
by resource 307
for expenses 307
Averaging timescale 451
B
Backward pass 328
Bar Chart tracking layout 383
Bars
adding and deleting 452
current 179
necking 454
summary 179180, 209
timescale, changing 453
user-defined date fields 186
Baselines
columns, showing comparison with current
project in layout 288
compare using Schedule Comparison 393
comparing 286
displaying activity bars 288
editing 288
managing 281288
modifying 288
saving 282
schedules, comparing with current 288
update with new data 290
Benefit plan 166
Borders, adding to text cells in reports 491
Budget
changes
approved status 167
not approved status 167
pending status 167
tracking 167
creating a layout for budget and variance
comparison 172
defining 159172
distributing to projects 160
establishing 163
fund share percentage 170
recalculating based on changes 167
setting up monthly spending plan 165
summary 168
top-down 160
tracking and analyzing 172
using WBS 140
Budgeted
cost
expense 264
Index
percent of threshold 361
C
Calendars
applying exceptions 196
changing workweek hours 196
creating 191197
deleting 197
global 120, 192
modifying 194
project, creating 192
resource 120, 192
setting default 97
yearly 195
Categories
expense 265266
Cell borders 491
Cells
copying (or cutting) and pasting 494
removing from reports 494
Check-in/check-out projects 415422
Close button 177
Codes
activity 201209
project 74, 96, 173182
resource 125
Columns
adding 447
colors, changing 448
copying format from another layout 447
fonts, changing 448
indicators, view in 190
modifying 446
removing 447
row height, changing 448
titles, editing 447
user preference 57
Command bar 37
Comparing projects and baselines 393
Complexity, projects 79
Concatenation 256
Constraint, date 301
Contract Manager
importing data 534
link to Project Management 529536
Cost accounts 257270
copying and pasting 261
creating 259
cutting and pasting 262
deleting 261
editing 260
overview 258
replacement, specifying 261
setting default for project 97, 260

Cost managers 25
Cost performance index threshold 361
Costs
analyzing 268, 272
at completion 222
information, entering 263
specifying amounts for expenses 267
Critical activities, setting maximum float to
detect 99
Critical path method scheduling technique 328
Currency
associating with resources 120
selecting view 53
showing/hiding 53
Curtain attachment
manually shifting 458
Custom color, defining 492
Custom fields
indicators 188
Custom text cells 487
adding to reports 488
identifying in the report canvas 482
Customer support xviii
D
Data date 95, 298
dragging line to change 302
selecting for scheduling 322
selecting with Update Progress 304
updating activities using 306
Data sources
adding to reports 483, 484
defining layout options for 485
embedding 484
Database administrator 23
Dates
actual
finish 300
start 300
anticipated
finish 95, 146
start 95, 146
constraint 301
early
finish 300, 328
start 300, 328
entering start and finish for activities 220
expected finish 220, 301
external early start 301
External late finish 301
689
690
Index
finish 300
forecast start 328
formatting 52
late
finish 300, 328
start 300, 328
planned
finish 300
start 300
remaining
finish 300
start 300
resume 301
start 300
suspend 301
update actual 315
Decimals, showing/hiding 53
Default
duration 220
global calendar 192
project cost account 260
scheduling settings 328
startup window, setting 56
tracking layouts 356, 366
Details tabs, including/excluding 92, 145, 177
Directory bar 37
displaying 38
Displaying the directory bar 38
Displaying the navigation bar 39
Dissolve activities 226
Distributed job services 344
Documentation, using xv
Documents 245, 375379
adding 376
assigning to WBS elements and activities 379
categories 245
deleting records 377
number for expense 266
opening 378
specifying location references 378
viewing 376
Duration
at completion estimate, entering 220
default 220
entering 219
percent complete type 315
percent of planned 362
planned 219
remaining 219, 315
synchronizing with units and resource units/
time 318
types 97, 216, 318
E
Early
finish date 300, 328
start date 300, 328
Earned value
calculating using weighted WBS milestones 149,
150
choosing completion percentage method for
calculating 153
cost 152
defining settings for WBS elements 152
performance, measuring using 268
using a baseline, choosing value for
calculating 289
E-mail
sending about an issue 354
transferring information 54
Endpoints, modifying 454
Enterprise project structure
access and privileges to 72
adding projects to 77
defining details 92
funding 170
linking projects through activity
relationships 223
moving around in 70
nodes
adding 75
deleting 90
leveling priority 94
OBS element for 93, 104
opening 87
root 77
setting budget estimates for 160
spending plan 161, 165
overview 68
project codes 174
setting up 67101
WBS 140
EPS
activity codes, creating 203
Estimate project complexity 79
Estimate-to-complete (ETC), techniques for
calculating 153
Exceptions, applying to calendar 196
Exclusive access 87
Expected finish date 220, 301
Expedition. See Contract Manager.
Expenses 257270
accrual types 264, 266
actual cost 264
adding 241, 263
assignment, changing 265
auto compute actuals, setting for 307
Index
budgeted
cost 241, 264
calculating actual and remaining units
automatically 267
categories 265266
costs, specifying 267
customizing columns in Activity Details 241
details, defining 266
document number 266
overview 258
planned
cost 241, 264
price/unit 264
summary report 268
Export
format
P3 644
XER 540, 574
XML 543
methodologies, XER format 574
projects
as a job service 542
P3 format 644
XER format 540
XML format 543
resources 545, 576
roles 545, 576
Export, layout 385, 433
Exposure values, calculating 370
External early start date 301
External late finish date 301
F
Feedback, viewing 243
Field
data cells 487
title cells 487
Filter 435444
by project code 181
combining 444
creating, user-defined 442
deleting 389
user-defined 443
global 441
nesting criteria 442
removing 443
risks 373
selecting 441
startup 64
timesheets by status 310
user-defined, creating 442
using project status 87
Financial periods
in columns 57
user preference 57
Finish date 300, 362
Finish to finish relationship 223
Finish to start relationship 223
Fiscal year, setting month for start of 99
Float
calculating multiple float paths 330
free 221, 328, 363
total 221, 328, 364
Forecast start date 328
Forward pass 328
Free float 221, 328, 363
Function points
calculating unadjusted values 274
using to perform top-down estimations 273
Funding
defining sources 169
viewing total 170
Future period bucket planning 235
create layout 237
display spreadsheet fields 237
guidelines 236
manually enter values 240
updating assignment data 340
Future periods, manually planning 235, 340
G
Gantt Chart 40, 428
applying settings from another layout 453
background lines, changing 457
bar label, changing 454
bars, formatting 452
bars, necking 454
creating and viewing relationships in 225
curtain attachments, displaying 458
formatting using user-defined dates 186
grouping by code 179
legend, showing or hiding 456
notebook items, displaying 455
notebook items, setting default size 455
summarizing using codes 179
text attachments, displaying 459
Global
activity codes 201
calendar 120, 192
change
691
692
Index
using indicators 190

filters 441
reports 475
Global change 253
Arithmetic operators 256
modifying statement 254
text fields, combining 256
using arithmetic with 256
using with user-defined fields 186
Group 435444
band, customizing appearance of 180
by activity codes 207
by hierarchical item 438
by project code 179
by WBS path 144
customizing 437
using interval 438
using resource codes 127
H
Headers/footers, adding 511
Hierarchies
activity codes 202
cost account 258
EPS 77
funding 169
OBS 104, 106, 112
project code 174
resource 117
roles 128
WBS 139
HTML 517
editing features 96, 244, 369
links, adding to image or text cells 493
settings, defining for image cells 489
I
Image cells
adding
HTML links to 493
to reports 488
defining
HTML settings for 489
layout options for 489
Import
format
P3 653
XER 550, 578
XML 557
layout 385, 433
methodologies, XER files 578
project 78
projects
as methodologies 583
P3 files 653
XER files 550
XML files 557
projects, command line
XER files 562
resources 567, 588
roles 567, 588
Inactive
WBS elements 147
Indicators, working with 188
Issue navigator 352, 357
Issues 351366
adding 352
default tracking layouts for 356, 366
defining details for 353
sending e-mail about 354
viewing history of 355
J
Job Service
exporting projects 542
Job service 323, 331, 343, 347, 508
distributed 344
non-distributed 343, 347
L
Labor units 222
Lag time 223226
Language, setting 36
Late
finish date 300, 328
start date 300, 328
Layouts
Activity
Details 429
Network 212, 428, 460
Table 212, 427
Usage Profile 429
Usage Spreadsheet 427
adding 432
budget and variance comparison 172
create for future period bucket planning 237
customizing 373, 445471
exporting 433
Gantt Chart 428
grouping and summarizing by codes 207
headers/footers, adding 511
Index
HTML format 517

importing 433
opening 432
sample 44
overview 40
page settings, defining 510
previewing 514
printing 509
publishing to project Web site 520, 523, 525
Resource Usage
Profile 430
Spreadsheet 430
sample, opening 44
saving 432
Trace Logic 431
tracking 381389
assigning to thresholds 366
creating 382
default for issues 356, 366
filtering 388
global 384
types 426
working with 425434
Left margin, using in Report Editor 481
Legend
printing 513
showing or hiding in Gantt Chart 456
Level 295336
priorities, setting 94, 335
setting resource availability limits to 122
Level of effort activities 216
Limits
setting resource availability 121
setting role availability 131
using for delayed resource start 122
Line cells
Location references for documents 378
Log file, creating for tasks 56
Login name
entering 32
Timesheets 123
Logo
adding to a header or footer 512
M
Mail preferences, setting 54
Margins, setting 511
Material resource 120
Menu
bar 37
693
shortcuts 39
Methodologies
exporting, XER format 574
importing
from projects 583
XER files 578
transferring to other Project Management module
users 573, 591
Methodology Management module
importing methodologies 7986
overview xiii
Microsoft Excel, copying resource spreadsheet data
to 434
Microsoft Project files
exporting projects 594, 628
exporting resources 602
importing projects 607, 618, 638
importing resources 618
Microsoft Project-managed projects
See MSP-managed projects
Milestones
activities 216
WBS 149
MSP-managed projects xiv
exporting to XER files 538
importing 610
Multiple items, selecting 39
N
Navigation bar 37, 39
Network administrator 23
Nodes
adding to EPS 75
OBS 105, 109
Nonlabor units 222
Not approved status for budget changes 167
Notebook
EPS node and project 96
topics 243
Notes
resources, entering for 123
O
OBS
chart 107
creating and adding elements 109
deleting element 113
editing elements 112
element assigned to activity 218
establishing for EPS node/project 93
hierarchy 112
694
Index
identifying when adding a new project 77

responsible 72
root 75, 106, 109
security profile for 104, 110
setting up 103113
table 108
viewing 107, 110
Opening the module 32
Operations executive 24, 69
Options bar 42
Organizational breakdown structure. See OBS.
Out-of-sequence activities, updating 298
Overtime units 317
Overview 2630
P
P3 projects
exporting 644
data not converted 652
special considerations 648
importing 653
advanced conversion options 677
data not converted 676
special considerations 667
P6 Web Access, overview xiii
Page settings, defining 510
Password
changing 58
entering 32
Pending status for budget changes 167
Percent complete
based on activity steps 100
calculating using weighted steps 247
calculation types 217, 314
estimating for updated activities 305
physical 116, 247
setting default type 97
types 221
Performance percent complete, calculating using
weighted WBS milestones 149, 150
Physical percent complete 116, 316
Planned
cost
expense 264
duration
entering 219
finish date 300
project status 93
start date 95, 300
WBS elements 147
Planned duration

PLF files 385
Portfolios
setting access to 35
PPM. See Project Portfolio Management
Predecessor relationship 226
Preserve early and late dates during leveling 335
Preview
layouts 514
reports 514
Price per unit 305
Price/time
for activities without resources 100
Price/unit
expense cost 264
setting 122
Primary
resources 116, 218, 220, 243
role 133
Primavera Contractor, exporting projects for use
with 681
Primavera proprietary format 416
Print Preview 514
Printing 509518
headers/footers 511
layouts 515
legend 513
reports 515
Prior experience, using to perform top-down
estimations 272
Priority
definitions for leveling 336
leveling number 334
Private location reference, entering 378
Profiles
Activity
Cost 270
Usage 429, 470
data options, setting 60
Resource Usage 430, 468
Program manager 24, 69
Progress
estimating 298
See Update.
Progress Spotlight 302
Project Architect Wizard 7986
Project codes 74, 173182
adding values to 175
assigning
to projects 96
values 177
Index
chart 176
defining 175
filtering by 181
grouping by 179
scoring 176
summarizing by 180
weighted 176
Project complexity 79
Project controls coordinator 24, 69
Project data
transferring
between P3 and the Project Management
module 643
to other Project Management module
users 537, 571
to Primavera Contractor users 681686
using Microsoft Excel files 627641
using Microsoft Project files 593617
Project Management
process overview 26
roles 23
Project Management module
importing Contract Manager data 534
link to Contract Manager 529536
overview xii
Project manager 24, 30, 69
Project Portfolio Management 22
Project Portfolios
selecting 33
Project Web site
adding
layouts 523
reports 523
customizing appearance 524
overview 520
publishing 522
schemes 524
system requirements 521
ProjectLink
export considerations 538
import considerations 610
overview xiv
Projects
access rights to 87, 104
activity codes, creating 205
adding to EPS 77
assigning relationships between 226
check-in/check-out 415422
coding 175
compare using Schedule Comparison 393
controlling 29
cost accounts 257270
creating using Project Architect Wizard 79
defining EPS details 92

deleting 90
duration, setting 50
end date 95
exclusive access to 87
expenses 257270
exporting
Microsoft Project format 594, 628
P3 format 644
XER format 540
XML format 543
importing 78
Microsoft Project format 607, 618, 638
P3 files 653
XER files 550
XML files 557
importing, command line
XER files 562
leveling priority 94
link to Contract Manager project 532
linking with activity relationships 223
maintaining document library 375379
managing 30
managing remotely 416
OBS element for 93
opening 70, 87
planned start date 95
planning overview 29
publishing on the web 519526
scheduling 322328
spending plan 161, 165
status 87, 93
summarizing 74, 180, 341350
options 342
time units, setting 50
tracking 381389
updating 295336
viewing document library 376
Public location reference, entering 378
Publishing project Web site 520, 522
R
Rate source 233
Rate type 338
Recalculate Resource Costs 337
Recipient
adding to e-mail list 354
removing from e-mail list 354
Reflection 299
creating 409
guidelines 413
merging changes 412
695
696
Index
overview 408
previewing and choosing changes 410
Relationships
assigning
between projects 226
using Activity Details 226
creating in Gantt Chart or Activity Network 225
deleting 225
establishing 223
lines, showing or hiding in Gantt Chart 455
modifying 225
types and lag 223
viewing in Gantt Chart 224
Remaining
duration, entering 219, 315
finish date 300
start date 300
units, calculating automatically 267
Remaining duration
estimating for updated activities 305
Report canvas, using in Report Editor 481
Report Editor
left margin, using the 481
ruler, using the 481
Reports
adding
background images to 494
borders to text cells in 491
data sources to 483, 484
field title or field data cells to 488
image cells to 488
line cells to 490
rows to 483, 486
variable or custom text cells to 488
batch
setting up 507
creating with Report Wizard 476, 478
customizing 473507
editor 474
expenses summary 268
global 475
variables, adding 511
groups 506
headers/footers, adding 511
HTML format 517
indicators, view in 190
modifying 478
opening 475
overview 474
previewing 514
printing 509
removing
background images from 494
cells from 494
rows from 486
Report Editor, working with 481
sorting 495
user-defined fields, viewing in 186
wizard 474
Resource
price per unit 305
updating 305
Resource assignments
calculating the units, duration, and units/time
based on activity duration type 63
choosing defaults for 63
grouping and sorting 339
manually planning 235
manually updating 340
preserving the units, duration, and units/time
for 63
viewing 339
Resource Assignments window 234, 434
Resource costs, recalculating 337
Resource curves 135
assigning to resource or role assignments 234
deleting 137
modifying 136
removing from a resource or role
assignment 234
Resource rates
calculating costs with multiple 338
time-varying 337
Resource spreadsheet data, copying to Microsoft
Excel 434
Resource Usage Spreadsheet
display fields for future period bucket
planning 237
Resource/cost manager 25, 69
Resources
adding 118
assigning
roles to 133
to activities 230
to activities by role 231
auto compute actuals, setting 307
availability, or standard rate 120
breakdown structure (RBS) 117
calendar 120
choosing as rate source 233
codes 125, 126
customizing columns in Activity Details 230
defining 115134
Index
dependent activities 216

exporting 545, 576
Microsoft Project format 602
hierarchy 117
importing 567, 588
Microsoft Project format 618
labor classification 120
leveling 333334
overview 116
price/unit 122
primary 116, 218, 220, 243
recalculating costs 337
replacing assignments 230
setting
limits for 121
user preferences for analysis 469
shifts 124
Timesheets settings for 123
units and prices 121
units/time 122, 318
Usage
Profile 41, 430, 464, 465, 468
Spreadsheet 41, 430
Stacked Histogram 466
viewing 117
Responsibility list, viewing for OBS 111
Responsible manager
WBS 146
See OBS.
Resume activity progress 320
Resume date 301
Risks
adding 368
types 372
calculating
exposure values 370
impact 371
customizing layout 373
deleting types 372
filtering 373
managing 367373
Role assignments
choosing defaults for 63
manually planning 235
manually updating 340
Roles
add rates to 130
adding 129
analyzing use 232
choosing as rate source 233
defining 115134
exporting 545, 576
697
importing 567, 588

limits
defining 131
setting options for viewing 61
overview 116
primary 133
recalculating costs 337
removing from activities 231
setting up 128
units/time 132
using as resource assignments 231
viewing 128
Root
EPS node 77
OBS 75, 106
Rows
adding to reports 483, 486
copying (or cutting) and pasting 486
removing from reports 486
Ruler, using in Report Editor 481
S
Sample layouts 44
Schedule 295336
automatically 331
backward pass 328
data date 95
defining activity information for 219
forward pass 328
performance index threshold 363
projects 320328
using forecast start date 328
variance
index threshold 364
threshold 363
Schedule Comparison
comparison data 400
overview xiv, 392
SDK. See Primavera Software Development Kit.
Security profiles associated with OBS elements 110
Shifts
resource 124
Shortcut menus 39
Sight lines 457
Software Development Kit xiv
Sort 435444
Spending plan
EPS nodes and projects 161
establishing 165
tally 165
Spotlight activities
See also Progress Spotlight.
698
Index
Spreadsheets
Activity
Cost 269
Usage 427
data options, setting 60
Resource Usage 430
Start date 300
variance threshold 363
Start to finish relationship 216, 223
Start to start relationship 216, 223
Starting the module 32
Startup
filters 64
options, setting 56
Status
activity 220
approved for budget changes 167
check-in/check-out 416
not approved for budget changes 167
pending for budget changes 167
project 87, 93
Step
adding to activities 246
assigning templates to activities 250
converting to template 249
creating templates manually 248
weights 116
Successor relationship 226
Summarize
by activity codes 207209
by project codes 180
how the module summarizes data 349
manually 343
projects 74, 98, 180
to WBS level 141
using resource codes 127
Summary
bars 179180, 209
budget 168
expenses report 268
Suspend activity progress 320
Suspend date 301
T
Tabs, modifying Activity Details 229
Tailoring a methodology 83
Tally
benefit plan 166
spending plan 165
Target. See Baselines.
Task dependent activities 216
Team
leader 25, 69
member 25, 69
Technical support xviii
Text cells
adding borders to 491
adding HTML links to 493
changing background color 492
custom, identifying in the report canvas 482
formatting text in 491
Thresholds 351366
adding 358
assigning tracking layout to 366
monitoring 365
parameter definitions 361
Time
formatting units 5052
Timescale
changing increment for progress update 302
Timescale, adjusting 449
Timesheet Approval, overview 311
Timesheets
approving 309
establishing resource settings for 123
filtering by status 310
login name, selecting 123
updating activities using 309
Timesheets application
single login name for, setting 123
Timesheets module 243
overview xiii
Toolbars 37
Top-down budgeting 160
Top-down estimation 155, 271277
applying 275
applying saved estimations 276
deleting 277
using function points 273
using prior experience 272
viewing 276
Total Degree of Influence (TDI) 275
Total float 221, 328, 364
Trace Logic 41, 227, 431
Tracking layouts 381389
assigning to
issues 356357
thresholds 366
creating 382
filtering 388
global 384
publishing to Web site 525
Index
Transferring information through e-mail 54
U
Unadjusted Function Point Count (UFP) 274
Units
percent complete type 315
regular and actual 317
Units/time
formatting 50
maximum 122
maximum, for roles 132
setting default 120
Update
activities with
duration percent complete type 315
physical percent complete type 316
units percent complete type 316
actual dates 315
analyzing data from 297
baselines 290
choosing a method 298
collecting data for 296
cycle, communicating progress 297
determining frequency 297
guidelines for process 299
manually 314
process 296
progress
automatically 308
for all activities 306
progress for spotlighted activities 304
project progress 295336
using
manual and update progress methods
together 305
using timesheets 309
User
preferences, setting up 4961
User defined fields
using with Global Change 255
User-defined fields 183190
indicators, working with 188
V
Variable cells 487
Variance
accounting threshold 361
at completion threshold 364
between planned budget and spending plan 165
comparing current and target dates 288
cost threshold 362

creating layout to show budget estimate 172
finish date threshold 362
index, cost threshold 362
negative 161
schedule
index threshold 364
threshold 363
start date threshold 363
Viewing resource assignments 339
Views, switching between hierarchy and list 42
W
WBS 139154
access rights to levels 104
active elements 147
adding an element to 145
category value, assigning 151
chart, viewing and modifying 142
defining earned value settings for 152
deleting elements 147
editing elements 146
inactive elements 147
milestones 149
planned elements 147
planning and budgeting using 140
responsible manager 146
selecting element for activity 218
viewing 142
what-if elements 148
WBS summary activities 216
Weight
activity steps 247
assigning to WBS 155
estimation
assigning to activity 157
assigning to WBS 156
using in top-down estimation 155
WBS milestone 150
Weighted codes 176
What-if
WBS elements 148
Wizards
assistance options 55
create a new project 77, 79
implementing 55
new activity 55, 213
new resource 55, 118
overview 46
Project Architect 7986
report 474, 476, 478
using 46
699
700
Index
Work breakdown structure. See WBS.

Work hours
defining 195
Work products 245, 375379
adding 376
assigning to WBS elements and activities 379
categories for 245
deleting records 377
opening 378
specifying location references 378
viewing 376
Workspace, overview 37
X
XER file format 416
XER files
exporting
methodologies 574
MSP-managed projects 538
projects 540
resources 545, 576
roles 545, 576
importing
methodologies 578
projects 550
projects as methodologies 583
resources 567, 588
roles 567, 588
importing, command line
projects 562
XML files
exporting
projects 543
importing
projects 557

Primavera P6 Project Management Reference Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Primavera P6 Project Management Reference Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Primavera P6 Project Management Reference Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Primavera P6

Copyright 1999 - 2008 Primavera. All rights reserved.

Part 1: Overview and Configuration

Setting User Preferences....................................................................49

Part 2: Structuring Projects

Setting Up the Organizational Breakdown Structure ..................103

Defining Resources and Roles.........................................................115

Reviewing Work Breakdown Structures .......................................139

Defining Budgets ..............................................................................159

Establishing Project Codes..............................................................173

Primavera - Project Management

Working with User-Defined Fields .................................................183

Creating Calendars ..........................................................................191

Part 3: Implementing the Schedule

Working with Activities ...................................................................211

Working with Cost Accounts and Project Expenses.....................257

Performing Top-Down Estimation .................................................271

Primavera - Project Management

Part 4: Updating and Managing the Schedule

Updating, Scheduling, and Leveling...............................................295

Summarizing Projects .....................................................................341

Project Issues and Thresholds ........................................................351

Primavera - Project Management

Maintaining a Projects Document Library ..................................375

Tracking Projects .............................................................................381

Comparing Projects with Schedule Comparison ..........................391

Creating and Using Reflections ......................................................407

Checking Projects In and Out.........................................................415

Part 5: Customizing Projects

Grouping, Sorting, and Filtering Data...........................................435

Customizing Layouts .......................................................................445

Primavera - Project Management

Customizing Reports .......................................................................473

Printing Layouts and Reports.........................................................509

Publishing a Project On the Web ...................................................519

Part 6: Importing and Exporting Data

Transferring Data to Other

Transferring Methodology Data.....................................................573

Primavera - Project Management

Transferring Data Using Microsoft Project Files..........................593

Transferring Data Using Microsoft Excel Files.............................627

Transferring Data Between

Transferring Data to Primavera Contractor Users ......................681

Primavera - Project Management

Primaveras Project Management module is

Primavera - Project Management

Methodology Management The Methodology Management

Primavera - Project Management

Primavera Integration API The Primavera Integration API

Primavera - Project Management

Using Documentation and Help

Use an organizational breakdown structure (OBS) in conjunction

Establish the personnel and equipment required to perform the

Establish and use a work breakdown structure (WBS) as the basis

Establish project budgets and the funding sources behind them,

Set up project codes to categorize projects for organizing, grouping,

Create calendars that define national and organizational holidays,

Part 3: Implementing the Schedule Describes how to define a set

Establish the activities that compose projects and apply durations,